King Khaled International Airport Development and Expansion: Specifications Part 2 OF 3

Draft Final Design Documents
King Khaled International Airport

Development and Expansion
Specifications
Part 2 OF 3
S17058-0100D – March 2019 1440 ‫رجب‬

KING KHALED INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DEVELOPMENT AND EXPANSION
SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
King Khaled International Airport Development and Expansion
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
034910 DECORATIVE GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE

035440 CEMENT-BASED SCREED
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
042000 UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
050513 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METALS

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055300 METAL GRATINGS
057000 DECORATIVE METAL
057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
064113 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064600 WOOD TRIM
064800 WOOD FRAMES
066200 CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
074113.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
074213.19 INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
074450 EXTERIOR CLADDING: LIGHT WEIGHT CEMENT BOARD
075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES
077129 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

S17058-0100D-FD-TOC-15A-PMC-01 REV C Page 1 of 6
© Copyright protected
079200 JOINT SEALANTS

079500 EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083473 SOUND-CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
084400 CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
087113 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
088000 GLAZING
088113 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING
088300 MIRRORS
088700 GLAZING SURFACE FILMS
089119 FIXED LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
093000 TILING
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
095443 STRETCHED FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS
096340 STONE FLOORING
096513 RESILENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096516.13 LINOLEUM FLOORING
096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
096723 RESINOUS FLOORING
096766 FLUID-APPLIED ATHLETIC FLOORING
096813 TILE CARPETING
096816 SHEET CARPETING
096900 ACCESS FLOORING
097500 STONE FACING
097813 INTERIOR METAL WALL PANELING
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101423 PANEL SIGNAGE

102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102219 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
104400 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
110100 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

111300 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
120000 FURNITURE
123640 STONE COUNTERTOPS
123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
124816 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

210518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
211100 FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
211200 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
212200 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

221123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

221313 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
221316 SANITARY WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221429 SUMP PUMPS
223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 DUCT INSULATION
230716 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
230719 HVAC PIPE INSULATION
230900 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233413 AXIAL HVAC FANS
233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233433 AIR CURTAINS
233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
236200 PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
237200 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
237313 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237320 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
238123 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238219 FAN COIL UNITS

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

260501 IDENTIFICATION
260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGER AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260539 UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260914.15 SCADA FOR ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS – EXTENSION WORKS
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261300 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500.02 MEDIUM VOLTAGE ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262713 ELECTRICITY METERING
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263324 DC CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

271055 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
271105 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271305 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
271505 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271800 COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT SECURITY AND SPECIAL AIRPORT
SYSTEMS
272000 DATA COMMUNICATIONS
272133 WIRELESS DATA NETWORK
272231 COMPUTERS AND PERIPHERALS
273123 IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
273241 RADIO (TETRA) SYSTEM
274132 INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION SYSTEM
274216 ELECTRONIC VISUAL INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM

275116 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

275126 AUDIO FREQUENCY INDUCTION LOOP
275300 DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM
275313 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM (MCS)
276500 COMMON USE SYSTEMS
276550 BORDER CONTROL EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281300 SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL (SACS)

281353 SECURITY SCREENING SYSTEMS (SSS)
282300 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)
283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
285111 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORKS
311000 SITE CLEARING

312000 EARTHMOVING
313116 TERMITE CONTROL
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321723 ROAD PAVEMENT MARKINGS

321723.13 AIRFIELD PAVEMENT MARKINGS
323233 CURBS, SIDEWALKS & BOLLARDS
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION

PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Grout.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends
and welded steel collar; Electro Galvanized.
B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B,

Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness;

round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
D. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for

filling annular space between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface

of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of
pipe.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517

S17058-0100D-FD-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV B Page 1 of 4
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant
coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-

adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs,
and walls.
B. Install pipe at the center of sleeve and not to be supported by sleeve..
C. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and
concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
D. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new
slabs and walls are constructed.
1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE
or -PP sleeves.
2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical

equipment areas or other wet areas 100 mm above finished floor level.
3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without
sleeve-seal system.
E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint
sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements for sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop
materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade

at service piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and
size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center
piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in
annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150):Cast-iron wall sleeves;

Galvanized-steel wall sleeves; Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or
Sleeve-seal fitting
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves;
Galvanized-steel wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with
sleeve-seal system; Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system; Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or
Sleeve-seal fittings.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear

space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal
system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with
system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system


system.
3. Interior Partitions (For all wall types):
a. Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves

for fire rated walls, and PVC for non-fire rated walls.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves
for fire rated walls, and PVC for non-fire rated walls.
END OF SECTION 210517

SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and polished-brass

finish and setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-

plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip

fasteners.
D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and polished-brass finish

and with concealed hinge and setscrew.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and

spring-clip fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors in
exposed areas.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518

S17058-0100D-FD-SPC-15A-ME-01 REV B Page 1 of 2
B. Install pipe at the center of escutcheon and not to be supported by sleeve. Install
escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and
with OD that completely covers opening.
C. Escutcheon plates are to be securely held in position allowing enough clearance

for expansion.
D. Install escutcheons with ID that allows pipe expansion.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type.
b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-
plated finish.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, stamped-steel type.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with rough-brass finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass finish.
h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210518

SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Equipment labels (i.e.: clean agent cylinders, fire extinguishers, pump (if
needed)).
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels (i.e.: wet sprinkler pipe, stand-pipe, fire hydrant pipe, fire
department pipe; etc.)
4. Valve tags.(i.e.: fire zone valve, water motor gong –alarm check valve,..)
5. Warning tags.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and

the proposed content for each label.
D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Polished brass or aluminum, or Plastic material

0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but
not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553

5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing
distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing
distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to
three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's number and manufactures name, specification

number and mane; where equipment is located.
C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-

by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and
identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and
schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is
specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance
data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1.6 mm thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: Orange.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71

deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not
less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72
inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency

notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded,

with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction .
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive

backing.
D. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same

designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, sprinkler zone and
an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to

accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to
indicate flow direction.
E. Pipe-Label Colors:
1. Background Color: Safety Red.

2. Letter Color: White.
F. Hydraulic data plate
(1) Hydraulic data plate should be added on risers and stand-pipes that sized by
hydraulic method (that connected to sprinklers above 5.6 K-factor)
2.4 VALVE TAGS
A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping-

system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1. Tag Material: polished Brass or aluminum, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, with
predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, beaded chain or S-hook.
3. Valve-Tag Color: Safety Red.
4. Letter Color: White.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper.
Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve
tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed,
or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency
shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS
A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER,"
"CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Safety Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that
could impair bond of identification devices.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and

painting of surfaces where devices are to be installed.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and

doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar

concealment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
B. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above

accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance
spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as
follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern
is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations and on through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible
enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce
intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
labels.
8. All Fire protection pipe labels should extend 360 degrees around piping.
C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in

pipes including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List
tagged valves in a valve-tag schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with
captions similar to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph
below:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Fire-Suppression Standpipe: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm), round.

b. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm), round.
c. Clean-Agent Fire-Extinguishing System: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm),
round.
3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.

3.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Identifications should be comply with all requirement of project Authority Having

Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing all

required identification for fire submission equipment and pipe.
C. Perform work of this section in accordance with NFPA 13 & NFPA 14

SECTION 211100 - FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire-suppression water-service piping and related components

outside the building [and service entrance piping through floor into the
building] [and service entrance piping through wall into the building] and the
following:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Fire-suppression specialty valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the
following:
1. Firefighting network, including pipe diameters and gradients.
2. Chambers and other structures, including invert levels, frames, covers.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other

services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves,
hydrants and specialty locations, and elevations.
B. Field quality-control reports.
A. Regulatory Requirements:
FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 211100

S17058-0100D-FD-SPC-ENV-01 REV A Page 1 of 11
1. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-

suppression water-service piping, including materials, installation, and
testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
C. Comply with FM Global's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment

Directory" for fire-service-main products.
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 and NFPA 13 for materials,

installations, tests, flushing, and valve, hydrants and for fire-suppression water-
service piping.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves including fire hydrants according to the
following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and
corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent
rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves including fire hydrants according to
the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall
for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than
ambient dew point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in
watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by
crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels
or stems as lifting or rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt,
debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping: Do not interrupt

service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the
following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-
distribution service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify the engineer no fewer than three days in advance of proposed

interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without the engineer written
permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends.
B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell

and plain spigot end.
C. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain
spigot end.
D. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron

standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
1. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands,

rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
E. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
1. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
F. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron.
2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS
1. Pipe and fittings shall be to ISO 4427-2, DIN 8074/8075 or AWWA C906.
Pipe shall be supplied in straight pieces and not rolled on a drum. The ends
of each pipe shall be plain and suitable for heat fusion. Pipe and fittings
shall be class 16kg/cm2 for firefighting.
2. Materials used shall have a standard PE code designation 3408 and a

minimum hydrostatic design basis of 1600 psi according to AWWA C906
Table 1.

3. Manufacturers shall provide certification that stress regression testing has

been performed on the pipe products. Materials shall also meet elevated
temperature requirements as given in Table 2 AWWA C906.
4. Fittings shall be to AWWA C906, extruded or injection moulded suitable

for class of pipe required.
5. Joints for pipes and fittings shall be by heat fusion and in strict accordance
with pipe manufactures recommendations. Joints shall have a tensile
strength equal to that of the pipe. Fusion temperature, interface pressure,
alignment and cooling time, shall be according to manufactures
recommendations.
6. Tests on PE Compounds: Where PE is used for potable water, PE

compounds in pipes and fittings shall contain no ingredients in an amount
that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to
be toxic. PE compounds shall be tested and certified suitable for potable
water accredited testing agency. Tests shall be made in accordance with
requirements no less restrictive than those in the NSF Standard No. 14
(1976), Sections 3 and 4. The seal and mark of the testing laboratory shall
be included on pipes and fittings.
2.3 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.
3. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged

and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153
or BS EN 545. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more
gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion
indicated. Include AWWA C111 or BS EN 681, ductile-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
a. Pressure Rating: 16 bars minimum.
B. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings:

include.
3. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and 1 or 2

flexing sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint
ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153 or BS EN 545.

Include AWWA C111 or BS EN 681, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,

and steel bolts.
a. Pressure Rating: 16 bars minimum.
2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping:
1. Standards: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

2. Form: Sheet or tube.
3. Material: LLDPE film of (0.20-mm) minimum thickness.
4. Material: LLDPE film of (0.20-mm) minimum thickness, or high-density,
cross laminated PE film of (0.10-mm) minimum thickness.
5. Material: High-density, cross laminated PE film of (0.10-mm) minimum
thickness.
6. Color: Black.
2.5 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 33 "Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods" for

commonly used joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings:
1. Underground Piping, DN 40 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling

same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with,
piping to be joined.
2. Underground Piping, DN 50 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type
coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends
compatible with, piping to be joined.
3. Aboveground Piping: Pipe fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
C. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material of gaskets to be
as recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Bolts, nuts and washer to be stainless steel grade 316.
2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with

pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:

include.

3. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling,

with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of
same sizes as piping to be joined.
a. Standard: AWWA C219.

b. Center-Sleeve Material: Ductile iron.
c. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
d. Pressure Rating: 16 bars minimum.
e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
C. Split-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:

include.
3. Description: Metal, bolted, split-sleeve-type, reducing or transition

coupling with sealing pad and closure plates, O-ring gaskets, and bolt
fasteners.
a. Standard: AWWA C219.

b. Sleeve Material: Ductile iron.
c. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide
pressure rating.
d. Gasket Material: O-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise
indicated.
e. Pressure Rating: 16 bars minimum.
f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
D. Flexible Connectors:
1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid;

with copper-tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends
brazed to hose.
2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire
braid; with ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5,
steel pipe flanges welded to hose.
2.7 GATE VALVES
A. Ductile-Iron Gate Valves:
1. Non-rising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: (For valves

>=50mm)

a. Description: Ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-

iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
1) Standard: AWWA C509 or BS 5163.

2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 16 bars.
3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint or flanged or
grooved.
4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
2.8 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:

include.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements.
4. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.
a. Standard: MSS SP-60.

b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece
bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include
sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with
recessed flange for branch valve.
c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, [metal] [resilient]-seated
gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron or ductile iron valve
boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of
burial of valve, plug with lettering "FIRE WATER," and bottom section with
base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately (125 mm) in diameter.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length
to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
2.9 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants:
1. Description: Freestanding, with one DN 115 and two DN 65 outlets,

DN 150 threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with DN 150
mechanical-joint inlet. Interior and exterior coating to be 300 microns
(minimum) fusion bonded epoxy.
a. Standards: AWWA 503, UL 246 or FM approved.

b. Pressure Rating: 16 bars minimum.

c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local
fire department. Include cast-iron caps with steel chains.
d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 38 mm point to flat.
e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valves by turning operating nut
to left or counterclockwise.
f. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with excavating, trenching, and backfilling requirements in Section 31

"Earth Moving."
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Firefighting Connection: Arrange with concerned company for tap of size and in
location indicated in firefighting main.
B. Firefighting Connection: Tap firefighting main according to requirements of

concerned company and of size and in location indicated.
C. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and

AWWA M41.
1. Install encasement for piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
D. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.
E. Bury piping with depth of cover over top and according to the following:
1. Under Driveways: With at least 1.20m covers over top.

2. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 0.90 m additional cover.
F. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and

other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.
G. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source

and building fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe
sizes indicated.
1. Terminate fire-suppression water-service piping within the building at the

[floor slab] [wall] until building-water-piping systems are installed.
Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping
material. Make connections to building's fire-suppression water-service
piping systems when those systems are installed.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems
pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
F. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
G. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with

grooved-end, ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts.
H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints or Electro Fusion Joint: Clean and dry joining
surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to
ASTM D 2657.
I. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each
underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and
AWWA M44.
C. UL-Listed or FM Global-Approved Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24 and

NFPA 13. Gate valves for fire protection service shall be UL 262 approved as per
NFPA 13. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing
up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
D. UL-Listed or FM Global-Approved Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with

NFPA 24 and NFPA 13.
E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.
F. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff

valves.[ Install full-size valved bypass.]

3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to existing firefighting main
B. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to interior fire-suppression piping.
A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is

not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
NFPA 13, Chapter 10.
B. Test and inspection reports shall be submitted with samples to authorities having
jurisdiction
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground [ detectable] warning tape during backfilling of

trench for underground fire-suppression water-service piping. Locate below
finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic fire-

suppression water-service piping or fire-suppression water-service piping with
electrically insulated fittings, on main electrical meter panel. Comply with
requirements for identifying devices in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean[ and disinfect] fire-suppression water-service piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been
altered, extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging[ and disinfecting] procedure prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction,
use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping
system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points
of outlet.
3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction,
use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing

at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow it to stand for 24 hours.
b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine;
isolate and allow it to stand for three hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no
chlorine remains in water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles with test results to authorities
having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows
evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging [ and disinfecting] activities.
3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground fire-suppression water-service piping [NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to

DN 300)] shall be following:
1. DI, [Class 350], fire-service pipe with fittings and joints.
2. PE, [Class 150] [Class 200], fire-service pipe; molded PE fittings; and heat-
fusion joints.
3.10 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor
with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.
B. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Provide for drainage.
C. UL/FM Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24.

SECTION 211200 - FIRE SUPPERSSION STANDPIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping and equipment for the following building systems:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class III standpipes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire hose coupling thread
for attaching fire hose.
B. Hose Station: Hose connection, fire hose rack, and fire hose.
C. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material

specifications prepared according to NFPA 14 for obtaining approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Verify the design of standpipes for compliance with NFPA, and obtain approval
from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include minimum and
maximum residual pressures at hydraulically remote outlets according to the
following:
1. DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) Hose Connections: 450 kPa (65 psig) minimum and 690
kPa (100 psig) maximum.
2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) Hose Connections: 690 kPa (100 psig) minimum and
1200 kPa (175 psig) maximum.
B. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-

kPa (175-psig) minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
FIRE SUPPERSSION STANDPIPES 211200

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for standpipe piping.
2. Pipe hangers and supports.
3. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
5. Air compressors. Include electrical data.
6. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and arrangement
of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and
marking; and finish.
7. Hose connections. Include size, type, and finish.
8. Hose stations. Include size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and
length of fire hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and finish
of nozzles; and finish of rack.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test
results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in
NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of standpipe specialty to include
in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1
including interface with fire alarm system for local and remote system status
monitoring and trouble.
E. Working plan prepared according to NFPA 14 to the authority having jurisdiction.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and

accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that
comply with other requirements indicated.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.
C. Standpipe Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a

testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
E. NFPA Standard: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing

complying with NFPA 14, "Standpipe and Hose Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Automatic Wet-Type, Class III Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) or
DN 25 hose stations and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections. Has open water-
supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting,
and joining materials.
2.3 PIPES
A. Underground pipe: Refer specification section 211100–Facility fire suppression

water service piping.
B. Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ERW pipe / ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E Grade B
Schedule 40 in DN150 (NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30 in DN200 (NPS 8)
and larger.
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS
A. Underground pipe fittings: Refer specification section 211100–Facility fire

suppression water service piping
B. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M.
C. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11.
D. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
E. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable iron or

ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory
grooved according to AWWA C606.
(1) Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads
to provided system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with
NFPA 13.

(a) 32mm to 100mm: “Installation ready” stab-on design for direct ‘stab’
installation onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and
no loose parts.
(b) 125mm and larger: Standard rigid couplings.
(2) Flexible Type: Use in seismic areas where required by NFPA 13.
(a) 50mm to 200mm: “Installation ready” stab-on design for direct ‘stab’
no loose parts.
(b) All other sizes: Standard flexible couplings.
F. Flange adapters shall be galvanized ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, flat
faced, designed for incorporating flanged components with Class 125 or 150 bolt-
hole patterns to a grooved piping system.
A. Underground pipe joining material: Refer specification section 211100–Facility

fire suppression water service piping.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include

ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts.
Include listing for dry-pipe service for couplings for dry piping.
C. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B 16.21, Nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges:
Full-face gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges:
Ring-type gaskets.
D. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding

materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being
welded.
2.6 FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 2070-kPa (300-psig)

nonshock working-pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be
furnished with grooved ends instead of type of ends specified.

B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends;
solid wedge; OS&Y; and rising stem.
C. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: iron body, bronze mounted, taper
wedge, OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings
and flanged ends.
D. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150; bronze
or Brass body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
E. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: cast-iron body and bolted
cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
F. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: cast-iron body with
rubber seal, bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
G. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves: DN 50 and Smaller: Body Material, Bronze

end connections: Threaded.
H. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves: DN 65 and Larger: Body Material: Cast or

ductile iron, end connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Pressure-Regulating Valves: 2760-kPa (400-psig) minimum rating, brass.

Include DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2), female NPS inlet and outlet;
adjustable setting feature; and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as
indicated.
1. Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
B. Ball Drip Valves: automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check device with
threaded ends.
C. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
(1) Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa minimum.
(2) Material: Brass or bronze.
(3) Inlet: Female pipe threads.
(4) Outlet: Threaded with or without adapter having male hose threads.
(5) Pattern: Angle or gate.
(6) Finish: Polished chrome plated where exposed to view or Rough brass or
bronze.

2.8 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 (NPS 1/2) pipe
nipple, and bronze or brass ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled
"MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held
closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.9 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Description: 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, brass, hose valve for
connection of fire hose. Include 45-degree angle pattern design; female NPS inlet
and male hose outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include DN 25, DN40 or
DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2) as indicated, and hose valve threads according to
NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
1. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type is

indicated.
2. Finish: Rough brass or bronze.
2.10 HOSE STATIONS
A. Description: semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass, rack nipple; hose rack;
and the following features:
1. Valves: 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum pressure rating, 45-degree angle

pattern hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Valve Operation: Nonadjustable type, unless pressure-regulating type

is indicated.
2. Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
3. Flow-Restricting Devices: DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) or DN25 brass, adjustable for
DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) fire hose inlet.
4. Fire Hose: NFPA 1961, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets, and nozzle.
Include the following fire hose materials:
a. Jacket: Combination of natural and synthetic threads.
b. Lining: Rubber, or combination of rubber and plastic compounds
b. Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of rubber and plastic
compounds.
5. Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding units.
6. Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
Contains one multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type (FE-14.5-kg (10-lb)
nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container and Carbon-Dioxide Type
(FE-2): 4.5-kg (10-lb) nominal capacity, in manufacturer's standard
enameled-metal container.

B. DN65 and DN40 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 1-1/2) Hose Stations: DN65 (NPS 2-1/2)
hose valve with male threaded outlet, cap, and chain and DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose
valve; hose rack with water-retention device and pins for folded, DN40 (NPS 1-
1/2) lined hose; and DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and
nozzle.
1. Hose-Rack Finish: Red enamel.

2. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
3. Fire Hose: Lined, 30-m (100-foot) length.
4. Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa minimum.
5. Pressure-Control Device: Pressure reducing.
6. Pattern: Angle.Nozzle: Brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.
7. Material: Brass or bronze.
8. Pressure-Control Device:, integral or for field installation if indicated.
9. Size: DN 40 or DN25
10. Inlet: Female pipe threads.
11. Outlet: Male hose threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-
department threads.
2.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Fire Department Connections: cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plate;
brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel
connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads, extension pipe
nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate with marking
"AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Type: Recessed mounting.
2. Body Material: Corrosion-resistance metal.

3. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.
4. Number of Inlets: Two or three as indicated on the drawings.
5. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
2.12 ALARM DEVICES
A. General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-

wheel operator with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction
and 250-mm diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish.
Include DN20 (NPS 3/4) inlet and DN25 (NPS 1) drain connections.
C. Water-Flow Indicators: electrical-supervision, paddle operated, vane-type water-

flow detector; with 1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating; and designed for

horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit

switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-
V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false
signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
D. Pressure Switches: electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard

feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design
that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.
E. Valve Supervisory Switches: electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally

closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully
open position.
F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: electrical; single-pole, double throw; with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post
valve is in other than fully open position.
2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure Gauges: 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 2070 kPa
(0 to 300 psig).
(1) Case: ABS (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene)
(2) Window: Polycarbonate
(3) Dial: Black Figures on White Background
(4) Pointer: Black, Aluminum
(5) Movement: Suspended Spring with Polyester Segment
(6) Bourdon Tube: Bronze
(7) Socket: Brass, Soft Soldered
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this
Section.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations
of piping connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated
construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose
connections and stations are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.4 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same
as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves, and other dry-
type fire-suppression standpipe piping: Use galvanized, standard-weight steel
pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves, and other dry-
type fire-suppression standpipe piping: Use galvanized, standard-weight steel
pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
E. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Refer specification section 211100–

Facility fire suppression water service piping.
F. Standpipes: Use the following:
1. DN65 (NPS 2 1/2) and Smaller: Standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
ends, cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. DN80 (NPS 3) and Larger : Standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
3. Optional DN80 (NPS 3) and Larger: Standard-weight steel pipe with plain
ends, steel welding fittings, and welded joints

3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not
indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FM approved for

applications where required by NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.
2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-approved

valves are not required by NFPA 14.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

b. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.
A. Underground joint construction: Refer specification section 211100–Facility fire

suppression water service piping.
B. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved
ends and Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-
end fittings; and steel, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions.
Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for dry piping.
C. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than
system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 and smaller.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having DN65 and larger end connections.
F. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
G. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME
B31.9.
I. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME
B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to
remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
J. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe

according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for
steel-pipe joints.
K. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe

according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for
steel-pipe grooved joints.
L. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations. The gasket style and elastomeric
material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified.
Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks
in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. A factory-trained
field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in
the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products.
Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation.
Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate

general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval
with Engineer before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with

restrained joints.
C. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of fire-

suppression standpipe
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions
are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having

DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger connections.

G. Install drain valves on standpipes.
H. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and
check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
I. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
J. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Install
according to NFPA 14.
K. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Construct rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and
at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than
DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe
between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they
will not be subject to freezing.
A. Install fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties

according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, manufacturer's written instructions, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open, located to

control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Provide
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and
trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control

sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
E. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers

instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
F. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of

flow, in main supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Install bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.

3.9 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
C. Install DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device,

unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe

escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply
piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire
hose. Refer to Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets.
3.10 HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction.
B. Install DN40 (NPS 1-1/2) hose-station valves with flow-restricting device, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached to standpipe or

substrate.
D. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe

escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply
piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire
hose. Cabinets are specified in Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
3.11 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and standpipes to fire pumps. Include backflow

preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain
to floor drain or outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department

connections, and accessories.
D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.
E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
3.12 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to

requirements in NFPA 14 and in Section "Identification for Fire-Suppression
Piping and Equipment."

A. Flush, test, and inspect standpipes according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance"
Chapter.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to
demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not pass

tests and inspections.
E. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Start and run air compressors.
6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department

equipment.
3.14 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed
and operate correctly.
B. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
C. Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have threads
compatible with local fire department equipment.
D. Fill wet-pipe standpipe piping with water.
E. Verify that hose connections are correct type and size.
F. Verify that hose stations are correct type and size.

G. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
H. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
I. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
3.15 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain standpipes and hoses.

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Contract apply to this Section.
B. Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for standpipe piping.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire-suppression sprinklers, piping, and equipment for the
following building systems:
1. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves,

specialties, and automatic sprinklers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material

specifications prepared according to NFPA 13 for obtaining approval from
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to

operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping

containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water
discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open
when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are
included if indicated.
A. Verify the design of sprinklers for conformance with NFPA 13, and obtain
approval from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify the design of sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain
approval from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313

S17058-0100D-FD-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV C Page 1 of 17
2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow

preventers.
3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As per NFPA 13
requirements.
4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 6.3 mL/s over 139-sq. m (0.10 gpm over
1500-sq. ft.) area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over 139-sq. m
(0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.) area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s over 139-sq. m
(0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.) area.
d. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 18.9 mL/s over 232-sq. m (0.30
gpm over 2500-sq. ft.) area.
e. Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 25.2 mL/s over 232-sq. m (0.40
gpm over 2500-sq. ft.) area.
5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per NFPA 13 requirements.
C. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 1200-

kPa (175-psig) minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
3. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
5. Air compressors. Include electrical data.
6. Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and
arrangement of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet;
escutcheon and marking; and finish.
7. Excess-pressure pumps. Include electrical data.
8. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow
characteristics, mounting, finish, and other pertinent data.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, shall be coordinated

with other mechanical services and electrical/telecom services, using input from
installers of the items involved.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
F. Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: As specified in "Preparation" Article.
G. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to

NFPA 13, that have been approved by Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations, if applicable.
H. Welding certificates.
I. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test
results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in
NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of sprinkler specialty to include
in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating,

and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-
hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and

field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and

accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection
Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that
comply with other requirements indicated.
C. Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a

testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.

E. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing

complying with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances."

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged

cover, with space for spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the
number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers.
Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of
sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting,
and joining materials.
2.2 PIPES
A. Underground pipe: Refer specification section 211100–Facility fire suppression

water service piping.
2.3 Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type-E, Grade-B hot-dip
galvanized-steel pipe or Electro Galvanized ERW where indicated; Schedule 40 in
DN150 (NPS 6) and smaller, and Schedule 30 in DN200 (NPS 8) and larger.PIPE
FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
B. Underground pipe fittings: Refer specification 211100–Facility fire suppression

water service piping. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: UL-ASME B16.3.
C. Steel, Threaded Couplings: UL- ASTM A865/A865M.
D. Steel Welding Fittings: UL-ASTM A 234/A 234M, ASME B16.9, or

ASME B16.11.
E. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: UL-ASME B16.5.Grooved-End Fittings for

Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A
536,ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
F. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid
pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

1. Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads
to provided system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with
NFPA 13.
a. 32mm to 100mm: “Installation ready” stab-on design for direct ‘stab’
no loose parts.
b. 125mm and larger: Standard rigid couplings.
2. Flexible Type: Use in seismic areas where required by NFPA 13.

a. 50mm to 200mm: “Installation ready” stab-on design for direct ‘stab’
no loose parts.
b. All other sizes: Standard flexible couplings.
G. Steel, Press-Seal Fittings: 1200-kPa (175-psig) pressure rating; with steel housing,
butylene O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with Schedule 5, plain-end, steel pipe.
Include manufacturer's pressure-sealing tools.
A. Underground pipe joining material: Refer specification section 211100–Facility

fire suppression water service piping.
B. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe dimensions.
Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and
nuts.
C. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
thick.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges:
Full-face gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges:
Ring-type gaskets.
D. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding

materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being
welded.
2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 2070-kPa (300-psig)

nonshock working-pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end piping may be
furnished with grooved ends instead of type of ends specified.

B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends;
solid wedge; OS&Y; and rising stem.
C. Indicating Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-
type, bronze body with threaded ends; and integral indicating device.
D. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted,
taper wedge, OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing
rings and flanged ends; and integral indicating device.
E. Indicating Device: Electrical [115] [220]-V ac, prewired, single-circuit,

supervisory switch.
F. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80,
Class 150; bronze body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
G. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and
bolted cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged
ends.
H. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body
with rubber seal, bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or

"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig (1200 kPa)

minimum.
3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
B. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure, designed

for horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet,
bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and single-hinge pin and latch design.
Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages,
retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
1. Option: Grooved-end connections for use with keyed couplings.

2. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, and separate from main
drain piping.

C. Zone/Floor Control Valves:
1. Floor control valves assembly consisting of UL listed FM approved

indicating-type floor control valve with supervisory switch, pressure
gauge, water flow switch , test drain valve assembly and check valve;
installation and piping arrangement to be as per NFPA 13 appendix A
2. Floor control valves rated for minimum of 1200 Pa (175psi) working
pressure
3. Check valve is optional: check valve is used when valve is connected to
combined sprinklers/ stand by riser; if separate risers check valve may not
be installed as per NFPA 13 appendix A.
4. Floor control valve shall be provided with a drain connection having a
minimum size as determined in NFPA 13 to drain that portion of the
system controlled by the sectional valve.
5. A pressure gauge with a connection not smaller than 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) shall
be installed at each main drain associated with a floor control valve.
6. Floor control valves, should be accessible to authorized persons during
emergencies.
D. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 2760-kPa (400-psig) minimum rating,

brass. Include DN40 or DN65 (NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2), female NPS inlet and
outlet; adjustable setting feature; and straight or 90-degree angle pattern design as
indicated.
1. Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
E. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20 (NPS 3/4), ball check
device with threaded ends.
2.7 SPRINKLERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or

"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
B. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the

following:
1. UL 199, for applications except residential.

2. UL 1767, for early suppression, fast-response applications.
C. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) orifice with

Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6 and Nominal 25-mm (1-inch) orifice with
Discharge Coefficient K of 25.2, for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating,
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed:UL 199.
1. Characteristics:
a. Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K

between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Nominal 17/32-inch (13.5-mm) Orifice: With Discharge
Coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
c. Nominal 1-inch (25-mm) Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K 25.2.
E. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.(SP-2a)

2. Pendent sprinklers.(SP-2)
3. Pendent sprinkler with K factor 8 (SP-2b)
4. Pendent sprinkler with K factor 25.2 (SP-2c)
5. Pendent Window sprinkler with K factor 5.6 (SP-2d)
6. Sidewall sprinklers, including escutcheon.(SP-3)
7. Sidewall extended coverage sprinkler (SP-3a)
8. Upright sprinklers.(SP-1)
F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated, bronze, and painted.
G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler
mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type
sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 25-mm vertical
adjustment.
3. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
I. Sprinkler Guards: UL 199, Wire-cage type, including fastening device for

attaching to sprinkler.
2.8 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS
A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile iron, or

other materials compatible with piping.
B. Press-Seal Fittings: UL 213, steel housing with butylene O-rings and pipe stop.
C. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with locking-lug ends.
D. Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive

gasket, bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlet.

E. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213,ductile-iron housing with pressure-responsive

gaskets, bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlets.
F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals;
adjustable.
G. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body;
with threaded inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
H. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet
and capped drain outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
I. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with

threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass.
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with brass, wall,
escutcheon plate; brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass,
lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963
and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads,
extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon plate
with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE"
1. Type: Recessed mounting.

3. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular.
4. Number of inlets: Two or Three as indicated on the drawings.
5. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
6. Pressure rating 1200 kpa minimum
B. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body,

inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
sizes and threads, and bottom outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps,
gaskets, and brass chains; brass, lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for
each hose-connection inlet; 450-mm high brass sleeve; and round, floor, brass,
escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated.

3. Number of inlets: Two or Three as indicated on the drawings.
4. Pressure rating 1200 kpa minimum

2.10 ALARM DEVICES
A. General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with pelton-

wheel operator with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction
and 250-mm diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel factory finish.
Include DN20 (NPS 3/4) inlet and DN25 (NPS 1) drain connections.
C. Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow

detector; with 1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or
vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for
isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc;
complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals
and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
D. Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with

retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and
design that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.
E. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 346; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other
than fully open position.
F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 346; electrical; single-pole, double

throw, with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled
indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.
2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure Gauges: UL 393, 90- to 115-mm diameter dial with dial range of 0 to
2070 kPa (0 to 300 psig).
(1) Case: ABS (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene)
(2) Window: Polycarbonate
(3) Dial: Black Figures on White Background
(4) Pointer: Black, Aluminum
(5) Movement: Suspended Spring with Polyester Segment
(6) Bourdon Tube: Bronze
(7) Socket: Brass, Soft Soldered

2.12 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type as indicated.

Control panel includes NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and
solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power
supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically
supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-
pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors

and Class A detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 220-V
ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled
"MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a
cover held closed by breakable strut.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15
(NPS 1/2) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure
labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions
and a cover held closed by breakable strut.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results
for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of
this Section.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.
B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same
as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized,
standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use galvanized,
standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel,
keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
E. Sprinkler Feed Mains and Risers: Use the following:

1. DN50 (NPS 2 ) and Smaller: Standard-weight black steel pipe (ASTM

grade B) with threaded ends, cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and
threaded joints.
2. DN65 (NPS 2 1/2) and Larger: Standard-weight black steel pipe (ASTM
grade B) with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed
couplings; and grooved joints.
3. Optional DN80 (NPS 3) and Larger: Standard-weight black steel pipe
(ASTM grade B) with plain ends, steel welding fittings, and welded
joints.
F. Wet-Pipe, Sprinkler Branch Piping: Use the following:
1. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: Standard-weight black steel pipe

(ASTM grade B) with threaded ends, cast- or malleable-iron threaded
fittings, and threaded joints.
2. DN80 (NPS 3) and larger: Standard-weight black steel pipe (ASTM
grade B) with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed
couplings; and grooved joints.
3. Optional DN80 (NPS 3) and larger: Standard-weight black steel pipe
(ASTM grade B) with plain ends, steel welding fittings, and welded
joints.
1. Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FM approved for

applications where required by NFPA 13.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.
2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-

approved valves are not required by NFPA 13.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

b. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.
A. Underground pipe joining construction: Refer specification section 211100–

Facility fire suppression water service piping.
B. Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll-grooved
ends and Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; steel, grooved-
end fittings; and steel, keyed couplings. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions.
Press-Seal-Fitting Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure and follow fitting

manufacturer's written instructions. Include use of specific equipment, pressure-

sealing tool, and accessories.
C. Locking-Lug-Fitting, Twist-Locked Joints: Follow fitting manufacturer's written

instructions.
D. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than
system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
G. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
H. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
J. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe
ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

K. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join light wall steel pipe and steel pressure-
seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
L. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using

qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance"
Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use
welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate

general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written

approval from Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File written
approval with Engineer before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24 and with

restrained joints.
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller. Unions
are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having

DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff

valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
sprinkler risers when sprinkler branch piping is connected to sprinkler risers.
I. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and
check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials and
installation.
L. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from

earthquake damage.
M. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Construct rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection.
Include pressure gages with connection not less than DN8 (NPS 1/4) and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve.
Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to
freezing.
3.6 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install specialty sprinkler fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

A. Install listed fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and

specialties according to NFPA 13, manufacturer's written instructions, and
B. Gate Valves: Install listed fire-protection-service valves supervised-open, located

to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections.
Provide permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by
each valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers

instead of check valves in potable-water supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of

flow, in main supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-
line connection.
3.8 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms without Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
3. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright and pendent sprinklers, as indicated.
4. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
5. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
6. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Flush sprinklers.
7. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
8. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed
sprinklers, as indicated.
9. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
10. Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-
response sprinklers where indicated.
11. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes:
a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished

spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not
exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or
other corrosive fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover
plate.
c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

3.9 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.
B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles.
C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect water-supply piping and sprinklers to fire pumps. Include backflow

preventers.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain
to floor drain or outside building.
C. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, fire department connections, and

accessories.
D. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.
E. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to

requirements in NFPA 13 and in Section "Identification for Fire-Suppression
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to
demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.

3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.15 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed
and operate correctly.
B. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
C. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified
are replaced with new, correct type.
D. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature
ratings, and have guards as required for each application.
E. Verify that fire department connections have threads compatible with local fire
department equipment.
F. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.
G. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
H. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
I. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
J. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train Employer's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-suppression
sprinklers.

SECTION 212200 - CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:
1. Piping and piping specialties.

2. Extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Extinguishing agent.
4. Detection and alarm devices.
5. Control and alarm panels.
6. Accessories.
7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm
system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NOVEC 1230: Trade name for FK-5-1-12 fire-extinguishing clean agent.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Description: Engineered system for discharge and total flooding of hazard areas
with "NOVEC 1230," made by 3M Fire Protection Systems.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total

flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity above the ceiling, below the
ceiling, and below the raised floor. System may include separate zones above and
below the ceiling and beneath the raised floor; allow a nominal20% residual
quantity of gas subject to final agreement with Engineer and authority providing
approval under Applicable Laws. If smoke is detected below the raised floor,
extinguishing agent shall be discharged in the underfloor zone only. If smoke is
detected below the ceiling, extinguishing agent shall be discharged in zones above
and below the ceiling and below the floor. If smoke is detected above the ceiling,
extinguishing agent shall be discharged in the zone above the ceiling only.
CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 212200

B. Space/enclosure integrity tests shall be carried out prior to commissioning and

final setting to work of the systems to ensure that adequate design allowance has
been made in the volume calculations.
C. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as
appropriate for areas being protected and include safety factor. Use clean agent
indicated and in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
D. Performance Requirements: Discharge NOVEC 1230 within 10 seconds and

maintain 4.7 percent concentration by volume at 21 deg C for 10-minute holding
time in hazard areas.
1. NOVEC 1230 concentration in hazard areas greater than 10.0 percent

immediately after discharge or less than 4.7 percent throughout holding time
will not be accepted without written authorization from Employer and
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 4278-kPa calculated working pressure and
2484-kPa initial charging pressure.
E. Cross-Zoned Detection: Include devices located in two separate zones. Sound

alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on
actuating single-detection device in the same cross zone area.
F. Verified Detection: Include devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on

activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating
second-detection device.
G. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being

activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of hand
pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the time delay has expired.
H. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
I. System Operating Sequence: As follows:
1. Actuating First Detector: Give visual indication on annunciator panel,

Energize audible alarm, close motorized fire and smoke dampers to isolate
only the protected area so other rooms will not be affected for centralized
HVAC system, release and close doors in protected area, and send signal to
fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Give visual indication on annunciator panel,
Energize audible alarm, shut-down centralized HVAC system, shut down
power to protected equipment, actuate time delay for extinguishing-agent
discharge for 30 seconds, and release extinguishing agent.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights.
J. Operating manual-release stations will discharge extinguishing agent when

activated.

K. Operating abort switches will stop extinguishing-agent discharge while being

activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of
switch will discharge agent. Activating the abort switch when there is no fire
alarm activation should not release the agent but should register a time stamped
event in the Fire Alarm System (FAS) monitoring station.
L. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set
pressure.
M. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
N. Only certificated installers that are UL and FM listed will be approved for
installations.
O. All necessary insurance company, local and statutory approvals are to be obtained
by the Fire Protection Contractor.
P. Fire Protection Contractor is to provide liaison and co-ordination with other

contract packages and ensure that the installation drawings take due account of all
other services which may affect the performance of the fire protection system.
Q. Ensure that the work is programmed to suit the MEP contractor’s installation
programme. Allow sufficient time for all necessary approvals and comments on
installation drawings and for testing and commissioning.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1. Extinguishing-agent containers.
2. Extinguishing agent.
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual-release stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include

design calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to
scale:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate

dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria,
including analysis data.

4. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of

extinguishing agent required for each hazard area.
5. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items,
and the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors,

and accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.
d. Ceiling penetrations and ceiling-mounted items.
6. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a. Controls and alarms.

b. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if
mounted in space, detectors, and accessories.
c. Equipment and furnishings.
7. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors,

and accessories.
b. Method of supporting piping.
8. Indicate the Following on Ceiling Plans:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles,

detectors, and accessories.
b. Method of supporting piping.
c. Other equipment located in the ceiling space that is being protected
including sprinkler piping,
d. HVAC equipment, raceways, or conduit.
C. Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001, that

have been approved by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include
design calculations.
D. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Commissioning"

Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For components to include in operation and

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For special agent system to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of clean-agent
extinguishing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain extinguishing agent and equipment through one

source.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements

of clean-agent extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system
selected. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics
may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate piping to comply with ASME B31.1, "Power

Piping."
F. FM Compliance: Provide components that are FM approved and are listed in

FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide."
G. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label clean-agent extinguishing systems to

comply with NFPA 2001, "Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems."
H. NFPA 1: Fire Code – 2015 Compliance.
I. NFPA 10: Portable Fire Extinguisher – 2013 Compliance.
J. NFPA 13: Standard for Sprinkler System ‐ 2016 Compliance.
K. NFPA 14: Standard for Stand Pipe Systems ‐ 2016 Compliance.
L. NFPA 15: Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection ‐ 2017
Compliance.
M. NFPA 24: Standard for installation of private fire service mains & their
appurtenances – 2016 Compliance.
N. NFPA 30: Flammable and combustible liquids code – 2015 Compliance.
O. NFPA 101: Life safety Code ‐ 2015 Compliance.
P. NFPA 415: Standard on Airport Terminal Building – 2016 Compliance.
Q. NFPA 2001: Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System – 2015 Compliance.
R. NFPA 5000: Building Construction and Safety Code – 2015 Compliance.

S. SBC: Saudi Building Code 801 Compliance.
T. UL Compliance: Provide equipment components complying with UL 1058,

"Halogenated Agent Extinguishing System Units," and are UL listed for clean-
agent extinguishing system units in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe, tube,
fitting, and joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed
in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and Appendix A, for charging pressure of
system.
2.3 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 80,
seamless steel pipe.
2.4 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Malleable-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
B. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless Class 600 is
indicated.
C. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: FM approved and UL listed, ASTM A 47/A 47M

malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe
and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of

piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm)

maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

C. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for clean-
agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536,
ductile-iron housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.6 VALVES
A. General Valve Requirements:
1. UL listed or FM Approved for use in fire-protection systems.

2. Compatible with type of clean agent used.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever,

capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow
capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent

entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure-relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing

agent when container is removed from manifold.
2.7 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS
A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure
rating that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure
gage.
1. Finish: Red, enamel or epoxy paint.

2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and
connections for main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage
containers.
3. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets
consisting of steel straps and channels; suitable for container support,
maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.
2.8 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT
A. Clean Agent: NOVEC 1230; FK-5-1-12, Dodecaflouro-2-methylpentan-3-one.
2.9 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type,

discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.

2.10 MANIFOLD AND ORIFICE UNIONS
A. Description: UL-listed device with minimum 15-MPa (2175-psig) pressure

rating, to control flow and reduce pressure of INERGEN gas in piping.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for system
design requirements.
2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, sized for
system design requirements.
2.11 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, including equipment and features

required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.
B. Power Requirements: 240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system
components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to
produce power at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 Type 3, enameled-steel cabinet, for indoor

applications, and Type 4 Type 4X, Stainless Steel cabinet, for outdoor
applications.
1. Mounting: Recessed flush with surface Surface.
D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area

1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable
devices assigned to the required number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.
Above should have time stamped event when activated and should be seen in Fire
Alarm System monitoring workstation.
E. Provide the following control-panel features:
a. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and

operating system electrical devices.
b. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
c. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
d. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with
visual status indication on the annunciator panel.
e. Control interface capability with Building Control System, if
applicable, and Fire Alarm System for general alarm, control panel
fault, cylinder low pressure, loss of primary power and low battery
voltage..

f. Capability to monitor and indicate loss of primary power, low battery

voltage.
F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans and

locations of detectors and manual-release stations. Include lamps to indicate
device-initiating alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and
stainless-steel or aluminum enclosure.
G. Standby Power: Sealed Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to

operate system for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include
automatic battery charger, with varying charging rate between trickle and high
depending on battery voltage, that is capable of maintaining batteries fully
charged. Include manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter, electrical
contacts for connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.
2.12 DETECTION DEVICES
A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following
types:
1. Photoelectric Detectors: UL 268, consisting of LED light source and silicon
photodiode receiving element.
B. Signals to the Central Fire Alarm Control Panel: Any type of local system trouble
is reported to the central fire alarm control panel as a composite "trouble" signal.
Alarms on each system zone are individually reported to the central fire alarm
control panel as separately identified zones.
2.13 MANUAL-RELEASE STATIONS
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, with "PULL STATION" caption, 220-V

ac or low voltage compatible with controls, and red finish with clear plastic
hinged cover, Include contacts for connection to control panel. Unit can
manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains
engaged until unlocked.
1. Mounting: Surface Semirecessed.
B. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.
C. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.

2.14 SWITCHES
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, where available, 220-V ac or low voltage

compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.

2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release
circuit signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Abort Switches: Dead-man type, requiring constant pressure, for stop of
system discharge.
4. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device.
2.15 ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: FM approved or UL listed, low voltage, and surface mounting,

B. Bells: Minimum 150-mm diameter.
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
2.16 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING
A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 26 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-
area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
work performance.
B. Each room shall include a pressure relief system and a mechanical post operation
clearance fan.
3.2 AREA SERVED BY CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM
A. Building distributor (BD) rooms.
B. UPS rooms.
C. ECBS rooms.

D. Emergency control center rooms.
E. Entrance facility rooms.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR 2484-kPa CHARGING PRESSURE
A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties
and accessories and where required for maintenance.
B. Fittings Working Pressure: 4278 kPa minimum.
C. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
D.
E. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Galvanized steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded

fittings, and threaded joints.
F. DN65 and DN80 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3): Galvanized steel pipe, malleable-iron
threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
G. DN65 and DN80 (NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3): Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-
end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
H. DN100 (NPS 4) and Larger: Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings;
steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
3.4 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb
and according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed
couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.
D. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements
listed in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and related Appendix A paragraphs;
and ASME B31.1.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure-

relief devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.
3. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and
accessories, complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section

"Detection, Actuation, and Control Systems," as required for supervised

system application.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The

following are specific connection requirements:
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and

maintenance.
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system.
Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Divisions 26 and 28.
D. Ground electrical components.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
3.6 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and

panels according to NFPA 2001 and Section "Identification for Fire-Suppression
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are
entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the
horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
A. Professional Engineer: Inspect installed clean-agent extinguishing systems,

prepare installation report, and certify that installation complies with the Contract
Documents and calculations, and comments of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section

"Approval of Installations." Include the following inspections and tests to
demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.

2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and check
mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure
Inspection," and Appendix C, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure."

5. Perform functional predischarge test.

6. Perform system functional operational test.
7. Check remote monitoring operations.
8. Check control-panel primary power source.
9. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
C. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system when

installation is complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure
construction has been completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating
instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of Installations."
Include the following to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Perform simulation test.

2. Perform system functional operational test.
3. Check remote monitoring operations.
4. Check control-panel primary power source.
5. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
D. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

Replace equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified and
indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until
satisfactory results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities

having jurisdiction.
E. Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7, "Inspection and Test Procedures," and Section 8,
"System Function Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
F. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.
G. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.

3.8 CLEANING
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before
assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner. Pipe
network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before installing nozzles
or discharge devices.
3.9 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and

report results in writing.
B. Verify that extinguishing system is installed and connected according to the

Contract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with the Contract Documents.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions and do the following:
1. Verify that piping system installation is completed and cleaned.

2. Verify that tests of piping system are complete.
3. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
4. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
E. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures

are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and pressurize

to indicated charging pressure.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.
4. Adjust operating controls.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Clean agent extinguishing
system. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed

motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; efficiency and
power factor for 100% and 75% load, mounting arrangements; enclosure type
size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug;
and coatings/finishing.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
D. Shop drawing for field-installed motors, include dimensioned plans, elevations,

including required clearances and service space around equipment.
E. Operation and maintenance data as per manufacture instructions.
A. Comply with NEMA MG1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
B. Comply with IEC 60034 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
C. Comply with IEC 60072 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
D. Comply with IEC 60529 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
E. The plumbing and drainage systems should be designed in accordance with the
recommendations and guidelines of the following standards and associations or
the worldwide acceptable relevant standard:
1. IPC International Plumbing Code 2015.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513

2. NPC National Standard Plumbing Code 2015– United States of

America.
3. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code-2012.
4. SBC Saudi Building Code 701-Sanitary.
5. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers.
6. BS-EN British and English standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise

indicated.
B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.
C. Motors shall be NEMA design B or design N or NY as applicable to IEC 60034-

12 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for high torque
applications.
D. Motors 0.746 kW (1 HP) and Larger: Three phase.
E. Motors smaller than 0.746 kW (1 HP): Single phase.
F. Frequency Rating: Determined by the frequency of circuit to which motor is

connected, refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings.
G. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected,

refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings.
H. Service Factor for Drive 1.5; Service factor for Motors: 1.1 or 1.15 according to
NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1 - continuous running duty to IEC 60034-1
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, unless otherwise indicated.
Motors used for excessive intermittent periodic operation shall be suitably
designed for the expected number of starts. Motors’ dimensions shall comply with
NEMA MG1 or IEC 60072 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards as
applicable.
I. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to
start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated
environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding
nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
J. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to

NEMA MG1 or IC 411 to IEC 60034-6 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards as applicable, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

K. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled

(TEAAC) to NEMA MG1 or IC 611 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable or totally
enclosed, water to air cooled (TEWAC) to NEMA MG1 or IC 817 to IEC 60034-
6 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards as applicable. Enclosure
type shall be as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer,
L. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for outdoor use and IP54 to IEC 60529 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for indoor motors as a minimum.
M. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F)
ambient temperature, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for specific applications such as:
overhead cranes or submersible pumps, where temperature rise not exceeding 105
deg. C may be used.
N. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to
NEMA MG1 or Class I to IEC 60034-18-41 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards and shall be classified as energy efficiency to NEMA MG1 or
high efficiency class IE2 to IEC 60034-30 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards.
O. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of
protection.
P. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of
protection and shall be designed for differential CT's and/or surge protection
(surge arrestor and surge capacitor). Enough space shall be provided below main
terminal box for cable connection.
Q. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for
winding protection for all low voltage motors rated 50 HP and above and for all
low voltage VFD motors.
R. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for
winding and bearing protection for all medium voltage motors.
S. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor
controller suppliers to ensure compatibility, proper starting and satisfactory
operation.
2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1 or IEC 60034 and IEC 60072 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1 or IEC Standards or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE3

to IEC 60034-30 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors
(where needed as per design) have separate winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
6. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class F for motors with temperature
rise 80 deg. C and Class H for motors with temperature rise 105 deg. C as
indicated in paragraph 2.1 M above.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor
terminal box to suit control method. Maximum permissible starting current shall
be 5 to 6.3 times the Full Load Current (FLC). (NEMA starting code F or G) for
motors rated 15 HP and above. For motors rated below 15HP, starting current
shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and

features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller
output.
D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25
minimum service factor to NEMA MG1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents.
Windings are insulated with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is
chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to IEC or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.

2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit

starting torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B insulation may be used.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW
(1/20 hp).

C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection

automatically opens power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature
exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal
protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal
range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high
radial forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other
single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Piping is to be centered within sleeves and not be supported by sleeve.
D. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to motor

terminal box and use liquid tight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.
F. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC or

NFPA 70 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards recommendations
for “Hazardous (classified) Locations”.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation.

Coordinate with the commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a
part.
B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and power.
C. Report unusual conditions.
D. Report current deficiencies of field-installed units.
E. Ensure the motors relate to plumbing systems are bonded to local wiring
regulations (Requirements for Electrical Installations_

SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for plumbing piping
systems.
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working

pressures, and temperatures.
B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and

selection and design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and
methods of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each
expansion fitting and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

legally registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516

located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the

kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating,

with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-
end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless
2. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and
carbon-steel shroud.
B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with

internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated for 1200 kPa
at 116 deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.
1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external

control rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Types: Single and double sphere.
D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-

hose legs joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow
fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.
1. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel or Ductile fittings.
a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700
psig at 70 deg F) and 3550 kPa at 315 deg C (515 psig at 600 deg F)
minimum pressure ratings.

d. Joints for DN65 to DN150 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6): Stainless-steel or

ductile hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel or ductile sheaths with
1900 kPa at 21 deg C (275 psig at 70 deg F) and 1380 kPa at
315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and
2.2 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed

for repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250
psig at 400 deg F) minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to
match piping system, drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and
flanged-end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2. Double-Slip Type: With base.
B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition

packing, designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725 kPa at
204 deg C (250 psig at 400 deg F) minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials Specifications," and with
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-
containing parts and bolting or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.

3. Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection
minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection
minimum.
2.3 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for
alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, steel, hex head.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, steel,

plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use
in hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with

hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate
for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3 or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, two-component epoxy resin suitable
for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be
installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,
zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic grout;
suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.
C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to

partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in
temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications." or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards and to prevent
transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to
piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M or
C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, or

otherwise required, and include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written

instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors
installed on or in concrete.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up
field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of

0.05 mm.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section
"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M or

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to
ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc
coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B,

Schedule 40, or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards zinc coated, with
plain ends.
D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards.
E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness;

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517

F. Modeled PE or PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered cup, and smooth outer surface

with nailing flange for attaching wooden forms.
G. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.

Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of

pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating
of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for

imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar
with center opening to match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new
or -PP sleeves.

equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished
floor level.
sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified
in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm)
above finished floor level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified.
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe

penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete

slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves or

Galvanized-steel wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves or
Galvanized-steel wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Cast-iron wall sleeves with
sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or

system.
system or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

system.
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves

for fire rated wall , PVC-pipe sleeves for non-fire rated wall..
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Escutcheons.
2. Floor plates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew

fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-

plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip

fasteners.
D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with

concealed hinge and setscrew.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge,

and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2 FLOOR PLATES
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors
for exposed areas only.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of
insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel typeor split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with rough-brass finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type .
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with
rough-brass finish.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of
piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for plumbing and water meters installed.
B. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for

installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for
each meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range,

fittings, and location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying

accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to
240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale
divisions (0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale
division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E1-07 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519

B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring
secured, 230 mm (9 inches) long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane,

360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to

suit installation.
2.3 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.100 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection; Metal or steel
chrome plated Ring, dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for
booster sets and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum or steel painted with 115-mm- (4-1/2-
inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings or white

aluminum w/ Black & Red Markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale;

+ or - 3 or 2-3% ANSI/ASME Grade B
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of

vacuum to 15 psig of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
2.4 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.100 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of
material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.5 TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe
from dial-type thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200
deg F), chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to plus
275 deg F), ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers,
pressure gage and carrying case.
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the

system's operating conditions.
2.6 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves,
fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system
fluid.
1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of

equipment or system where used.
2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
3. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total
volume in gallons (liters).
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-
inch-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting
to flow element.
1. Scale: Liters per second (Gallons per minute).

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
C. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
2.7 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in

piping systems.

1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic

pelton-wheel indicator.
2. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa (125 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 93 deg C (200 deg F).
4. Location: at main connection point (Tie-in point) for domestic water pipe
after water meter.
2.8 WATER METERS
A. Description: AWWA C700-03 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, displacement type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters (gallons) or
cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.
B. Description: ANSI/AWWA C701-07 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, turbine type. Registers flow in liters (gallons) or cubic meters (cubic
feet) as required by utility.
C. Description: ANSI/AWWA C702-01 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, compound type, bronze case. Registers flow in liters (gallons) or
cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.
D. Description: ANSI/AWWA C703-96 (2004), UL-listed, FM-approved or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, main-line, proportional, detector
type; 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; with meter on bypass. Registers
flow in liters (gallons) or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.
1. Bypass Meter: ANSI/AWWA C702-01 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, compound type, bronze case; size not less than one-half
nominal size of main-line meter.
Local Standards, turbine type, bronze case; size not less than one-half
nominal size of main-line meter.
E. Description: ANSI/AWWA C703-96 (2004), UL-listed, FM-approved or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, main-line-turbine, detector type;
1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure; with strainer and with meter on bypass.
Registers flow in liters (gallons) or cubic meters (cubic feet) as required by utility.

Local Standards, turbine type, bronze case; not less than DN50 (NPS 2).
F. Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; direct-reading type complying

with ANSI/AWWA C706-96 (R2005) or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting
wiring, and remote register assembly.
G. Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; encoder-type complying with

ANSI/AWWA C707-05 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards;
modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and
remote register assembly.

1. Data-Acquisition Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and

quantity.
2. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and
quantity.
H. Water meter provided for retail areas will be connected to BMS system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written

instructions for applications where used.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at
most readable position.
B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Building water-service entrance.
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure

gages.
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of

each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of

pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's

D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible

locations.
E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in

accessible locations.
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as
prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards and utility's requirements.
1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water meter

inlet. Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass around meter,
unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet
and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and
piping on brick or concrete piers.
3. Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet
and outlet and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter,
valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
3.7 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to
utility's instructions and requirements.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow

service and maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and
devices.

C. Ground electrically operated meters.

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after

installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace
cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with
manufacturer's touchup paint.

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to plumbing piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure
and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim
material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation
instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating

at least 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in
successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting,
servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards for building services piping and ASME B31.1 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for power piping.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm

drainage piping valves unless referenced.
B. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards Standard Practice documents referenced.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for

valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the
ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified
below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full
extension of rising stems.
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under
ground or above ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with
7.5 mm (300 micron) fusion bonded epoxy coating.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of

Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following
special operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed
2400 mm (96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and
larger.
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended

stems arranged to receive insulation.

G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards bypass and drain connections.
H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for

cast iron, ASME B16.5 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for
steel, and ASME B16.24 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for
bronze valves.
J. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a
melting point below 450 deg C (840 deg F) for gate, globe, and check
valves; below 216 deg C (421 deg F) for ball valves.
K. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall
be provided.
2.2 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125 or Class
150 or PN16 1380-kPa (200-psi) cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150,
2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP subject to suit system operating pressure; ASTM B 62
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards cast-bronze or brass body and
bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated
packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125 or Class 150 or
PN16, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP subject to suit system operating pressure,
ASTM A 126 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards cast-iron or
ductile iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron or ductile iron wedge, brass-alloy
stem, rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland
assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150 or PN 16,
4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP subject to suit system operating pressure, ASTM B 584
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards bronze or brass body and
bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port for DN15
(1/2-inch) valves and smaller and conventional port for DN20 (3/4-inch) valves
and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded or
soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Steel handwheel.

2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.

2.4 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125 or PN
16 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP subject to
suit system operating pressure; ASTM B 62 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards cast-bronze or brass body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or
teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze
nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125 or PN 16,
1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP subject to suit system operating pressure, ASTM A 126
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards cast-iron or ductile iron body
and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-
alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron
follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, 1035- kPa (150-psi)
maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem,
field-replaceable EPDM or NBR seat or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug, or
grooved style; Single-Flange ,Wafer or Double Flanges; Aluminum-bronze or
Ductile iron disc:
1. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.
2. Operator for Sizes DN50 (2 Inches) to DN150 (6 Inches): Standard lever
handle.
3.
4. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) to DN600 (24 Inches): Gear operator
with position indicator.
2.6 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125
or Class 150 or PN16, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi)
CWP subject to suit system operating pressure; horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
ASTM B 62 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards cast-bronze or
Brass body and cap, rotating bronze or brass disc with rubber seat or
composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125 or
Class 150 or Class 250 or PN16 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP subject to suit system
operating pressure, ASTM A 126 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards cast-iron or ductile iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing,
weighted non-slam, bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc
movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and
seats made accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check
bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper
size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and
damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished
floor elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel
wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside
of tube.
D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside
valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact.
Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or
overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around
the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal
seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except
where dry seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into
which the pipe is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges

and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and
downstream for proper shutoff and retention.

3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except
provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved
end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe
and ball valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections
for specific valve applications and arrangements.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system,
and bronze or teflon disc.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or
elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
5. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
6. Check Valves: Class 125, swing type as indicated.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Con-

tract apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-58, "Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials,

Design, and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation."
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test wa-
ter.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
ter.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component,
and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed. Include design calculations justifying forces,
sizes, embedments and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529

A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pres-
sure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." or Electro
Galvanized as per ASTM B633or Design to meet MSS SP-58, type 26 or equiva-
lent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calcu-

lations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional en-
gineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated com-

ponents Carbon steel, stainless steel or Mild Steel. Refer to "Hanger and Support
Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have
field-applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where at-
tachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field as-

sembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are in-
dicated.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts (only for metal pipe material): 690-kPa (100-psi)
minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533 or equiva-

2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533 or equiva-
lent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, Type I calcium silicate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumfer-
ence of pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of
pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operat-
ing below ambient air temperature.
D. Metal Framing Systems: Metal framing systems in this article require calculating
and detailing at each use. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on drawings or comparable product.
2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting
multiple parallel pipes.
3. Standard: MFMA-4.
4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit
into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel
or stainless steel.
7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc or Hot-dipped galvanized.
8. Paint Coating: Epoxy or Polyester.
9. Plastic Coating: Polyurethane, Epoxy or Polyester
E. Pipe stands: Pipe stands in this article require calculating and detailing at each
use.
1. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies

made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-
mounted piping.
2. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe
clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without
membrane penetration.
3. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plas-
tic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
4. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand

a. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and
pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
b. Base: Stainless steel.
c. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,
continuous-thread rods.
d. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with
plastic or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
5. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand

a. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and
pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
b. Bases: One or more; plastic.
c. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
d. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
e. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
6. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports

made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for
mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attach-

ments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Lo-

cal Standards, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hy-
draulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for

both interior and exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and

systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except

as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsu-
lated or insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to
DN900 (NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-
iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type sup-
port for pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjust-
ment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to
DN750 (NPS 1 to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused
by expansion and contraction might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65
to DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement
caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN1050 (NPS 2 to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN600 (NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expan-
sion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
DN50 to DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment dur-
ing installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe
risers, DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for
riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe
rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to vari-
ous types of building attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450
deg F) piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pip-

ing system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment
to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom
flange of beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of
beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bot-
tom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attach-
ing to structural steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending
from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated
loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).
8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at
beam is required.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems sub-
ject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior

voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufac-
turer to prevent crushing insulation (for only metal pipe material).
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated metal pipe, 360-
degree insert of high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-
strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoin-
ing insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal
shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control pip-

ing movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does
not exceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of pip-
ing system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load
and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contrac-
tion of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load
tion of piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid trans-
fer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or con-
nected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and
load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support
piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as speci-
fied above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel
according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.

Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69.
Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges,
guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. In-
stall concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install
reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manu-
facturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's oper-
ating manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and com-

pletely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping sys-
tems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate ac-
tion of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads
and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping,"
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards is not exceeded.

K. Insulated Metal Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may pro-

ject through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-
hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 or equiva-
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor

barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoin-
ing insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight-distribution plate for metal pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if
pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on metal cold piping with
vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

weight-distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Metal Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm (12 inches) long and
1.22 mm (0.048 inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm (18 inches) long
and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm (24 inches) long and
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm (24 inches) long and
5. Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
L. For spacing in pipe hangers and supports refer specification section “221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING” and “221316 SANITARY WASTE, VENT AND
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING”. Which in accordance with IPC “Table 308.5
HANGER SPACING”.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to

support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing
surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes
and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections

that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or equivalent BS/EN or equiva-

lent Local Standards procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the fol-
lowing:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments

and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm (1-1/2

inches).
3.6 PAINTING
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up

0.05 mm (2 mils).

"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and ap-
ply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M or equivalent

SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, and vibration
isolation roof curbs
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of
isolator specified. Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional

engineer, for the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators and

design of vibration isolation bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages
and attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include
auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
C. Submittal should include equipment field vibration test procedure and it’s results.

registered and qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located
and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of vibration
isolation bases that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration

restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548

2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation devices with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation

bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

These items are specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Mechanical vibration noise is a common source of occupant complaints in most

buildings. Vibration noise would be transmitted from the equipment, usually
located on roof or mechanical rooms in basement, through building structure into
other spaces which can cause acoustic discomfort to occupants. According to
ASHRAE, any vibrating, reciprocating, or rotating equipment should be mounted
such that it doesn’t transmit significant levels of vibration into the surrounding or
supporting structure. Thus mitigation measures such as vibration isolation to all
vibrating equipment with its attachments like piping and ductwork are a must in
line with ASHRAE guidelines.
B. Noise and vibration energy from mechanical equipment could carry through the
building structure and transmit into adjacent spaces. Therefore, all vibration and
rotating equipment should be isolated from the structure, thus insuring no
significance disturbing noise is to be transmitted to areas within.
C. The table below illustrates the types of mechanical equipment, its locations,
structural span, power as well as the details of vibration isolation methods applied
in line with ASHRAE Handbook, 2015 HVAC applications, Chapter 48 Table 47.



2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of the equipment supported.
1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single

or multiple layers and molded with a nonslip pattern or square cell design
surface pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to provide uniform
loading over the pad area; Highly resilient, extra thick rubber pad with
modular square cell construction
2. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less
than 2 mm per 25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa
(50 psig).
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant

rubber or neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates.
Factory-drilled and tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-
drilled baseplate for bolted connection to structure. Color-code to indicate
capacity range. These isolators come in a range of 30 to 70 durometers (a
durometer is a measure of stiffness).
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators or in

steel reinforced molded neoprene assembly comply as per BS 1726.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percentof the compressed height
of the spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated
load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,
without deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size
baseplates to limit floor loading to 690 kPa (100 psig).
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable,

steel open-spring-type isolators.
1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring
extension due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled
baseplate for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Provide adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed
height of the spring at rated load.
load.


6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Hot-dip galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or

neoprene isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded
connections for hanger rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to

allow for 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on
lower threaded rod.
8. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate
capacity range.
G. TYPE S-I - Inertia Bases: Provide vibration isolation schedule inertia bases
manufactured from welded steel channels designed to receive concrete poured
into the steel frame. The steel frame shall incorporate pre-located equipment
anchor bolts and free-standing laterally stable spring mounts generally as
described under type S mounts.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than
25mm clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and
auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and
discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A
36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger
isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves
and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt
templates from supported equipment manufacturer.
H. TYPE L-I - Inertia Bases: Provide where indicated on the vibration isolation
schedule inertia bases generally as type S-I except that the springs shall be type L
vertically restrained.

I. TYPE F-I - Inertia Bases: Provide where indicated on the vibration isolation
schedule inertia bases generally to type S-I except that the isolators shall be
moulded glass fibre isolators as described under type F mounts.
J. Seismic Performance: Refer to general notes on structural drawings or structural

report.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by
the isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power
transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes,

plates, and bars conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards. Include support brackets to anchor base to
isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height
with not less than 25-mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame.
Pour concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide
for anchor bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight

curb designed to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 56-
m/s (125-mph) wind impinging laterally against the side of the equipment.
B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding,

unhoused, laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1. Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building

structure and include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material
and 50 mm of rigid insulation on the inside of the assembly.
2. Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to
permit leveling of equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly
with a rubber isolation pad. Locate spring isolators so they are accessible
for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without
interfering with the integrity of the roof.
3. Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials,
attached to the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of
the lower support assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for

compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-and sound-,control products according to

manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation

bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation

bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete, and
trowel to a smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration

isolators.
F. Allow 150 mm minimum clearance between any vibrating equipment and

building structure.
G. Allow 300 mm minimum unobstructed space below supporting slabs or beams for
installation of vibration isolation hangers.
H. All piping connected to vibration-isolated equipment must be vibration-isolated

from the building structure within mechanical rooms or for a distance of 10
meters from the equipment, whichever is greater. For noise critical spaces, all pipe
runs require resilient mounts.
I. Isolation hangers should be used for all piping in equipment rooms and up to 15 m
from vibration-isolated equipment and PRV stations.
J. Provide isolation hangers on floor mounts with the same deflection as the
equipment.
K. All other piping within the room should be isolated with 19 mm minimum
deflection isolator.

L. Any piping below or adjacent to a noise-sensitive area should be isolated with a

combination of spring and rubber hanger.
M. Locate the pipe shafts, anchors and guides in noncritical areas, such as next to
elevator shafts, stairwells and toilets.
N. Where concern about vibration transmission exists, some type of vibration

isolation support or acoustical support is required for pipe supports, anchors and
guides.
O. Flexible connectors at equipment provide piping flexibility to protect equipment

from strain due to misalignment or thermal movement of piping. They can also
help attenuate noise and vibration.
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure.
Provide temporary load spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
9. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test
for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
10. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling
system.
11. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties.
12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal

operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so
they are out of contact during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at
operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation control

devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

tract apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes identification for plumbing piping and equipments.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond pa-
per. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag,
room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves in-
tended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Furnish copies for mainte-
nance manuals specified in Division 1 aside from mounted copies.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for lettering size, length of color
field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar con-
cealment.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Sections. If

more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Contractor's
option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal or plastic permanently fastened to equipment with

data engraved or stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,

operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essen-
tial data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommenda-

tions of ASME A13.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Mini-
mum letter height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm for access door signs and simi-
lar operational instructions.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless other-
wise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according
to ASME A13.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, unless
D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-

coded, pressure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees

around pipe at each location.
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accom-

modate both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate
direction of flow.
G. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-

adhesive marker comply w/ ANSI / ASME A13.1 standard, vinyl tape, at least
0.08 mm thick.
1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm;
65 mm for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Lo-
cal Standards, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system abbrevia-
tion and 13-mm sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum or glossy transparent

PVC film 80 micron.
2. Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.
J. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with ab-
breviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-mm
center hole for attachment.
K. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on ma-
sonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Stand-
ards, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass.
L. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate en-
graving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white mela-
mine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to

match equipment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
M. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the fol-

lowing color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by
ASME A13.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the follow-
ing:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving
conditions, and speed.
7. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, and valves; 115 by 150 mm for
equipment.

N. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 85 by 145 mm.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION,
or DO NOT OPERATE.
O. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations

used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use
numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and
maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multi-

ple systems of same name are indicated.
P. Warning signs and Labels:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechani-

cal engraving, 1.6 mm thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black
3. Background Color: Yellow
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 71 deg C.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but
not less than 80mm by 40mm.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 13 mm) for viewing distances up to 1830 mm, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include sec-
ondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible H. with label and
with substrate.
9. In paragraph below, describe required label content. The objective of label-
ing equipment is to coordinate it with Drawings, including plans, details,
and schedules. This will allow
other information, such as capacities and operating characteristics, to be ob-
tained.
10. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency
notification
instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of
flow.

B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ANSI/ASME A13.1 or equiva-

C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by follow-
ing method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 20 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker,
and covering full circumference of pipe.
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by
following method:
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings,
and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according to the following:

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and ter-
minal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclo-
sures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15-m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to
7.5 m in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately
spaced markers.
3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops,
shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and
similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures. List tagged valves in valve
schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color
scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum or glossy transparent PVC film 80 micron.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: 40 mm, round.

2. Hot Water: 40 mm, round.
3. Compressed Air: 40 mm, round.

E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Cold Water: Blue.
2. Hot Water: Yellow.
3. Compressed Air: Green.
F. Letter Color: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: Black.

2. Hot Water: Black.
3. Compressed Air: Black.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each ma-

jor item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general catego-
ries of equipment:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units.
2. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
3. Pumps, compressors, and similar motor-driven units.
4. Heat exchangers, coils, electric water heaters, heat recovery units, and simi-
lar equipment.
5. Tanks and pressure vessels.
6. Strainers, filters, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in ex-
posed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above
acoustical ceiling or similar concealment.
1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in

unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visual-
ly blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating
cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or

otherwise attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state.
Materials to be used on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards requirements. Materials shall be
asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by

NFPA 220 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Adhesives,
coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except
cellular elastomers, shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a
smoke-developed classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards and NFPA 255 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards. Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory
and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for

each type of insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION 220719

6. Application of field-applied jackets.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.
3. Jacket Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).
4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for
each type of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer,

indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply

with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a

craft training program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical

to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, or NFPA 225
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and
smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation
and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
finishes. Build mockups according to the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 3-m section of DN50 (NPS 2) straight pipe.

b. One 90-degree elbow.
c. One tee fitting.
d. One DN50 (NPS 2) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One reducer.

2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application

details for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation
application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed
at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade,
and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified
in Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required,
after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on
segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible

in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871 or equivalent

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as

acceptable according to ASTM C 795 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
E. Rock wool or Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin complying with the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1 or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, with factory-applied, all-
purpose, vapor-retarder FSK jacket.
a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

b. Density: 48 kg/m3.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C or equivalent BS/EN
or equivalent Local Standards in the following classes and grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-
fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for
bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic

for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II or
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195 or
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with
ASTM C 196 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply
with ASTM C 449 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-

rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet
materials; conforming fire rating of Class 1, BS 476
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity:  0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 L for 20 mm thick insulation.

G. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for dimensions used in
preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
H. Acoustic insulations: Acoustic insulations on drainage pipes to reduce airborne

and impact sound in occupied space in front of house area only. All insulated
drainage pipes are to be labelled to aid identification. Labels shall be provided at a
maximum of 3m centers. Insulation shall be provided and shall comprise 50mm
mineral wool having a density of 80-100kg/m³With an outer mass barrier of sound
barrier mat of superficial density 5 kg/m³. Joints between sections of sound barrier
mat shall overlap at least 10mm and be sealed using a duct jointing tape.
Insulation shall be protected with 0.8mm thick Polyisobutylene (PIB) sheet,
having a tensile strength of not less than 2.5N/mm². PIB coat is to be encased in
aluminium sheet. The PIB sheet material shall be adhered to the external surface
of the insulation and all joints shall be lapped secured and sealed by adhesive or
solvent welding. All jointing, sealing materials and methods of application shall
be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195 or equivalent

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and
for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation
of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using
Environmental Chambers."
C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A,

Type II, Class I or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A or

E. Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;

comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil (0.9-mm) dry film
thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
4. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A or equivalent BS/EN

or equivalent Local Standards, and shall be compatible with insulation materials,
jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a less VOC content
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to
adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82
deg C).
4. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and

substrates.
2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus
121 deg C).
4. Color: Aluminum.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant all

purpose, kraft paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and
forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209) or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick.

2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows;
same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2.8 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, Type I for cloth, woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, and
presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
B. Tape: Vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards
1. Tape Width: 100 mm.
C. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
D. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-

mm, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are

compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the

manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or
jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe
runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered
except drainage pipes.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive
a vapor retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal
and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special
instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in

insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder
mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend

insulation on anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe
and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by
the hanger, support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75-mm wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip and spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface
to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along
edge at 100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a

vapor retarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic

on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and
fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal
voids with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with
top of roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation
ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50
mm below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls,

terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with
vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

walls and floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously

through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Sections

"Penetration Firestopping" and "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder

mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER OR ROCK WOOL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints
with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at
intervals of 4.5 to 6 m to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation
segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward
clinched staples at 150 mm o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange
and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlapping seams at least 25 mm, and seal joints with vapor-retarder
mastic.

C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight

segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply
mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a
thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials
with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with
manufacturer's attachement and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber
blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to
packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For
check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without
disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal
seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation
with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of
air to the pipe surface.
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will
allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe

insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of
insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in
insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50-mm overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end
joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and at end joints.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
B. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
following systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after

installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with
requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is
less, for various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new
materials according to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection
according to these Specifications.
3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor

retarders, and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and
material, thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic hot water.
1. Operating Temperature: 15 to 60 deg C (60 to 140 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber or Rockwool; except for pipe drops to
fixtures within walls, use flexible elastomeric, 13 mm thick.

3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, DN32 (1-1/4-inch NPS) and smaller: 13 mm.
b. Pipe, DN40 (1-1/2-inch NPS) to DN80 (3-inch NPS): 19mm.

c. Pipe, Larger than DN80 (3-inch NPS): 25 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket

where exposed pipes are located at height of 3 meters or lower.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: None.
B. Service: Domestic cold water.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
a. Pipe, all sizes: 13 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None where concealed; aluminum jacket where

exposed pipes are located at height of 3 meters or lower.
6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater piping directly under roof
slab in front of house areas.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral wool (Acoustic Insulation in front of house
area only).
3. Insulation Thickness: 50 mm.
4. Sound Barrier Mat: Yes.
where exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
7. Finish: None.
D. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and sanitary piping in front of house areas.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral wool (Acoustic Insulation in front of house
area only).
where exposed to view or in mechanical rooms..
7. Finish: None.

E. Service: Vertical condensate drain piping


6. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
7. Finish: None.
F. Service: Horizontal condensate drain piping in ceiling voids.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None where concealed; aluminum jacket where
exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
6. Finish: None.
3.12 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building.
B. Service: Domestic water.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.

6. Finish: None.

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures
and equipment inside building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to
building.
B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water
service piping and water distribution piping.
C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to
fixtures and equipment throughout the building.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.

2. NP: Nylon.
3. PB: Polybutylene.
4. PE: Polyethylene.
5. PP: Polypropylene.
6. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the
following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Combined Fire-Protection and Domestic, Service Entrance Piping:

1725 kPa (250 psig).
2. Service Entrance Piping: 1100 kPa (160 psig).
3. Water Distribution Piping: 860 kPa (125 psig).
B. Seismic Performance: Refer to general notes on structural drawings or structural

report.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s literature and data for piping and fittings.
B. Coordination Drawings.
C. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
D. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to

specified standards.
B. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials,"
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for plastic potable-water
piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping.
D. Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health

Effects," or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards Sections 1 through 9
for potable-water piping and components.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents. Deliver materials to Employer.
1. Keyed Couplings and gasket, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller.

2. Keyed Couplings and gasket, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in
Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the following markings in accordance with
ASTM F441/F441M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards:
manufacturer's name, material designation code, nominal pipe size, schedule or
class, pressure rating in psi or kilopascal, the ASTM F441/F441M and National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF) or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards
seal of approval for potable water.

C. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, Schedules 40 and 80.
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Schedule 80, CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F437 or equivalent BS/EN or

C. Schedule 80, CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F439 or equivalent BS/EN or

D. Schedule 40, CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F438 or equivalent BS/EN or

E. CPVC Plastic-Piping-System Socket Fittings: ASTM D2846/D2846M or

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in

B. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493 or
1. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
3. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended
by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
D. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with
pressure rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be
joined.

2.4 VALVES
A. Refer to Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty

valves.
B. Refer to Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for special-duty valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping
pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves

underground. Use the following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
2. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe;
CPVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
D. Aboveground, Domestic Cold Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:

1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F441/F441M-09 or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC,
2.
3. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M-09, or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
4. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M-09 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe;
5.
6. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M-09 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe;
7. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M-09 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

E. Aboveground, Domestic Hot Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:

1. CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-
cemented joints.
F. Non-Potable-Water Piping: Use the following:

1. DN90 (3-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
2. DN100 to DN200 (4- to 8-Inch NPS): CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe or ball valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Plastic gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves may be used with plastic
piping.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved
on coordination drawings.
B. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same
as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump
and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in
Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
K. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for

thermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."
L. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with
requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping."
M. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Plumbing Piping."
N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply
with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply
with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping."
3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and
locations indicated for service entrances into building.
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee
with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply
with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in
Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
C. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply

with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic
Water Piping Specialties."
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in

size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with
gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
E. Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining
surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards Appendix.
F. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
3.7 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's
requirements. Refer to Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for
water meters.
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser
serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use gate or ball
valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves
for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each
supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use gate
or ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use gate or butterfly
valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at
low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and
branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

D. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge

side of each pump and circulator, and where indicated. Use ball valve for piping
DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller and butterfly valve for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch
NPS) and larger. Refer to Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
balancing valves.
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment":
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight,
horizontal runs 30 m and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal
runs longer than 30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight,
horizontal runs longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or
longer. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm
minimum rods.
D. Install hangers for CPVC plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 900 mm

with 10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1500 mm.
2. DN32 to DN50 (1-1/4- to 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing,
1200 mm with 10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing,
1800 mm.
3. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing,
1800 mm.
4. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing,
1800 mm.
5. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
E. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to ANSI/MSS SP-69 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards and manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and
extend to and connect to the following:
1. Booster Systems: Connect cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in
sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Section
"Plumbing Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated.
Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of
unions for connections DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
C. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for
3.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification

materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
B. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before

concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.

C. Test water distribution piping as follows:
D. Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are
not air bound and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
portion of piping tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been
covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system
materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
E. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as
follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if
method is not prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651-05 or
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards AWWA C652-02 or as
described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does
not appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at

least 50 mg/L (50 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and
allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at
least 200 mg/L (200 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to
stand for 3 hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in

water coming from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure
if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.14 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and
that piping is full of water.
B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary
sealing of piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain
plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as
specified for application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready
for use.
C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.
D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 550 kPa (80 psig)

maximum, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.
5. Strainers.
6. Hose stations.
7. Hose bibs.
8. Drain valves.
9. Water-hammer arresters.
10. Air vents.
12. Water meters.
B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.
1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic
piping components.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig
(860 kPa) or PN 16 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Seismic Performance: Refer to general notes on structural drawings or structural

report.
C. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials,"
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for plastic potable-water pip-
ing components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping.
D. Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Ef-

fects," or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards Sections 1 through 9
for potable-water piping and components.
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers :
1. Standard: ASSE 1012 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
3. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
4. Body: Bronze or Brass
5. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated .
B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies :

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle third of flow
range.
4. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: 5 psig (kPa) maximum, through middle
third of flow range..
5. Body: Bronze or Brass for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with
interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
and larger.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.
8. Accessories:
a. ValvesNPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on
inlet and outlet.
b. ValvesNPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate
type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
C. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers :

2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
3. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or NPS 3/4 (DN 20) or NPS 1 (DN 25) or NPS 1-
1/4 (DN 32).
4. Body: Bronze or Brass with union inlet.
D. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers :

2. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
3. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
4. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 or
5. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.
E. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits :
1. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying

case with test-procedure instructions.
2.4 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators :

2. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa).
3. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller;
cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-
1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
4. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
B. Water-Control Valves :

1. Description: Pilot-operated, diaphragm-type, single-seated, main water-

control valve.
2. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum
with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include
small pilot-control valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor
piping.
3. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards or FDA-approved, interior
epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.
a. Pattern: Globe-valve design.
b. Trim: Stainless steel.
2.5 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices :

2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
3. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.
4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
5. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
6. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable,
temperature-control handle.
7. Tempered-Water Setting: 104 deg F (40 deg C).
8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated .
B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves :

2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Type: Exposed-mounted , thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.
4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
5. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
6. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-
water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle.
8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated .
9. Piping Finish: Chrome plated .
10. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed or surface
mounting and with hinged, stainless-steel door.
C. Manifold, Thermostatic, Water Mixing-Valve Assemblies :
1. Description: Factory-fabricated, cabinet-type or exposed-mounted,

thermostatically controlled, water mixing-valve assembly in two -valve
parallel arrangement.

2. Large-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic, water mixing valve and downstream-

pressure regulator with pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
3. Intermediate-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic, water mixing valve and
downstream-pressure regulator with pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
4. Small-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic, water mixing valve.
5. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Comply with ASSE 1017 or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Include check stops on hot- and
cold-water inlets and shutoff valve on outlet.
6. Water Regulator(s): Comply with ASSE 1003 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards. Include pressure gage on inlet and outlet.
8. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed surface mounting
and with hinged, stainless-steel door.
9. Selected Large-Flow, Tempered-Water Valve Size..
10. Tempered-Water Setting.
11. Unit Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate.
12. Unit Minimum Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate.
13. Selected Unit Flow Rate at 45-psig (310-kPa) Pressure Drop.
14. Unit Pressure Drop at Design Flow Rate.
15. Unit Tempered-Water Outlet Size end connection.
16. Unit Hot- and Cold-Water Inlet Size end connections.
17. Thermostatic Mixing Valve and Water Regulator Finish: Chrome plated,
polished, chrome plated or Rough bronze.
18. Piping Finish: Chrome plated or Copper.
D. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves :
1. Standard: ASSE 1016 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.
3. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
4. Temperature Control: Adjustable.
5. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
6. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.
E. Primary Water Tempering Valves :

thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve, listed as tempering
valve.
3. Body: Bronze.
4. Temperature Control: Manual.
5. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.
6. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

2.6 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers :
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) or PN 16 minimum unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
that complies with AWWA C550 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) .
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14
mm) .
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) .
6. Drain: Hose-end drain valve.
2.7 HOSE STATIONS
A. Single-Temperature-Water Hose Stations (CHC-1)
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards.
2. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handle, hose
connection, and hose rack. Include thermometer in front.
3. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
4. Body Material: Bronze or Brass..
5. Body Finish: Rough bronze or Cast brass..
6. Mounting: Wall, with reinforcement.
7. Supply Fittings: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and check
valve and NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if
check stop is included with fitting.
8. Hose: Manufacturer's standard, for service fluid, temperature, and pressure;
50 feet (15 m) long.
9. Nozzle: With hand-squeeze, on-off control.
10. Vacuum Breaker:
a. Integral or factory-installed, nonremovable, manual-drain-type, hose-

connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards or backflow preventer
complying with ASSE 1052 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards.
b. Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards on outlet.

2.8 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs :

Standards for sediment faucets.
2. Body Material: Bronze or Brass.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or
solder-joint inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable,
hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze or Cast brass..
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.9 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves :
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
4. Body: Copper alloy, Brass or Bronze
5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards and cap
with brass chain.
2.10 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water-Hammer Arresters :
1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards

or PDI-WH 201.
2. Type: Metal bellows .
3. Size: ASSE 1010 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,
Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.11 AIR VENTS
A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents :
1. Body: Bronze or Brass

2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure
rating at 140 deg F (60 deg C).
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with

stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa)

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
2.13 WATER METERS
A. Refer to Specification Section 220519 for water meters.
B. Displacement-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C700 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards.
b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure.
c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as
required by utility company.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. End Connections: Threaded.
C. Turbine-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:

Standards.
c. Body Design: Turbine; totalization meter.
e. Case: Bronze.

f. End Connections for Meters NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
g. End Connections for Meters NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Compound-Type Water Meters:
1. Description:

Standards.
c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization
meter.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. Pipe Connections: Flanged.
E. Remote Registration System: Direct-reading type complying with AWWA C706

or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards; modified with signal-
transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register
assembly as required by utility company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and

systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of
contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or

system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain
connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive
pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-
floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer.
Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with
memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
C. Install water-control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with
globe valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
E. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff

valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as

specified.
F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water
pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve and pump.
G. Install hose stations with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with
thermometer on outlet.
1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as

specified. Install 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood
blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for
fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section "Rough Carpentry."
H. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
I. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge
onto floor drain.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies.
5. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.
6.
7. Water pressure-reducing valves.
8. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
9. Manifold, thermostatic, water mixing-valve assemblies.
10. Primary water tempering valves.
11. Hose stations.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,

indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in
Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, double-check, backflow-prevention

assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's
reference standard.
B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing

valves.

SECTION 221123.13 – DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged booster pumps to maintain pressure in the

building water distribution systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of

selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of
packaged booster pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for packaged booster pumps.
Include setting drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation
and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include

structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration
isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages
and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary
motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to include in
operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of packaged booster pumps through one
source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of packaged booster pumps and are based on specific manufacturer
types and models selected. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 221123.13

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70 - 2007, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, for piping.
E. UL Compliance for Packaged Pumping Systems:
1. UL 508, "Industrial Control Equipment." or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards,
2. UL 508A, "Industrial Control Panels." or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards,
3. UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps." or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards,
4. UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment." or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards,
F. Booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as packaged pumping systems by

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged booster pump units;

complying with UL 778 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,;
suitable for water service.
B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section "Common Motor Requirements for

Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so

driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above
1.0.
C. The internal surface of the volute shall be coated with 300 micron fusion bonded
epoxy coating applied at the factory.
D. Pumps dedicated for Drinking Water System shall have Stainless-steel

construction for all parts and components in contact with water.

E. Piping: ANSI/ASME B31.9 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

for piping materials and installation.
1. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: ASTM B88M-05, Type B (ASTM B88-03,

Type L) or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,, drawn,
copper, water tube with copper, solder-joint, pressure fittings and brazed
joints or ASTM A53/A53M-07 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards,, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded, cast-iron
fittings and threaded joints.
2. DN125 (NPS 5) and Larger: ASTM A53/A53M-07 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards,, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with
threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded joints.
3. Header End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.
4. Header End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
F. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components, may have
grooved ends for grooved joints.
G. Shutoff Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if
required to suit system pressure; bronze, rising-stem gate valve or MSS SP-110,
4135-kPa (600-psig) minimum CWP, bronze ball valve with ends matching
piping.
H. Shutoff Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-70-2006, Class 125, or
higher if required to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, OS&Y, cast-iron gate
valve with flanged ends or MSS SP-67, Type I for tight shutoff, 1206-kPa (175-
psig) CWP, single-flanged, cast-iron butterfly valve.
I. Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if
required to suit system pressure; bronze, non-slam, swing check valve.
J. Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, or higher
if required to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, cast-iron, non-slam, swing check
valve.
K. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined

dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 1725-

kPa (250-psig) minimum working pressure at 82 deg C (180 deg F).
2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange
assembly; for 1035- or 2070-kPa (150- or 300-psig) minimum working
pressure as required to suit system pressures.
L. Hydropneumatic Tank: Precharged, ASME-construction or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards,, diaphragm or bladder tank made of materials
complying with NSF 61 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,.
M. Sensors: Pressure switches.

N. Control Panel for constant-speed booster pumps: Automatic, with load control
and protection functions. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards,and UL 508 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards,.
1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part

of unit.
2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards,.
3. Motor Controller: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with
undervoltage release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect, and
short-circuit protective device.
a. Control Voltage: [120-V] [220-V] ac, using integral control power

transformer.
4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.

5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control
panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.
6. Duplex, Automatic Alternating Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main
pump and to two-pump operation.
7. Triplex, Sequence (Lead-Lag-Lag) Starter: Switches lead pump to one lag
main pump and to three-pump operation.
8. Instrumentation: Unit suction and discharge pressure gages.
9. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
10. Light: Running light for pump.
11. Thermal-bleed cutoff.
12. Low-suction-pressure or Water-storage-tank, low-level cutout.
13. High-suction-pressure cutout.
14. Low-discharge-pressure cutout.
15. High-discharge-pressure cutout.
16. Building Automation System Interface: Provide auxiliary contacts for
interface to building automation system. Include the following:
a. On-off status of each pump.

b. Alarm status.
O. Control Panel for variable-speed booster pumps: Factory installed and connected
as an integral part of booster pump; automatic for multiple-pump, variable-speed
operation, with load control and protection functions.
1. Control Logic: Solid-state system with transducers, programmable

microprocessor, VFC, and other devices in controller. Install VFC for pump
motors larger than 25 hp in separate panel; same type as motor control panel
enclosure.
2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards,, variable-frequency, solid-state type.
a. Control Voltage: [120] [220]-V ac, with integral control-power

transformer.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards,.
4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch for each pump in
cover of control panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.
a. Duplex, Automatic, Alternating Starter: Switches lead pump to lag

main pump and to two-pump operation.
b. Triplex, Sequence (Lead-Lag-Lag) Starter: Switches lead pump to one
lag main pump and to three-pump operation.
6. Pump Operation and Sequencing: [Pressure-sensing method] [or] [flow-

sensing method] [Pressure-sensing method for lead pump and flow-sensing
method for lag pumps].
7. VFC: Voltage-source, pulse-width, modulating-frequency converter for
each pump.
8. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to transfer to constant-speed
operation upon VFC failure.
9. Instrumentation: Suction and discharge pressure gages.
10. Lights: Running light for each pump.
11. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
12. Thermal-bleed cutoff.
13. Low-suction-pressure, or, water-storage-tank, low-level cutout.
14. High-suction-pressure cutout.
15. Low-discharge-pressure cutout.
16. High-discharge-pressure cutout.
17. Building Automation System Interface: Provide auxiliary contacts for
interface to building automation system. Include the following:
a. On-off status of each pump.

b. Alarm status.
P. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

units before shipping.
Q. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined

metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and
testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.
2.2 COMPACT, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Description: Simplex packaged unit, with pump, piping, valves, sensor,

hydropneumatic tank, and controls for constant-speed operation.
1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 860 kPa (125 psig), and as required to suit
system pressure.
2. Pump: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," or equivalent BS/EN
or equivalent Local Standards, for close-coupled, end-suction centrifugal
pumps.

a. Construction: Single stage, radially split, bronze fitted.

b. Impeller: ASTM B584-08a or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards,, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Control Valve: Adjustable, automatic, direct-acting pressure regulator on

pump discharge.
4. Relief Valve: Adjustable, pressure-relief type on pump discharge.
5. Hydropneumatic Tank: Minimum 38-L (10-gal.) water-volume capacity,
precharged, diaphragm or bladder tank.
2.3 CONSTANT-SPEED-DRIVE, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping, valves, sensors, and
controls for constant-speed operation.
system pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Duplex, with two equal-size pumps.
3. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with one small lead and two large equal-size
lag main pumps.
4. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with three equal-size pumps.
5. Pumps: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, for close-coupled, end-suction
centrifugal pumps.
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, for close-coupled, in-line centrifugal
pumps.

b. Impeller: ASTM B584-08a, or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
7. Pumps: Comply with HI 2.4, HI 9.8, "Vertical Pumps," or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, for multistage barrel pumps.
a. Construction: Multistage, bronze fitted.

b. Impellers: ASTM B584-08a or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards,, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed or
semiopen, and keyed to shaft.
8. Control Valve: Adjustable, automatic, pilot-operated, pressure regulator for
each pump discharge.
2.4 VARIABLE-SPEED-DRIVE, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping, valves, sensors,

controls, and adjustable-speed-drive units for variable-speed operation.

system pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Duplex, with two equal-size pumps.
3. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with three equal-size pumps.
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, for close-coupled, end-suction
centrifugal pumps.
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, for close-coupled, in-line centrifugal
pumps.

b. Impeller: ASTM B584-08a, or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
6. Variable-Speed-Drive Controllers: Adjustable-speed-drive unit for each

pump.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of

connections before packaged booster pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for

packaged booster pumps. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install packaged booster pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions

and with access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
B. Support packaged booster pumps using the following vibration-control devices,

unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Install units with total of 7.5 hp or less, with rubber-isolator mount or

spring-isolator vibration isolators.
2. Install units with total of more than 7.5 hp, with concrete-filled, inertia-base
vibration isolation bases and spring-isolator vibration isolators.

C. Support connected piping so weight of water distribution piping is not supported

by packaged booster pumps.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section "Domestic Water

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge

pipe equal to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge headers.
2. Install flexible pipe connectors on piping connections to unit suction and
discharge headers. Install flexible pipe connectors same size as piping.
Refer to Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for flexible pipe
connectors.
3. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to unit suction and discharge
headers. Install valves same size as unit suction and discharge headers.
Refer to Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-
duty valves.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
C. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.

indicated, use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B or equivalent BS/EN
or equivalent Local Standards,
3.5 IDENTIFICATION

specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start booster
pumps to confirm proper motor rotation and booster-pump operation.
C. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.
B. Controls: Set for automatic starting, stopping, sequential, and alarm operations.
C. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance

operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling
hot liquids is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if
it is bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
D. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare
pumps for operation.
2. Open valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motors.
4. Open discharge valves slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
6. Close valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pump
units. Refer to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.
END OF SECTION 221123.13

SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sanitary sewerage outside the building. It covers the pipe and
fittings, manhole and chambers, and accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 312000 "Earth moving" for excavating, trenching and backfilling.

2. Division 3 "Concrete" for concrete structures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for materials:
1. GRP: Glass-Fiber Reinforced Plastic
2. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic.
A. A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to

system test pressure.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, standard drawings,

catalogs and installation instructions for system materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments for
the following:
1. Sewage pipe network, including pipe diameters and gradients

2. Manholes and other structures, including invert levels, frames and covers.
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313

C. Coordination Drawings: Show manholes and other structures, pipe sizes,

locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and
connections. Show other piping in same trench, horizontal/vertical clearances
from sewer and other system piping on plans and cross sections. Indicate
interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate
structures.
D. Coordination Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles

to horizontal scale of not less than 1:500 and to vertical scale of not less than 1:50.
Indicate manholes and piping. Indicate underground structures and pipe. Show
types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping.
E. As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit record drawings of installed

pipework and products, in accordance with requirements of the Specification,
Division 01.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for system materials
and products. Include this data, product data, Shop Drawings, and submit
drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of the
Specification, Division 01.
G. Certificate of Compliance.
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements

of piping and specialties and are based on the specific system selected. Other
products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Materials and operations shall comply with the latest revision of all
applicable Codes and Standards.
2. Comply with requirements of sanitary sewer utility company.
C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
D. Testing on GRP Pipes: The following tests shall be carried out on manufactured
pipes. Details of the testing program to be submitted to the Engineer for review
and approval prior to commencement of pipe manufacture. The manufacturer
quality control scheme shall be to BS 5750 or ISO 9002. Guidance on quality
control and sampling shall be BS EN 14364. At least the following tests shall be
carried out and reported for approval:
1. Longitudinal strength to ASTM D3262.

2. Hydraulic test to ASTM D 3517.

3. Stiffness to ASTM Method D 2412 or ISO 7685.
4. Wall thickness to EN ISO 3126.
5. Diameter to EN ISO 3126.
6. Hardness to ASTM 2583.
7. Loss of ignition to ASTM D 2584.
8. Hoop tensile to ASTM D 3517.
E. Tests on vitrified Clay Pipes: The following tests shall be carried out on vitrified
clay pipes and products. The third party inspection report shall cover the following
quality control test all as per SASO 235-1995 or the applicable standard
specifications:
 Visual inspection
 Minimum bore
 Length
 Deviation from straightness
 Crushing strength
 Water tightness
 Polyurethane sealing elements
 Angular deflection
A. Inspect Materials delivered to Site for damage, store with minimum of handling.
B. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, fittings, jointing materials and rubber gaskets
in direct sunlight.
C. Do not store materials directly on the ground.
D. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
E. Handle pipes, manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
F. Manufacturer's recommendations on handling, repairing, laying, jointing,

anchoring, cutting and other works for pipes and fittings are to be strictly
followed.
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify
existing utility locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping, if any, to be closed and abandoned.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt or interfere with utilities serving facilities on

the Project site or on adjoining property unless permitted under the following

conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to
requirements indicated:
1. Notify the Engineer no fewer than three days in advance of proposed

interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without the Engineer written
permission.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to sewer main with concerned authorities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:
1. Pipe and Fittings: BS EN 1401, ASTM F 794, or DIN 8062 – Class 3

(equal to 6 kg/cm2 minimum), PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot
ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.
2.2 GRP PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipes and fittings to BS EN 14364 or AWWA C950.
B. Pipe and fittings shall include a corrosion resistant liner, a structural wall and a
resin rich exterior surface.
C. The liner shall have a nominal thickness of 1.0 mm. The liner surface shall be
reinforced with "C" glass. The remainder of the liner thickness shall be reinforced
with an acid resistant chopped "E" glass strand or mat.
D. The pipe structural wall shall consist of glass reinforcement, and fine silica sand,
all impregnated with resin. The fine silica sand shall be added to the structural
layer to achieve the design thickness for the required stiffness specified such that
the overall hoop flexural modulus (E) for pipe is not less than 24 GN/m2. Silica
sand and filler content shall not exceed 50%.
E. Pipes shall be provided with a resin rich outer layer reinforced with one layer of
"C" glass veil. The exterior layer shall have a minimum thickness of 0.2 mm. The
layer shall resin be rich and reinforced with one layer of "C" glass.
F. The resin used for the corrosion resistant liner of the pipe and fittings shall be
high grade polyester resin (isophthalic or better) type. For the structural wall and
exterior layer of the pipe a high grade isophthalic polyester resin shall be used. No
dark pigments shall be used in the pipe or fittings.

G. All glass reinforcements except for the inner and outer surfaces of the pipe and
fittings shall be of the "E" type. Surface reinforcement shall be of the "C" glass
type.
H. Pipes shall be designed for a life of not less than 50 years. Contractor shall submit
calculations for initial and long term deflection with truck loads, buckling,
vacuum, pressure class, and strain in accordance with Appendix "A" of AWWA,
C-950 or equivalent. The maximum calculated long term deflection should not
exceed 3%. Copies of the design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
I. Extra strength H30, Stiffness: Minimum 10,000 N/m2 to 20,000 N/m2 depending
on location. Suitability of stiffness shall be verified by Contractor for the various
trench and pipe laying conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer.
Pressure class shall be 6 kg/cm2 minimum or as shown on Drawings.
J. Longitudinal strength shall be to BS EN 14364 Table 13 or ASTM D3262 Table

7.
K. Hoop strength shall be to ASTM D3517 Table 8.
L. Strain corrosion resistance: Tests shall be carried out as per ASTM D 3681 or BS
EN 14364 strain corrosion value at 50 years to equal or exceed 0.7%.
M. Markings shall be to BS EN 14364 clause 5.3 and 6.7.
N. Joints: GRP double socket couplings with rubber rings shall be to BS 7874 and
BS EN 681: Parts 1 and 2. Allowable angular deflection shall be to BS EN 14364
clause 4.7.3.1.
2.3 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Use vitrified clay pipes for sewer networks with pipe diameters from 200 to 500
mm.
B. Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall be to SASO 235/236-1995 or BS EN 295

and shall be marked accordingly.
C. Pipes and fittings shall be glazed and shall comply with BS 295-1 Clause 2 and in
particular sub-clause 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.9, 2.10 & 2.14.
D. Pipes and fittings shall be Class 160 for pipes ≤ 500mm diameter and Class 120
for pipes ≥ 600mm diameter crusting strength per Class in KN/m2 as given in
Table 5 of BS 295 part 1. Pipe may also be classified as standard strength or extra
strength.
E. Jointing material: sealing elements shall be polyurethane to Clauses 3.12 & 3.13.
F. Joints shall be water tight to Clauses 3.2 & 3.3 of EN 295.

G. Pipes shall be supplied with approved flexible and telescopic rubber ring joints
which shall be capable of withstanding the specified tests pressures applied both
internally and externally.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. PVC Cleanouts:
1. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe
fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.
2.5 MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS
A. Normal Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes:
1. Description: ASTM C 478M, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth

indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
2. Diameter: 1200 mm minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to
base section, as required to prevent flotation.
4. Base Section: 150-mm minimum thickness for floor slab and 100-mm
minimum thickness for walls and base riser section; with separate base slab
or base section with integral floor.
5. Riser Sections: 100-mm minimum thickness, of length to provide depth
indicated.
6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top
type is indicated; with top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
7. Gaskets: ASTM C 443M rubber.
8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923M, cast or fitted into manhole
walls, for each pipe connection.
9. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, 150- to 225-
mm total thickness, with diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and
with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated
elevation and slope.
B. Heavy Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes:
1. Description: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16,

heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated,
with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
2. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add
concrete to manhole as required to prevent flotation.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923M, cast or fitted into manhole
walls, for each pipe connection.
5. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, 150- to 225-
mm total thickness, with diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and
with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated
elevation and slope.

C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Chambers: Construct of reinforced-concrete bottom,

walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16, heavy-traffic,
structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.
1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation.

2. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 150 to 225
mm total thickness, that match 600 mm diameter frame and cover.
D. Manhole and Chamber Frames and Covers: Ductile iron to BS EN 124 or

equivalent, epoxy coated, solid top. Suitable lifting device for covers to be
provided at a rate of one for every 10 covers. Frames to be bolted to manhole to
ensure proper fixity. Wording on cover is to be as approved on Site. Types to be
as follows:
1. For roadways: Class D400 heavy duty non-rock type for wheel loads up to
11.5 tons. Minimum test load 400KN.
2. For sidewalks: Class C250, medium duty. Minimum test load 250 KN.
3. Size: As indicated on the Drawings.
E. Manhole Cover Inserts:
1. Description; Manufactured, GRP form, of size to fit between manhole

frame and cover and designed to prevent stormwater inflow. Include handle
for removal and gasket for gastight sealing.
2. Type: Solid.
F. Step Irons shall be to BS EN 13101.
G. Concrete:
General: Reinforced and plain cast-in-place concrete complying with Division 3
“CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE”, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type V as specified.

2. Design Mix: 35 MPa minimum (Cylinder), with 0.40 maximum water-
cementitious materials ratio.
3. Channels and Benches: Field formed from plain concrete 35 MPa minimum
(Cylinder), with 0.4 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio and
minimum cementitious materials of 380kg/m3. Include channels and
benches in manholes.
2.6 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Internal faces of manholes and chambers shall be coated with four coats of coal
tar epoxy paint, 70% epoxy and 30% coal tar. The coating shall be applied by
brush in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum thickness shall be
1000 microns.
B. Externally with three layers of asphaltic composition that shall be applied by

brush in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum thickness shall be
600 microns.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section

312000 "Earth Moving."
A. General: Include watertight joints.
B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting
products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to
applications indicated.
C. Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:
1. Sewers less than 400 mm: PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets and
gasketed joints.
2. Sewers larger or equal than 400 mm: GRPsewer pipe and fittings, gaskets
and gasketed joints.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general
location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and
arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install
piping as indicated, to extent practical taking into consideration the site
conditions. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping
manufacturer's written instructions subject to Engineer Approval.
B. Prior to being installed, each section of the pipe shall be carefully examined for
damage and conformity with these specifications. All pipes damaged or deemed
not to conform to these specifications shall be rejected and removed from site. All
pipes in which the spigots and bells cannot be made to fit properly, or pipe, which
has chipped bells or spigots, will be rejected. The faces of all spigots ends and of
all shoulders on the bells must be true. Examine bell and spigot for uniformity and
smoothness of liner and barrel.
C. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install
gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written
instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
D. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings
for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

E. The foundation for gravity sewer pipe shall be a firm flat bottom trench with
bedding material (as specified) compacted with bell holes. The pipe and fittings
shall be laid in the trench so that its interior surface shall conform to the grade and
alignment as shown on the drawings. Pipe laying shall be done in such a way as to
disturb as little as possible the pipe that has already been laid.
F. After the trench foundation has been properly graded to receive the pipe, the pipe
shall be carefully lowered into the trench with approved methods. Under no
circumstances shall the pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.
All damaged pipe shall be replaced. Any defects due to settlement shall be
corrected by the Contractor.
G. Before laying, the bell and spigot will be wiped free from any dirt or other foreign
matter. All surfaces of the portion of the pipe to be joined, and the factory-made
jointing material, shall be clean and dry. Lubricants, primer, adhesives, etc., shall
be used as recommended by the pipe or joint manufacturer’s specifications. The
jointing material or factory-fabricated joints shall then be placed, fitted, and
adjusted in such workmanlike manner as to obtain the degrees of water tightness
required.
H. Trenches shall be kept dry during bedding, laying and jointing and for as long a
period as required until the trench is backfilled. As soon as practicable after the
joint is made, sufficient bedding material shall be placed along each side of the
pipe to offset conditions that might tend to move the pipe off line or grade. The
greatest care shall be used to secure water tightness and to prevent damage to or
disturbing of the joints during the backfilling process, or at any other time.
I. Install two flexible joints at the pipe connection to structure: the first at 1 diameter
distance maximum from outside face of manhole and the second at not more than
1.0m away from the first joint as shown on the drawings.
J. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed,
use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling. A detailed method statement shall be
submitted for the Engineer approval.
K. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.

2. Install piping with 1200mm minimum cover; otherwise protection slab shall
be provided.
3. Install PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and
ASTM F 1668.
4. Install fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 and
ASTM F 1668.
L. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is
completed.
1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.

2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected
debris, if required by the Engineer, or authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated and
Manufacturers’ recommendations.
B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1. Join PVC profile sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-
seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.
2. Join PVC gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and
ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-
gasket joints.
3. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 4161 for elastomeric-
seal joints.
4. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.
C. Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Follow manufacturer's instructions regarding placement of bedding and

backfilling, cleanliness of joint surfaces, lubricant used, correct location of
components, provision of correct gaps between end of spigot and back of socket,
maximum permissible deflection of joints for detachable couplings and flexible
joints, provision of flexible joints for connections to pipes built into structures.
3.5 MANHOLE AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes/chambers complete with appurtenances and accessories

indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur
in pavements. Set tops 75 mm above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891.
F. Construct cast-in-place concrete manholes as indicated.
1. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, rein-

forcement, and concrete.
G. External Coating: Refer to Part 2 "Protective Coatings" for related specifications.

H. Internal Coating: Refer to Part 2 "Protective Coatings" for related specifications.
I. Step Irons: The Contractor shall cast into precast units or grout into preformed
mortices. The Contractor shall not use step irons as lifting eyes. Devices for lifting
and handling shall be provided on exterior faces.
J. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur
in pavements. Set tops 75mm above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise
indicated.
K. Install manhole-cover inserts in frame and immediately below cover.
L. Adjustment for Level: The Contractor shall build top courses of concrete rings
after completion of surrounding levels and adjust as necessary to give accurate
and even final levels.
M. Covers and Gratings: The Contractor shall bed frame solidly in mortar and fix
firmly using fixing bolts and set cover in position to prevent twisting. The
Contractor shall position centrally over opening and level and square with
surrounding finishes.
3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade.
Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 450- by

450- by 300-mm deep. Set with tops 25mm above surrounding grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush
with pavement surface.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building

drains of sizes and in locations indicated.
B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.
1. Make branch connections from side into existing piping. Remove section of
existing pipe, install connection fitting into existing piping, and encase
entire connection with not less than 150 mm of concrete.
2. Make branch connections from side into existing underground manholes by
cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 75mm of concrete
to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe
passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush
with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole
wall, encase entering connection in 150 mm of concrete for minimum

length of 300 mm to provide additional support of collar from connection to

undisturbed ground.
a. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing

concrete and piping materials.
3. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from

entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous
material that may accumulate.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Mov-
ing." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at
outside edges of underground manholes. Color and text to be modified according
to local authorities requirements.
1. Use warning tape over ferrous piping.

2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of
underground manholes/structures.
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage

has occurred. Inspect after approximately 600mm of backfill is in place, and
again immediately prior to Substantial Completion.
1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible

between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of
ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until
defects are within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Field Testing: Generally:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and

approval.

b. Testing and inspection shall promptly follow installation of sewer

pipe including services. Testing shall not be more than 500 m behind
pipe laying operation
c. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of
d. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with
at least 24 hours' advance notice.
e. Carry out tests in the presence of the Engineer's Representative.
f. Provision of test equipment: All items for test have to be provided on
site before the test, i.e. pressure gauges, instruments, water etc.
g. Fittings and joints: Permanently anchor fittings before testing and
leave all joints exposed for checking.
h. Test sections: Test gravity sewers in sections between manholes.
i. Test sections: Limit test sections in pressure lines to not more than
500 m.
j. Test sections: Test pressure lines between valve chambers whenever
possible.
k. Test plug: Secure end of main and test plug by struts.
l. Apply pressure by manually operated test pump or, in the case of
large diameter mains, by power driven test pump, if approved.
m. Examine exposed joints and repair visible leaks.
n. Failure: Should a test fail, locate leak and replace or make good
defective pipe or replace and make good faulty joint. Retest main.
o. Submit separate report for each test.
p. Records: Keep test records in an approved form. Hand original copy
to the Engineer immediately after completion of test.
q. Non-pressure lines not exceeding 1000 mm diameter are to be air
tested before backfilling and hydrostatic tested after backfilling.
r. Non-pressure lines over 1000 mm diameter are to be visually
inspected from the inside and tested at joints by hydraulic individual
joint test.
s. Non-pressure lines: Carry out infiltration tests where crown of pipe at
high part of length under test is more than 1.2 m below water table.
t. Pressure lines: Carry out hydrostatic test while pipeline is partially
backfilled.
2. Hydrostatic Tests for Gravity Lines: Test sanitary sewerage according to

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following:
a. Procedure is to be as described for pressure pipelines.

b. Test pressure: 1.0 m head of water above pipe soffit at highest point
and not greater than 6 m head of water at lowest point of section
under test. If maximum head is exceeded, test section in stages.
c. Test period: 30 minutes.
d. Allowable leakage: 0.02 liters/linear meter/meter diameter/30
minutes.
3. Air Testing of Pipelines:

a. Test procedure to BS EN 1610.

4. Infiltration Test for Gravity Pipes
a. Timing: Carry out test after total backfilling of length under test.
b. Plug effectively all inlets to system as directed.
c. Pumping of groundwater shall be discontinued for at least 3 days prior
to the test for infiltration
d. Measure residual flow by approved method i.e. weir or other.
e. Infiltration limits: The following limits are not to be exceeded:
1) Pipelines not exceeding 700 mm: 0.02 liters/hour/100 linear
meters/mm diameter,
2) Pipelines over 700 mm: 0.03 liters/hour/100 linear meters/mm
diameter.
f. Failure: Test will be deemed to have failed if allowable infiltration
water is exceeded. Locate source of excessive infiltration by
approved means i.e. traversing light and mirrors or inflated rubber
plug etc. and make good. Repeat test until successful.
5. Visual Inspection Test
a. Timing: Carry out test after total backfilling of length under test.
b. Limit of length to be tested at one time is three full length pipes unless
otherwise approved.
c. Apparatus: Use rubber tyred bogies which do not damage lining of
pipe and an adequate supply of electric lamps.
d. Check joints by means of feelers to ensure rubber rings are correctly
located.
e. Check pipe barrel for visible cracks.
6. Testing of Manholes: Plug manhole inlets and outlets, fill manhole with
water and allow to stand for at least 24 hours or such longer period to allow
for complete absorption. Re-top with water. Allowable leakage over 24
hours is not to exceed 1% of total volume of manhole, otherwise make good
and retest.
7. Deflection Tests for GRP Pipes:
a. Conduct: Deflection tests for GRP pipes as required by the Engineer

at 3 stages. Deflection shall be measured at the spigot end at mid-
point and at socket end.
b. Stage 1: At completion of primary backfill (deflection at this stage
should be below 0.5%).
c. Stage 2: At final backfill (maximum allowable deflection 2.5%).
d. Stage 3: Six months after final backfill (maximum allowable
deflection 4.0%).
e. Pipes not passing the deflection tests at stage 2 or stage 3 will be
removed and replaced.
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is
within allowances specified.
3.10 CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF SEWERS
A. Cleaning: Clean pipeline of silt and debris after backfilling pipe trenches and
completing manholes, hatch boxes etc. but before surfaces are permanently
reinstated and make ready for inspection by the Engineer's Representative.
B. Inspection: Pipelines of 700 mm diameter and over are, where practicable, to be

inspected from the inside and when necessary a suitable trolley is to be provided
for this purpose.
C. Inspection: Pipelines less than 700 mm diameter and larger pipelines which
cannot be inspected from the inside, are to be inspected by passing a cylinder of
diameter 25 mm less than the internal diameter of the pipe and length not less than
the internal diameter of the pipe through each pipeline.

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage
piping inside building and to locations indicated.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary
sewage from building.
B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm
drainage from building.
C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside
building sewer piping and inside drainage piping.
D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and
vapors from fixtures and equipment throughout the building.
E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage piping, under pressure.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene polymer, rubber.
3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
5. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin pipe.
6. HDPE: High density polyethylene.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the
following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated or
required to suit systems’ operating pressures:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).

2. Storm Drainage Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
SANITARY WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221316

3. Sewage, Force-Main Piping Systems: 690 kPa (100 psig).
B. Pipes should be sloped suitable to maintain a self-cleansing velocity of at least 0.6

meters per second when flowing full.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details.
C. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, in

Part3 of this Section.
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to

specified standards.
B. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," or equivalent

BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for plastic piping components.
Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-
drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping;
and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
D. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform

Plumbing Code "UPC" and American Society of Plumbing Engineers "ASPE"
data books.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
describing contents. Deliver materials to Employer.
1. Keyed Couplings and gasket.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in

B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40.
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards with mechanical- or push-on-joint bell and plain
spigot end, unless plain, grooved, or flanged ends are indicated.
D. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2665 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, Schedule 40.
E. HDPE Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3350 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, HDPE pipe with HDPE fittings of suitable grade for above and
underground applications, corrosion resistant, hot water resistant and extensive
resistance for chemicals. Fittings are to be of electro weld sleeve coupling type or
as recommended by manufacturer for various installations.
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Threaded-Fitting, End Connections: ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 or equivalent BS/EN

or equivalent Local Standards.
C. Steel Pipe Pressure Fittings:
1. Galvanized, Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, made of ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM
A106/A106M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,
Schedule 40, seamless, steel pipe.
2. Malleable-Iron Unions: B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with
ball-and-socket joint, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, and female
threaded ends with threads according to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 or equivalent
3. Cast-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.4 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.
D. Grooved-Joint, Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Galvanized-Steel Piping:

ASTM A 536 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards ductile-
iron castings, ASTM A 47/A 47M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards malleable-iron castings, ASTM A 234/A 234M or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards forged steel fittings, or
ASTM A 106/A 106M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards
steel pipes with dimensions matching ASTM A 53/A 53M or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards steel pipe, and complying with
AWWA C606 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for
grooved ends.

2. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Galvanized-Steel Piping: ASTM F 1476

or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, Type I. Include ferrous
housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber gasket
suitable for hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts.
E. Ferrous Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping

body and slip-pipe section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-
plated finish on slip-pipe section, and flanged ends.
F. Ferrous, Double Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with

telescoping body and 2 slip-pipe sections. Include packing rings, packing, limit
rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe sections, and flanged ends.
G. Ductile-Iron, Mechanical- or Push-on-Joint Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10

or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern; or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, ductile-iron compact pattern. Include ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards ductile- or gray-iron glands,
rubber gaskets, and steel bolts with mechanical-joint fittings. Include
ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards
rubber gaskets with push-on-joint fittings.
H. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536 or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching
AWWA C110/A 21.10 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards
ductile-iron pipe or AWWA C153/A 21.53 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards ductile-iron fittings and complying with AWWA C606 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for grooved ends.
I. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM F 1476 or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, Type I. Include ferrous housing
sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber center-leg gasket suitable for
hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts.
J. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of

flanged and mechanical-joint ends conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or
ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
Include 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections.
Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111
ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
K. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with sleeve and

flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends
conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Include ANSI/AWWA
C111/A21.11 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards ductile-iron
glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
L. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: 3-piece assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve

with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections

conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Select and assemble
components for expansion indicated. Include ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards ductile-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
M. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, made to ASTM D3311 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns.
N. PVC Plastic, Tubular Fittings: ASTM F409 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards drainage pattern, with ends as required for application.
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in

B. Adhesive primer for PVC fittings: ASTM F 656 or equivalent BS/EN or

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Solvent cement for PVC fittings: ASTM D 2564 or equivalent BS/EN or

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: ASTM A666 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing
sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
E. Steel, Keyed Couplings: ASTM A666 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket
suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
F. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with
pressure rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be
joined.

G. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM

C1173 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards with elastomeric
sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-
resistant metal band on each end.
1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and

stainless-steel band assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of
piping to be joined. Include the following:
a. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards elastomeric seal.
b. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be
joined.
c. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.
2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric

compression gasket, made to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and
outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include the following:
a. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards elastomeric seal.
b. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to
be joined.
2.4 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A674 or

ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards
polyethylene film, 0.20-mm minimum thickness, tube or sheet.
2.5 VALVES

valves. Use valves specified for "Domestic Water Systems" applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Comply with requirements of Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,

and backfilling.
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping
pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:

1. DN32 and DN40 (1-1/4- and 1-1/2-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC
socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
2. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings,
and solvent-cemented joints.
3. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket
fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
4. DN200 and DN250 (8-Inch and 10-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC
5. DN300 (12-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:

1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
2.
cemented joints.
E. Aboveground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:

cemented joints.
F. Underground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:

cemented joints.
G. Aboveground, Sewage Force Mains: Use the following:

1. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron,
threaded fittings.
2. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe; steel,
grooved-end fittings; and steel, keyed couplings.
3. DN150 and Larger (6-Inch and Larger NPS): Ductile-iron, grooved-end
pipe; ductile-iron, grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings.

H. Aboveground and Underground, Kitchen waste piping from Commercial kitchens

(Hot F&B): Use the following:
1. HDPE - high density polyethylene plastic pipes and fittings.
I. Aboveground, For drainage of zone control valve of sprinkler and test drain line:
Use the following:
1. DN50 to DN100 (2- to 4-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron,
threaded fittings.
2. DN125 and DN150 (5- and 6-Inch NPS): Galvanized steel pipe; steel,
grooved-end fittings; and steel, keyed couplings.
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe or ball valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to
size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved
on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals
for Plumbing Piping."
3.5 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends
may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to
vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are
installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees,
elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction
of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage
piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
B. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install
true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place
hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's
written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation
requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.

2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of
flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of
flow.
5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent
stack.
D. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
E. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and
as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having

jurisdiction.
F. Install PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D2665 or equivalent

G. Install underground, PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D2321 or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Provide concrete protection for
pipes installed at depth 1.2 m or less.

A. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
B. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606 or

equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Lubricate and install gasket over
ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket,
with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.
C. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type,
and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.
D. PVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM
D2665 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards Appendixes.
E. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in

ASTM D402 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for safe
handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.
A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each pump discharge and where
indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller.
Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Check Valves: Install non-slam type, swing check valve on each pump discharge,
downstream from shutoff valve.
A. Comply with requirements of Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight,
horizontal runs 30 m and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal
runs longer than 30 m.

4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight,
horizontal runs longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or
longer. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each
fitting, valve, and coupling.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm
minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for steel and ductile-iron piping with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2100 mm; 10-mm

minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
2. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 2700 mm with 10-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
3. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 10-mm
4. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.4 m with 13-mm
5. DN80 (3-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 13-mm
3.7 m with 16-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing,
4.5 m.
7. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3.7 m with 19-mm
8. DN200 through DN300 (8- through 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal
spacing, 3.7 m with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical
spacing, 4.5 m.
spacing, 3.7 m with 25-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical
spacing, 4.5 m.
F. Install hangers for PVC plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing,
1200 mm.
1200 mm.


spacing, 1200 mm with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical
spacing, 1200 mm.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP 58 and
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to
the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in
sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for
connections DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect
to the following:
1. Sump Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sump-pump discharge.

2. Sewage Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sewage-pump discharge.
C. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and
maintenance of equipment.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed sanitary waste, vent and storm drainage piping. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must
be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.

a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before

concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.
B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence
of such procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced
drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose
work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and
approved.
3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping,
except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in
piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 3.m
of head. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection starts
through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set
and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and
watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where
they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of
250 Pa (1-inch wg). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water
closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect
plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion
C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such

procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-

main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has
been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above
materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss
in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion

3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of
water-based latex paint.

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Deep Seal Traps.
5. Vent caps.
6. Trench drains.
7. Garage drains.
8. Air-admittance valves.
9. Roof flashing assemblies.
10. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
11. Flashing materials.
12. Grease interceptors.
13. Solids interceptors.
14. Odor control unit.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent
terminals.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

B. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 14 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

"Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping
specialty components.
D. The plumbing and drainage systems should be designed in accordance with the
2. NPC National Standard Plumbing Code 2015– United States of Amer-
ica.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves

Standards.
3. Body: Cast iron.
4. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
5. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless.
6. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or
field modified to hang closed.
7. Extension: ASTM A 74 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts :
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards for cast iron for back of house and service areas and for all other
areas ASME A112.3.1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards
for stainless steel for cleanout test tee.
2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless,
cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head cast-iron plug or Stainless-steel plug
with seal..
5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout
size.
B. Metal Floor Cleanouts :

Standards for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.
2. Size: Same as connected branch.
3. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.

4. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron for back of house and service areas and for all
other areas Stainless steel.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Painted cast iron or Stainless steel.
10. Frame and Cover Shape: Square.
11. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
12. Riser: ASTM A 74 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,
Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
Standards.
15. Housing: Stainless steel.
16. Closure: Stainless steel with seal.
17. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts :

Standards. Include wall access.
2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
3. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
4. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head,brass plug.
size.
6. Wall Access: Round, stainless-steel all-installation frame and cover.
2.3 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains :

Standards .
2. Pattern: Floor or Funnel floor drain.
3. Body Material: Gray iron .
4. Seepage Flange: Required.
5. Anchor Flange: Required.
7. Outlet: Bottom or Side as applicable.
8. Backwater Valve: Not required.
9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel .
10. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
11. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze.
12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Polished bronze.
13. Top Shape: Square.
14. Funnel: Required .

15. Inlet Fitting: spigot outlet, and barrier trap-seal creates a physical barrier
that blocks drain gases and their odors from escaping.
16. Trap Material: Cast iron.
17. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
B. Stainless-Steel Floor Drains :
1. Standard: ASME A112.3.1 or ASME A112.6.3 or equivalent BS/EN or

2. Outlet: Bottom or Side.
3. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel or Polished bronze as per interior
architect manual. .
4. Top Shape: Square.
5. Seepage Flange: Required.
6. Anchor Flange: Required.
8. Barrier trap-seal: Creates a physical barrier that blocks drain gases and their
odors from escaping. Trap Material: Cast iron.
9. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
2.4 DEEP-SEAL TRAPS:
1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching

connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water
seal.
2.5 VENT CAPS:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof

design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
2.6 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains :

Standards for trench drains.
2. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
3. Flange: Seepage.
5. Outlet: Bottom or End or Side .
6. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.
7. Grate Finish: Painted.

8. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty

9. Trap Material: Cast iron
10. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap with barrier trap-seal creates a physical
barrier that blocks drain gases and their odors from escaping.
2.7 GARAGE DRAINS
A. Garage Drain :

Standards for parking garage drains.
2. Heavy duty suitable for car trench loading, coated cast iron, (300 mm)
diameter top drain,
3. Bottom outlet,
4. Seepage pan and combination flashing clamp and frame for heavy duty,
deep flange slotted grate.
5. Barrier trap-seal creates a physical barrier that blocks drain gases and their
odors from escaping.
6. Grate finish: Painted
2.8 AIR-ADMITTANCE VALVES
A. Fixture Air-Admittance Valves :

Type A for single fixture or Type B for branch piping.
2. Housing: Plastic.
3. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
4. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.
B. Stack Air-Admittance Valves :
1. Standard: ASSE 1050 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards

for vent stacks.
2. Housing: Plastic.
3. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
4. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
2.9 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies :
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-

inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm)from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing
fitting.
1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.

3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
2.10 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies :
1. Standard: UL 1479 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards

assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
2. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
3. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with
integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete
slabs.
4. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-
ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC
protective cap for plug.
5. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.11 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm)
thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch (1.01-
mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm) minimum
thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material
being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, lead-

free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.12 GREASE INTERCEPTORS
A. Grease Interceptors :

Standards , for intercepting and retaining fats, oils, and greases from food-
preparation or -processing wastewater.
2. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required.
3. Body Material: Cast iron or steel or polyethylene.
4. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
5. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
6. End Connections: Flanged or Hub or Threaded as applicable.
7. Cleanout: Integral or field installed on outlet.
8. Mounting: Above floor.
9. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.
10. Operation: Automatic recovery or Manual cleaning as applicable.
2.13 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS
A. Solids Interceptors :
1. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor made for removing and retaining

sediment from wastewater.
2. Body Material: Cast iron.
3. Interior Separation Device: Baffles.
4. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
5. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
6. Mounting: Above floor.
2.14 ODOR CONTROL UNIT
A. Description: the unit shall consist of the following:
1. Odor control unit vessel

2. Activated carbon filtering media
3. Pre-filter inclusive of housing, washable nylon filter, etc…
4. Blower and blower motor
5. Interconnecting pipework and valves

6. Accessories such as drain valves. Overflow, air sampling devices, weather

cap, manhole, inlet chamber and as recommended by the unit supplier
7. H2S monitor
8. Differential pressure gauge
9. Factory control panel
B. The odor control unit shall reduce the H2S levels to 0.1 ppm.
C. The odor control unit shall be constructed of GRP and provided with all the nec-
essary connections including, drain connection, overflow connection, air inlet
connection, air outlet connection with weather cap, air dampening connections,
flanged access manhole, differential pressure detector connection and H2S moni-
tor. Conductive resin strips behind weld lines shall be included to alleviate static
build up and shall be bonded to earth. All materials shall be resistant to corrosion
from chemicals encountered in the process.
D. Belt driven centrifugal air blower shall be constructed of corrosion resistant mate-
rial such as GRP, or stainless steel and shall be supplied with volume control
damper.
E. The fan shall be forward or backward curved impellers, and shall be suitable for
the required operation condition; it is preferred that the fans be installed after the
filter and draw air throw filters under vacuum pressure in order to remove the
risk of gas leaks under pressure.
F. The filter media shall be activated carbon and shall be effective in dealing with
odors arising from concentrations of Hydrogen Sulphide Gas.
G. Activated carbon filtering media shall be chemically regenerated and restored in

place by water wash. The filtering media shall be specially designed and chemi-
cally enhanced for sewage odor control.
H. An air pressure switch for detection of the efficiency of filters shall be provided. It
shall be of the differential pressure type and be protected for the environment.
The switch shall be intrinsically safe and shall be arranged to initiate an alarm
one week before filters require cleaning.
I. Factory Control Panel: Manufacturer’s standard controls and functions. IP56 rat-
ing for outdoor installation.
J. Provide auxiliary contacts in odor control unit controllers for interface to automa-
tion system. Include the following:
1. On-off status of odor control unit

2. Alarm status

2.15 MOTORS
A. General requirements for motors are specified in Section "Common Motor

Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so

driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above
1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and
connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install grease interceptors and solids interceptors on cast-

in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment
bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment

provided.
2. Construct bases to withstand, without damage to equipment.
3. Construct concrete bases 6 inches (150 mm) high and extend base not less
than 6 inches (150 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions
of grease interceptors and solids interceptors, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) or as per
manufacturers rquirement at 28 days.
5. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around
the full perimeter of concrete base.
6. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
7. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
8. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide
cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and
of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100)
for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100)
and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top
flush with finished floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of
types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of
drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage
area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,

but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent
slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent
slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between

drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes
where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain,
G. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of
drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.
I. Install stack air-admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping.
J. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend
through roof.
K. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through
roof.
L. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at

floor penetrations.
M. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) above
floor.
N. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

O. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste

piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.
P. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
Q. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
R. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion

joints for easy access and maintenance.
S. Assemble components of FOG disposal systems and install on floor. Install trap,
vent, fresh-air inlet, and flow-control fitting according to authorities having
jurisdiction. Install shelf fastened to reinforcement in wall construction and
adjacent to unit, unless otherwise indicated. Install culture bottle, culture
metering pump, timer, and control on shelf. Install tubing between culture bottle,
metering pump, and chamber.
T. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting,

according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless

2. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having
integral cleanout on outlet.
U. Install grease removal devices on floor. Install trap, vent, and flow-control fitting
according to authorities having jurisdiction. Install control panel adjacent to unit,
V. Install solids interceptors with cleanout immediately downstream from

interceptors that do not have integral cleanout on outlet. Install trap on
interceptors that do not have integral trap and are connected to sanitary drainage
and vent systems.
W. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
X. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes
unless trap is indicated.
3.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control
fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-
type unit.

C. Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-
inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft.
(20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or

embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10
inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at
least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or

commercially made flashing fittings, according to Section "Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or
secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:
2. Solids interceptors.
3. Valves.
4. Motors.
5. Odor control units.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,

indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in
Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

representative to inspect field-assembled, commissioning & start-up grease
removal and odor control devices and their installation, including piping and
electrical connections, and to assist in testing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
3. Remove and replace damaged or malfunctioning components.
4. Draft copies of the O&M manual shall be provided prior to commencing
site testing and commissioning of the systems.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain grease removal and odor
control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 221329 – SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewage pumps for the building sanitary drainage systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer catalog shall show:
1. Performance data including performance curves and indicating brake

horsepower, head, flow and NPSH.
2. Equipment foundation data.
3. Furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of pump
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting
drawings with templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and
other anchorages. The following shall be submitted:
1. Connection Diagrams: Connection diagrams shall show details of

connection of cables and pump motors.
2. Control Diagrams: Control diagrams shall show motor starters, relays, or
any other component necessary for safe operation.
3. Fabrication Drawings: Fabrication drawings shall indicate size, type, and
efficiency rating.
4. Installation Drawings: Installation drawings shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended instructions.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Wiring diagrams shall show detail wiring for power,
signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
C. Test Reports: Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests:
1. Hydrostatic leak.
2. Static heads.
3. Pump flow capacity.
D. Certificates: Listing of product installations for similar items shall identify at least
5 installed units similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 221329

service for a minimum of 5 years. List shall include purchaser, address of

installation, service organization, and date of installation. Certificates shall be
submitted for the each equipment and accessories showing conformance with the
referenced standards contained in this Section.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: The following shall be submitted:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions

2. Vibration specifications.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to
include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models
selected. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may
be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
1. .
C. The plumbing and drainage systems should be designed in accordance with the
America.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUMP SELECTION
A. Where parallel pump operation is indicated, pumps shall be selected with

characteristics specifically suited for the service without unstable operation.
B. Pumps shall be selected for service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a
given casing and impeller series.
C. Pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the published maximum
diameter of the casing or less than 15 percent larger than the published minimum
diameter of the casing will be rejected.
A. Pump Impeller should be capable of handling solids 2 inch (50mm).
B. Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated. A pump unit shall deliver, at rated
speed, not less than the specified flow against the specified or indicated discharge
head while the liquid level is not more than 300 mm above the datum elevation of
the pump. Datum elevation shall be taken as the level of the entrance eye of the
impeller.
C. Discharge head, specified or indicated, shall include the friction head of the
system piping external to the pump unit and the static head measured from a point
of reference on the sump to the highest point in the system.
D. The packaged pump sets should be complete with all pumps, motors, valves,
controls, alarms, float switches or level controls etc. and provided by the one
manufacturer.
E. Ratings shall be based on pumping clear, fresh water at a temperature of 50 deg. C

(122 deg. F).
2.2 SEWAGE PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction

sewage pump units. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for
permanent installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps
available only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded
companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Motor shall be manufacturer's standard construction for the service and
shall be permanently sealed, oil-filled, and watertight. Motor space shall be fitted
with watertight expansion provisions to accommodate temperature normal to
specified duty. Motor seals shall remain watertight under any pressure developed

in the volute and under a sump-level static head of not less than 9100 mm of
water; Shop Drawings shall so certify. Motors shall be single speed, with grease-
lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through full range of pump
performance curves. Power cord shall be of suitable length, waterproof, internally
grounded, oil-resistant, Type SO chloroprene, with 3 prong plug.
E. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel, AISI Type 316 or equivalent
F. Pump shaft shall be constructed of ground and polished AISI Type 304 or 316 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards corrosion-resistant steel with
hardened wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations. Hardened
surfaces may be overlays of 500 Brinell Stellite, Wall Colmonoy, or similar
proprietary metals, or plasma-spray-applied ceramic materials of not less than 900
Brinell hardness. Mechanical properties and diameter of the shaft shall ensure that
whip, deflection, or vibration will not be of sufficient magnitude to impose greater
than design loads on the specified shaft bearings under normal operating
conditions. Means shall be provided for external adjustment of the clearance
between the impeller and the inner surfaces of the volute section.
G. Bearings and Lubrication: One or more antifriction ball- or roller-bearings shall

be furnished in the motor and bearing support housing above the cover-plate
surface, with full provision for the mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust
loads imposed. Bearings shall be sealed and grease-lubricated and shall have an
L-10 rating of not less than 200,000 hours. Shop Drawings shall bear the
manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be manufactured from
vacuum-processed or degassed-alloy steels. Bearings shall be furnished with
grease and pressure-relief fittings at bottom or opposite side the bearing where
discharge may be viewed.
H. Intermediate shaft bearings shall be of the sleeve type. Center distance between
any 2 bearings on the shaft shall not exceed 1370 mm or 1520 mm for pumps
operating at 1,200 rpm or less. Sleeve-bearing length shall be not less than 2
times the shaft diameter. A sleeve bearing located near the lower extremity of the
shaft shall be provided.
I. Flexible Couplings: Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a
flexible coupling. Flexible member shall be a tire shape or a solid-mass serrated-
edge disk shape made of chloroprene material and retained by fixed flanges.
Flexible coupling shall act as a dielectric connector, shall not transmit vibration or
end thrust, and shall permit up to 4-degree misalignment under normal duty.
J. Support Pipe: A wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric with the pump shaft
shall connect the pump to the sump coverplate. Support-pipe flanges shall be
machined and doweled to ensure proper alignment of the pump and shaft
whenever the pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the field.
K. Liquid-Level Control: Duplex pump unit shall be furnished with the electrical and
mechanical devices required to provide automatic operation of the pump unit
when the liquid in the sump rises to a predetermined level. Controls shall

automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump to the other and shall
operate both pumps simultaneously whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds the
capacity of the operating pump. A means of adjustment such as float-rod stops
shall be provided to allow for variations in the start and stop level-control points.
Float and rod shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts of the fluid-level
sensing mechanism below the cover shall be bronze, brass, or material of
equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of sewage.
L. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

M. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined

testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or
with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 QUICK-DISCONNECT-SYSTEM, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump complying with HI 1.1-

1.2 and HI 1.3 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for
submersible sewage pumps. Include quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron legs that elevate pump to permit flow into
impeller, and discharge companion flange arranged to connect to quick-
disconnect-system discharge-elbow fitting.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and dynamically balanced,
open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft,
and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-
lubricated ball bearings.
5. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
6. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload
protection; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor waterproof power cable
of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for
connection at pump.
7. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and
waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for
connection at pump.
8. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, Schedule 40, galvanized-
steel pipe.
9. Pit Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting controls.
Refer to "Sewage Pump Pits" Article for other requirements.
10. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:

a. Guide Rails: Two galvanized-steel or other corrosion-resistant

vertical pipes or structural members, attached to baseplate and basin
sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor,
supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or
other attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that
mates to movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel cable attached to pump and basin cover
at manhole.
11. Controls: NEMA 250 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,
Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with floats, float rods, and
rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump
units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
12. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins
of depth greater than 1500 mm.
13. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards, Type 6 enclosure with micropressure-switch
alarm matching control and electric bell; 220-V ac, with transformer and
contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
2.4 SEWAGE PUMP, REVERSE-FLOW ATTACHMENT
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, reverse-flow pump attachment for factory or

field installation in sewage pump basin.
B. Inlet Fitting: One combination inlet-overflow strainer fitting.
C. Valves: Two shutoff valves and two check valves.
D. Strainers: Two strainer housings with reverse-flow, self-flushing strainers.
E. Pipe and Fittings: Size and configuration required to connect to sewage pumps
and piping.
2.5 SEWAGE PUMP PITS
A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to
section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to

fit cover.

1. Pattern: Z cross section shape with raised outer rim of height matching
cover for recessed mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of
floor slab..
C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access,
pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power
cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot
traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.
D. All chambers shall be, where applicable, constructed strictly in accordance with
the details shown in BS EN 752, Sewers for Adoption and the drawings.
E. All In-situ concrete pump, sump, valve chambers etc. shall be designed by the
structural/civil engineer.
F. In pump chambers the benching of concrete shall be formed as indicated on the

drawings and as recommended by the pump manufacturers, to ensure correct
operation of the pump and inlet.
G. All benching shall be properly compacted by a mechanical vibrator and finished

to a perfectly smooth finish.
2.6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves. Use valves specified for domestic
water, unless otherwise indicated. Include features and devices indicated.
2.7 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation

system. Include the following:
1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Alarm status.
2.8 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. The electrical and control installation must be IP67 rated to give a total
submersion protection, in accordance with the main electrical specification.
B. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with BS 7671 or equivalent Local

Standards

C. The pumping station control panel(s) shall incorporate the following items:
1. Control panel (D.O.L. duty / assist / standby)
2. A sheet steel dust and damp proof cabinet in stove grey enamelled finish for
wall or backboard mounting. IP55 protection, front access, necessary door
labels and incorporating:
a. 1 No. compartment with door interlocked on load isolator.
b. 2 No. Sets of motor fuses and necessary HRC protection fuses for the
control circuit, transformer etc.
c. 2 No. contactor starters, incorporating thermal overload and single
phase protection.
d. 1 No. thermal cut-out circuit with auto-reset.
e. 2 No. hand/off/auto switches and stop/start/reset buttons.
f. 1 No. automatic duty pump alternator.
g. 1 No. set of run / trip lamps.
h. 1 No. low voltage level control circuit serving float switches.
i. 1 No. High level alarm, buzzer/lamp/mute button.
j. 1 No. pumps failure alarm.
k. 1 No. mains failure alarm.
l. 1 No. set of volt-free contacts for connection to BMS to monitor
power failure, pump failure and high level.
m. 1 No. enable/disable interface to BMS
n. 1 No. Running hours meter for each pump.
o. High level alarm connected to pump starter control and to BMS via
BMS interface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of

piping connections before pump installation.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section "Earth Moving."
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sewage

pumps. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pimps, pipes, fittings and accessories in accordance with BS 8000-13, BS

EN 12056-4, BS EN 752 or equivalent Local Standards and manufacturer's
recommendations, to ensure the complete discharge of any and all drainage from
the pumped rising main(s), without any leaks.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal
of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Submersible Sewage Pumps: Set pumps on pit floor. Make direct connections to
sanitary drainage and vent piping.
1. Anchor quick-disconnect systems to bottom of pit and pit sidewalls or

covers. Install pumps so pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges
make positive seals when pumps are dropped into place.
E. Sewage Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to drainage piping. Refer
to Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete work. Connect pit to drainage
and vent piping. Set pit cover and fasten to top edge of concrete pit. Install
cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary drainage and vent piping installation requirements are specified in

Section "Sanitary Waste, Vent and Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump

nozzles, and connect to sanitary drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam, swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sewage
pump discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for
piping DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in
Division 26 Sections.

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation
as required for system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance

operations:
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is
bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power
is as follows:
1. Start motors.
C. Be responsible for arranging all necessary tests, surveys and inspections that are
required to ensure that the materials and components in this specification are
properly installed and that they shall fulfill the functional and performance
requirements specified. This is to include a pressure test of the pumping main.
This test shall be 1.5 times the maximum calculated design pressure calculated by
the designer/installer and must be held for a 1 hour period.
D. Test the pumps to the maximum calculated design load to ensure the system is
fully operational and prove pump duties. Provide leak test on pump chamber.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sewage pump units. Refer
to Division 1 Section. "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Roof drains.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Backwater valves.
4. Trench drains.
5. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
6. Flashing materials.
B. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with

following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
2. Force-Main Piping: 690 kPa (100 psig).
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified
testing agency.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and

characteristics of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and
models selected. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance charac-
teristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties

made to specified standards.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified

in this Section that are listed and labeled.
E. Comply with ASME B31.9 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

"Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221423

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains :

Standards, for general-purpose roof drains.
3. Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-inch (357-mm) diameter.
4. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Not required.
5. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required.
7. Extension Collars: Required.
8. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
9. Expansion Joint: Required.
10. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
11. Dome Material: Cast iron.
12. Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required.
13. Vandal-Proof Dome: Required.
14. Water Dam: Not required.
B. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, Combination Roof and Overflow Drains :

Standards, for general-purpose roof drains.
2. Body Material: Cast iron, coated to protect against corrosion.
3. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Not required.
4. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required.
6. Extension Collars: Required.
7. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
8. Expansion Joint: Required.
9. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
10. Dome Material: Aluminum
11. Elevated Dome Height 4.5- to 7-inch (115- to 178-mm).
12. Overflow Water Dam: 2.5- inch (65-mm).
C. Downspout Adaptors :
1. Description: Manufactured, gray-iron casting, for attaching to horizontal-

outlet, parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout.
2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet.
D. Downspout Boots :
1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, gray-iron casting, with strap or ears for
attaching to building; NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet; and shop-applied bituminous
coating.

2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor Cleanouts :

Standards, for adjustable housing cleanouts.
3. Type: Adjustable housing.
4. Body or Ferrule Material: For Back of house and service areas Cast iron
otherwise Stainless steel .
6. Outlet Connection: Inside calk or Spigot or Threaded as applicable.
7. Closure: Cast-iron plug
8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Rough bronze.
10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
11. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to
cleanout.
B. Test Tees :
1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or

CISPI 301 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, for cleanout
test tees.
2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless,
cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
4. Closure Plug: Countersunk or raised head, brass.
size.
2.3 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Cast-Iron, Horizontal Backwater Valves :

Standards, for backwater valves.
4. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
5. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless.
6. Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled.
7. It will be provided where the building storm pipes are connected directly to
external storm network.

8. Extension: ASTM A 74 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

Service class; full-size, cast-iron soil-pipe extension to field-installed
cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
2.4 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains :

Standards, for trench drains.
3. Flange: Anchor with weep holes.
5. Outlet: Bottom or End or Side as applicable.
6. Grate Material: Ductile iron.
7. Grate Finish: Not required.
8. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
2.5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies :
1. Standard: ASTM E 814 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,

for through-penetration firestop assemblies.
2. Certification and Listing: Intertek Testing Service NA for through-
penetration firestop assemblies.
3. Size: Same as connected pipe.
4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with
integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete
slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at
base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective
cap for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards,12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M or equivalent BS/EN or

equivalent Local Standards, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch (1.01-
mm) minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm) minimum
thickness.
D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material
being installed.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, lead-free

alloy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between

drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes
where penetrated.
2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back-outlet parapet roof drains and

connect to sheet metal downspouts.
C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 6 inches (152 mm) above grade. Secure
to building wall.
D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto
grade.
E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following instructions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use
NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is
indicated.
2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45
degrees.
3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top
flush with finished floor.

G. Install horizontal backwater valves where the building storm pipes are connected
directly to external storm network.
H. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.
I. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of
drains flush with finished surface unless otherwise indicated.
J. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete

floor penetrations.
K. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary

Waste, Vent and Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement
of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other
drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m) lead sheets, 0.0938-
inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-
kg/sq. m) lead sheets, 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or

embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length
of 10 inches (250 mm) and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at
least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

SECTION 221429 - SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sump pumps for the building storm drainage systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer catalog shall show:
1. Performance data including performance curves and indicating brake

horsepower, head, flow and NPSH.
3. Furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of pump
indicated.
4. Coating data if any, rpm, shut-off head, design point and run-out limitations.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting
drawings with templates, directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and
other anchorages. The following shall be submitted:
1. Connection Diagrams: Connection diagrams shall show details of

connection of cables and pump motors.
2. Control Diagrams: Control diagrams shall show motor starters, relays, or
any other component necessary for safe operation.
3. Fabrication Drawings: Fabrication drawings shall indicate size, type, and
efficiency rating.
4. Installation Drawings: Installation drawings shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended instructions.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Wiring diagrams shall show detail wiring for power,
signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
C. Test Reports: Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests :
1. Hydrostatic leak.
2. Static heads.
3. Pump flow capacity.
4. Hydrostatic testing at rated speed over complete range of minimum flow to
run out.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

5. Vibration level at rated speed over complete range of minimum flow to run
out.
D. Certificates: Listing of product installations for similar items shall identify at least
5 installed units similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful
service for a minimum of 5 years. List shall include purchaser, address of
installation, service organization, and date of installation. Certificates shall be
submitted for the each equipment and accessories showing conformance with the
referenced standards contained in this Section.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: The following shall be submitted :
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Vibration specifications.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to
include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

requirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models
selected. Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may
be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Ensure that the whole installation complies with the relevant standards, including
the following:
1. BS 437 or equivalent Local Standards - Specification for cast iron spigot
and socket drain pipe and fittings
2. BS 1710 or equivalent Local Standards - Specification for identification of
pipelines and services
3. BS 6087 or equivalent Local Standards - Cast iron pipes and fittings, their
joints and accessories for the evacuation of water from buildings –
requirements, test methods and quality assurance
4. BS 7671 or equivalent Local Standards - Requirements for electrical
installations. IEE Wiring Regulations. Seventeenth edition
5. BS 8000-13 or equivalent Local Standards - Workmanship on building sites
code of practice for above ground drainage and sanitary appliances
6. BS EN 752 or equivalent Local Standards - Drain and sewer systems
outside buildings
7. BS EN 877 or equivalent Local Standards - Cast iron pipes and fittings,
their joints and accessories for the evacuation of water from buildings.
Requirements, test methods and quality assurance
8. BS EN 12056-4 or equivalent Local Standards - Gravity drainage systems
inside buildings. Wastewater lifting plants. Layout and calculation
SUMP PUMPS 221429


D. The plumbing and drainage systems should be designed in accordance with the
America.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUMP SELECTION
A. Where parallel pump operation is indicated, pumps shall be selected with

characteristics specifically suited for the service without unstable operation.
B. Pumps shall be selected for service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a
given casing and impeller series.
C. Pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the published maximum
diameter of the casing or less than 15 percent larger than the published minimum
diameter of the casing will be rejected.
D. Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated. A pump unit shall deliver, at rated
speed, not less than the specified flow against the specified or indicated discharge
head while the liquid level is not more than 300 mm above the datum elevation of
the pump. Datum elevation shall be taken as the level of the entrance eye of the
impeller.
E. Discharge head, specified or indicated, shall include the friction head of the
system piping external to the pump unit and the static head measured from a point
of reference on the sump to the highest point in the system.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

F. Ratings shall be based on pumping clear, fresh water at a temperature of 50 deg. C

(122 deg. F).
G. Minimum time between two successive pump starts should be 5 minute.
H. The packaged pump sets should be complete with all pumps, motors, valves,
controls, alarms, float switches or level controls etc. and provided by the one
manufacturer
2.2 SUMP PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction

sump pump units. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for
permanent installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps
available only with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded
companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading

through full range of pump performance curves.
E. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be AISI Type 316 or equivalent BS/EN or
F. The noise level for sump pump should be as recommended by manufacturer.
G. Pump shaft shall be constructed of ground and polished AISI Type 304 or 316 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards corrosion-resistant steel with
hardened wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations. Hardened
surfaces may be overlays of 500 Brinell Stellite, Wall Colmonoy, or similar
proprietary metals, or plasma-spray-applied ceramic materials of not less than 900
Brinell hardness. Mechanical properties and diameter of the shaft shall ensure that
whip, deflection, or vibration will not be of sufficient magnitude to impose greater
than design loads on the specified shaft bearings under normal operating
conditions. Means shall be provided for external adjustment of the clearance
between the impeller and the inner surfaces of the volute section.
H. Bearings and Lubrication: One or more antifriction ball- or roller-bearings shall

be furnished in the motor and bearing support housing above the cover-plate
surface, with full provision for the mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust
loads imposed. Bearings shall be sealed and grease-lubricated and shall have an
L-10 rating of not less than 200,000 hours. Shop Drawings shall bear the
manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be manufactured from
vacuum-processed or degassed-alloy steels. Bearings shall be furnished with
grease and pressure-relief fittings at bottom or opposite side the bearing where
discharge may be viewed.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

I. Intermediate shaft bearings shall be of the sleeve type. Center distance between
any 2 bearings on the shaft shall not exceed 1370 mm or 1520 mm for pumps
operating at 1,200 rpm or less. Sleeve-bearing length shall be not less than 2
times the shaft diameter. A sleeve bearing located near the lower extremity of the
shaft shall be provided.
J. Flexible Couplings: Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a
flexible coupling. Flexible member shall be a tire shape or a solid-mass serrated-
edge disk shape made of chloroprene material and retained by fixed flanges.
Flexible coupling shall act as a dielectric connector, shall not transmit vibration or
end thrust, and shall permit up to 4-degree misalignment under normal duty.
K. Support Pipe: A wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric with the pump shaft
shall connect the pump to the sump coverplate. Support-pipe flanges shall be
machined and doweled to ensure proper alignment of the pump and shaft
whenever the pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the field.
L. Liquid-Level Control: Duplex pump unit shall be furnished with the electrical and
mechanical devices required to provide automatic operation of the pump unit
when the liquid in the sump rises to a predetermined level. Controls shall
automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump to the other and shall
operate both pumps simultaneously whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds the
capacity of the operating pump. A means of adjustment such as float-rod stops
shall be provided to allow for variations in the start and stop level-control points.
Float and rod shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts of the fluid-level
sensing mechanism below the cover shall be bronze, brass, or material of
equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of sewage.
M. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

N. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined

testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or
with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sump pump complying with HI 1.1-

1.2 and HI 1.3 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards for submersible
sump pumps.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.

2. Casing: Cast iron with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to
permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange suitable for
plain-end pipe connection arranged for vertical discharge.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local
Standards, abrasion-resistant cast iron; statically and dynamically balanced,
SUMP PUMPS 221429

open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft,

and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-
lubricated ball bearings.
5. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
6. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload
protection; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required,
with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
7. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and
waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing assembly for
connection at pump.
8. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, Schedule 40, galvanized-
steel pipe.
9. Pit Cover: Multiple section, steel, and suitable for supporting controls.
Refer to "Sump Pump Pits" Article for other requirements.
10. Controls: NEMA 250 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards,
Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with floats, float rods, and
rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump
units on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
11. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins
of depth greater than 1500 mm.
12. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250 or equivalent BS/EN or
equivalent Local Standards, Type 6 enclosure with micropressure-switch
alarm matching control and electric bell; 220-V ac, with transformer and
contacts for remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
2.4 SUMP PUMP PITS
A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to
Section "Cast-in Place Concrete."
B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to

fit cover.
1. Pattern: Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface.

2. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching
cover for recessed mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of
floor slab.
C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access,
pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power
cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot-
traffic areas.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

2.5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves. Use valves specified for domestic
water, unless otherwise indicated. Include features and devices indicated.
2.6 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation

system. Include the following:
1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Alarm status.
2.7 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. The electrical and control installation must be IP67 rated to give a total
submersion protection, in accordance with the main electrical specification.
B. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with BS 7671 or equivalent Local

Standards
C. The pumping station control panel(s) shall incorporate the following items:
1. Control panel (D.O.L. duty / assist / standby)
2. A sheet steel dust and damp proof cabinet in stove grey enamelled finish for
wall or backboard mounting. IP55 protection, front access, necessary door
labels and incorporating:
a. 1 No. compartment with door interlocked on load isolator.
b. 2 No. Sets of motor fuses and necessary HRC protection fuses for the
control circuit, transformer etc.
c. 2 No. contactor starters, incorporating thermal overload and single
phase protection.
d. 1 No. thermal cut-out circuit with auto-reset.
e. 2 No. hand/off/auto switches and stop/start/reset buttons.
f. 1 No. automatic duty pump alternator.
g. 1 No. set of run / trip lamps.
h. 1 No. low voltage level control circuit serving float switches.
i. 1 No. High level alarm, buzzer/lamp/mute button.
j. 1 No. pumps failure alarm.
k. 1 No. mains failure alarm.
l. 1 No. set of volt-free contacts for connection to BMS to monitor
power failure, pump failure and high level.
m. 1 No. enable/disable interface to BMS
n. 1 No. Running hours meter for each pump.
o. High level alarm connected to pump starter control and to BMS via
BMS interface.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of

piping connections before pump installation.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section "Earth Moving."
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sump

pumps. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Concrete for pits and sumps is specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal
of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump floor. Make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.
E. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to storm drainage piping.
Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete work. Set basin cover and
fasten to top edge of concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with
finished floor.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Storm drainage piping installation requirements are specified in Section "Sanitary

Waste, Vent and Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement
of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump

nozzles, and connect to storm drainage piping.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

2. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sump
pump discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for
piping DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
3. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each
automatic, packaged pump discharge.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation
as required for system application.
3.7 INSPECTION
A. Be responsible for arranging all necessary tests, surveys and inspections that are
necessary to ensure that the materials and components in this specification are
properly installed in accordance with the contract programme and that they fulfill
the functional and performance requirements specified.
B. Provide clean water and all apparatus for testing, as required.
C. All new lengths of pumped main, pump chambers, valve chambers etc. shall be
capable of passing the tests specified both before and after surface treatment and
any reinstatement, where necessary, is complete. Locate and remedy all defects
and re-test to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. The commissioning of sump pump must include pre operation and startup
reqirement as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance

operations:
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is
bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
C. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power
is as follows:
1. Start motors.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sump pump units. Refer
to Division 1.
SUMP PUMPS 221429

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:

1. Commercial, electric water heaters.
2. Accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating

obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in operation and
G. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements

of water heaters and are based on specific units selected. Other manufacturers'
products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."

in NFPA 70, Article 100 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, by
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to
comply with ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure
Vessels Division 1 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
E. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the

following:
1. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except

Low-Rise Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters or
2. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Low-Rise
Residential Buildings," for household water heaters or equivalent BS/EN or
F. Local Certification: Heaters should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer

agreeing to repair or replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include heating elements and storage tanks.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion: As per
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMMERCIAL, POINT-OF-USE, STORAGE, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, internally glass lined

/ copper coat with epoxy coating (NFS 61 approved) with heating element suitable
for operating on voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical
Drawings.

B. Storage Tank Construction: ASME or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local

Standards-code steel with 1035-kPa (150-psig) working-pressure rating.
1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping

connections, relief valve, drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach
tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include ANSI/ASME B1.20.1
or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, pipe thread.
2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards, barrier materials for
potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and
outlets.
3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, “Energy Efficient Design
of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.” or equivalent
BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.
C. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in, immersion type.
1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
D. Anode Rod: Factory installed, magnesium.
E. Drain Valve: corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
F. Safety Control: Automatic, high temperature limit and low water cut off
2.2 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped
and complying with PTC 25 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards.
Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure
setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with
sensing element that extends into tank.
1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable

instead of combination relief valve.
2. Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for
tankless water heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in
piping.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with PTC 25 or
equivalent BS/EN or equivalent Local Standards. Include pressure setting less
than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with PTC 25 or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent

Local Standards. Furnish for installation in piping.
1. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.

D. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand

for floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include
dimension that will support bottom of water heater a minimum of 450 mm above
the floor.
E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated,

steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
F. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not
less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than DN20
(NPS 3/4).
G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and

outlet piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves
for field assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing
balanced flow through each water heater.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-

code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or
B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times

pressure rating before shipment.
C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass

tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
B. Anchor water heaters to substrate.
C. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve
outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest
floor drain.

D. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage.
Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and
discharge onto closest floor drain.
E. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
F. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining.
G. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over
floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water
heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
drain valves.
H. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
1. Exception: Omit thermometers for the following:
a. Household, water heater inlet and outlet piping.

b. Commercial, point-of-use, water heater inlet piping.
c. Water heater with thermometer outlet piping.
I. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Section "Meters and Gages
for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.
J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water
heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through
each water heater. Include shutoff valve, and thermometer in each water heater
inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet. Refer to Section
"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves and Section
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
K. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet
piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
L. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage
tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
M. Fill water heaters with water.
3.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-
water-circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.

D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar

metal.
E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in

Division 26 Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
F. Ground equipment.

indicated, use those specified in ANSI or equivalent BS/EN or equivalent
Local Standards.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION

specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the

following:
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
7. Energize electric circuits.
8. Adjust operating controls.
9. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 60 deg C
(140 deg F) unless piping system application requires higher temperature.
10. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters. Refer to
Division 1 Section. "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 224100 - RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. For Architectural Interior (AI) Sanitary ware manual refer below documents :
1. S17058-0100D-PK2-TR3-FD-MAN-AI-02
2. S17058-0100D-PK3-TR4-FD-MAN-AI-02
3. S17058-0100D-PK4-TL3-FD-MAN-AI-02
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Lavatories.
2. Shower faucets.
3. Kitchen sinks.
4. Laminar-flow, faucet-spout outlets.
5. Water closets.
6. Water closet hygiene spray.
7. Ablution faucet.
8. Urinal.
9. Janitor sink.
10. Supply fittings.
11. Waste fittings.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-

mounted plumbing fixtures.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100

C. Details of all associated installation accessories.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in
emergency, operation, and operation and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings.
3. Flushometer-Tank Repair Kits.
4. Toilet Seats.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures of unit shell.

b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: As per

manufacturer from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: As
per manufacturer from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: As
per manufacturer from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories: (LAV-1) Undercounter Oval wash basin, bottle trap and basin mixer
combination with all needed accessories (Reference IA code:- X-WB-301 / X-
WB-401 / X-WB-501) vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for vitreous-china lavatories.
b. Type: Oval wash basin with overflow and fixing clamps.

c. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual.

d. Siphon and angle valve included.
e. Color: White.
f. Trap: Bottle trap, chrome plated, adjustable, 1 ¼ inch metal bottle,
75mm seal. (Reference IA code:- T-BT-301 / T-BT-401 / T-BT-501)
2. Faucet: Deck mounted touchless faucet with integrated temperature mixer

(Reference IA code:- T-BM-301 / T-BM-401 / T-BM-501).
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
b. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet
inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and
fixture receptor.
c. Body Material: General-duty, solid brass or General-duty, copper or
brass underbody with brass cover plate.
d. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
e. Maximum Flow Rate: Pre-set at 3 lpm at 3 bar, can be adjusted from
1.5-6 lpm.
f. Centers: Single hole, Adjustable.
g. Mounting: Deck, exposed.
h. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) as per selection.
i. Spout: Rigid.
j. Spout Outlet: Aerator or Spray.
k. Operation: Sensor.
3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.
B. Lavatories: (LAV-2) Wall hung wash basin with semi pedestal, bottle trap and
basin mixer combination with all needed accessories (Reference IA code: - X-
WB-302 / X-WB-402 / X-WB-502) vitreous china / Ceramic. ADA compliant.
1. Fixture:
b. Type: Wash basin with overflow and fixing clamps.
e. Color: White.
75mm seal. (Reference IA code:- T-BT-301 / T-BT-401 / T-BT-501)
2. Faucet: Deck mounted touchless faucet with integrated temperature mixer

(Reference IA code: - T-BM-301 / T-BM-401 / T-BM-501).
fixture receptor.

e. Maximum Flow Rate: Pre-set at 3 lpm at 3 bar, can be adjusted from

1.5-6 lpm.
g. Mounting: Deck, exposed.
i. Spout: Rigid.
j. Spout Outlet: Aerator or Spray.
k. Operation: Sensor.

C. Lavatories: (LAV-3) Undercounter Oval wash basin, bottle trap and basin mixer
combination with all needed accessories (Reference IA code:- X-WB-351 / X-
WB-451 / X-WB-551) vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Fixture:
e. Color: White.
75mm seal.
2. Faucet: Basin rim mounted mixer (Reference IA code: - T-BM-351 / T-

BM-451 / T-BM-551).
fixture receptor.
e. Maximum Flow Rate: 4 lpm
g. Mounting: Basin rim, exposed.
h. Valve handle: Lever.
i. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) as per selection.
j. Spout: Rigid.
k. Spout Outlet: Adjustable aerator.
l. Operation: Manual.
m. Drain: Pop up.
n. Accessories: Multiport cartridge, hot water limiter integrated in the
cartridge, flexible hoses.


D. Lavatories: (LAV-4) Wall hung oval wash basin with semi pedestal, bottle trap
and basin mixer combination with all needed accessories (Reference IA code: - X-
WB-352 / X-WB-452 / X-WB-552) vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Fixture:
d. Faucet hole location: Rim.
e. Siphon and angle valve included.
f. Color: White.
g. Trap: Bottle trap, chrome plated, adjustable, 1 ¼ inch metal bottle,
75mm seal.
2. Faucet: Basin rim mounted mixer (Reference IA code: - T-BM-351 / T-

BM-451 / T-BM-551).
fixture receptor.
e. Maximum Flow Rate: 4 lpm
g. Mounting: Basin rim, exposed.
h. Valve handle: Lever.
i. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) as per selection.
j. Spout: Rigid.
k. Spout Outlet: Adjustable aerator.
l. Operation: Manual.
m. Drain: Pop up.
n. Accessories: Multiport cartridge, hot water limiter integrated in the
cartridge, flexible hoses.

2.2 SHOWER FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System

Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with
potable water.
B. Shower Faucets : (SH-1) Shower kit (Shower head and mixer) with all needed
accessories (Reference IA code: - T-SD-301 / T-SD-401)
1. Shower mixer:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.

b. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; check stops; and
fixed shower head, arm, and flange. Coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies.
c. Body Material: Solid brass.
d. Finish: Polished chrome plate
e. Mounting: Concealed.
f. Operation: Soft touch, Time flow 30 seconds.
g. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
h. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.
i. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on
hot- and cold-water supply connections.
2. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
3. Shower Head:
a. Type: Without ball joint.

b. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.
c. Mounting: Wall mounted.
d. Spray Pattern: Fixed.
e. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
f. Flow Rate: 6.0 L/min at 3 bar.
4. Drain: Channel floor drain (Reference IA code: - T-FD-303 / T-FD-403).
a. Type: Single piece body with plain cover.

b. Material: Stainless steel.
c. Drain Location: Left side or Right side.
C. Shower Faucets : (SH-2) Shower kit, Shower head (Reference IA code:- T-HS-
551) Shower mixer (Reference IA code: - T-SM-551) with all needed accessories.
1. Shower mixer:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.

b. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; check stops; and
fixed shower head, arm, and flange. Coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies.
c. Body Material: Solid brass.
d. Finish: Polished chrome plate
e. Mounting: Concealed.
f. Operation: Compression, manual.
g. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
h. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.
i. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on
hot- and cold-water supply connections.
2. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or NPS 3/4 (DN 20).

3. Shower Head:
a. Type: Without ball joint.

b. Shower Head Material: Metallic or Nonmetallic with chrome-plated
finish
c. Mounting: Wall mounted.
d. Spray Pattern: Fixed, Rain shower, High performance spray pattern.
f. Flow Rate: 12.0 L/min with flow restrictor.
2.3 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks: (KS-1) Undercounter Rectangular kitchen sink, and kitchen

faucet combination with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code: - X-KS-351 /
X-KS-451 / X-KS-551)
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel kitchen
sinks.
b. Overall Dimensions: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
c. Bowl:
1) Type: One bowl rectangular kitchen sink.

2) Mounting: Undercounter.
3) Body Material: Stainless steel.
4) Surface finish: Surface satin finish.
5) Dimensions: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
6) Siphon and angle valve included.
7) Trap: Bottle trap or P-trap.
8) Drain: crumb cup or grid or outlet for disposer.
a) Location: Centered in bowl.
2. Faucets: Kitchen mixer with high raised spout (Reference IA code: - T-KF-
351 / T-KF-451 / T-KF-551)
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System

Components – Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact
with potable water.

fixture receptor.
c. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
d. Flow Rate: Flow rate limiter 40% in combination with hot water
limiter.
e. Dimensions: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
f. Mixing Valve: Single control.
g. Mounting: Deck or exposed

h. Handle(s): Lever.
i. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck, As per AI sanitary ware manual.
j. Spout Outlet: Swivel aerator/spray.
k. Drain: Stopper with chain or Grid or Lift and turn.

4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article..
2.4 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS

Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout outlet materials that will be in
contact with potable water.
B. Description: Chrome-plated-brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating,

laminar stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet
for attachment to faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow
of faucet.
2.5 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets (EWC-1) Wall mounted toilet bowl with seat cover and flush valve
combination with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code:- X-WC-301 / X-
WC-401 / X-WC-501) vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, ASME A112.19.5, and

ASSE 1037.
b. Bowl Type: Siphon jet.
c. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual..
d. Rim Contour: Elongated
e. Water Consumption: Water saving.
f. Color: White.
2. Toilet Seat: Slow close.
3. Flush Valve: Touchless Concealed flush valve. (Reference IA code:- T-FP-

301 / T-FP-401 / T-FP-501)
a. Type: Concealed flush valve.

b. Finish: Polished chrome.
c. Flow rate: 4.0 L / 6.0 L per flush.
d. Operation: Concealed sensor operated with manual courtesy. As per
AI sanitary ware manual.
f. Accessories: Hydraulic unit with solenoid valve and multifunction 8
ways fitting are included. As per AI sanitary ware manual.

B. Water Closets: (EWC-2) Wall mounted toilet bowl with seat cover and flush valve
combination with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code:- X-AT-301 / X-AT-
401 / X-AT-501) vitreous china / Ceramic. ADA compliant
1. Bowl:

ASSE 1037.
f. Color: White.

301 / T-FP-401 / T-FP-501)

C. Water Closets: (EWC-3) Wall mounted toilet bowl with seat cover and flush valve
combination with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code: - X-WC-351 / X-
WC-451 / X-WC-551) vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Bowl:

ASSE 1037.
f. Color: White.
3. Flush Valve: Concealed flush valve. (Reference IA code:- T-FP-351 / T-FP-

451 / T-FP-551)
a. Type: Concealed dual flush valve.

d. Operation: Manual. As per AI sanitary ware manual.


f. Accessories: Integrated with stop cock and all necessary fitting are
included. As per AI sanitary ware manual.
D. Water Closets: (AWC-1) Squat toilet with flush valve combination with all
needed accessories (Reference IA code:- X-WC-302 / X-WC-402 / X-WC-502),
vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual..
c. Water Consumption: Water saving.
d. Color: White.

301 / T-FP-401 / T-FP-501)

E. Water Closets: (AWC-2) Squat toilet with flush valve combination with all
needed accessories (Reference IA code:- X-WC-452), vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual..
d. Color: White.
2. Flush Valve: Concealed flush valve. (Reference IA code:- T-FP-451)
a. Type: Concealed dual flush valve.

d. Operation: Manual. As per AI sanitary ware manual.
f. Accessories: Integrated with stop cock and all necessary fitting are
F. PRM toilet set: (ADA-1) Basin with bottle trap and basin mixer, wall mounted
toilet bowl with seat cover and concealed cistern combination with all needed
accessories. (Reference IA code:- X-AT-351 / X-AT-451 / X-AT-551) vitreous
china / Ceramic. ADA compliant

1. Bowl:

ASSE 1037.
d. Rim: Rimless
f. Color: White.
g. Accessories: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
2. Toilet Seat: Seat no cover with retaining buffers.
3. Flush Cistern: Concealed dual flush cistern, 3/4.5 L dual flush.
4. Flush Plate: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
5. Lavatory: Wall hung wash basin, bottle trap and basin mixer combination.
vitreous china / Ceramic. ADA compliant.

b. Type: Wash basin with overflow and fixing clamps.
e. Color: White.
75mm seal.
6. Faucet: Basin rim mounted mixer.

fixture receptor.
d. Maximum Flow Rate: 4 lpm
e. Valve handle: Lever.
f. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) as per selection.
g. Spout: Rigid.
h. Spout Outlet: Adjustable aerator.
i. Operation: Manual.
j. Accessories: TMV3 approved basin mixer.


2.6 WATER CLOSET HYGIENE SPRAY
A. Hygiene spray: (BPH-1) Hygiene spray with hose and fixed wall bracket along
with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code:- T-HF-301 / T-HF-401 / T-HF-
501)
a. Type: Spring trigger hand spray.

d. Hose : 1200mm Chrome-plated, double clenched hose. As per AI
sanitary ware manual.
e. Accessories: Fixed wall bracket, angle valve/flow regulator are
B. Hygiene spray: (BPH-2) Hygiene spray with hose and fixed wall bracket along
with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code:- T-HB-351 / T-HB-451 / T-HB-
551)
a. Type: ABS (Plastic) spring trigger hand spray.

c. Trigger control handle with locking position.
d. Maximum flow rate: 6.0 L/min.
f. Hose : 1240mm Chrome-plated, double clenched hose. As per AI
sanitary ware manual.
g. Accessories: ABS Fixed wall bracket, angle valve/flow regulator are
2.7 ABLUTION FAUCET
A. Ablution faucet: (AB-1) Wall mounted spout with integrated sensor and concealed
mixing valve with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code:- T-AF-301 / T-AF-
401 / T-AF-501)
a. Type: Wall mounted spout.

c. Flow rate: 3.0 L/min at 3 bar. Adjustable 1.5-6.0 L/min.
d. Operation: Integrated sensor operated.
f. Accessories: Mixing valve included. As per AI sanitary ware manual.
B. Ablution faucet: (AB-2) Wall mounted mixer with all needed accessories.
(Reference IA code:- T-AF-351 / T-AF-451 / T-AF-551)
a. Type: Wall mounted mixer with multiport cartridge.

c. Flow rate: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
d. Operation: Manual.
e. Lever: Joystick.
f. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual.

g. Accessories: Anti-vandal laminar aerator, Oval escutcheon are

2.8 URINAL
A. Urinal: (UR-1) Wall mounted urinal with integrated sensor and flush valve
combination with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code:- X-UR-301 / X-
UR-401 / X-UR-501) vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Fixture:
a. Type: Wall mounted urinal.

b. Dimension: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
d. Color: White.
e. Accessories: Siphon, connecting set and fixation kit are included. As
per AI sanitary ware manual.

302 / T-FP-402 / T-FP-502)

c. Flow rate: 0.3 L/sec at 3 bar. Adjustable.
d. Time flow pre-set at 3 sec, can be adjusted from 2 to 14 sec. As per
e. Operation: Concealed sensor operated with manual courtesy. As per
g. Hygienic duty flush every 12 Hr. after last use to prevents vacuum in
the siphon.
h. Accessories: Hydraulic unit solenoid valve, stopcock, filter and
multifunction 8 ways fitting are included. As per AI sanitary ware
manual.
B. Urinal: (UR-2) Wall mounted urinal and flush valve combination with all needed
accessories. (Reference IA code:- X-UR-351 / X-UR-451 / X-UR-551) vitreous
china / Ceramic.
1. Fixture:
a. Type: Wall mounted urinal with back inlet.

c. Water Consumption: Min. 2 L/flush, Water saving.
d. Color: White.
e. Accessories: Siphon, connecting set and fixation kit are included. As
per AI sanitary ware manual.

352 / T-FP-452 / T-FP-552)


c. Flow rate: 0.3 L/sec at 3 bar. Adjustable.
d. Time flow pre-set at 3 sec, can be adjusted from 2 to 14 sec. As per
e. Operation: Concealed sensor operated with manual courtesy. As per
g. Hygienic duty flush every 12 Hr. after last use to prevents vacuum in
the siphon.
h. Accessories: Hydraulic unit solenoid valve, stopcock, filter and
multifunction 8 ways fitting are included. As per AI sanitary ware
manual.
2.9 JANITOR SINK
A. Janitor sink: (MS-1) Wall hung MOP sink and utility faucet combination with all
needed accessories. (Reference IA code: - X-JS-301 / X-JS-401 / X-JS-501)
vitreous china / Ceramic.
1. Fixture:
a. Type: Wall hung MOP sink with concealed fixing.

c. Color: White.
d. Accessories: Trap and fixation kit are included. As per AI sanitary
ware manual.
2. Faucet: Wall mounted mixer (Reference IA code: - T-UF-301 / T-UF-401 /

T-UF-501).
a. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet

inlets with supplies; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
b. Body Material: General-duty, solid brass or General-duty, copper or
d. Maximum Flow Rate: 3 lpm regulated.
f. Mounting: Wall mounted, exposed.
g. Valve handle: Knob. As per AI sanitary ware manual.
i. Spout: Ø22 mm swivel tubular under-spout L.
j. Operation: Manual.
k. Accessories: Mixing valve outlet is included. As per AI sanitary ware
manual.
B. Janitor sink: (MS-2) Floor standing cleaners sink and utility faucet combination
with all needed accessories. (Reference IA code: - X-JS-351 / X-JS-451 / X-JS-
551).

1. Fixture:
a. Type: Floor standing cleaners sink.

b. Material: Stainless steel of thickness 1mm with base welded together.
c. Drain location: Back left.
d. Finish: Surface satin finished.
f. Without tap ledge and 40 mm rear upstand, 48 mm plug waste with
stainless steel overflow tube.
g. Accessories: Trap, stainless steel folding grid and rubber bumps are
2. Faucet: Wall mounted mixer (Reference IA code: - T-UF-351 / T-UF-451 /

T-UF-551).
a. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet

inlets with supplies; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
b. Body Material: General-duty, solid brass or General-duty, copper or
d. Maximum Flow Rate: As per AI sanitary ware manual.
f. Mounting: Wall mounted, exposed.
g. Valve handle: Knob. As per AI sanitary ware manual.
i. Spout: Swivel tubular spout.
j. Operation: Manual.
k. Accessories: Mixing valve outlet is included. As per AI sanitary ware
manual.
2.10 SUPPLY FITTINGS

Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with
potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Lavatory and Kitchen Sink Supply Fittings:
1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube

matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.
2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression
stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
a. Operation: Loose key or Wheel handle .
3. Risers:

a. Material: Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube or

ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible
hose riser.
2.11 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) offset tailpiece for accessible
lavatories.
C. Drain: Pop-up type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) straight tailpiece as part of faucet for
standard lavatories.
D. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) offset tailpiece for accessible kitchen
sinks.
E. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) straight tailpiece for standard kitchen
sinks.
F. Trap:
1. Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) for lavatories.

2. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) for kitchen sinks.
3. Material: Chrome-plated, and chrome-plated-brass or -steel wall flange.
2.12 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-

adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping

systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture
installation.
B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where
fixtures will be installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage

piping.
C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
D. Install pedestal lavatories on pedestals and secured to wood blocking in wall.
E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be

connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate
within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified
with fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 22
Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
F. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on
wide side of compartment.
G. Install toilet seats on water closets.
H. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet
spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include
adapters if required.
I. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower
arms.
J. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have a disposer. Install switch
where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
L. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting.
Install in sink deck on countertop at sink Insert location. Connect inlet hose to
dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.
M. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout
over sink.
N. Set bathtubs baths and shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout.
O. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and
waste piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
P. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section
"Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
Q. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-
type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture
color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste,
and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section

"Domestic Water Piping."
C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section
"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and
waste piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged

finishes.
B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers'

recommended cleaning methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in
writing by Employer.

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed

motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting

arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and
grounding lug; and coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
A. Comply with NEMA MG1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Comply with IEC 60034 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
C. Comply with IEC 60072 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Comply with IEC 60529 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
E. Comply with SASO.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise

indicated.
B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513

C. Motors shall be NEMA design B or design N or NY as applicable to IEC 60034-

12 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, unless otherwise recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for high torque applications.
D. Motors 0.746 kW (1 HP) and Larger: Three phase.
E. Motors smaller than 0.746 (1 HP): Single phase.
F. Compliance with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
G. Frequency Rating: Determined by the frequency of circuit to which motor is

connected, refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings .
H. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected,

refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings.
I. Service Factor: 1.15 according to NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1 -

continuous running duty to IEC 60034-1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,
unless otherwise indicated. Motors used for excessive intermittent periodic
operation shall be suitably designed for the expected number of starts. Motors’
dimensions shall comply with NEMA MG1 or IEC 60072 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards as applicable.
J. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to
start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated
environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding
nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
K. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to

NEMA MG1 or IC 411 to IEC 60034-6 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
as applicable, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer.
L. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled

(TEAAC) to NEMA MG1 or IC 611 to IEC 60034-6 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards as applicable or totally enclosed, water to air cooled (TEWAC) to
NEMA MG1 or IC 817 to IEC 60034-6 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
as applicable. Enclosure type shall be as recommended by manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer, unless otherwise indicated.
M. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 for outdoor use and
IP54 to IEC 60529 for indoor motors as a minimum.
N. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F)
ambient temperature, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for specific applications such as:
overhead cranes or submersible pumps, where temperature rise not exceeding 105
deg. C may be used.
O. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to
NEMA MG1 or Class I to IEC 60034-18-41 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards and shall be classified as energy efficiency to NEMA MG1 or high

efficiency class IE2 to IEC 60034-30 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
P. Include built-in terminal blocks..
2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1 or IEC 60034 and IEC 60072 or Equivalent BS/EN or

E Standards, induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1 or IECStandards or Equivalent

BS/EN or Standards.
2. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE3
to IEC 60034-30 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors
have separate winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class F for motors with temperature
rise 80 deg. C and Class H for motors with temperature rise 105 deg. C as
indicated in paragraph 2.1 M above.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor
terminal box to suit control method. Maximum permissible starting current shall
be 5 to 6.3 times the Full Load Current (FLC). (NEMA starting code F or G or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards) for motors rated 15 HP and above. For
motors rated below 15HP, starting current shall be as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and

features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller

output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class F insulation.
3. Insulation: Class F.
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to IEC or Equivalent BS/EN

or Local Standards requirements for thermally protected motors.

D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25
minimum service factor to NEMA MG1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,
greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings
are insulated with non hygroscopic material. External finish is chemical-resistant
paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to IEC or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.

2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit

starting torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B for motors located in air-
conditioned
5. spaces and Class F for motors located outside or in non air-conditioned
spaces.Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency – Class “eff1”, unless
Classification in accordance with the definition set by the “European
Commission of
Electric Machinery and Power Electronics Manufacturers”.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW
(1/20 hp).
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection

automatically opens power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature
exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal
protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal
range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high
radial forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other
single-phase motors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to motor

terminal box and use liquid tight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.
E. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC or

NFPA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards recommendations for “Hazardous
(classified) Locations”.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service - Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to supervise field assembly of components and installation of equipment units
including accessories and to perform test and inspections.
B. Common motors for HVAC will be considered defective if it does not pass test
and inspections.
3.3 COMMISSIONING
A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation.

Coordinate with the commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a
part.
B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and power.
C. Report unusual conditions.
D. Report current deficiencies of field-installed units.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of motor units that fail in materials or workmanship
within warranty period.

A. Deliver equipment according to manufacturers’ written instructions.
B. Store equipment indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect equipment from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive
substances, and physical damage

SECTION 230516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for HVAC piping systems.
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working

pressures, and temperatures.
B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and

selection and design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and
methods of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each
expansion fitting and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

legally registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516

kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for

installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating,

with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-
end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless
2. Joints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows
and brass shroud.
3. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows,
stainless-steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and
carbon-steel shroud.
B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with

internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.

3. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated for 1200 kPa at 116
deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.
1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external

control rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Types: double sphere.
3. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-

hose legs joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow
fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.
1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.

a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze

sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and
3450 kPa at 232 deg C (500 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure
ratings.
b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and
2. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.
a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
2.2 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed

for repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250
psig at 400 deg F) minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to
match piping system, drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and
flanged-end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2. Double-Slip Type: With base.
B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition

packing, designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725 kPa at
204 deg C (250 psig at 400 deg F) minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials Specifications," and with
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-
containing parts and bolting.

3. Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection
minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection
minimum.
2.3 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for
alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use
in hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with

hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate
for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-

component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened
concrete where fastener is to be installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on
stud, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.
C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to

partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in
temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected
equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to
piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1 or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards.
C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, or

otherwise required, and include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written

instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors
installed on or in concrete.
3.5 PAINTING
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

0.05 mm.

"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or ductile iron, with plain ends and integral water stop
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated or
Electro Galvanized.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, Schedule 40, zinc coated or Electro
Galvanized, with plain ends.
D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

Schedule 40.
E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness;

F. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer

surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517

G. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.

Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of

pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
or other equivalent alternative.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating
of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
4. For fire sealant, refer to Architectural specification # 078413.
2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for

imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar
with center opening to match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new
or -PP sleeves.

equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm)above finished
floor level.
sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified
in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm)
above finished floor level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified.
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe

penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete

slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150) Cast-iron wall sleeves;

Galvanized-steel wall sleeves; Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or
Sleeve-seal fittings]
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150)Cast-iron wall sleeves; Galvanized-steel wall
sleeves or Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
system; Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or

3. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-
seal system; Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system. Concrete Slabs-on-
Grade:
4. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150)Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-
seal system; Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system;
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Sleeve-seal
fittings. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with
sleeve-seal system; Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system;
Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system or Galvanized-steel-
pipe sleeves. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves;

PVC-pipe sleeves; Stack-sleeve fittings; Sleeve-seal fittings; Molded-
PE or -PP sleeves or Molded-PVC sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves;
PVC-pipe sleeves or Stack-sleeve fittings.
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves

or PVC-pipe sleeves.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for HVAC systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for
each meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range,

fittings, and location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying

accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified
requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
E. Operation and maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation
and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flowmeters.
3. Thermal-energy flowmeters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

1. Heating Hot Water: 0 to 100 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to
212 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
2. Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0
to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale
division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E1-07 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring
secured, 230 mm (9 inches) long.

D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to

suit installation.
2.3 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass
lens.

D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched

markings.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to

suit installation.
2.4 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass
lens.
C. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
D. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched

markings.

E. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit

installation.
F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.
2.5 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards; direct-

mounting, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Brass or Aluminum anodized with 110-mm- (4.5-inch-) diameter, glass

lens.

D. Element: Bimetal coil.
F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.
2.6 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, bimetal

type.
B. Dial: 25-mm (1-inch) diameter.
C. Case: Stainless steel.
D. Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3-mm- (1/8-inch-) diameter, tapered-end stem

with nominal length of 125 mm (5 inches).
2.7 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting
to hold fixed thermometer stem.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not
less than thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping
not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.8 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to
hold test thermometer.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
less than thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping
not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.9 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded

end for attaching thermometer.

less than thickness of exterior insulation.
2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not
less than thickness of insulation lining.
2.10 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.100 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, phosphor-

bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection; dry type, for all purpose use.
Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter,

glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of

vacuum to 15 psig of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

2.11 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.100 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, DN8

(NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material
suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.12 TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe
from dial-type thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200
deg F), chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to plus
275 deg F), ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers,
pressure gage and carrying case.
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the

system's operating conditions.
2.13 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves,
fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system
fluid.
1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of

equipment or system where used.
2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-
inch-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting
to flow element.
1. Scale: Liters per second (Gallons per minute).

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
C. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
D. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting made

for installation in piping.
1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and

attached tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50
(NPS 2) and smaller elements and flanged or welded for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2)
and larger elements.
E. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for

insertion into piping.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with

brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.
2.14 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in

piping systems.
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic

pelton-wheel indicator.
2.15 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
A. Instruments include turbine-wheel or ultrasonic flow-sensor element and meter,

two temperature sensors, transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery
pack, integral stop valves, strainer, and magnetic trap.
1. Construction: Bronze body.

2. Pressure Rating: minimum 860 kPa (125 psig) subject to suit operating
pressure.
3. Temperature Range: 0 to 121 deg C (32 to 250 deg F).
4. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatt
hours or joules (British thermal units).
5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
6. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.
7. Display: Visually indicates thermal-energy flow in kilowatt hours or joules
(British thermal units).

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written

instructions for applications where used.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up
central systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
5. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
6. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
7. Each duct thermometer support flange.
C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting

panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing
length.
D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed

thermometers are indicated.
1. Install with socket extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.
E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test

thermometers are indicated.
1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.

2. Install with extension on insulated piping
3. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct

thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at
most readable position.
B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.
D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure

gages.
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of

each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of

pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's
D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible

locations.
E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in

accessible locations.
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as
prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
3.6 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for
remote sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to
support meter.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow

2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and
devices.
C. Ground electrically operated meters.

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B or Equivalent
D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after

installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace
cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with
manufacturer's touchup paint.

SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves and Motorized valves common to
HVAC piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure
and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim
material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation
instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating

at least 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in
successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting,
servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in

Division 1 Section "Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations"
Paragraph.
B. ASME or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards

for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for power piping
valves.
3. ASME B31.9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for building services
piping valves.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents
referenced.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523

D. SASO compliance.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the
ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not
use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
G. SWP: Steam working pressure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified
below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full
extension of rising stems.

B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under
ground or above ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with
7.5 mm (300 micron) fusion bonded epoxy coating.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated in the "Application
Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and
temperatures.
D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following
special operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed
2400 mm (96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and
larger.
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended

stems arranged to receive insulation.
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain
connections.
H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for cast iron,
ASME B16.5 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for steel, and
ASME B16.24 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for bronze valves.
J. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards.
K. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18 or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards.
L. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall
be provided.
2.2 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125 or PN 16,
1380-kPa (200-psi) cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-
psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards cast-bronze body
and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem or non-rising
stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered
end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.

B. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125 or PN 16,
1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron or ductile iron wedge, brass-alloy stem,
rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly,
flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150 or PN 16,
4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, ASTM B 584 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard
port for DN15 (1/2-inch) valves and smaller and conventional port for DN20 (3/4-
inch) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and
seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Steel handwheel.

2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
3. Memory Stop: For operator handles.
4. .
2.4 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125 or PN
16, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP subject to
suit system operating pressure;; ASTM B 62 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards cast-bronze or brass body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon
disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut,
threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125 or PN 16,
1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP subject to suit system operating pressure;, ASTM A 126
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with
bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw
and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67,or PN 16, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, 1035- kPa
(150-psi) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem,
field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug, or grooved style up
to 12 inch and double flanged for larger sizes :
1. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron or Stainless steel.

2. Operator for Sizes DN50 (2 Inches) to DN150 (6 Inches): Standard lever

handle with memory stop.
3.
4. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) to DN600 (24 Inches): Gear operator
with position indicator.
5. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) and Larger, 2400 mm (96 Inches) or
Higher above Floor: Chain-wheel operator.
2.6 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125
or PN 16, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP;
horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
cast-bronze or brass body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or
composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125 or PN
16, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted non-slam,
bronze disc or cast iron disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
2.7 MOTORIZED VALVES
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
a. All valves shall be designed and manufactured for, continued operation

without seizure, cavitation, excessive vibration or strain; and requiring only
that degree of maintenance generally accepted as normal for the specific type
of valve required. Likewise the valves shall also be able to withstand long
periods of inactivity without detrimental effects on seals, etc.
b. The valve components that will require to be replaced at each maintenance
stage should be defined and considered.
c. All parts and components in a given type, size and rating of valve shall be
designed and built for inter-changeability so that replacement parts may be
installed without additional fitting or machining.
d. All pressure containing parts shall be designed to withstand the design
pressure, based on material thickness excluding corrosion allowances.
e. The mating surfaces of any sealing joints shall be fully machined after any
necessary stress relieving. A composite one piece gasket shall be used
between the mating surfaces. Metal-to-metal joints are not acceptable.
f. Joints requiring accurate re-alignment upon re-assembly shall have dowels
fitted, commensurate with valve size.

g. The Isolation Valves shall be required to operate under the chilled water,
heating water and condenser water design conditions as stated in the relevant
documents and drawings.
h. All valves of the same type, size and pressure rating shall have the same
face-to-face dimensions and the same flanges and shall be interchangeable.
i. Isolation Valves shall be designed to open and close against an unbalanced
pressure equal to the valve pressure rating.
2. PIPE CONNECTION
a. Pipe connections shall be integrally cast with the valve body.

b. Valves of size DN 50 and less, with pressure rating PN 25 and lower may
have screwed connections in accordance with ISO 7 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards.
c. Valves of sizes above DN 50 and other pressure ratings shall be flanged to
ISO 7005 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
d. Face-to-face and centre-to-face dimensions shall comply with ISO 5752 or
e. All bolt holes are to be over drilled by 2mm on the diameter to accommodate
flange joint insulation sleeves if required.
f. The front and back faces of each flange should be fully machined and shall
be drilled for through bolting. Spot facing of the back of the flange will be
considered to be an acceptable alternative to full machining of that face. The
sealing faces shall have a surface finish not coarser than 3.2 micrometers Ra
to ISO 468and BS EN ISO 4288.
3. FASTENING
a. External bolting shall conform to BS 4882, and shall be hot dip galvanised in
accordance with BS 729.
b. Internal fasteners shall be of compatible material.
4. LIFTING POINTS
a. Valves having a mass in excess of 50 kg shall incorporate suitable lifting

attachments for connection of lifting chain by means of 'D' shackles

5. LOCKOUT
a. All Isolation Valves shall have a mechanical, positive locking capability.

b. For electrically actuated, remotely controlled valves, the locking
mechanism(s) shall prevent operation manually unless the mechanism is
unlocked, whilst at the same time allowing operation by the control system.
c. All Isolation Valves shall be capable of being locked in the fully open and
fully closed positions.
6. MANUAL OPERATION
a. Where manual operation is specified, Isolation Valves shall be fitted with

lever arms or hand wheels, or stem caps for key operation. Lever arms and
hand wheels shall be positioned to be in either the horizontal or vertical
plane. Suitable gearing shall ensure that stem caps are presented in the
vertical position for operation by ring key and bar.
b. Hand wheels shall be sized such that the maximum force required to operate
the valve is 0.3 kN applied at the rim of the hand wheel, or in the case of ring
key operation, gearing shall be chosen such that the valve is operable by a
standard ring key and bar.
B. ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVES
1. ELECTRICAL OPERATION
a. Electrically powered actuators for the operation of valves can be mounted

either directly or indirectly.
b. The actuator shall be suitably rated for the valve, the duty and the
manufacturer recommendation regarding the torque requirements.
c. A clutch shall engage the hand wheel for manual use, and prevent hand
wheel rotation during powered operation.
2. LOCAL OPERATION
a. Actuators shall be suitable for remote or local operation electrically by push

button, and be fitted with a hand wheel for manual operation. A pad-lockable
"local/off/remote" switch on the actuator shall allow the mode of operation to
be selected. Local electrical initiation of operation shall not negate actuator
control of valve speed or safety functions. A clearly identified actuator
mounted stop button shall allow powered operation to be stopped with one
action. Local operation shall not negate the remote indication of valve and
actuator status and alarms.

b. Ensure the possibility to operate the clutch to disengage the motor drive in an
emergency. The clutch lever shall be pad-lockable in both the engaged and
the disengaged positions. Hand wheel operation shall have the facility to
hammer the valve off, or onto the seat. The direction of rotation of the hand
wheel for closing shall be clockwise. A plate shall be mounted with the
direction of opening indicated, and the word "OPEN" written in both
Englishand Arabic. Likewise a similar label shall indicate the closing
direction with the word "CLOSE".
3. ACTUATOR MOUNTING
a. Mounting of the actuator to the valve or pedestal shall comply with ISO
5210/ISO 5211 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
b. The drive mechanism shall be self-locking such that fluid and/or vibration
forces do not cause the valve, disc or gate, to move from any set position.
c. The drive arrangement shall be designed to transmit the maximum torque
induced by the drive motor.
4. SPEED OF OPERATION
a. Speed of operation shall be stated as the valve stroke time from fully open to
fully close.
5. ISOLATING OPERATION
a. Actuators that operate infrequently, i.e., at or less than one start per hour
shall be considered to be isolating duty.
6. FAILURE MODE
a. Unless otherwise specified, actuators shall "stay put" in case the actuator
control systems fail.
7. MECHANICAL VALVE POSITION INDICATION
a. The valve actuator assembly shall have a mechanical means of indicating the
valve position. Actuators shall be fitted with limit switches to indicate the
valve position (either OPEN or CLOSE), over a PROFIBUS-DP interface
with the Chilled Water Plant PLC SCADA System.
b. Limit switches shall be fitted as required by the actuator manufacturer, or by
the requirements of the actuator control circuits.
8. ENCLOSURE
a. Actuator enclosures shall have a degree of protection to NEMA 6P or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. The valve shall remain fully
operational under any flooded condition.

b. Actuator enclosures shall have an inner watertight and dustproof O-ring seal
between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements of the
actuator. This system shall fully protect the switch mechanism, motor and all
other internal electrical elements of the actuator, from ingress of moisture
and dust should the terminal cover be removed on site for cabling.
9. ELECTRIC MOTORS
a. Motors shall be of the squirrel cage rotor type, suitable for direct-on-line
starting. Enclosures shall be totally enclosed (non-ventilated).
b. Motors shall have Class "F" insulation, but with a temperature rise restricted
to that allowed for Class "B" as described by IEC 85 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards. Motors shall be rated with 4 starts per hour a minimum and
shall permit the valve to be fully stroked in the relevant time periods.
c. In-built thermal protection and anti-condensation heaters shall be provided.
10. MOTORS STARTERS AND CONTROL
a. Each actuator shall be provided with a mechanically and electrically

interlocked reversing contactor starter integral with the assembly. The starter
shall operate on 400 V (+ 10%), 60Hz (+ 5%) three phase supply.
b. Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of
appropriate size for the control and 3-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly
identified at each end. The terminal enclosure shall be separated from the
inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal. All
wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main
enclosure for physical and environmental protection. External conduit
connections between components are not acceptable. Terminal enclosure
shall be provided with a minimum of 2 threaded cable entries.
c. Switches and terminals having different voltages shall be segregated from
each other by insulating barriers.
d. Each actuator shall be provided with:
 Local/Off/Remote rotary selector switch (lockable)
 Momentary “Stop” push button (emergency only)
 Momentary “Open” push button (valve to open in local mode only)
 Momentary “Close” push button (valve to close in local mode only)
 Local valve position indicator
 Each shall be labelled in English and Arabic.
e. The actuator mounted stop button shall be a red "mushroom" type. The
starter control circuit shall incorporate over torque and open/close limit
switches for tripping the electric motor during over torque or at fully open
and fully closed positions.

f. Torque and limit switches shall be set prior to despatch from the factory,
consistent with the calculated values corresponding to the maximum
operating conditions.
11. REMOTE CONTROL AND INDICATION
a. Remote indication and control facilities shall be provided over a

PROFIBUS-DP or Modbus interface compatible with the PLC SCADA
System of the Chilled Water Plant as follows:
 Open and close valve status from limit switches
 Open and close controls
 Emergency shutdown (ESD) control
 Valve “Actuator Fault” alarm status, which shall be initiated under the
following conditions:
 Phase fault
 Power supply failed
 Control supply failed
 Local “stop” push button
 Local/off/remote switch not in remote position
 Motor tripped on overload
b. The facility shall be provided in each actuator to receive an 'ESD' signal.
This signal shall override all controls, local and remote and close the valve.
c. Labels in English and Arabic shall be provided for:
 Warning of different operating voltages within the actuator enclosure
 Actuator controls and indications
12. AMBIENT CONDITIONS
a. Actuators shall be suitable for mounting in exposed locations having high

solar radiation, shade temperatures up to 65°C, windblown sand and dust and
occasional heavy rain. Actuators shall also be suitable for subsoil chamber
mounting conditions of high humidity.
13. COATINGS FOR ACTUATORS
a. Standard heavy duty coating system(s) will be accepted provided they

comply with the following minimum requirements.
b. The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed coating system(s) for
review and approval by the Engineer prior to award of any contract or
purchase order. The Submittal to the Engineer shall include but not necessary
be limited to the following:

 Proven suitability of the coating system for an aggressive environment,

including UV resistance where required.
 The procedures and specification for substrate surface preparation,
coating application and quality control.
 Recommendations for surface preparation and coating application.
 The mean dry film thickness for each coating application and for the total
coating system.
14. TESTING OF ACTUATORS
a. Direct mounted actuators shall be tested at the factory, mounted to the valve
as an integral part of the assembly. The testing shall be conducted to ensure
that all requirements mentioned in this specification are met. Related test
reports and certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval
prior to shipment to site. All actuator functions shall be tested, signals being
simulated as needed to complete testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc
movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and
seats made accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check
bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper
size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and
damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings

C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow
servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished
floor elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel
wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside
of tube.
D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside
valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact.
Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or
overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around
the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal
seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except
where dry seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into
which the pipe is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges

and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and
downstream for proper shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except
provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved
end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe
and ball valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections
for specific valve applications and arrangements.
B. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125 or PN 16, cast-iron or ductile iron body.

2. Ball Valves: Class 150 or PN 16, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem
extension and memory stop.
3. Globe Valves: Class 150 or PN 16, bronze or cast-iron or ductile iron body
to suit piping system, and bronze disc.
4. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron or cast iron, aluminum bronze, ductile iron
disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
5. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150 or PN 16, with composition seat.
6. Check Valves: Iron swing as indicated. Swing check shall be Class 150
with bronze seat ring.

C. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125 or PN 16, cast-iron or ductile iron body.

2. Ball Valves: Class 150 or PN 16, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem
extension and memory stop.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125 or PN 16, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc;
or Class 125, cast-iron body.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron or cast iron, aluminum bronze,
or elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
5. Check Valves: Class 125 or PN 16, bronze body swing check with rubber
seat; Class 125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body
wafer check.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

tract, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equip-
ment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe

Hangers and Supports."
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
ter.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
ter.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component,
and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multi-
ple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations justifying
forces, sizes, embedments and characteristics of components and fabrication de-
tails.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529

A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pres-
sure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." or Equiva-
lent BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calcu-

lations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, by a qualified professional engi-
neer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated com-

ponents. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where
to use specific hanger and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have
field-applied finish.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are in-
dicated.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-

strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards calcium silicate with vapor barrier or
rubber insert.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards calcium silicate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumfer-
ence of pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of
pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operat-
ing below ambient air temperature.

A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attach-

ments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Stand-

ards, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-
cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for

both interior and exterior applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and

systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except

as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsu-
lated or insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to
DN900 (NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-
iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type sup-
port for pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjust-
ment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to
DN750 (NPS 1 to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused
by expansion and contraction might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65
to DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement
caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN1050 (NPS 2 to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN600 (NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expan-
sion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
DN50 to DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment dur-
ing installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe
risers, DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for
riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe
rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to vari-
ous types of building attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450
deg F) piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in pip-

ing system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment
to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom
flange of beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of
beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bot-
tom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attach-
ing to structural steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending
from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated
loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).
8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at
beam is required.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems sub-
ject to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior

voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufac-
turer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree
insert of high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength,
water-repellent-treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insula-
tion with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control pip-

ing movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does
not exceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of pip-
ing system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load
tion of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load
tion of piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid trans-
fer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or con-
nected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and
load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support
piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as speci-
fied above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel ac-
cording to AWS D1.1/D1.1M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.

Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69.
Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges,
guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. In-
stall concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install
reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manu-
facturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's oper-
ating manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and com-

pletely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping sys-
tems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate ac-
tion of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads
and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping,"
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards is not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may pro-

ject through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-
hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 or Equiva-
lent BS/EN or Local Standards.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor

barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoin-
ing insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor
barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm (12 inches) long and
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm (18 inches) long
and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm (24 inches) long and
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm (24 inches) long and
5. Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to

support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing
surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes
and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections

that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments

and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm (1-1/2

inches).
3.6 PAINTING
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1requirements for touching up

0.05 mm (2 mils).
"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and ap-
ply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M or Equivalent

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases and vibration
isolation roof curbs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of
isolator specified. Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional

engineer, for the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators,

design of vibration isolation bases, and selection of restraints.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages
and attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include
auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
C. Field quality-control test reports and equipment field vibration test procedures and
results.

registered and qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located
and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of vibration
isolation bases that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration. All

selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548

A. Wind-Restraint Loading:
1. Basic Wind Speed: Refer to Structure drawings.

2. Building Classification Category: Refer to report-category III as per SBC.
3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by maximum area of
HVAC component projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction, and
45 degrees either side of normal.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation devices with other

assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation

bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

These items are specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Noise Criteria:
1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall
not exceed following NC levels:
Type of Room NC LEVEL

Concourses Arrival/Departure 45
VIP lounges 38
Baggage Handling 45
Retail 40-45
Auditoriums, Theaters 35
Bathrooms and Toilet Rooms 40
Mosques 35
Conference Rooms 35
Corridors 40
Dining Rooms, Food Services/ Serving 35
Kitchens 50
Laundries 50
Lobbies, Waiting Areas 40
Locker Rooms 50

Offices, large open 40

Offices, small private 35
Shops 50
2. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans,
the Contractor shall select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria,
local ordinance noise levels, and ASHRAE or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards. requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in
accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2009, Chapter 8,
Sound and Vibration or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
3. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to
compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room
test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy
which may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as
furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room
attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power level
emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.
4. In the absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment
noise levels 0.914 m from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise
generation.
B. Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria: For each piece of machinery in the
human work environment, the maximum airborne sound levels shall not exceed
84 dB A-weighted scale, continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB peak sound
pressure-level, impact or impulse, noise. Unless otherwise specified the maximum
equipment airborne sound power level in dB shall not exceed the following data:
Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)

Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)
Equipment
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air Handling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79
Make-Up Air Fan 91 91 80 84 82 76 71 65
Air Conditioning Unit 100 96 90 89 86 80 75 72
Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Cooling Tower 110 110 105 102 98 95 92 87
Pump 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72
Fan 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37
C. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not

to exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second RMS,
filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in
vertical, horizontal, and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet
if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors
may be made at the mounting feet.

D. Materials: Rubber shall be natural rubber. Elastomer shall be chloroprene. Shore

A durometer measurement of both materials shall range between 40 and 60.
Where this substitution is made, specified deflections shall be modified by the
manufacturing source to accommodate physical characteristics of inorganic
materials and to provide equal or better vibration isolation. Weather-exposed
metal vibration-isolator parts shall be corrosion protected. Springs shall be
chloroprene coated.
E. Mechanical vibration noise is a common source of occupant complaints in most

buildings. Vibration noise would be transmitted from the equipment, usually
located on roof or mechanical rooms in basement, through building structure into
other spaces which can cause acoustic discomfort to occupants. According to
ASHRAE, any vibrating, reciprocating, or rotating equipment should be mounted
such that it doesn’t transmit significant levels of vibration into the surrounding or
supporting structure. Thus mitigation measures such as vibration isolation to all
vibrating equipment with its attachments like piping and ductwork are a must in
line with ASHRAE guidelines.
F. Noise and vibration energy from mechanical equipment could carry through the
building structure and transmit into adjacent spaces. Therefore, all vibration and
rotating equipment should be isolated from the structure, thus insuring no
significance disturbing noise is to be transmitted to areas within.
G. The table below illustrates the types of mechanical equipment, its locations,
structural span, power as well as the details of vibration isolation methods applied
in line with ASHRAE Handbook, 2015 HVAC applications, Chapter 48 Table 47.


2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of the equipment supported.
1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single

or multiple layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness to provide uniform loading over the pad area.
2. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less
than 2 mm per 25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa
(50 psig).
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant

rubber or neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates.
Factory-drilled and tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-
drilled baseplate for bolted connection to structure. Color-code to indicate
capacity range.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.

load.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size
baseplates to limit floor loading to 690 kPa (100 psig).
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable,

steel open-spring-type isolators.

1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring
extension due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled
baseplate for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Provide adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
load.
6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Hot-dip galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or

neoprene isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded
connections for hanger rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and
elastomeric insert in compression.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to

allow for 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on
lower threaded rod.
8. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate
capacity range.
G. TYPE S-I - Inertia Bases: Provide vibration isolation schedule inertia bases
manufactured from welded steel channels designed to receive concrete poured
into the steel frame. The steel frame shall incorporate pre-located equipment
anchor bolts and free-standing laterally stable spring mounts generally as
described under type S mounts.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than
25mm clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and
auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Include supports for suction and
discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A
36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger

isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves
and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt
templates from supported equipment manufacturer.
H. TYPE L-I - Inertia Bases: Provide where indicated on the vibration isolation
schedule inertia bases generally as type S-I except that the springs shall be type L
vertically restrained.
I. TYPE F-I - Inertia Bases: Provide where indicated on the vibration isolation
schedule inertia bases generally to type S-I except that the isolators shall be
moulded glass fibre isolators as described under type F mounts.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by
the isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power
transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes,
plates, and bars conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards. Include support brackets to anchor base to isolation units.
Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases
or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height
with not less than 25-mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural
frame. Pour concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide
for anchor bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight

curb designed to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 56-
m/s (125-mph) wind impinging laterally against the side of the equipment.
B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding,

unhoused, laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1. Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building

structure and include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material
and 50 mm of rigid insulation on the inside of the assembly.
2. Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to
permit leveling of equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly
with a rubber isolation pad. Locate spring isolators so they are accessible

for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without
interfering with the integrity of the roof.
3. Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials,
attached to the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of
the lower support assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for

compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-and sound--control products according to

B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation

bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation

bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete, and
trowel to a smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration

isolators.
F. Vibration isolation for rotating equipment and attached piping is to be generally

per ASHRAE Guidelines Specifications and details will be reviewed and project
specific types and performance will be established. All vibration isolators must be
sized according to weight, distribution, static and dynamic loads to be supported.
G. Select isolators with a natural frequency as far below the equipment operating
speed as possible to achieve the highest degree of vibration control.
H. Fans with wheel diameters of 560 mm and less and all fans operating at speeds up
to 300 rpm do not generate large vibratory forces.
I. For fans operating under 300 rpm, select isolator deflection so the isolator natural
frequency is 40% or less than the fan speed.

J. To reduce the chance of high-frequency vibration transmission in fans, air

handling units and packaged rooftop units, add a 25 mm thick rubber or glass
fiber pad to the base plate of spring isolators. The pad also acts as a barrier to
high-frequency noise.
K. All major rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment will require spring

isolation with a minimum static deflection as referenced in the table above.
L. Locate equipment as far away from occupied or sensitive areas as possible.

Otherwise, place it adjacent to areas such as bathrooms, stores, hallways to create
a buffer zone.
M. Locate heavy equipment near columns or heavy-duty beams.
N. Locate equipment on a properly designed base or rail, which is then mounted on

vibration isolators.
O. Allow 150 mm minimum clearance between any vibrating equipment and

building structure
P. Allow 300 mm minimum unobstructed space below supporting slabs or beams for
installation of vibration isolation hangers
Q. All piping connected to vibration-isolated equipment must be vibration-isolated

from the building structure within mechanical rooms or for a distance of 10
meters from the equipment, whichever is greater. For noise critical spaces, all pipe
runs require resilient mounts.
R. Isolation hangers should be used for all piping in equipment rooms and up to 15
m from vibration-isolated equipment and PRV stations.
S. Provide isolation hangers on floor mounts with the same deflection as the
equipment.
T. All other piping within the room should be isolated with 19 mm minimum
deflection isolator.
U. Any piping below or adjacent to a noise-sensitive area should be isolated with a

combination of spring and rubber hanger.
V. Locate the pipe shafts, anchors and guides in noncritical areas, such as next to
elevator shafts, stairwells and toilets.
W. Where concern about vibration transmission exists, some type of vibration

isolation support or acoustical support is required for pipe supports, anchors and
guides.
X. Select a spring deflection that is a minimum of 4 times the anticipated deflection

change with a 19 mm minimum deflection.

Y. Risers of 305 mm or less can be supported at intervals every third floor of

building.
Z. Pipe risers 365 mm and more may require support at closer intervals.
AA. Recommended to fill the annular space at wall and floor penetrations with fibrous
material or use an engineered sleeve, as they are normally overlooked as a
vibration path.
BB. Flexible connectors at equipment provide piping flexibility to protect equipment

from strain due to misalignment or thermal movement of piping. They can also
help attenuate noise and vibration.
CC. Spring or combination spring and rubber hangers are recommended whenever
ducts are suspended below or near a noise-sensitive area.
DD. Isolate the first 15 m from AHU or fan discharge and where the duct is supported
beneath or adjacent to a vibration sensitive area. Mostly recommended for large
ducts with velocity exceeding 25 fps.
EE. Flexible canvas and elastomeric duct should also be used at fan and AHU
discharge and intake.
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure.
Provide temporary load spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
9. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test
for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
10. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling
system.
11. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties.
12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal

operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so
they are out of contact during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at
operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of

operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written

recommendations.
I. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

tract, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes identification for HVAC piping and equipments.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond pa-
per. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag,
room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves in-
tended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Furnish copies for
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 aside from mounted copies.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for lettering size, length of color field, col-
ors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar con-
cealment.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Sections. If

more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Contractor's
option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data en-

graved or stamped.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,

operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and es-
sential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommenda-

tions of ASME A13.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Minimum letter
height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm for access door signs and similar opera-
tional instructions.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless other-
wise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according
to ASME A13.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-

coded, pressure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees

around pipe at each location.
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accom-

modate both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate
direction of flow.
G. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following

color codes:
1. Green: Cold-air supply.

2. Yellow: Hot-air supply.
3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
4. Hazardous Material Exhausts: Use colors and designs recommended by
ASME A13.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
5. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, re-
turn, and exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.

H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-

adhesive, vinyl tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.
1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm;
65 mm for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Stand-
ards, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system abbrevia-
tion and 13-mm sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum.

2. Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.
K. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with ab-
breviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-mm
center hole for attachment.
L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on ma-
sonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass.
M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock;
Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, un-
less otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes
for mechanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to

match equipment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the fol-

lowing color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by
ASME A13.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the follow-
ing:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving
conditions, and speed.
7. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 by

150 mm for equipment.
O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 85 by 145 mm.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION,
or DO NOT OPERATE.
P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations

used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use
numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and
maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multi-

ple systems of same name are indicated.
Q. WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
(1) Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechani-
cal engraving, 1.6 mm thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
(2) Letter Color: Black
(3) Background Color: Yellow
(4) Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 71 deg C.
(5) Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but
not less than 80mm by 40 mm.
(6) Minimum Letter Size: 13 mm) for viewing distances up to 1830 mm, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include sec-
ondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
(7) Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. Adhesive: Contact-type per-

manent
(8) Adhesive, compatible H. with label and with substrate.
(9) In paragraph below, describe required label content. The objective of label-
ing equipment is to coordinate it with Drawings, including plans, details,

and schedules. This will allow other information, such as capacities and op-
erating characteristics, to be obtained.
(10) Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergen-
cy notification instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of
flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1 or Equivalent

C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by follow-
ing method:
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by
following method:
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings,
and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according to the following:

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and ter-
minal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclo-
sures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termina-
tion.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15-m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to
7.5 m in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately
spaced markers.

3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, and HVAC
terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of units. List tagged valves
in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color
scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Chilled Water: 40 mm, round.

2. Heating Water: 40 mm, round.
3. Condenser Water: 40 mm, round.
4. Gas: 40 mm, round.
5. Steam: 40 mm, round.
E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Chilled Water: Blue.
2. Heating Water: Yellow.
3. Condenser Water: Green.
4. Gas: Yellow.
5. Steam: White.
F. Letter Color: According to the following:
1. Chilled Water: Black.

2. Heating Water: Black.
3. Condenser Water: Black.
4. Gas: Black.
5. Steam: Black.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each ma-

jor item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general catego-
ries of equipment:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
2. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
3. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorp-
tion units.
4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.

5. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units,

and similar equipment.
6. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
7. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, VAV boxes, fan coil
units, controls and components.
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.
9. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, and similar equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in ex-
posed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above
acoustical ceiling or similar concealment.
1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in

unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with
duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction
of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces
and at maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed or
concealed by removable ceiling system.
D. WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
(1) Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other
items where required.
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visual-
ly blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce
design objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including

submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to
specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and

equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and
equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system
and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment,
such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,

branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more
factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow,
whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to

yield repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593

F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the
suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted

conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the

performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those
presented when the fan was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters
or leaves the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or

equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing
and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Engineer's Notice to

Commence, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the
qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Engineer's

Notice to Commence, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report
as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below.
Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports

prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing,
adjusting, and balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing
report forms.
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified

by either AABC or NEBB, or another agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Employer's and the
Engineer's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members,
equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls
Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of
scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing,

adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare

certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the
approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent's report forms as approved by the Engineer.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national

standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB
Certification".
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or

more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.

A. Employer Occupancy: The Employer may occupy completed areas of the

building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Employer during
testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the
Employer's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems

and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC
systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing
activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air
and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and

to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing,
adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract of the

Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that
quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and
appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project

Record (As-Built) Documents."
D. Examine Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements

of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment
controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities
in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the
performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions
different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the
design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and
that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual
Specification Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated

balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control
devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly
installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing
and for efficient system and equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting

and balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed,

bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning
controls is ready for operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to

verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight.
Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of
diverting or mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and
straight fins.
P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the

suction piping.
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks
and controls.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended

controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness
of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in
multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-
way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of
sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract
Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system
reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different
from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design
values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures.
2.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-
by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify
the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are
required and access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system
operations can be met.
2.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the

procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes
to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.
After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new
materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according
to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification

material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control
levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
2.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors
and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required
outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the
return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing
dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
2.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and

exhaust-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume,
multizone, dual-duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air
systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this
Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm
listed by the fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as

practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the
flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as
near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and
downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of
the plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which

maintenance personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound
traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced
conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in
design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual
system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where
variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual
conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the
Engineer. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and
electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate
dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur.
Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to
determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
design airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper

and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable

for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal
outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within
specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet

manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within
specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers
rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances
of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
2.6 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more
than the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a
maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units
equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so
they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have

been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at

a position that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and
static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so
the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the
sum of the terminal unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static
pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge
duct losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design
airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit
manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total
airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as
described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional
reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the

condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the
return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the
static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure
adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.
2.7 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at
pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved
pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in
addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest
vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at
design flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure.
Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type,
unless several terminal valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-
balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
2.8 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for
positive-displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.
Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct
for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump
curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential
across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve.
Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake
horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance
data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the
pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor
nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-

pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve
flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as

follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design
flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest
percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest
percentage over design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage,
voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including
outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions

of balancing.
2.9 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above
for hydronic systems.
2.10 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL

PROCEDURES
A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary
system.
2.11 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of automatic
temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing
valves.
E. Record safety valve settings.
F. Verify operation of steam traps.
2.12 MOTORS
A. Motors: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Drives: Test for proper operation at

speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the
controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller
manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
2.13 CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
Record compressor data.
2.14 BOILERS
A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
2.15 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed
for less than 3540 L/s (7500 cfm).
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each
incremental stage.
5. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
2.16 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in

temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of
final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
2.17 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would
adversely affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature

controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and
valve operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device
positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the
speed of response to input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer
operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system
operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe
operations.
2.18 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
2.19 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract

Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the
adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and
additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance
measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems
and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed

procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of
deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a
separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving
multiple floors.
2.20 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard

bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and
balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified
testing and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the
following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include

approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the
following data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the
Contract Documents.
10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from
design values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the
following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum
pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution

systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the
following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in
mm (inches).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in
mm (inches).
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
i. Outside airflow in L/s (cfm).
j. Return airflow in L/s (cfm).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.

c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c. (fins per inch).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
h. Tube size in DN (NPS).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Average face velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Air pressure drop in Pa (inches wg).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
h. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
i. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa (psig).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
o. Inlet steam pressure in kPa (psig).
H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils
installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in kW (Btuh).
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
i. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
j. Minimum face velocity in m/s (fpm).
a. Heat output in kW (Btuh).

b. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
c. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).

f. Voltage at each connection.

g. Amperage for each phase.
I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in
mm (inches).
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in
mm (inches).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Suction static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram

with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Duct size in mm (inches).
f. Duct area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
g. Design airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
h. Design velocity in m/s (fpm).
i. Actual airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
j. Actual average velocity in m/s (fpm).

k. Barometric pressure in Pa (psig).
K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. m (sq. ft.).

b. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in L/s (cfm).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in m/s (fpm).
e. Final airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
f. Final velocity in m/s (fpm).
g. Space temperature in deg C (deg F).
L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include
the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

b. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Water pressure drop in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
M. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems,

stand-alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled
condensing units, include the following:

b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in kg (lb).
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg C (deg F).
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).

b. Outlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
g. Condenser water temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
j. Condenser water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
o. Suction pressure in kPa (psig).
p. Suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in kPa (psig).
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg C (deg F).
s. Oil pressure in kPa (psig).
t. Oil temperature in deg C (deg F).
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. The kW input.
x. Crankcase heater kW.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
N. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For steam, chilled water and hot-water

heat exchangers, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Service.

d. Make and type.

e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Ratings.
2. Steam Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Inlet pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Condensate flow rate in kW (lb/h).
3. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the
following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
4. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the
following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
O. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller
size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
f. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
g. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Required net positive suction head in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in mm (inches).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.

a. Static head in kPa (feet of head or psig).

b. Pump shutoff pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
c. Actual impeller size in mm (inches).
d. Full-open flow rate in L/s (gpm).
e. Full-open pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
f. Final discharge pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
g. Final suction pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Final total pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Final water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
P. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
f. Fuel type and input in kW (Btuh).
g. Number of passes.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
a. Operating pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Operating temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Number of safety valves and sizes in DN (NPS).
f. Safety valve settings in kPa (psig).
g. High-limit setting in kPa (psig).
h. Operating-control setting.
i. High-fire set point.
j. Low-fire set point.
k. Voltage at each connection.
l. Amperage for each phase.
m. Draft fan voltage at each connection.
n. Draft fan amperage for each phase.
o. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).

Q. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
2.21 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform

additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being
maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not
performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional
inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter
conditions.

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching
insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments;
and sealing compounds.

Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by
NFPA 220 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Adhesives, coatings,
sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except cellular
elastomers, shall have a maximum flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25 and a
smoke-developed classification (SDC) of 50. Flame-contributed classification
(FCC) shall be as specified for the application. These maximum values shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards and NFPA 255 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.

Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified temperature
ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures normal for the
surfaces to which they are to be applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of
each sample material.
DUCT INSULATION 230713



with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft training

program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.

to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84 or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards, UL-723 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, or NFPA
225 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer
and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.

a. One 3-m section of rectangular straight duct.

b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
c. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers.

Engineer.
application.



appropriate ASTM or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards or other approved
specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application

may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Insulation materials and including finishes shall be:
1. Of weatherproof quality for outdoor situations
2. Of sufficient strength if liable to mechanical damage or foot traffic
3. Resistant to vermin attack
4. Resistant to the growth of fungi
5. Protected manufactured and installed to prevent electrolytic action corrosion

or decay
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871 or Equivalent
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as

acceptable according to ASTM C 795 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.

E. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers or mineral bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from
kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density : 48kg/m3 (Excerpt for Air Totem insulation (It should be 72kg/m3)
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II or Equivalent BS/EN or
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density : 24kg/m3.
G. Minimum thickness is 50 mm for mineral wool insulation.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, (measured before factory
application or installation), minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all
surfaces. Minimum tensile strength, 6.1 N/mm width. Jackets used on insulation
exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without
sizing.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all

C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy

complying with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209) or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in
contact with insulation.
1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor
installation and 0.8 mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
paper.
D. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with

ASTM A 666 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, Type 304 or 316 ; 2.5 mm
thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

paper.
2. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.

2.3 VAPOUR BARRIERS
A. Where thermal insulation is applied to the outside of piped and ducted services,
equipment and plant used to convey, store or generate fluids or gases at
temperatures lower than the design ambient dew point temperatures indicated, a
water vapour barrier shall be provided. The vapour barrier shall be applied such
that it is continuous and gives protection to the whole surface of the insulation
which it protects. It shall not be pierced or otherwise damaged by supports or by
the application of external cladding. At points of support means of load
distribution shall be provided as necessary.
B. It is absolutely essential that the insulation and vapour barrier is applied in a dry
condition when there is no below ambient temperature liquid in the pipework
distribution system.
C. Provide a factory applied primary vapour barrier to all thermal insulation, on air
conditioning ducts, chilled and cold water services.
D. Internally the vapour barrier shall comprise a glass reinforced Class O aluminium
foil, 12 microns thick, incorporating a 5mm × 5mm scrim pattern, with a burst
strength of 400 kN/m². The water permeance of the foil shall be < 0.0006 g/(sMN)
and the joints and terminations to be coated in a brush applied vapour barrier
mastic to provide a complete seal.
E. The circumferential and longitudinal seams in the vapour barrier foil shall be
sealed with an approved pressure sensitive, 30 micron thick, aluminium foil
vapour barrier tape. There shall be absolutely no cracks, open joints or seams in
the vapour barrier foil.
F. For external locations or plant rooms subject to high humidity (greater than
80%RH) provide vapour barrier as indicated above for internal pipework but the
whole then to be clad with two full applications of a brush or spray applied vapour
barrier mastic coating with an open weave no 10 glass cloth between coats and
then finally clad in aluminium sheet.
G. Any evidence of discontinuity of the vapour barrier jacket shall be sufficient cause
for rejection or repair.
H. Repairs to the vapour barrier shall be carried out using self-adhesive vapour
barrier tape.
2.4 ADHESIVES
indicated.
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service

temperature range of 10 to 427 deg C.

1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L.
C. Phenolic Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature

range of minus 59 to plus 149 deg C.
D. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with D. MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Sealants are categorized into "joint sealants" and "flashing sealants." Joint sealants
are primarily used for vapor sealing longitudinal seams and butt joints of
insulation materials. Flashing sealants are primarily used for sealing jacket and
mastic materials.
B. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Phenolic Products: Subject to

compliance with requirements provide one of the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.

B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.

Fuller Company; 30-45.

substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: -73 to + 149 ° C.
5. Color: White or gray.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L

C. Aluminium Cladding Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. Idenden crylic Duct sealant 40-317
b. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.

c. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
d. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.

e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

substrates.
4. Service Temperature Range: -40 to plus 121 ° C.
5. Color: Aluminum/translucent.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L.
2.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate,

fireproofing board suitablefor operating temperatures up to 927 °C. The complete
system when installed is to provide for 1 hourstability, 1 hour integrity and 1 hour
of insulation resistance in accordance with BS 476-24 and ISO6944 or ASTM C
656, Type II, Grade 6. Tested and certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating by
anNRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. An acceptable alternative would be fire rated ductwork.
2.7 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct
hangers and supportsto maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install fire stopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I , woven glass-fiber fabrics,

plain weave, and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.


complying with ASTM C 1136 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 , Type 304 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards; 0.5 mm thick.

E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin,
and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin
length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate

for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a
holding capacity of 45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered
surface.
2.9 VAPOUR BARRIER MASTICS

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor B. or outdoor use on

below-ambient services.

following:
a. Idenden 30-150.
b. Foster Brand, 60-75.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.033 g/sMN 0.8-mm dry film

thickness. Apply a minimum of 2 coats
3. Service Temperature Range: - 46 to + 104 ° C.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by

weight.

5. Color: White.
2.10 INSERTS FOR INSULATED DUCTWORK BRACKETS
A. Brackets on ductwork which is insulated shall have proprietary made heavy

density phenolic foam (with zero ODP) circular rings or flat sections, of equal
thickness to the insulation, inserted between the bracket and pipe or duct. The
inserts shall incorporate a factory applied metal spreader plate and a Class O
vapour barrier. The length of the insert shall extend outside the bracket by at least
15 mm each side. Where pipework expansion takes place on roller chairs, the
insert shall extend the full expansion distance plus 15 mm and an outer galvanised
sheet steel casing of suitable thickness shallbe secured to the insert to prevent
damage. On ductwork systems operating at elevated temperatures the inserts shall
be suitable for the operating conditions.
B. Vapour barriers shall be continuous over the inserts and in the case of roller
chairs, under the outer galvanised sheet casing.
C. Ductwork insert density shall be as follows:
1. Density of ductwork below 1000 mm should be 80 kg/m3 and above that

120 kg/m3.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 1.0 mm thick, minimum 25 by 25 mm, aluminum

according to ASTM B 209M, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
B. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.61 mm thick, minimum 25 by 25 mm, stainless

steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove

materials that will adversely affect insulation application.


manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
thicknesses required for each duct system.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive
a vapor retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in

mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor

retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal
with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing
as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic
to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and
secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having
same facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with

ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at

floor support at top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal
insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates

per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of
fittings and transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal
ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from
insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm
o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply
additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at
cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,
rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel
with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape
matching insulation facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and
cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 50 mm on longitudinal seams and
end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of
450 mm o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full
insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-
oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to
insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange
with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for
insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of
fittings and transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from
insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm
o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply
additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at
cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,
rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
matching insulation facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and
cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full
insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as

closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation

on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit
the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to
insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange
with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or

insulation with factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and
joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw
insulation.
3.6 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket

as specified in Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow
3.7 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at
the end of this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
4. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of
building exterior.

5. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of

building exterior.
6. Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
7. Indoor concealed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
8. Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork.
9. Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and
sections.
7. Testing agency labels and stamps.
8. Nameplates and data plates.
9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 25 mm for ducts located in conditioned space & 50 mm for
ducts located in unconditioned space.
3. Number of Layers: One.
where exposed to view or in mechanical rooms at height of 3 meters or
lower.
B. Service: Return-air ducts and Exhaust air ducts.

C. Service: Supply/Return-air Totems.

2. Thickness: 50 mm (72kg/m3).
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed.

D. Service: Outside-air ducts.


lower.
E. Service: Rectangular, range-hood exhaust ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber board.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; stainless steel or
Aluminum jacket where exposed to view.
F. Service: Rectangular, dishwasher exhaust ducts.

2. Thickness: 25 mm.
where exposed to view at height of 3 meters or lower.
3.9 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts.

a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.8 mm.

b. Corrugation Dimension: 64 by 16 mm.

B. Service: Return-air ducts and Exhaust-air ducts connected to heat recovery units.



SECTION 230716 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract,

apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Field application for each equipment type.

2. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of
each sample material.

interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials,
sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.

with requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to

those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84 or Equivalent BS/EN or
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 230716

Local Standards, UL-723 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, or NFPA 225

or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a testing and inspecting agency

a. One chilled-water centrifugal pump.

b. One small tank, vessel or heat exchanger.
c. One balancing or pressure regulating valve.

Engineer.
application.

appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and
maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation

application.

1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required,
after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on
segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in

each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

E. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft
paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density: 48 kg/m3.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II or Equivalent BS/EN or
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density: 24 kg/m3.
G. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber

materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type II or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards for sheet materials.

manufacturer.


4. Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
6. Noise Reduction : Up to 27 L for 20mm thick insulation.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, unless

B. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy

complying with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209) or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in
contact with insulation.
1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor
installation and 0.8 mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
paper or textile jacket.
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, woven glass-fiber fabrics,

plain weave, and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local


E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin,
and washer manufactured for attachment to equipment with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate

for surface temperatures of equipment, and breechings; and to achieve a

holding capacity of 45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered

surface.
2.4 VAPOUR BARRIERS
equipment and plant used to convey, store or generate fluids or gases at
temperatures lower than the design ambient dew point temperatures indicated, a
barrier tape.
2.5 ADHESIVES
indicated.


temperature range of 10 to 427 deg C.

range of minus 59 to plus 149 deg C.
1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L
2.6 SEALANTS
mastic materials.
B. Joint Sealants:

compliance with requirements provide one of the following:



substrates.


following:



substrates.
5. Color: Aluminum/translucent.
2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove

materials that will adversely affect insulation application.


manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and
free of voids throughout the length of equipment.
thicknesses required for each equipment system.
Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket
in either the wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive
a vapor retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in

mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and

pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears,

and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
O. Insulate the following indoor equipment:
1. Chilled-water air separators (small tanks).

2. Chilled-water compression tanks (small tanks).
3. Chilled-water centrifugal pump housings.
4. Chilled water heat exchangers.
5. Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.
6. Chilled water, steam and hot water valves and accessories.
P. Insulate the following outdoor equipment:
1. Aboveground water storage tanks.

2. Aboveground fuel storage tanks.
Q. Omit insulation from the following:
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION
A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the
equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical
surfaces for tight joint. Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesive-attached anchor pins and speed washers on sides of tanks
and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. On tank and vessel, 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and
400 mm o.c. in both directions.
c. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads
of tanks and vessels.
5. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

matching insulation facing
7. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
8. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 75 mm.
9. Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and
other elements that require frequent removal for service.
10. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps,
and nameplates.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels:

Apply insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
A. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with
manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead
under lap and the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
B. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.6 FINISHES

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two
coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
A. Inspection: Engage a Contactor Quality Control Engineer, to perform the

following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,
jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

B. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing

insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with
requirements:
1. Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent
of chilled-water pumps, whichever is greater.
3. Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small
tanks, whichever is greater.
C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

D. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection
3.8 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the
end of this Section.
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.
B. Equipment: Chilled-water air separators, compression tanks, and chilled water heat
exchangers.

3. Insulation Thickness: 25mm
a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.6 mm

b. Corrugation Dimension: 32 by 6 mm

6. Finish: None.
C. Equipment: Chilled water pumps.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral-fiber board or Flexible elastomeric
3. Insulation Thickness: 25mm or 50mm.



6. Finish: None.
D. Equipment: Hot water pumps.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral-fiber board.
3. Insulation Thickness: 50mm

E. Equipment: Heating hot-water air separators.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric or Mineral fiber board.
3. Insulation Thickness: 25mm or 50 mm
4. .


7. Finish: None.
F. Equipment: Heating hot-water heat exchangers, steam-to-water converters, and

deaerators.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber board.
3. Insulation Thickness: 50 mm/


6. Finish: None.

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating
cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.

Materials to be used on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards requirements. Materials shall be asbestos
free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by

NFPA 220 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Adhesives, coatings,
sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except cellular
elastomers, shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke-
developed classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards and NFPA 255 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Coatings and
sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for

each type of insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
HVAC PIPE INSULATION 230719

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.
3. Jacket Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).


with requirements.


to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84 or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards, UL-723 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards or NFPA
225 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a testing and inspecting agency

a. One 3-m section of DN50 (NPS 2) straight pipe.

b. One 90-degree elbow.
c. One tee fitting.
d. One DN50 (NPS 2) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.

g. One reducer.

Engineer.
application.

appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade,
and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified
in Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required,
after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on
segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible

in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin

complying with the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1 or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, with factory-applied, all-purpose,
vapor-retarder FSK jacket.
a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

b. Density: 64 kg/m3.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II or Equivalent

BS/EN or Local Standards, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following
classes and grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-
fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for
bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic

for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195 or
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with
ASTM C 196 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply
with ASTM C 449 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-

rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I for tubular
materials and Type II for sheet materials or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.



manufacturer.
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 L for 20 mm thick insulation.
2.2 VAPOUR BARRIERS
equipment and plantused to convey, store or generate fluids or gases at
temperatures lower than the design ambient dewpoint temperatures indicated, a
barrier tape.

2.3 ADHESIVES
for bondinginsulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise
indicated.

temperature rangeof 10 to 427 deg C.

range of minus 59 toplus 149 deg C.


2.4 VAPOUR BARRIER MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;

comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor or outdoor use on below-
ambient services.
following:
a. Idenden 30-150.
b. Foster Brand, 60-75.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.033 g/sMN 0.8-mm dry film
thickness. Apply a minimum of 2 coats
3. Service Temperature Range: - 46 to + 104 ° C.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by
weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
mastic materials.

B. Joint Sealants:
compliance with requirementsprovide one of the following:
substrates.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L.

following:
substrates.
5. Color: Aluminum/translucent.6. For indoor applications, use sealants that
have a VOC content of 420 g/L.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, unless

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant all

C. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and
forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209) or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick.

paper.
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows;
same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth woven glass-fiber
fabrics, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local


2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.

manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

thicknesses required for each piping system.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe
runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive
a vapor retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal
and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special
instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in

mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe
and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by
the hanger, support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75-mm wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip and spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface
to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along
edge at 100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a

vapor retarder.

on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and
fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal
voids with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with

ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50
mm below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls,

terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

walls and floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously

through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Penetration
Systems.
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder

mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.

3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints
with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at
intervals of 4.5 to 6 m to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation
segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward
clinched staples at 150 mm o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic.

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlapping seams at least 25 mm, and seal joints with vapor-retarder
mastic.

2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply
mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a
thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials
with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with
manufacturer's attachement and accessories. Seal seams with tape and

2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber
blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to
packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For

check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without

disturbing insulation.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal
seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation
with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of
air to the pipe surface.
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe

insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of
insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in
insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 300-mm

intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least
75 mm. Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire
spaced at 300-mm intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at
300-mm intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of
installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and
press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm.
Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the
finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block
insulation of the same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.

2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered
sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with
stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.
1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body.

Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for
access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.
A. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 25-mm overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50-mm overlap at
longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed
water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation
manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and at end
joints.
3.8 FINISHES

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
3.9 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
3. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
A. Inspection: Engage a Contactor Quality Control Engineer, to perform the

following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,
jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
B. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after

installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with
requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is
C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

D. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection
3.11 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor

retarders, and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and
material, thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.12 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Condensate drain piping.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket where exposed to view or in
mechanical rooms at height of 3 meters or lower.
6. Finish: None.
B. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber or Flexible elastomeric
a. Pipe diameter 50 mm or less: 25 mm insulation thickness.
b. Pipe diameter 65 or larger: 50 mm insulation thickness.
c. Exposed pipe (all diameter): 50 mm insulation thickness.

lower..


6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.

6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
a. Pipe, DN50 (2-inch NPS) and Smaller: 25 mm.

b. Pipe, Larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS): 38 mm.
lower.
6. Finish: None.
3.13 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building.

Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in piping distribution
Sections.
B. Service: Refrigerant suction.


6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber or Flexible elastomeric


6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
a. Pipe, DN50 (2-inch NPS) and Smaller: 25 mm.

b. Pipe, Larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS): 50 mm.

6. Finish: None.

SECTION 230900 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Division 1, Division 14, Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division 26,
Division 27, Division 28 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
The BMS sub-contractor shall provide the Building Management System (BMS),
shall implement all features called for in this specification and shall implement the
necessary sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.
The Building Management System sub-contractor shall be responsible for the

integration of the BMS with the other low voltage building systems as detailed
hereafter in Scope of Works and the remainder of specifications.
The BMS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical contractor and

shall be a BMS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.17 "BMS installer
qualifications".
RELATED WORKS
The following disciplines contain requirements that relate to this Section:
HVAC
Plumbing
Electrical
ABBREVIATIONS
A/C - Air Conditioning

ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASC - Application Specific Controller
BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device
BTL - BACnet Testing Laboratory
BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block
BMS - Building Management System
BSI - British Standards Institution
CCR - Central Command Room
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) 230900

CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers

CPU - Central Processing Unit
CUC - Central Utilities Complex
DCP - Distributed Control Panel
DDC - Direct Digital Control or Direct Digital Controller
DDR - Double Data Rate
ELV - Extra Low Voltage
EP - Electric-to-Pneumatic
FAS - Fire Alarm System
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FMS - Facility Management System
HMI - Human Machine Interface
HVAC - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
ICT - Information and Communication Technology
ISO - International Standards Organization
ID - IDentification
I/O - Input/Output
ISA - Instrument Society of America (now International Society for
Measurement and
Control)
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode
LON - Local Operating Network
LSF - Low Smoke and Fume
MATV - Master Antenna Television
MCC - Motor Control Centre
NAC - Network Automation controller, BTL Certified as BACnet
Building Controller.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NPT - National Pipe Taper (pipe thread specification)
ODBC - Open Data Base Connectivity
OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer
OIW - Operator Interface Workstation
OLE - Object Linking and Embedding
OPC - OLE for Process Control
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
PABX - Private Automatic Branch eXchange
PC - Personal Computer
PCI - Peripheral Component Interconnect
PE - Pneumatic-to-Electric
PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PDA - Personal Digital Assistant
PIM - Process Interface Module
POT - Portable Operator Terminal
PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon)
RAID - Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks
RAM - Random Access Memory
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference

RH - Relative Humidity
RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
SAMA - Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SCBA - Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCPT - Standard Configuration Property Type
SCSI - Small Computer System Interface
SMS - Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging)
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
SNVT - Standard Network Variable Type
SOAP - Simple Object Access Protocol
SQL - Structured Query Language
SSPC - Standing Standard Project Committee
SVGA - Super Video Graphics Adapter
TDS - Technical Data Sheets
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UCPT - User-defined Configuration Property Type
UNVT - User-defined Network Variable Type
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAV - Variable Air Volume
VDU - Video Display Unit
VFC - Volt Free Contacts
VPN - Virtual Private Network
VFD - Variable Frequency Drive
WAN - Wide Area Network
XIF - eXternal Interface File
XML - eXtensible Mark-up Language
DEFINITIONS
Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem.
Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity, etc.).
BACnet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol

communication standard developed by ASHRAE (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012) and
which is now an ISO and ANSI standard. BACnet can operate over multimedia
including Ethernet, ArcNet and MSTP. The BACnet components shall be fully
compliant with British standards BS EN ISO 16484-5 (Building automation and
control systems. Data communication protocol), BS EN 13321-1 (Open data
communication in building automation, controls and building management. Home
and building electronic system. Product and system requirements), ANSI/ASHRAE
135-2012 and all other applicable codes.
BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated properties such
as a temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current value, maximum
and minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.

BACnet Conformance: A description of the capabilities of a device for

communicating information to other BACnet devices. It is usually a set of
requirements to be met in order for a device to conform to BACnet standards. There
are 6 levels of conformance for standard BACnet objects and services. The higher
the conformance class the more features that are covered. The BACnet devices
furnished under this sub-contract shall, at minimum, be conformance class 4.
BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB’s): A BIBB defines a small portion

of BACnet functionality needed to perform a particular task. BIBB’s come in pairs,
A and B, which reflect the client/server nature. The A BIBB represents the client,
i.e. the device requesting information or commanding an action. The B BIBB
represents the server, i.e. the device furnishing the information or executing the
command. For 2 devices to be interoperable the A BIBB and the B BIBB must be
the same.
BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol

communication standard which complies with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012 and
ASHRAE 135.1-2013 standards
Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON” condition
and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
BMS: This shall mean the complete Building Management System including the
components at the Field, Automation and Management Levels.
Component: Any individual element of the BMS furnished under this sub-contract
including hardware, software and materials.
Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install complete
HVAC control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks, sensors, PE and
EP switches and like devices. This also includes all wiring from node to node, nodes
to all sensors and points defined in the I/O summary shown on drawings or specified
herein and required to execute the sequence of operation. This does not include line
voltage power wiring.
Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate

system and component malfunctions.
Direct Digital Control (DDC) involves the connection of microprocessor-based

controllers to field level sensors and actuators. The signals received from field level
instrumentation are converted from analogue to digital format so that the data can be
used in software logic. Control signals are determined by software logic and they
are converted from digital to analogue format so that the final control elements can
be adjusted.
Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized and

independent of a central computer.
Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor, complete

with every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.

Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate

input data from one communications protocol to output data in a second
communications protocol.
Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the operator

to manage, command, monitor and program the system.
Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer between two

devices based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standard based gateway.
Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of different

types to share information with each other without losing any of their independent
functional capabilities and without the need for complex programming.
Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the BMS
controllers and workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not
require a gateway for protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected
on a peer-to-peer network using one of the approved LAN technologies such as
Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP or BACnet/IP.
Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a

communication bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all
control units. Additionally, a network provides central monitoring and control of the
entire system from any distributed control unit location.
Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer programs
and which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting,
compilation, storage assignment, data management and related services.
Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW consists of a high-level processing

personal computer and peripheral I/O devices that enable access to the PC and to the
entire Management Level Network.
Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that operate

on the same communications level of a network without intervention from any
intermediary devices such as a host or server.
Peripheral I/O: Input / Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the
computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals
include graphical display, printers, hard drives, disk drives and modems, etc.
Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate

network management, node commissioning, diagnostics and general operator
interface with the BMS.
Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in

application. An application creation software tool is required for an application to be
created and downloaded to the device.
Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of
“furnish”.

Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-
net or domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on
node address and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links
between power line, twisted pair, fiber, coax and RF media are sometimes referred
to as Routers.
Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a

technical committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard or Equivalent
Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are
intangible rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs
executed by the computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the
computer systems and encompasses any programs such as operating systems,
applications programs, operating sequences and databases. The term "software"
shall be interpreted to include firmware if, in the context in which it is used, the term
"software" does not exclude the use of read-only memory and the use of firmware
meets all of the applicable criteria detailed in these specifications.
Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to

client workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has
the ability to process information but data storage, applications and administrative
functions reside on the BMS server. The applications run on the server and screen
updates are sent from the server to the client. The thin client workstation displays
the screen updates and sends operator entered requests/commands via the keyboard
and mouse back to the server for execution.
Application Specific Controller: A controller generally designed for a specific

application and for a single piece of equipment.
Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and other
technologies to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.
XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.
XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-

up Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange
information over HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web
Service.
The above definitions shall apply to the words:

When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when they
are capitalized.
In the singular and in the plural.
In all grammatical tenses.

BMS ARCHITECTURE
The following is a general description of the BMS architecture. This description is

not intended to indicate the number of components and neither is it intended to be
the only acceptable BMS configuration. The description of the system architecture
is provided to illustrate the relationship between the various components. Different
BMS Specialists may have a slightly different topology that generally will be
acceptable provided that it meets the intent of these specifications.
The BMS contractor shall be responsible to provide any additional requirements

(Hardware & Software) to overcome any conflicts that may arise due to topology
changes by the system integrator. For the purpose of describing the BMS
architecture it is divided into 3 levels:
BMS Management level
BMS Automation Level
Field Level
The Management Level

The Building Management Level shall provide a means of interoperable
communication between the Extra Low Voltage (ELV) Building
Systems using BACnet/IP. This LAN is hereafter referred to as the
Building Management Level Network. This Network shall provide a
means by which the ELV building systems can exchange data in the form
of BACnet objects. It shall be BACnet/IP and shall be such that an
operator with the required access level shall be able to undertake
monitoring and control functions for any of the integrated ELV building
systems from any workstation that communicates with the BMS servers
residing at the Site Management Level.
It shall be the responsibility of each ELV building system sub-contractor,
to ensure that all the system data is available at the Management Level
Network in the form of BACnet objects. Each ELV building system sub-
contractor shall provide comprehensive and complete documentation
regarding the BACnet object ID, component IP addresses, databases and
other pertinent information. The intent is that any third party system
provider shall be able to read this data from the network and shall be able
to write data in BACnet format to the third party system.
The BMS Specialist shall provide comprehensive and complete
documentation regarding the BACnet object ID, component IP
addresses, databases and other pertinent information.
All Servers, Operator Interface Workstations (OIW), Operating Systems
and related applications shall reside on the management level.
The Network Automation Controllers (NAC) shall be part of the
Management Level Network.
As an exception, certain of the NAC shall be at the Automation Level
rather than the Management Level. If a third party system provides
monitoring and control for equipment that is also monitored and

controlled by a BMS DDC controller (such as chillers for example), then

the gateway between the third party system and the BMS shall be at the
Automation Level.
The third party ELV Building System Specialist shall
provide the interface / gateway, shall connect the gateway
to the data port at the third party Building System and shall
provide complete documentation to the BMS Specialist.
The gateway shall be a BACnet to third party protocol.
The BMS Specialist shall connect the gateway to the BMS
Automation Level Network and shall map the BACnet
objects to the associated DDC controllers.
The BMS Specialist shall provide the third party Specialist
with the BACnet object for information that is to be
transferred from the BMS Automation Level Network to
the third party system controller together with other
relevant information.
The third party Specialist shall map the points into the third
party system controller.
The BMS Specialist shall map the BACnet object IDs of
the third party system points into the servers. These points
shall be treated in exactly the same manner as any points
monitored/controlled by the BMS control panels directly.
The Automation Level

The automation level shall, primarily, include the DDC controllers that
interface with the field sensors and final control elements. It is
anticipated that there will be 2 types of Automation Controllers within
the BMS architecture:
Advanced Application Controllers (AAC).
Application Specific Controllers (ASC).
The BMS Automation Level Networks shall be BACnet throughout. No
other protocols shall be used at the BMS Automation Level. All AACs
and ASCs shall communicate on the same protocol.
The Field Level

The Field Level shall include the instrumentation interfaced to the
Automation Level DDC controllers such as the temperature, humidity,
level, pressure sensors and switches etc.
It shall also include the final control elements such as the valve and
damper actuators and the control relays.
All field level cables shall be in containment.
The control and monitoring signals between the Automation Level
controllers and the Field Level components shall be via industry standard

analogue ranges, except where detailed below, such as 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V,

4 to 20 mA, switched 0 and 5V, switched 0 and 10V, etc.
The Building management system provided shall include the capability for multiple
users to access the BMS simultaneously from remote locations via the internet.
Access for the remote assistance is subject to approval of stake holders concurrence.
Internet access shall be accomplished by use of standard Internet browser software
applications such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft internet Explorer and shall not
require the use of proprietary access software but shall be password protected.
Interface shall be to the entire BMS and shall provide the capability to monitor all
I/O and adjust parameters.
The supplied BMS system shall use an open architecture and fully support a multi-
vendor environment. To accomplish this effectively, the BMS shall support and
principally use only open communication protocol standards, and be able to also
integrate a wide variety of third party devices and applications via existing vendor
protocols and through the latest software standards.
Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC

system component complies with ASHRAE 135.
Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC

system component complies with BACnet-certified open protocol devices.
Must be able to use TCP/IP networking protocol and access all data using a standard
WEB browser such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer.
Workstation applications must be exchange and display graphically data supplied

through third party OPC (OLE for Process Control) Servers and BACnet
interfaces and shall be configured to accept data from the other intelligent systems
shown on the BMS Network Schematic in order to provide supplementary and
centralized graphics and alarms of this information in similar format to the Interfaces
for internal information on HVAC equipment.
The operator workstation must have the ability to support third party ActiveX
controls in an integrated environment.
The system must be configured and commissioned to export of data to the Planned
Preventive Maintenance program (PPM), facility and energy management
applications and business reports.
The main BMS backbone will be Ethernet . BMS controllers communicating on

BACnet MS-TP will be connected to BMS backbone through the gate way ( BACnet
/IP) to. The BMS workstations and Network Controllers will connect directly to the
BMS backbone. Network Controller sub-LANs will be open protocol such as
BACnet or equal and approved..

Comply with the following performance requirements:
1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current
data within 10 seconds.
2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current
data within 8 seconds.
3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator
command of a binary object and device reaction.
4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control
units or workstation within six seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds.

Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five

seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops,

and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain

measured variables within tolerances as follows:
a. Water Temperature: ± 0.5 ° C.

b. Water Flow: ± 5 % of reading.
c. Water Pressure: ± 2 % of reading.
d. Space Temperature: ± 0.5° C.
e. Ducted Air Temperature: ± 0.5 ° C.
f. Outside Air Temperature: ± 1.0 ° C.
g. Dew Point Temperature: ± 1.5 ° C.
h. Temperature Differential: ± 0.15 ° C.
i. Relative Humidity: ± 5 % rh.
j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): ± 3 % of reading.
k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): ± 5 % of reading.
l. Airflow (Terminal): ± 10 % of reading.
m. Air Pressure (Space): ±2.5 Pa.
n. Air Pressure (Ducts): ± 25 Pa.
o. Carbon Monoxide: ± 5 % of reading.
p. Carbon Dioxide: ± 50 ppm.
q. Electrical: ± 5 % of reading.

SCOPE OF WORKS
The specialist BMS Contractor shall provide a Building Management and

Automatic control System for the building services installations to include Power
Distribution, sequence control and Environmental control of the plant and
equipment. The BMS Contractor shall ensure the new BMS system is compatible
the existing BMS systems to allow the two systems to communicate and in the
longer term to enable existing systems to be migrated across to the new BMS
system. The BMS system design shall be detailed and finalized by the BMS
specialist subcontractor in line with the requirements of the full project MEP
services specifications and drawings. The specialist subcontractor shall also supply
all materials, install, and commission and finally set up, adjust and tune the
installation to meet intent of the performance specification and the Building User’s
operational requirements. Unless indicated otherwise use control components and
equipment from one manufacturer throughout. The BMS system specialist
Contractor shall take due account of possible phasing of the works and shall agree
a program for completion in stages with the MEP subcontractor. The BMS
subcontractor shall make sure that the system allows for expansion by up to 20% in
the number of points without additional hardware. The specialist shall include in his
tender price for all the control panels required for all the plant indicated in the
drawings, schedules and specifications. Ease of use and appropriate and intuitive
human interfaces for a layperson is a key requirement of this specification and such
devices shall be selected with attention to detailed performance and good
architectural fit. These devices must be approved by the contract administrator and
architect before use.
Provide a complete BMS turnkey installation as detailed in the sections of this

specification. The BMS shall comprise at minimum, the following components:
Tie in to existing BMS Servers and mapping the BACnet objects of TR3,
TR4 & TL3.
Operator Interface Workstations (OIW)
Portable Operator Terminals (POT)
Local Area Networks (LAN)
Network Automation Controller (NAC)
Distributed Control Panels (DCP)
Advanced Application Controllers (AAC)
Application Specific controllers (ASC)
Field Instrumentation including intelligent sensors
Automatic Valves
Dampers
Actuators for automatic valves and dampers
Routers, Hubs, Switches, gateways, software as well as all other
accessories or equipment necessary to implement the required interfaces
with third party systems.

Software as detailed herein

Low Voltage Cables (Less than 240V)
All power supplies, interlocking and control relays and other components
as well as material and services required for a complete and fully
operational turnkey BMS installation in line with the specifications.
The BMS subcontractor shall coordinate the interface between his
network and the building’s converged data network installed by the ICT
specialist.
Map the BACnet objects into the servers and present data for the third party ELV
Building Systems that are integrated at the BMS Automation Level.
The BMS shall meet the following general criteria:

Computer based.
Fully networked.
Real time.
Distributed processing.
No single point of failure.
All components of the BMS at the management level and at the automation level,
except for the Application Specific Controllers (ASC), shall operate on UPS. The
BMS contractor shall not provide the UPS. The BMS contractor shall coordinate
with the Electrical contractor for the UPS outlets dedicated for the BMS as indicated
on the electrical design drawings. The building contractor shall provide the UPS
outlets for all the BMS panels installed within terminal TR3, Terminal Link TL3 &
Terminal TR4.
The BMS contractor shall show the power supply / UPS load
requirements for each DCP on the submitted riser diagram
The BMS contractor shall submit the calculated UPS loads for approval.
The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the BMS
manufacturer that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any
components that become available before the on-site commencement of installation
then these shall be offered by the BMS Specialist to the Employer at no additional
cost to the Employer. The Employer shall have the option to accept or decline the
offer. The components offered shall have been in successful operation in at least 2
similar applications for a minimum of 12 months.
The BMS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the legal
operation of the BMS.
Provide adequate earthling on all equipment to prevent the build-up of

electromagnetic voltage potentials. Provide screening of panels, enclosures, devices,
or components that emit interferences. All monitoring and control and
communication cables shall be screened with one end earthed.

Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-contract:
Warranty and service during the defects liability period.
Submittals, samples and record documentation.
Comprehensive commissioning and testing.
Detailed theoretical and practical training services for the Supervisors
and Operators.
Coordination with other site Specialists.
Reporting to the Employer and Engineer for the coordinated and timely
execution of the Work
Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation and
method statement for third party systems. The BMS Specialist shall
provide separate interoperability documentation at the end of execution
of the project, which shall detail integrating BACnet objects, controllers
or gateways from any manufacturer, connecting all the hardware of the
proposed system to another BACnet system server or link all the data in
the proposed BMS to another system with all their attributes. This
document shall also include the BACnet Object ID of all the objects
captured or generated by the system, database documentation, querying
methods and full documentation to read and write BACnet data with
another system.
The BMS Controls System Specialist Contractor shall provide the following
minimum services.
Provide wiring and layout diagrams for all motor control panels
indicating all necessary power and control circuitry. All wiring is to be
indicated including "internal" wiring and "field" wiring to remote
devices. Details to be coordinated with as-manufactured details from
other contract divisions and parties.
Provide and select all control valves and control dampers with suitable
actuators according to Authority, flows and static and differential
pressure ratings required. (Installation by MEP Subcontractor).
Provide, install and commission all air compressors, receivers, tubing,

wiring, interfaces, dampers and pneumatic actuators required to control
stair pressurization.
Provide resources to install and finally terminate all field controls
devices and wiring.
Provide supervision during installation of control devices to ensure
correct incorporation into the Works.
Provide resources necessary to commission the control systems and
provide test results and Documentation for approval.
Provide a detailed description of operation of the control systems with
operating parameters, set points and interfaces with other systems.

Provide thorough client instruction and clear and concise operating and
maintenance manuals and troubleshooting or the control system.
Provide wiring diagrams showing connection details to all field located
devices.
Update drawings and other material as necessary to suit plant and
equipment actually installed.
Provide specific routines and specialist software to suit the performance
requirements of this Specification.
Provide all hardware necessary to comply with this performance
specification.
Provide resources necessary to label and identify the complete control
system.
Provide all software to control systems in accordance with the
performance requirements of this Specification.
Provide a simple user guide specially written for the use of ordinary non-
technical occupants of the apartments and offices which will explain
clearly the operation of the air conditioning controls in layman’s terms.
The BMS subcontractor shall co-operate and co-ordinate with other
divisions
K. Performing work on this project as necessary to achieve a complete operational

installation. The BMS subcontractor shall also consult the drawings and
specifications of all trades to determine the nature and extent of others’ work.
L. It will be the duty of the BMS subcontractor to work in co-operation with other
Contractors, and with other sub-contractors, rendering assistance and arranging the
works so that the entire project will be delivered in an expeditious, professional and
timely manner.
M. The BMS system is required to interface with the other equipment manufacturers
such as chillers, boilers, packaged air conditioning units, fan coil units, pump speed
controllers etc. such that all the manufacturer’s standard operating parameters are
available for display and adjustment via the BMS system.
N. The BMS shall support the Distributed Server Architecture (DSA).
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
The BMS sub-Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the work of
all other trades on the project.
Any task related to the BMS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified in this
document as being the responsibility of another trade shall be the responsibility of
the BMS sub-Contractor.

BMS EXPANSION
The BMS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent (20%) additional

hardware (field) points without adding controllers. The number and type of the
installed spare points shall be uniformly distributed between the installed controllers.
Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of new sub
networks and associated routers, gateways, etc.
Each BMS as installed shall be expandable, at minimum, to incorporate the

following in addition to the above:
A minimum of 200 percent additional hardware (field) points with the
addition of NAC, DCP, Routers, Gateways and ASC.
A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to
those required to meet these specifications.
A minimum of 10 No. additional interfaces to low voltage building
systems of a similar nature to those integrated under this contract.
Subsequent to the potential expansion detailed above:

The BMS performance shall not be degraded in any manner and shall
meet all performance criteria detailed in these specifications.
Equipment installed under this sub-contract shall not become redundant
as a result of implementing these BMS expansion requirements.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Prepare an itemized listing of all shop drawings and equipment documentation

submittal data for the Project including all required submissions identified
throughout the Contract Documents. The itemized listing shall include a shop
drawing sheet number or equipment documentation submittal number, reference to
the specific Specification section and description of the shop drawing or equipment
documentation submittal item. Submit the itemized listing within two (2) weeks
after commencing work.
Prepare all shop drawings, diagrams, equipment and device schedules, equipment
technical data sheets and software information necessary to ensure compliance with
the Specifications. Submit all shop drawings and equipment documentation
submittal data for the work within 1 months of receiving the notice to proceed except
the cable and containment shop drawings detailed below which shall be submitted
within 15 days of the notice to proceed.
The following information shall be included on the cover page for each shop drawing
and equipment documentation submittal:
Project name.
Date.
Submittal number and re-submittal (revision) number as appropriate.

Name and address of Engineer.

Name and address of Employer.
Name and address of BMS contractor.
Name and address of supplier or vendor if appropriate.
Name of manufacturer.
Reference to the applicable Specification Section by name and number.
Stamped and signed coordination certification stamp.
Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, minimum A1 plot size. Drawings shall
include diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures, equipment details
and software descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum,
the shop drawings shall include:
BMS topology schematic.
Installation drawings and schedules.
DCP, ASC and other panel layouts, including floor plan location and
interconnection drawings.
Field instrumentation locations on floor plan drawings.
Schematic of systems indicating instrumentation locations.
Installation details on scaled drawings including mounting, routing and
wiring elements including bases and special construction.
Schedule of cabling including details of proposed cable types.
Composite drawings of all motor starter terminal strips and damper
terminal strips indicating all existing and new wiring by all contractors
on the motor terminal strip.
Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and
model number.
Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves,
and control devices.
Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and
labeling.
Written description of sequence of operation and IO list.
SUBMITTALS
Equipment submittals shall include design, performance and installation details for
all aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the equipment documentation
submittals shall include:
Equipment technical data sheets with mounting and installation details.

Central monitoring and control equipment details.

Operator terminal specifications and data sheets.
Software specifications and descriptions including operating sequences.
Field sensor and instrumentation specification sheets.
Dampers, damper actuators and Damper Interface Unit (DIU) drawings.
Valves and valve actuator specification sheets and valve schedules.
Details of PID and other appropriate control algorithms.
Proposed Graphical Display schematics.
Equipment Technical submittal shall include the following information.
1. Description of the control systems indicating all set points, alarm conditions, time
schedules and the exact method of control for each plant or system.
2. BMS topology showing all DDC controllers, operator workstations, networks
repeaters, and network wiring.
3. One-line schematics and system flow diagrams showing the location of all control
devices.
4. Points list for each DDC controller, including: Tag, Point Type, System Name,
Object Name, Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller Type, Address, Cable
Destination, Module Type, Terminal ID, Panel, Slot Number, Reference Drawing,
and Cable Number.
5. Vendor’s own narrative for each sequence of operations, to include the following:
a. Sequences shall reference input/output and software parameters by name
and description.
b. The sequences of operations provided in the submittal by the BMS
Contractor shall represent the detailed analysis needed to create actual
programming code from the design documents.
c. Points shall be referenced by name, including all software points such as
programmable set points, range limits, time delays, and so forth.
d. The sequence of operations shall cover normal operation and operation
under the various alarm conditions applicable to that system.
Data sheets of all equipment used. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:
DDC panels, peripherals, sensors, detectors, switches, actuators,
dampers, valves, meters, control air system components, and so forth.
Range and scale information for all transmitters and sensors. This sheet shall clearly
indicate one device and any applicable options. Where more than one device to be
used is on a single sheet, submit two sheets, individually marked. The
range of the instrument should be selected to ensure the expected
measured values lie at approximately 2/3 of full scale.

The BMS sub-contractor shall not implement Operating sequences until the Engineer
has given approval. The BMS sub-contractor shall make any changes to the
operating sequences as requested at the shop drawing stage and as requested by the
Engineer following their implementation up to the issue of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion at no additional cost to the Employer.
All literature pertaining to a particular item, piece of equipment or installation shall

be submitted at one time and shall be specifically prepared for this project. General
sales information brochures shall not be acceptable. Each equipment documentation
submittal shall be properly marked with service or function, any options available
that are not to be provided shall be crossed out or options that will be provided shall
be highlighted.
Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from the
specifications will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the
specification requirements shall be rejected. Before equipment, devices and
materials are installed, they shall have submittals that are stamped by the Engineer
“Approved” or “Approved as Noted”. Submittals stamped “Approved” or
“Approved as Noted” shall not relieve the contractor from the requirements to
comply with the complete requirements of the Specifications. Corrections or
modifications to the work because of errors and/or omissions shall be at the
contractor’s expense.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control A. device.
Indicate dimensions capacities, performance characteristics, electrical
characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and start up instructions for
each type of product indicated.
1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,

manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator
workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units,
transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control
panels, and operator interface equipment.
2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system

software, operator interface colour graphics, and other third-party
applications.
3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product. Include written description of
sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor prior to
submission to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a rubber stamp
that states: "I hereby certify that the equipment shown on this shop drawing, product
data and or sample, complies in all respects with the requirements of the
Specifications for this Project. I further certify that all data shown here-on as to
performance, dimensions, construction, materials and other pertinent items is true
and correct."
(Name of the BMS sub-Contractor)
Signed:

Position:
Date:
Each submittals shall be reviewed by design consultant and shall be affixed.
Moreover design consultant shall review and endorse any substitute material before
requesting for review and acceptance by the Engineer.
WARRANTY AND SERVICES DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
The warranty period for all components of the BMS and their installation shall be 2
years following the date of completion of the project.
Any material furnished by the BMS sub-contractor which is defective or fails during
normal operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired) immediately
by the BMS sub-Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the period
prior to the issue of the certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.
Repair work shall only be undertaken at times approved by the Employer.
Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects Liability
Period. The cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability
Period shall be provided separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.
Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer placing a
system trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component, non-
functioning controller, etc.).
Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be within 24
hours for items not requiring immediate attention.
Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the BMS system or component failure
shall begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and Employer.
Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard product
offerings from the BMS Specialist and/or BMS equipment vendors during the
Defects Liability Period shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together
with the cost and, if the Employer wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any
time during the Defects Liability Period, software patches that correct software
errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall
be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE DURING THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

(OPTIONAL PRICE)
Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the initial
warranty period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base
tender pricing. The maintenance services shall cover routine preventative
maintenance and shall not include emergency maintenance or the cost of materials
that are to be covered by the warranty.

Schedule maintenance and repair works with the Employer’s representative to

prevent interference with normal building activities.
During routine maintenance components of the BMS shall be selectively inspected

and serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum, preventative
service inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period.
Perform, at minimum, the following during each preventative service inspection:
Verify the proper operation of the workstations including:
Cooling fans
Power supplies
PC diagnostics
Clean housings, keyboard, etc. Change or clean filters.
Verify proper operation of each digital controller and network. Clean
enclosures.
Verify the satisfactory operation of at least 25 percent of each type of
field device including valves and dampers. All field devices shall be
checked at least once during the initial Defects Liability Period and shall
be calibrated and adjusted as necessary.
Provide a comprehensive written report to the Employer indicating the
results of each inspection and all repairs and adjustments made.
Perform complete backup of all software.
The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall include
20 hours per year of programming changes to the BMS as requested by the
Employer.
Update as-built documentation, submitted at the time of taking-over of the Works as

necessary to reflect any changes that may have been introduced during the Defects
Liability Period.
Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance during the
Defects Liability Period in the tender submittal.
The BMS Specialist shall maintain an inventory of common components in the local
office for the replacement of failed components as detailed under “Spare Parts”.
Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the following
components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of
replacement components will be provided within the specified time periods.

BMS Component Delivery Time

Workstation Computer Equipment:
a. Server computer components. Five (5) days
b. Operator Workstations and Five (5) days
components.
c. Management and automation levels One (1) day
BMS
communication LAN components
including
any hubs, network interface cards,
bridges,
routers, protocol converters,
termination
plugs, etc.
NAC. Two (2) days
ASC and DDC. Two (2) days

Temperature sensors. One (1) days
Any other items of instrumentation. Two (2) days
During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum
of 10% spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under this contract.
At the end of the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over DDC,
NAC and ASC of each type to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to
10% of the number of installed DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site
under this contract.
During the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall maintain a minimum
of 10% spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At the end of
the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors of each type
to the Employer, which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed
sensors of each type installed on Site under this contract.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AFTER THE DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

EXTENSION (OPTIONAL PRICE)
Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the maintenance
during that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance service
contract shall be an all-inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves
the right to obtain parts from alternative sources.
The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as those
detailed in paragraphs "warranty and services during the defects liability period" and
"routine maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".
The BMS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer to provide
the maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The Employer
shall have the option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The BMS

Specialist shall submit the cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the
following ways:
A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between
labor and parts, OR
A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a
break-out between labor and parts for the first year and:
A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor portion of the
cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years
And a percent value or a table of percent values that the parts portion of
the cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years, or A
fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-
out between labor and parts for the first year with the annual increase for
labor and parts over the succeeding nine (9) years based on the annual
percent increase in a cost of living index from one year to the next, the
cost of living index to be used is to be specified by the BMS Specialist
in the tender submittal.
If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that correct
software errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and
they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BMS Specialist shall maintain a
minimum of 10% spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under
this contract. At the end of the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall
hand over DDC, NAC and ASC of each type to the Employer which shall, at
minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed DDC, NAC and ASC of each
type installed on site under this contract.
During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BMS Specialist shall maintain a
minimum of 10% spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract. At
the end of the Defects Liability Period the BMS Specialist shall hand over sensors
of each type to the Employer, which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the
number of installed sensors of each type installed on Site under this contract.
CODES, PERMITS AND APPROVAL
Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and certificates
shall be made available to the Employer.
The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other authorities
having jurisdiction shall be met.
Work shall be performed in compliance with Employer's insurance underwriters'

requirements.
All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials
and Methods”.

All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to IEC 60529 such that live
components cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at
minimum, IP 45 to IEC 60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65
to IEC 60529 unless specifically noted otherwise within these documents.
The BMS Specialist shall only offer equipment that meets UL 916 requirements and
all electrical components shall be UL listed and shall carry the UL label.
The BMS shall be listed and manufactured to ISO 9001 and ISO 9002 or Equivalent
All electrical installation work shall conform to the requirements specified in the
electrical trade contract documents. Where there is any conflict between the
requirements of the different project trade contract documents, statutes, codes,
regulations, local ordinances and any requirement of an agency having jurisdiction
over the project, the most stringent requirement shall apply unless determined
otherwise by Engineer. Advise the Engineer of any discrepancy between the various
requirements for the project.
Each component shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Manufactured by experienced manufacturers of the specific component
and facilities.
Designed to minimize the requirement for field repair or maintenance.
Modular design.
Electronic components shall have internal failure diagnostics.
Each component shall be maintainable without significantly affecting the
ongoing operation of the other components.
Components, test ports and cable terminations shall be readily accessible.
Damage caused by the failure of one component will be limited to the
component that has failed without affecting the ongoing operation of the
other components.
Analytic software applications to optimize the building’s performance,
fault detection and diagnostics shall be adopted by the BMS contractor.
Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance requirements of

the specifications when exposed to the following interferences:
Project lighting, telephone and elevator equipment.
VHF and UHF signals as generated by external or internal portable or
fixed transmitters.
AM signals as generated from transmitters?
Electrical noise on the building power system, both spurious and
harmonics.
The installations shall not radiate signals that cause interference to the
correct operation of The Employer’s on-site equipment.

The BMS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and

components shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61000-6-3
(General Emission Standard) and IEC 61000-6-1 and 2 (General
Immunity Standard), the requirements of the Federal Communication
Commission rules and regulations Part 15, sub part J and all other
applicable codes and statutes with respect to the radiation and conduction
of radio frequency interference.
SCHEDULE
Complete all requirements of the BMS sub-contract in accordance with the project
program and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.
Attend project meetings as requested by the Engineer.
Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work, durations of

individual tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and detail any
interface that must be coordinated with any other Specialists.
Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable to the
Engineer. An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.
Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing or work
overtime as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere with
other on-site Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule. Confirm,
prior to tender submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services proposed
are available and will be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project Schedule.
Provide written Request for Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer when specific
information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request for Information
notices shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the information.
BMS INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
The BMS specialist shall:

Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of trained
personnel capable of giving instructions and providing routine and
emergency maintenance on the BMS, all components and
software/firmware and all other elements of the BMS.
Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of
equivalent systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years in the project
area.
Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the total
BMS that shall be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours,
7 days a week.
Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to, supplies
of essential expendable parts.

Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance personnel

as per the Employer’s requirements.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety Commission
and with all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.
UNIT PRICES
The BMS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete BMS. In addition,
the BMS specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment installed
under the contract in sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the
contract to be priced by the Employer.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the term

"equal and approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer
will be allowed, but the substituted product must conform to all specified
requirements. The Engineer’s determination on the acceptability of substitutes shall
be final. Approved substituted equipment shall conform to available space
requirements. Substituted equipment that does not conform to the available space
requirements shall be replaced or required modifications shall be made at no
additional cost to the Employer.
All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All components
of one type shall be products of one manufacturer (temperature sensors, dampers,
etc.).
Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available

that does not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as determined by
the Engineer, a written application shall be made by the BMS Specialist to the
Engineer providing all relevant details concerning a proposed product or material
that contains hazardous material prior to installation.
Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to

Substantial Completion, the BMS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and
materials installed, and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCB).

PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION
The BMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that all
components proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:
Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall not be
affected when the building electrical distribution system experiences
disturbances of the type and magnitude normally encountered in
buildings of this nature.
An independent testing laboratory has verified that the VAV terminal
unit Application Specific Controller meets the performance requirements
detailed in these specifications. If so required by the Employer, the
testing laboratory shall test a project VAV terminal unit complete with
the BMS Application Specific Controller and the BMS Specialist shall
demonstrate that the VAV terminal unit ASC can meet all of the
requirements for monitoring and control accuracy and can undertake all
of the sequences of operation associated with the VAV as detailed in
these specifications. The independent testing laboratory test report is to
be submitted with the shop drawings.
Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage
showed that all components operated satisfactorily when the voltage
dropped to 75% or less of the nominal mains voltage and normal
operation resumed when the voltage returned to less than 85% of the
nominal mains voltage. Following these brownout conditions the
components were free of any stress and/or damage, operated as normal
and no data at the PC, NAC, DCP, DDC, Gateways and/or ASC was lost
or corrupted.
B. The control equipment supplied shall be supplied by a single company. A mixture
of different
Manufacturers’ control equipment components will not be acceptable.
C. All equipment shall meet the performance criteria as detailed in the specifications,
schedules and
Drawings. Liaise with and confirm details of plant and interfaces with other
trades.
D. Provide intelligent networked outstations generally housed in appropriate Motor

Control Panels,
valves and actuators, damper actuators, sensors, cables and containment,

supervisor computers, printers, modems, hardware, software and all peripheral
devices etc. to provide a complete Building Management System to monitor and
control the building services.
E. Provide a, PC based, supervisory software package with full interactive graphical

display of all building services equipment data on structured
schematics showing live control and monitoring points for use by a non-specialist

operator. The layout of the pages shall be designed to minimize the number of
page changes when used to manage the building systems.
F. Include for setting up full alarm and logging for all control and monitoring points
both real and virtual soft control points and software set points. The user shall be
able to change these parameters, adequate password authorization without entering
engineering or configuration mode or writing Software code.
G. The intelligent controllers shall be designed to function independently should the

network
Communications fail and shall be accessible locally from a human interface for
each local group of
Controllers.
H. Unless otherwise specified, provide the power and control field wiring and
containment from the Motor Control Panels (MCPs) to plant items, or as detailed
in the MCP schedules, and control equipment to provide a fully functional and
working system. Note that power wiring to the MCPs, major plant (such as chillers)
and terminal units shall be by the electrical contractor.
Where supplementary control points, internal or external are required they shall
be allowed for. As an illustrative example supply temperature sensors shall be
supplied where required to achieve good control of space temperature in a large
space.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Ensure that the design, construction, materials and finishes A. of all equipment are
suitable for the
location, climatic and operating conditions to which the installation will be
exposed.
B. The BMS Specialist Contractor shall satisfy the following requirements:

1. They shall provide proof of an established trading record in the region
for a minimum period of 15 years.
2. They shall have a current Quality Assurance Certificate to BS 5750 /
ISO 9000 and have held this for a minimum of 8 years. The manufacturer
of the Building Management System shall provide documentation
supporting compliance with ISO 9001 (Model of Quality Assurance in
Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing). Product
Literature provided by the BMS manufacturer shall contain the ISO 9001
Certification Mark from the applicable registrar. Manufacturers delivering
products that do not comply with the ISO 9001 certification requirement
shall provide the following information to assure that quality systems are in
place which are equivalent to the ISO 9001 standard:
a. Marketing Specification Standards
b. Design File Standards

c. Manufacturing Test Standards

d. Calibration Standards
e. Quality System Standards
f. Quality System Procedures
g. Documented management commitment that all employees
participate in quality programs
h. Training Procedures
i. Methods by which corrective actions are taken for problems
identified within the factory process.
All controls including all main processors, interface units, field processors, sensors,
actuators, valves etc. shall be manufactured and supplied by the same controls
system supplier.
They shall provide before order placement proof of their ability to supply, on
request, quality long term system maintenance and customer care facilities within
local municipality.
They shall have a locally based dedicated systems service infrastructure capable of
providing technical support on and off site at all levels together with a corresponding
parts replacement service.
They shall offer a commitment that all products supplied will be supported for a
minimum of 10 years following range replacement or obsolescence.
The BMS Specialist Contractor shall have a local branch facility. Emergency
service shall be available on a 24-hour, 7-day-a-week basis.
The BMS Specialist Contractor shall co-ordinate with other Trade Contractors
regarding the location and size of pipes, equipment, fixtures, conduit, ducts,
openings, switches, outlets, and so forth, in order to eliminate any delays in the
progress of the job.
I. The BMS architecture shall consist of the products of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the
Production of Building Management Systems, and shall be the manufacturer’s
latest standard of
Design. Controllers and DDC (Direct Digital Control) system components shall be
current production products.
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior applications that
shall be capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at minimum, the
following ambient conditions:
0 Deg. C. (41 Deg. F.) to 55 Deg. C. (131 Deg. F.) temperature.
10-95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).

Electrical power service of single phase 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz nominal with
tolerances in compliance with the applicable statutes, codes and regulations.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the contract
Documents
Accept products on site and verify damage.
Protect products from construction operations, dust and debris by storing in

conditioned space.
SPARE PARTS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data to
include a complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are
either normally furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or
specified hereinafter as EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the sub-
contract
Submit a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure

efficient operation at the particular installation. The foregoing shall not relieve the
Specialist of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide special hardware and software tools required for maintenance.
Provide plug in circuit board.
Sheets of continuous form paper.
LABELING
Provide labeling for all DDC controllers, NAC, DCP, Gateways, Routers, Hubs, field
level components, etc., panels and enclosures. Labeling shall meet, at minimum, the
following requirements:
Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or enclosure with
rivets or permanent adhesive.
Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background
colour.
Consistent throughout the project.
Indicated on the record documentation.

Provide labeling of all cabling and containment. Labeling shall meet, at minimum,
the following requirements:
Identified with permanent tag or self-adhesive label within the panel.
Cross referenced on the associated record documentation and laminated
record drawing within the panel enclosure.
The BMS Specialist shall provide labelling for all cable furnished and
installed by the ICT Specialist for the use of the BMS Specialist.
WARNING NOTICE
Provide warning notices at all equipment controlled by the BMS and at all associated
motor starters and MCC panels where notices of a similar manner have not been
provided by other trades. Warning labels shall be installed, at minimum, at the
following locations:
AHU access doors.
AHU motor starter and VFD controllers.
Pump motors.
Pump motor starter and VFD controllers.
Fan enclosure or access panel.
Fan motor starter and VFD controllers.
All other equipment and installations that are monitored and/or
controlled by the BMS.
The warning notices shall be 75 mm by 125 mm (3in. by 5in.) minimum, with yellow
background and with black lettering. The notices shall state the following:
THIS EQUIPMENT IS UNDER

AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY
START OR STOP AT ANY TIME WITHOUT
WARNING.
The warning notices shall be securely attached to the equipment at a location

approved by the Engineer and shall be highly visible. Submit a sample with shop
drawings.
PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the BMS except where it is
specifically identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be
furnished by another trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the
Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be lockable with
the same key.

Ventilated to prevent excessive heat build-up, where required.

Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain relief.
Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for
diagnostics, maintenance, removal or replacement.
Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for which
it is to be installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to
IEC 60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC
60529 unless specifically noted otherwise within these sub-contract
documents.
Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of
BMS controllers.
Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the drawings and at
Engineer approved locations.
The BMS Specialist shall not furnish MCC panels, motor starters, variable speed
controllers and local disconnect switches. The trade furnishing the motor starters
and variable frequency drives shall provide an interface terminal strip in a dedicated
enclosure which may be a separate external enclosure or may be a compartment
within the motor starter enclosure. Refer to the sub-contract documents for the trade
furnishing the motor starter and the variable speed controllers for the details of the
enclosures. The DDC controllers shall not be located in the MCC panels
CONDUIT, TRUNKING AND FITTINGS
Comply with Division 26, Specifications Sections: Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems” and “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
General Cable requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by system

manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
All input/output field cables shall be at least 18AWG (0.8sqm) where a multi-pair
cable shall not share analog and digital signals or digital outputs and digital inputs,
wiring shall follow the following rule:
One multi-pair cable for Analog Input / Output only
One multi-pair for Digital Outputs only
One multi-pair for Digital Inputs only
All the cables carrying analog signals shall be screened and shall have a drain wire.
Comply with the following Specification Sections – as applicable to power, control

and data signal transmission cables:

Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables.”
Division 27 Section “Communications Horizontal Cabling.”
LSZH: For use in plenum installation as per adopted Standards for the Project. Refer
to Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for
LSZH cables for installation in Plenum areas.
Fire Resistant Cables: For use with life safety installations interface. Refer to
Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.
Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
Terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Twist type wire nuts
shall not be acceptable. Insulated tinned copper lugs shall be provided.
Cable within panels or enclosures shall be installed in wiring guides.
All wiring terminations within field panels shall be terminated at terminal stripes and
shall be identification tagged on both sides of the terminal strip.
Cable run in vertical trunking shall have means of cable support, at minimum, every
2m.
BMS SERVER (BMSS)
General
All hardware, software, firmware, and/or operating system requirements
given are the minimum requirements. The Contractor's product shall
meet or exceed these requirements. Additionally, and due to the rapid
advancement and antiquation of hardware technology, the supplied
hardware shall be the “contemporary technical and operational
equivalent” of the specified hardware. The following requirements shall
be met:
Contemporary technical and operational equivalent shall be
based on a comparison of technology at the time of
Contract to the technology at the time of ordering the
equipment for each phase.
Hardware shall be ordered as close to the actual installation
date for a given phase as possible. Final hardware approval
and scheduled order date shall be at the sole discretion of
the Employer.
Hardware equivalence shall be based on both technical
equivalence and operational equivalence.

Contemporary technical equivalence shall be based on

device performance and class specifications.
Contemporary operational equivalence shall be based on
industry standards and function.
Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous
operation under the ambient environmental temperature, humidity, and
vibration conditions encountered at the installed location.
To ensure compatibility among devices, all hardware equipment shall be
supplied by a single manufacturer. Solutions which are based on sourcing
equipment from different manufacturers, are not acceptable.
Hardware specification
Hot redundant, fault tolerant servers shall be installed at the control
rooms.
At all levels of the architecture, data redundancy shall be ensured. The
detailed design of the Contractor shall highlight the actions adopted to
implement this redundancy.
The Contractor shall design servers that are able to cope with the foreseen
workload; the Contractor shall indicate the workload’s increase
percentage that the servers will be able to cope with.
Contractor shall deliver Rack servers or Blade servers and shall
configure them accordingly.
Processor:
Contractor shall provide an Intel Xeon processor - family
E5. Latest available family’s version at the time of ordering
shall be provided; if E5 v4 family is launched, processors
from E5 v3 family are not accepted.
Bus type: QPI.
Instruction set: 64-bit.
Instruction Set Extensions: AVX 2.0
Memory specifications:
Memory type: DDR4. All latest versions by Intel (E3 v5, E5
v4 and E7 v3 families) support DDR4 memory type.
Maximum Memory Bandwidth: 59.7 GB/s or higher. Max
Memory bandwidth is the maximum rate at which data can
be read from or stored into a semiconductor memory by the
processor (in GB/s).
Maximum Memory size: 1536 GB or better.
Supported Intel Data Protection Technology:

Intel AES New Instructions.

Secure Key.
Supported Intel Platform Protection Technology:
OS guard.
Trusted Execution Technology.
Execute Disable Bit.
Expansion slots’ technology: PCIe 3.0
Hot-swappable cooling fans shall be provided.
Calculation:
Based on the BMS manufacturer’s recommendations and
the physical total number of I/O points, Contractor shall
provide by justified calculations - for each of the servers -
the choice of the:
Processor’s number of cores.
Contractor shall not use the Hyper-Threading technology
in order to meet the required number of cores; Contractor
shall provide a physical number of cores equal or greater
than the required number.
CPU frequency.
RAM.
Storage capacity (calculated at maximum frequency).
The total average CPU load shall not exceed 40%.
Contractor shall increase the CPU number of cores and
RAM in order to maintain the required average CPU load.
The server storage hardware shall be calculated for 5 years,
configured using hardware RAID 5 and designed to use
less than 60% of the available space. Calculation shall
clearly state the analog tags’, the discrete tags’, and the
string tags’ number in addition to the update’s rate.
Hard drives: HDD: SAS Server RAID System shall have integrated
RAID 5 with on board RAID controllers.
Software RAID instead of a dedicated RAID controller chip is not
acceptable. Enclosure:
Servers shall be rack mounted in a standard 19” racks complying with
EIA/ECA-310-E and IEC 60297 Mechanical structures for electronic
equipment - Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm
(19 in) series:
IEC 60297-3-100 Part 3-100: Basic dimensions of front panels,

subracks, chassis, racks and cabinets
IEC 60297-3-102 Part 3-102: Injector/extractor handle
IEC 60297-3-103 Part 3-103: Keying and alignment pin

IEC 60297-3-104 Part 3-104: Connector dependent interface

dimensions of subracks and plug-in units
IEC 60297-3-105 Part 3-105: Dimensions and design aspects for
1U chassis
Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing
fans, shelves, drawers, special power wiring, ground connections,
cables, connectors, appurtenances, and adapters of any kind necessary
to accommodate the system installation, operation, testing, or
maintenance.
Operating System
The latest supported version of the Operating System shall be provided.

The following Operating Systems shall be supported:
Microsoft Windows Server.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES).
VMware.
Citrix XenServer.
OPERATOR INTERFACE WORKSTATIONS (OIW)
The OIW shall comprise a PC and associated peripheral operator I/O devices. The
OIW shall be located as follows:
Main BMS Control Room to be confirmed by client (connection to server
at T1/T2 or T5).
2 No. workstation at each BMS control room provided in the basement
level for Terminal TR3 and TR4. Additional 2 workstations shall be
considered for the TL3 which will be accommodated in either of the
BMS room.
Terminal T3, Terminal Link TL3 and Terminal 4 will be controlled and
monitored from these BMS client workstations and shall be connected to
the server located in the airport as per the client confirmation and it shall
be possible to connect a Building Management system Portable Operator
Terminal (POT) at any data outlet allocated for the BMS within the
KKIA’s Common LAN.
The OIW PC, shall have the latest release of Microsoft Windows professional
operating system at the time of implementation and shall have, at minimum, the
following facilities:
Intel® Core™ i7-6700 3.4GHz (up to 4.0GHz) 8M 4C TWR CPU or a
better performing model.
At least 1 TB RAID 1 Mirrored Array Configuration.
16 GB DDR4-2133 ECC Unbuffered RAM.

100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.

1GB DDR4 [DVI, HDMI.].
4 USB ports.
Super Multi DVD Burner.
Real time software or hardware clock.
Tower Case with minimum of 4 external 5¼” and 3 Internal 5¼” drive
bays, 400 watt or greater capacity rated power supplies, internal cooling
fan and external keyboard lock.
All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
Sound card for the annunciation of audible WAV and MP3 file tones or
pre-recorded messages at the integral graphical display stereo speakers.
Provide an alarm to uniquely identify a PC communication failure. One way that this
might be accomplished is by using a watchdog timer at a DDC controller.
Following a power failure, all PC shall return to a fully operational status without
operator intervention within two (2) minutes of the return of mains power. Software
changes, including modifications to database(s), shall not be lost in a power failure.
All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a
recognized manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest
time possible without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is
state-of-the-art and is based on the latest proven technology. All PC shall be suitable
for rugged and continuous operation.
The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at each OIW:

Keyboard and mouse.
Flat panel LCD video display unit.
Alarm printer
The BMS OIW at each location shall have 1No. Report Printer. Where there are
multiple OIW at one location the printer shall be networked such that they are
available to each OIW.
PERIPHERAL OPERATOR I/O DEVICES
Printers: General
The operator shall be able to direct the hardcopy output to any printer.
The BMS Specialist shall set up the system such that all BMS generated
messages such as alarms, returns to normal, etc. are directed to the

appropriate alarm printers and all BMS automatically generated and

operator requested reports are output to the appropriate report printer.
The printers at one location shall be accessible from any OIW such that
an operator at one location can generate a hardcopy message at any other
location.
Printers: Alarm Printers

The alarm printer shall meet the following specifications:
Minimum print speed of 300 characters/second. Slower
speed printers shall not be acceptable when printing in
normal quality.
Selectable character sizes
Sprocket paper feed.
Top-of-page, skip and tab control.
The printers shall accept continuous fan-fold paper with a
width equivalent to A3 size (297 mm by 420 mm).
Constructed for heavy duty-cycle environment.
24 x 24 dot matrix printer
Printers: Report Printers

The report printer shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
Minimum print speed of twelve pages per minute black and
three pages per minute color. Slower speed printers shall
not be acceptable when printing in normal quality.
Scalable fonts.
Single or double bin paper trays, capable of printing A3
size (297mm x 420mm) and A4 size (210mm x 297mm).
Page feed and page discharge controls.
Color and black and white printing capability without
changing ink or toner cartridges.
1200 dpi black and white and 600 x 300 dpi color.
Laser jet technology.
Keyboard:
Provide a keyboard for operator access at each OIW and server. This
shall be in addition to any other operator input device such as a mouse.
The keyboard shall be in a standard typewriter (QWERTY) configuration
with a full alphanumeric standard ASCII character set and with
additional dedicated keys for other functions associated with the BMS
such as print screen.

Mouse:
Provide a mouse at each OIW and server and configure the system such
that cursor control can be undertaken from both the keyboard and mouse
as selected by the operator.
Mouse shall be latest optical technology.
Graphical Display:
Provide a Full HD resolution LCD with LED backlight graphical display
at each OIW and server. The monitor shall be a flat panel type with
standard HDMI Input.
The graphical display shall be used for the display of operator entered
and requested data and the output of BMS generated alarm and other
information.
The graphical display shall have a minimum screen diagonal
measurement of 25 inches.
The graphical display shall be full HD 1080P having a minimum
resolution of 1920 by 1080 pixels with 100 Hz minimum refresh rate.
The unit shall be capable of displaying both schematic and alphanumeric
data at the same time.
A minimum of 16.7 million discrete colors shall be available for display
selection.
Integral stereo speakers.
PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)
The POT’s devices shall not be used by the BMS Specialist for commissioning the
BMS or for any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the Employer
immediately prior to the acceptance testing.
Provide a jack at each DDC controller and at each mechanical and electrical room
for the plug connection of the POT. Provide two spare cables for plug connection
for each POT. The operator shall be able to communicate with the BMS via the POT
using the same operator interface as that at any OIW PC.
Provide 2 No. POT in each BMS room
The POT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

4th generation Intel® Core™ i7-4710HQ Quad Core Processor (2.5GHz,
turbo up to 3.5GHz) with 6MB Cache and Hyper Threading
512 GB PCIe SSD.
8GB DDR3 1600 MHz RAM.
100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
Wi-Fi® Wireless networking (802.11b/g/n/ac) with Bluetooth® v3.0

14.0" IPS FHD 1920x1080p.

40X Speed CD-ROM drive (interchangeable).DVD SuperMulti (+/-R
double layer) drive.
Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
Integral QWERTY keyboard with full ASCII character set.
Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 3.5kg.
Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the POT that ensures
adequate protection.
POT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also be
powered by a 220/240 Vac, nominal 50/60 Hz source. Provide batteries
adequate for a minimum of 4 hours of operation.
When connected to the BMS Automation Level at the DDC controllers or at a

network data port, the POT shall be able to undertake all of the control and
monitoring functions that can be performed at the OIW. One of the POT’s shall be
used to configure the system components.
CONSOLES
The Contractor shall provide the enclosure’s furniture of the control rooms’
workstations referred to as consoles. The work-surface height shall be 72cm above
the finished floor.
The consoles shall accommodate the display, and the operator interface’s devices.
The consoles shall satisfy the functional, ergonomic and aesthetic requirements of
the operational environment.
The consoles shall be of modular design, facilitating future equipment retrofits and
full reconfigurations without major modification to the structure or to the exterior
elements.
The consoles shall have the possibility to customize the mounting positions in order
to suit both the operator and the equipment’s requirements.
The consoles shall be provided with ventilation, task lighting, bottom cable entry,
cable management system, power bars, adjustable monitor height and angle.
The Contractor shall provide pre-production review drawings of the console

arrangements in order to verify the equipment layout, exterior finish, architectural,
mechanical and electrical elements:
The contractor shall supply five sets of scaled drawings for each console assembly
showing the location of all the specified electronics in isometric view in addition to
top and front views.

The specification of sizes and dimensions shown in the drawings shall have a
tolerance of 1.5mm as maximum.
The Console shall be comprised of end and intermediate frames with horizontal
stringers and decorative end panels.
The Console shall feature a hinged dual-channel duct cover with integrated
aluminum mounting system for LCD monitor arrays.
The Console shall have a minimum 30mm thick MDF core PVC work surface. The
work surface shall be not less than 580mm deep overall and should include a 45mm
deep beveled edge covering the work surface's entire front width.
All components within the console shall be:

Of a pre-engineered modular construction, i.e.: constructed from a series
of independent sectional compartments.
Available from a pre-defined set of manufacturer’s model numbers.
Free from alterations to the design either prior to or following
installation. The assembly of the console shall be accomplished without
the need for either welding or carpentry work.
Constructed of a steel super-structure framework consisting of
intermediate and end frames connected by horizontal stringers. External
decorative side panels shall be available in TruForm or laminated MDF
core.
The self-supporting skeleton framework shall:

Be installed at the site in advance of any external finishing panels. The
framework shall be fully capable of supporting all specified electronics
without the need for attachment of any external panels.
Be capable of being supplied to site in knockdown (flat packed) form and
be capable of assembly using bolts and fastening system without welding
or carpentry work.
Include front and rear horizontal stringers constructed of 2.5mm formed
sheet metal. Stringers will connect, and span, 2mm end frames and/or
intermediate frames to form a complete structure.
Components
Intermediate and end frames shall be a minimum of 40mm in width and
capable of supporting fully loaded console. Intermediate and end frames
shall incorporate 10mm diameter threaded adjustable glides and 50mm
vertical slots for mounting two and four gang electrical boxes.
End frames shall feature an anti-tip extension and the intermediate
frames shall feature four grommet holes.
2.5mm formed sheet metal horizontal stringers with fastening system
shall be 50mm high and available in 600mm, 1200mm, and 1800mm
widths.

1.5mm stationary steel shelf shall extend 450mm from the front of the
console and shall feature four grommet holes and has a load capacity of
90kg.
Doors shall be supplied with a keyed-alike locking lever latch and
integrated cable management. Doors shall be able to accept an optional
CPU shelf or file/storage bin for convenient swing-out access.
15, 45, and 90 degree 2.5mm steel corner fillers shall be available.
Corners fillers will feature Insta-Lock fastening system for ease of
installation. Corners shall be available in concave and convex
configurations.
1.2mm steel hinged duct cover shall conceal, and allow easy access to,
dual cable raceway so signal and power cords can be separated.
2mm angled data/power rail shall include cable grommets and openings
for a universal data mounting plate and/or duplex power box. The
data/power rail shall incorporate Insta-Lock fastening system and,
combined with 2mm shelf brackets shall support the work surface.
Fully integrated black anodized aluminum track system shall be capable
of supporting a wide variety of monitor arrays while providing simple
horizontal adjustment. Constructed of extruded 6105-T5 aluminum with
a T-slot profile. Monitor array support posts shall be available in 380mm,
725mm, and 1000mm heights. The support posts shall be 48mm in
diameter with a wall thickness of 2.8mm. Monitor arrays shall be
mounted to the Versa-Track with ball spring drop-in T-nuts.
Chair
Provide 6 No. scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back rest
type, with gas lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with
carpet castors for base and back to Engineer's approval
Finish and Color

All exterior and frame steel components including doors, rack turrets,
duct covers, and shelving shall be zinc oxide wash primer with a black
powder coat textured finish.
Optional Accessories
A full range of optional accessories shall be available such as fans,
electrical boxes, CPU shelves, file bins, rack mount turrets, monitor
mounts, and LED task lighting with VESA mount or magnetic base.
Instructions
Fully detailed assembly instructions at least in English language shall be
supplied with both written and pictorial descriptions for each item/model
numbered component.

Packaging
Each component part number shall be independently marked and packed
into double or triple ply corrugated outer cartons and shall be suitable for
storage and shipping to site without damage.
Warranty
Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall
provide a written 10 years guarantee against defects of all component
parts, material and workmanship under normal use.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL
The BMS Specialist shall provide a site-wide software license that shall permit the
Employer to add a PC to the BMS Management level Network without the
requirement to obtain an additional software license.
The BMS shall have an “off-the-shelf” software package (Middleware) that shall be
able to import and export data in, at minimum, the following protocols over an
Ethernet TCP/IP backbone:
BACnet.
LonTalk.
Modbus.
SNMP.
XML/SOAP.
OPC.
KNX.
Shall be able to communicate with any DDE compliant application.
Data shall be output from the BMS in the appropriate protocol to the appropriate
ELV Building System. Note that it shall be possible to output the same data in
different protocols to different ELV Building Systems.
Information shall be output from the BMS when:

Requested by the operator. This includes requests made by the operator
for the immediate output of specific information and requests for
information that are optional and have been pre-programmed by the
operator for display.
Scheduled by the operator. An example of this might be the output of a
report at an operator-defined time of day.
An alarm condition has been detected by the BMS. All alarm conditions
detected by the BMS shall be annunciated as detailed elsewhere in this
section.
The operator interfaces for the Operator Interface Workstation and the Portable
Operator Terminal shall be the same.

The graphical user operator interface shall be "user friendly". The interface shall be
such that there is no need for the operator to reference documentation other than
"help" menus on the system in order for the operator to perform his normal duties
after the training has been received, as detailed in these specifications.
The operator interface shall be English language with metric units. The system shall
be capable of converting all engineering unit displays into the equivalent English
values and displaying such values with the appropriate unit identifiers. The
switchover from metric to English and vice versa shall be done with a single operator
command. The engineering unit switchover shall be for all measured and displayed
variables and calculated points. Unit conversion and display shall be carried through
all possible display view including graphical displays, text base displays, and
software application packages.
The performance criteria detailed in these specifications for the operator interface
shall apply when all BMS are in their completed form and all software and hardware
functions are operational.
The software shall be acceptable to all potential BMS Specialists. The BMS server
software package shall have a successful history of use with BACnet/IP and shall
incorporate all drivers required to meet these specifications.
The programs shall be designed to provide industrial quality real time data
presentation. The software shall enable the BMS Specialists to develop customized
graphical views of the mechanical and electrical systems and shall contain an
advanced graphics library that contains all potentially required images.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS CONTROL
Access to the BMS at the OIW, the POT and any other I/O device shall be protected
by a password based access system. An operator shall not be able to access
information or perform any tasks at the BMS until a valid password has been entered.
Access shall terminate when an operator signs off or after a predetermined time-out
period, initially set at 10 minutes after the last operator access, whichever occurs
first. The password shall not be echoed at any terminal when it is entered. Any
operator functions, whether or not detailed within these specifications, shall be
subject to the operator's password being of a sufficiently high level to enable the
operator to perform the function.
Each password shall have up to 6 No. alphanumeric characters, at minimum, with at

least 500 million different combinations and it shall be possible to have a minimum
of 10,000 active passwords at any time.
It shall be possible to define the following for each password:

I/O terminals that can be used for access. This shall be defined for any
terminal that has access to the BMS (including the web browsing
facility).
Functions that can be performed.

Points that can be accessed.
If the system has fixed defined function levels then there shall be at least five (5)
levels. Only the highest level shall be able to undertake changes to the passwords.
An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to make additions,
deletions and changes to the passwords on-line using an interactive procedure
including the changing of the time-out period. An operator with the highest level of
password shall be able to obtain a report detailing the passwords assigned to each
operator and all relevant details of the access privileges associated with each
password.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS GENERAL
An operator with the suitable level of access shall be able to access the network to
perform the following BMS functions:
Observe values of BMS monitored points, BMS outputs and BMS
calculated values.
Observe and change control modes for motors, i.e. BMS manual control
mode and BMS software control mode.
Observe, add, delete and change a database including a database that
defines a monitored, controlled or calculated point, a database that
defines schedules or a database that is created to meet any of the many
functions detailed in these documents.
Issue commands to change the status of a digital output or the value of
an analogue output.
Observe and acknowledge BMS determined alarm conditions.
Initiate the outputs of add, delete and change reports.
Observe, add, delete and change operating sequences.
Observe, add, delete and change graphical display system diagrams.
Observe, add, delete and change control algorithms including PID
control constants.
Other functions as expressly detailed in the BMS specifications or as
required, even if not expressed, in order to meet the intent of these
specifications.
Operator access shall be by penetration through a hierarchy of menus and/or system

displays on the graphical display using cursor control and by means of a series of
alphanumeric inputs at a keyboard. The menu selections shall be self-evident and
shall easily guide the operator through the execution of any of the functions. The
alphanumeric input shall comprise short English language statements and/or readily
understood abbreviations. Whichever approach is used, the process shall be via the
most direct path and shall involve as few operations as possible. It shall not be
necessary for the operator to know the location, i.e. the DDC controller, at which a

point is monitored/controlled in order to access any information concerning that

point.
Following the completion of all steps by the operator performing an operator access
function, the function shall commence within two (2) seconds and shall be completed
within ten (10) seconds apart from those functions that are subject to the limitations
of the output rate of the printers.
An operator shall be able to edit his keyboard entries prior to attempted execution
using standard keys such as "delete" and "backspace". However, if an operator
makes an incorrect entry then the BMS will display a message that clearly details the
nature of the error and identifies the appropriate "help" menu that will assist the
operator to successfully complete the entry.
All operator entries shall be echoed, except passwords, the OIW, servers and on the
screen on the POT depending on where the operator entry is made.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: PROGRAMMING MAINTENANCE

AND UPDATES
The BMS Specialist shall provide documentation detailing the methods and
techniques required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways,
routers and any other BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as
well as to export the data in any of the previously mentioned standards to another
system.
The system documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the BMS’s

incorporation into another BACnet system in the future.
The BMS Specialist Contractor shall provide software maintenance for one year after
handover.
The BMS Specialist Contractor shall provide a guarantee that the systems and
equipment that he provides will either continue to be produced and/or be
maintainable for a period of at least 10 years. Elemental equipment substitution is
accepted for peripheral items, but not for the microprocessor based equipment.
The BMS Specialist Contractor shall provide maintenance of the complete controls
installation for one year after handover. Include in the tender for maintenance to
include:
1. Help desk back-up for the user.

2. Call out service.
3. Regular service visits.
4. Re-tuning of control loops to cope with seasonal and occupancy changes.
5. Re-calibration of panel components every 6 months.
6. Re-calibration of field sensors and actuators every 6 months.
7. Replacement of all defective equipment during the maintenance period.
8. Software updates.

SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR REQUEST FOR

INFORMATION
Each monitored, controlled and calculated point in the system shall be accessed via
the menu and the alphanumeric approaches as detailed in these specifications.
Access using the system schematic displays, as detailed in the previous sections, with
the addition that once the system display level is reached it shall be possible to
progress to the individual monitored, controlled or calculated point. Once a menu
or system display selection is made it shall take no more than five (5) seconds before
the next menu or display level appears on the graphical display.
Access using the alphanumeric approach shall enable an operator to access any point
via a unique point name that may be a short English language descriptor or a readily
understandable mnemonic of the type used to identify points in the points schedules
and system diagrams.
Either approach shall enable the operator to observe or change any parameter
associated with a point and to add and delete points.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR COMMANDS
The operator shall be able to place any output in the BMS manual control mode and
when in that mode the operator shall be able to place any output to any required value
subject to any hardwired interlocks and any software interlocks that are specified to
apply in the BMS manual control mode.
The operator shall be able to place any setpoint that is determined by software into
the manual mode and to manually assign a value to the setpoint.
The operator shall be able to initiate the restart of equipment following a fire alarm
and following a power failure. Refer to the paragraphs titled "Equipment restart
following a fire alarm" and "Equipment restart following a power failure".
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA BASES AND OPERATING

SEQUENCES
The operator shall be able to make on-line modifications, additions and deletions to
all databases at the PC, NAC, DDC, and ASC using interactive procedures. Prior to
the acceptance of the changes by the BMS there shall be a restatement of the
contemplated database modification, addition or deletion together with a question of
the type "Do you wish to proceed?" which will require an affirmative answer before
the change takes place.
The operator shall be able to modify a sequence, add a sequence and delete a
sequence on-line as detailed in the Section titled “BMS Software”.

The databases shall be open standards based on BACnet. The BMS Specialist shall
provide complete comprehensive documentation on writing to the databases,
retrieving data from the databases and sharing the data at the databases.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ALARMS
Alarms shall be generated by the BMS upon the occurrence of one of the following
events:
Failure of a PC, DDC controller, or any other BMS hardware
components.
Failure of communications between nodes on any LAN or the BMS
Management level Network.
A monitored status indicates a discrepancy between the actual and the
required value.
A monitored value does not meet criteria established by the operator.
The deviation of a variable from setpoint exceeds operator-established
criteria.
The output to a final control element is outside operator-established
criteria.
A digital input is in the state defined by the operator as indicating an
alarm condition.
Software failures and errors shall be diagnosed and annunciated by the
BMS.
The failure of a BMS hardware component, including communications failures, shall

generate an alarm that shall be differentiated from process alarms. If the failure of a
PC cannot be annunciated at a printer or graphical display at the OIW because of the
BMS topology then provide an alternative means such as a "watchdog timer" at a
DDC controller. The alarm message generated by the BMS shall clearly identify the
component that has failed and the location of a communications failure shall also be
clearly indicated.
In the event that the BMS detects a disparity between the actual and the required
status of a digital input, the BMS shall generate an alarm and shall set the control
relay to the off state. This shall occur when the digital output is in both the BMS
manual control mode and the BMS software control mode and shall automatically
place the output in the BMS manual control mode.
The operator shall be able to define alarm conditions for each analog input, at
minimum, as follows:
The high limit above which the variable is in alarm.
The low limit below which the variable is in alarm.
An end or range alarm. This shall occur when the analogue signal goes
to zero or to its maximum value.

The operator shall be able to assign deviation limits to setpoint values. An alarm
shall be generated when a controlled variable deviates from setpoint by more than
an operator-defined amount.
The operator shall be able to assign alarm limits to analogue outputs. The BMS shall
generate an alarm when an analogue output reaches or exceeds an operator assigned
high limit and reaches or goes below an operator assigned low limit.
The operator shall be able to designate one state of a digital input as an alarm state.
The operator shall be able to assign a time delay following detection by the BMS of
an alarm condition such that if there is a return to normal during the assigned time
delays the alarm shall not be annunciated. If at the end of the time delay period the
alarm condition still exists then the BMS shall annunciate an alarm within two (2)
seconds (end-to-end time). The time delay shall be individually assignable to each
alarm condition. All monitored points shall meet these alarm annunciation criteria
regardless of type of panel used to monitor the point.
The operator shall be able to assign a dead-band to all analog high and low alarm
limits so as to minimize the too frequent and unnecessary annunciation of alarms.
An analogue alarm limit shall not have returned to normal until it has returned
beyond the alarm limit by a sufficient amount to have also cleared the dead-band.
The same shall also apply to analogue output high and low alarms.
A report shall be available to the operator detailing points in alarm and a further
report shall be available to the operator detailing the alarm limits established for the
monitored, controlled and calculated points.
Designated alarms shall be output on the alarm printer.
The occurrence of designated alarms shall initiate a visual alarm at the OIW. A
switch, button or keyboard key shall be dedicated to the acknowledgment of alarms
at the OIW. The visual alarm shall cease after acknowledgment of an alarm unless
another alarm is awaiting acknowledgment. All alarms shall be acknowledged
individually and the acknowledgment shall be recorded on the alarm printer. The
alarm message shall uniquely identify the cause of the alarm together with the time
of detection by the BMS. The operator shall be able to associate an "event message"
with any alarm occurrence. The operator shall be able to designate at which
workstation(s) the alarm shall be annunciated.
Alarms shall be allocated priorities by the operator on-line using an interactive

procedure. If there are concurrent alarms then they shall be annunciated in order of
their priority. An icon shall appear on the graphical display when there are alarms
other than those displayed. The cursor and icon shall enable the operator to bring up
an alarm report on the graphical display at any time. There shall be at minimum,
three levels of alarm priority. Alarms shall be prioritized in the following categories,
with the following actions taking place:

Category Action Taken
Critical. Printout on alarm printer and display on the

graphical display. Clearly distinguish critical
alarms on hard copy printouts and graphical
displays and reports.
Non-critical. Display.
BMS component. Printout on alarm printer and display. Clearly

distinguish BMS components alarms on hard
copy print outs and graphical displays and
reports.
Alarms shall remain on the OIW graphical display alarm queue until the alarm has
been acknowledged by the operator and returned to the normal state. If the alarm
returns to normal before operator acknowledgment, then it shall be identified as such
via different color designation on the alarm queue. If the alarm is acknowledged
before it has returned to normal, then it shall also be identified via a different color
designation.
It shall only be necessary to acknowledge an alarm at one OIW.
It shall be possible to assign alarms to different OIW on a scheduled basis.
The BMS Specialist shall configure the alarms and their priorities in accordance with
the requirements of the Employer.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: REPORTS
Reports shall be output when requested by the operator and when scheduled by the
operator.
Reports shall be provided as detailed throughout these specifications and shall be

output at the OIW, the printer designated by the operator at the report printer or the
screen at the POT whichever is selected by the operator. The default output device
for reports shall be the report printer at the OIW.
The operator shall be able to select reports to be output in the following manner:
For a specific point.
For a specific item(s) of equipment.
For all points located on a specific floor or area of the building.
For all equipment serving a particular floor.
For all points monitored, controlled and calculated.

For afterhours operation of the AHU.

For a specific schedule.
For a specific or group of trended points.
For a specific or group of totalized points.
Reports shall all have the time and date at which they were output recorded on them.
Reports shall be formatted in such a manner as to make them easily understandable
to the operator.
A menu of reports shall enable the operator to access any report on the BMS. Each
report shall contain the date and time.
The operator shall be able to configure customized reports. Standard and customized
reports shall be configured through the BMS.
The BMS Specialist shall configure the reports in accordance with the requirements
of the Employer.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: EVENT MESSAGES
The operator shall create messages up to 64 characters in length, at minimum, which

shall be displayed upon the occurrence of a particular event. There shall be capacity
for 1000 event messages at any one time and the operator shall be able to associate
a single message with more than one occurrence and shall be able to associate more
than one event message with a particular event.
The event message shall be output at all devices selected on-line by the operator
using an interactive procedure.
The operator shall be able to associate one or more event messages with the
following events:
An alarm
A change of status.
The return to normal of an alarm condition.
An operator entered schedule.
Any other event initiated by the BMS or monitored by the BMS.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
High Definition graphical displays of system diagrams are discussed in the Section
titled “Graphical Display system diagram” of these specifications.
Graphical Displays shall form the basis of the menu penetration means of operator
access.

The time and date and the building kW shall appear on the display at all times and
when there are system diagrams displayed on the OIW, the outside air temperature
and relative humidity shall be displayed.
Icons shall be used in conjunction with cursor control where possible to simplify
access to data and the execution of operator commands.
System diagrams shall appear on the graphical displays complete with all associated
data within five (5) seconds of the completion of the operator entry/ menu selection.
SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: WEB ACCESS
Operators and other authorized personnel shall have access to specific functions of
the BMS via a standard web browser interface, subject to password access assigned
by the Employer.
Web based access to the BMS shall provide monitoring and limited control specific
to the user. The information displayed on the web pages shall be refreshed at least
once every 10 seconds.
Where a Web page provides for the operator to input changes, the activation of the
changes shall require the operator to click on a "submit" button or similar feature
before the changes are sent. All web access actions shall be immediately echoed to
all other OIW.
BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL
The Distributed Control Panels, Workstations and Application Specific Controllers

shall run under the control of proven real-time executive operating software systems.
These operating systems are collectively referred to as the BMS operating systems.
The BMS operating Systems shall include:

Controllers Monitoring and Control Software
Controller Application Software
Data Analysis and Storage Software.
Data Presentation Software.
The operating sequences and all databases related to monitoring and control
functions shall reside at the associated DDC and/or ASC. Copies of these databases,
operating sequences, schedules and other programmable software shall reside at the
PC at the OIW. It shall be ensured that at all times there is no mismatch between
software resident at the DDC and/or ASC and the software copy resident at the PC.

SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS
The sequences of operation shall be resident at the controllers.
Where terms are used, such as “operator determined”, “operator changeable”, etc.,
which indicate an operator originated decision; it shall mean that an operator shall
be able to amend a value, such as a setpoint, alarm limit, time delay, etc. through an
interactive approach. The term "interactive" is used to mean that the system shall
operate in a conversational mode whereby the operator shall receive English
language prompts in the form of:
Tables into which the operator enters data.
Questions that are responded to by the operator.
Selections that are made by the operator based on a list of suggested
alternatives that is generated by the BMS.
The procedure by which an operator amends a value or implements a selection shall

be such that the operator can readily execute the task without reference to instruction
manuals and without knowledge of the BMS control language.
All setpoints, alarms limits, dead-bands, software time delays, report configuration
and requests, operating time limits, schedules, etc. shall be operator definable
through an interactive procedure via the OIW and POT. In addition, the setpoints
and schedules shall be changeable via the BMS/telephone and BMS/web facilities.
The equipment that is fed from emergency power and which is controlled by the
BMS shall operate normally under emergency power conditions and shall be
monitored and controlled by the BMS under emergency power conditions. Ensure
that all equipment furnished under this sub-contract that is associated with the
control of equipment on emergency power is fed from the emergency power service
and can maintain normal equipment operations when the equipment is on emergency
power. Following a loss of normal power, the BMS shall resume normal equipment
control and monitoring functions for that equipment on emergency power within 20
seconds of the availability of emergency power and similarly when there is a return
to normal power. If necessary provide an uninterruptible power source in order to
meet this 20 seconds resumption of operation requirement.
The BMS Specialist shall identify on the cable and containment shop drawings
which components are to be fed from emergency power and which components are
to be fed from a UPS source.
The BMS Specialist shall provide an easy to use means of defining the operating
sequences such as a high-level control language or a graphical/flowcharting facility.
The means provided for the creation of the operating sequences shall be suitable for
the implementation of the sequences detailed on the control diagrams that form a
part of these sub-contract documents.
If the BMS Specialist requires additional instrumentation to that indicated in the

BMS Point Schedules and Diagrams in order to implement the operating sequences

as detailed on the control drawings then the BMS Specialist shall include such
additional instrumentation within the tender price. Such instrumentation shall meet
the requirements detailed in the Section titled "BMS Field Instrumentation" or,
where specifications are not provided, details of such instrumentation shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The operating sequences shall be written in a readily understandable high level

control language such as Pascal, Basic, C or equivalent or they shall be constructed
using an easily understood graphics interface package. Provide adequate English
language notation in the software to assist the operator understand the intent of the
programmed sequences.
The control language shall be capable of implementing 32-bit floating-point

calculations using. At minimum, the following arithmetic operators:
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Roots
Exponentials
Natural logarithms
The control language shall, at minimum, be able to implement the following logic
operations and relational operations:
and
or
not
nand
nor
If then else statement
less than
less than or equal to
equal to
greater than or equal to
greater than
not equal to
The BMS Specialist shall be responsible for the stable operation of all control loops.
The BMS Specialist shall provide self-tuning PID control algorithms. Verify that
the control loops are stable.

If any BMS or system component should fail during the operation of a system, then
the BMS shall execute the procedure detailed in the sequences of operation. Where
a failure mode is not provided for a BMS controlled item of equipment the BMS
Specialist shall obtain details of the required failure mode from the Employer.
Any information required by the BMS Specialist for the implementation of the
software shall be requested in writing from the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the
time it is required. Submit the request for information in the form of tables or forms
for the Employer’s personnel to complete and return.
The operating sequences detailed in this section shall only apply when the BMS is
controlling and monitoring the system in the BMS software control mode.
In cases where outside air duct cross-sectional area exceeds a certain amount,
multiple damper sections rather than a single section shall be furnished and shall be
controlled in groups. Refer to the mechanical trade documents to determine the
number of damper sections and the number of actuators.
Where indicated on the control diagrams, the BMS Specialist shall interlock
motorized dampers with fans such that when the dampers are closed the associated
fans stop.
The BMS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the operating sequences as
requested by the Engineer without additional costs until the substantial completion
of the entire BMS.
The sequences of operation are detailed on the control drawings that form part of
these documents. Where sequences have not been specifically identified for a
mechanical, electrical or public health system/component, the BMS Specialist shall
obtain instruction from the Engineer and shall implement the required sequences at
no additional cost to the Employer.
BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLERS MONITORING & CONTROL

SOFTWARE
Scan rates at the DDC and/or ASC shall meet the following requirements:
Each analogue and digital input point shall be scanned at least once every
5 seconds.
If a point is in alarm, then the alarm shall be annunciated at the OIW
within 2 seconds of the termination of the time delay period following
detection of the alarm condition.
DDC outputs shall be updated at a frequency defined by the operator. The operator
shall be able to select a frequency, at minimum, in the range of 2 seconds to 256
seconds.
The operator shall be able to define a minimum time delay between successive starts
of equipment so that disturbances created on the building electrical system are
minimized in frequency and amplitude.

BMS analogue and digital outputs shall change as the result of either an operator
entered command or a BMS generated software command. These two modes of
BMS output are referred to as the BMS MANUAL CONTROL mode and the BMS
SOFTWARE CONTROL mode and differ as follows:
In the BMS manual control mode, the signal to a final control element
such as a valve or a damper actuator and to a relay such as a motor control
relay shall change as the result of a command manually entered at one of
the operator terminals. When an output is in the BMS manual control
mode, there shall be no means by which it can switch to the BMS
software control mode or by which the value or state of the BMS output
can change without operator intervention.
In the BMS software control mode, the signal to the final control element
or relay shall be changed automatically as the result of software such as
a schedule, operating sequence or Applications Package such as the
Optimized Scheduling feature.
The operator shall be able to select the mode of output control for each analogue and
digital output.
The operator shall be able to define the minimum time delay between the stopping
of a piece of equipment and its subsequent restart. This time delay shall be in effect
for motors in the BMS software control mode and for motors in the BMS manual
control mode.
If there is a discrepancy between the actual and BMS commanded state of a motor
then, unless the discrepancy arises because of control of the motor by the fire alarm
system or because of a power failure, the motor control relay shall be set
automatically to the OFF state, an alarm shall be generated and the motor shall be
placed in the BMS manual control mode.
If the discrepancy has arisen because of override control by the fire alarm
system, then the motor shall be restarted by the BMS in accordance with
the procedure detailed in the paragraph titled "Equipment Restart
Following a Fire Alarm".
If the discrepancy has arisen because of a power failure, then the motor
shall be restarted by the BMS in accordance with the procedure detailed
in the paragraph titled "Equipment Restart Following a Power Failure".
In all cases a motor shall only restart following an operator manually
entered command
The BMS shall not override any hardwired interlocks such as those provided at motor
starters for overload protection, damper interlock, pressure interlock, etc. and those
provided to facilitate control by the Fire Alarm System regardless of the BMS output
control mode.
Unless stated otherwise elsewhere in these Specifications, the modulation of final

control elements by the BMS in the BMS software control mode shall be based on a
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithm. The control constants for
the PID algorithm shall be definable by the operator. If self-tuning algorithms are

provided, it shall still be possible for the operator to manually tune the control loops.
The software shall incorporate facilities to enable the bump-less transfer of a
modulating output from BMS manual control to BMS software control and vice
versa and the prevention of integral wind-up. PID algorithms shall maintain the
system operation within the desired tolerance around the setpoint. Setpoint
tolerances shall be as follows:
Supply air temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.
Space temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.
Duct static pressure control, ± 50 Pa
Water differential pressure, ± 15 kPa.
Space static pressure control, ± 10 Pa
Relative humidity, ± 3%
Software shall automatically inhibit the generating of an alarm on an analogue input

when the status of an associated digital input indicates that an alarm condition is to
be expected. Such would be the case, for example, when an air handling unit is off
as it would be expected that the supply air temperature would be outside the alarm
limits established for the operating state. An interactive procedure shall enable the
operator to link any analogue value to a digital input so as to inhibit unnecessary
alarms. Points with their alarms locked out shall continue to be displayed on reports
and graphical displays. The alarms shall remain locked out for an operator defined
time delay following the start-up of the associated equipment
If for any reason the operator wishes to terminate the monitoring of a particular
digital or analogue input, then it shall be possible to take the point out of service via
an interactive procedure. If the point is the monitored variable in a control loop, then
the control loop shall be disabled, any sequence dependent on the point shall also be
disabled and all associated BMS outputs shall go to the BMS manual control mode.
An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to add, delete and modify points
monitored and controlled by the BMS.
An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to configure control loops. The
operator shall define Setpoints for control loops or they shall be derived from
software logic as detailed in the sequences of operation.
All configuration tools shall be built into the BMS graphics software and all
components of the system shall be programmable from any OIW via the web browser
including the downloading of programs to the DDC controllers.
BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLER APPLICATION SOFTWARE
Applications software functions associated with the control and monitoring of the
mechanical and electrical systems by the BMS shall be resident at the DDC
controllers and OIW PC as appropriate. The application of these features shall be in
accordance with the details provided in the Sequences of Operation. The BMS
Specialist is to implement all applications programs. Where additional information

is required the BMS Specialist shall request the information in writing to the
Employer at least two weeks before it is required by the BMS Specialist.
These application software packages shall include but not be limited to the
following:
Provide the following programs for the optimization of energy usage:
HVAC control
Provide the following programs for the calculation of data:
Electrical Energy usage and demand
Psychrometric properties
Equipment operating time
Provide the following programs for the restart of building mechanical
systems:
Equipment restart following a fire alarm
Equipment restart following a power failure
Energy Management Features: BMS controllers shall perform all energy

management functions specified herein to reduce energy consumption. The system
shall provide energy supervisory management routines that improve the energy
efficiency of the building HVAC systems. These routines shall coordinate the
execution of all energy management application features, acting as an executive
software system for them, and as an interface for their control strategy with other
application features in the system. These energy management functions to be
categorized under HVAC control. These features shall reside at the DDCs and are
to operate independently of the POT. Energy harvesting type of peripherals may be
used also.
HVAC Control
BMS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish Optimal
Run (start/stop) Time, Supply Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover
Optimization applications.
Optimization applications to be coordinated through energy supervisory
management routines. These routines to coordinate control action
required by optimization applications between themselves, all other
energy features, and all application features within the system.
Each control system to support English or metric units of measurement
and be assigned a unique identifier which is to be used to request
operator-relevant HVAC control status data. Each control system to be
capable of supporting Optimal Run Time, Supply Air Reset, and
Enthalpy Switchover Optimization.
Control systems and their associated points and parameters to be online
definable. Any additions, modifications or deletions to be made online.
Each system to be individually identified with a unique English language
descriptor.

Each system to provide a savings profile summary which is to document,

but is not limited to, the following:
Period start date as defined by operator
Calculated optimal start time daily saving values
Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values
Calculated optimal start time daily saving values during
current period
Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values during
current period
Calculated SAR (Supply Air Reset) daily saving values
Calculated SAR saving values during current period
Calculated ESQ (Enthalpy Switch-over) daily saving
values
Calculated ESQ saving values during current per.
These documented savings values to be automatically
historically stored for the current defined period and a
minimum of twelve past periods.
Optimal Run Time (ORT) Program is to:
Control start up and shutdown of HVAC control equipment
Provide the most efficient operation during potentially
energy wasteful periods of the day based on occupancy
schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements
and interior room mass temperatures
Startup systems by using outside air temperature and room
temperatures to "learn" the building's thermal
characteristics through a dynamic adaptive modeling
technique
Predict and self-adjust the HVAC control system for how
long building takes to cool down under different
conditions, using the adaptive model
Determine how early it can shut down the system without
adversely affecting ventilation, by using the outside air
temperature
Automatically determine the seasonal mode and worse case
condition for each day, by analyzing multiple building
mass sensors
Analysis to require only easily obtained occupancy
schedule data and desired mass temperatures for
implementation.
Supply Air Reset (SAR) Program is to:
Monitor cooling loads in building spaces

Monitor single zone unit discharge temperatures

Adjust HVAC control discharge temperature to the most
energy efficient levels that still satisfy the measured load
Raise cooling temperatures to highest possible value, and
still cool and dehumidify the warmest monitored room
served by fan.
Electrical Energy Usage and Demand

Provide software to monitor and report electrical energy usage and
instantaneous energy demand. This feature shall also store data for recall
via the historical data trend package.
The BMS shall monitor the demand kW, kVA and kWh at the
switchboards. The BMS shall also monitor and provide reporting on
kWh usage of controlled equipment within the building based on
equipment operating time and monitored kW for each piece of
equipment. If an item of equipment is not monitored then it shall be
possible for the BMS Specialist to input the kW of the equipment as a
constant to be used in the calculation. The kW value shall be obtained
from the manufacturer’s literature and shall be verified by the
manufacturer.
This software feature shall generate a report available on demand and on
a scheduled basis:
Demand (at each meter) at time of report.
Usage for present day to time of report.
Usage on previous day.
Usage for present week to time of report.
Usage for previous week.
Usage for present month to time of report.
Usage for previous month.
Usage for year to time of report.
Usage for previous year.
Peak demand for the present day, week, month and year to
time of report.
Peak demand for the previous day, week, month and year.
In addition to the above reporting of data the operator shall be able to
assign any monitored or calculated value to the real-time plotting and
historical data trend features.
As part of the work of this sub-contract the BMS Specialist shall
implement all energy management calculations as requested by the
Employer. Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to
the acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the energy
management calculation feature. The written request will clearly

indicate the information required from the Employer and the format in
which it is to be provided.
Psychrometric properties
Provide a software package to determine the following properties of
ambient air:
Wet bulb temperature.
Dew point temperature.
The above parameters shall be calculated using the monitored values of
ambient air-dry bulb temperature and relative humidity
This software package shall also calculate the enthalpy of ambient air
and ducted return air on the basis of the dry bulb temperature and relative
humidity monitored in ambient air and the ducted return air.
These psychrometric calculations shall be based on sea level data and
shall cover the dry bulb temperature range of +10 Deg. C. to +60 Deg.
C.
The psychrometric chart shall be displayed on the OIW and shall be
dynamic. With the input of any two variables all other psychrometric
data shall be automatically displayed on the psychrometric chart.
Equipment operating time

Provide a software package that will accumulate the operating times for
motors as selected by the operator using an interactive procedure. Any
piece of equipment that has its status monitored by the BMS shall be
selectable for inclusion in this feature. It shall be possible to concurrently
monitor the accumulated operating time for every item of equipment
monitored and/or controlled by the BMS. Data shall be stored at the local
controllers and shall be uploaded to the OIW at regular intervals. In the
event of loss of communications between the OIW and the local
controller the local controller shall continue to monitor and store data
such that the data can be downloaded when the communication is
restored. The number of starts and stops of motors shall also be
accumulated.
The operator shall be able to establish on-line, using an interactive
procedure, a value for the accumulated operating time at which a suitably
worded message shall be output to the operator advising that the
reporting limit has been reached for a specific motor. The message shall
be output at the designated alarm printer.
The operator shall be able to change the accumulated total for any motor
to any value.
The accumulated operating times shall be updated at least every 15
minutes.
The operator shall be able to obtain a report on demand and on a
scheduled basis detailing the accumulated operating times.

Operating times and the number of equipment starts/stops shall be input

by the BMS equipment-scheduling program to the Employer's Facility
Management System and shall be the basis of maintenance
programming.
Equipment restart following a fire alarm

Provide and implement a software program that will restart equipment,
following the return to normal condition that was shut down by the FAS
or by the BMS as the result of a fire alarm. The only equipment that shall
be shut down by the BMS as the result of a fire alarm shall be the VAV
terminal units and FCU. The FAS shall shut down all other equipment
on an as required basis.
If an item of equipment is shut down by a source other than
the BMS when there is a fire alarm in effect then the BMS
shall assume that the cause of the shutdown is the FAS and
shall not indicate an alarm.
The FAS shall communicate to the BMS a list of all
equipment that it has shut down as the result of a fire alarm.
If an item of equipment was presumed by the BMS to have
shut down as a result of the fire alarm but is not on the FAS
list then an alarm shall be annunciated for that item of
equipment to indicate equipment failure. An alarm shall
also be generated if an item of equipment on the list does
not have the required status.
Following the receipt by the BMS of a return to normal message from
the fire alarm system the operator shall be able to initiate the restart of
all equipment shutdown by the FAS and BMS with individual manually
entered commands to each item of equipment and with a single command
that shall restart all equipment scheduled to be operational at the time of
the operator restart command. Prior to the return to normal of the fire
alarm system the operator shall not be able to execute the restart
command. The restart of the equipment shall be subject to all the
software protection such as the minimum "off" time and the operator
defined time delay requirements between successive equipment starts.
implement the restart following a fire alarm function. Submit in written
to the Employer, at least 4 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request
for the order in which motors are to be restarted, the delay times between
successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’ times. The
written request will clearly indicate the information required from the
Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
Equipment restart following a power failure

Provide and implement a program that will facilitate the restart of
equipment following a power failure.

This program shall be based on the BMS detection of a power failure and
the return of power. This feature shall operate on a per BMS basis and
not a site wide basis and shall be implemented for both emergency,
normal power and UPS power.
When there is a loss of normal power, the BMS shall de-energize all units
under its control. When power is restored the BMS shall restart
equipment on the basis of the following as selected by the operator:
Manually entered operator command. A single command
shall initiate the start of all equipment controlled by a BMS
or the equipment shall be started individually as selected
by the operator.
Automatically by the BMS when the return of power is
detected by the BMS, either utility power.
Whichever method of restart is selected the motors shall be started in a
predetermined order and the startup shall be subject to all the software
protections such as the minimum "off" time and the operator defined time
delay requirements between successive equipment starts, to prevent
surges in the electrical distribution system.
implement the restart following a power failure function. Submit in
written to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing,
a request for the order in which motors are to be restarted, the delay times
between successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’ times.
The written request will clearly indicate the information required from
the Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
In the case of standby power, the BMS shall only restart equipment that
is scheduled to operate at that time of day and which is permitted to
operate under standby power conditions.
BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA ANALYSIS AND STORAGE

SOFTWARE
Data analysis and storage software shall reside at the BMS servers such that all PC
on the BMS Management level Network can present data in the same format. These
features shall comprise the following:
Dynamic Trending
Historical data trends
Dynamic Trending
Provide a software package that emulates, at minimum, a 3No. point strip
chart recorder. This program shall concurrently display 3No. or more
(maximum of 6) plots of variables in a graphical format. The graphs
shall be plotted as the values are sampled in a similar fashion to a chart
recorder and when the plot reaches the right hand side of the X-axis, the
X-axis shall scroll to the left so as to accommodate newly sampled data.

The variables to be plotted shall be selected by the operator from any

input, output point, BMS calculated value or any setpoint. It is envisaged
that the primary use of this facility will be for the tuning of control loops
and the observance of control loop performance. Typically this would
require, for example, the concurrent plotting of the loop setpoint, the
monitored variable and the BMS output to the final control element.
Each of the plotted variables shall be uniquely and clearly identified
using a means of differentiation such as different colors for each variable
or different symbols for the plotted points for each variable.
The X-axis shall be the time axis and shall have a scale selected by the
operator using an interactive procedure or shall be scaled automatically
to accommodate a minimum of 30 plotted points for each variable. The
plot rate shall be selected by the operator using an interactive procedure
and shall have the following minimum ranges:
Plot rates for monitored variables shall range from their
BMS scan rate to at least once per day.
Setpoints shall be plotted at the same rate as the associated
variable.
Plot rates for BMS outputs shall range from their BMS
update rates to at least once per day.
Plot rates for calculated points shall range from the rate at
which the calculation is performed to at least once per day.
The Y-axis shall be the value of the plotted variable. If plotted variables
have different ranges then provide separate Y-axes. The Y-axis for each
plotted variable shall be defined by the operator using an interactive
procedure or shall be scaled automatically using a technique that displays
the data in an optimum manner.
It shall be possible to have a minimum of 100 active trend plots at any
OIW on the network.
implement all trend logs as requested by the Employer. Submit in
writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing,
a request for points to be placed on the dynamic trending function. The
written request will clearly indicate the information required from the
Employer and the format in which it is to be provided.
Historical data trends

Provide a software facility for the collection and storage of data at the
BMS servers and its subsequent retrieval and display in tabular and
graphical form as selected by the operator.
The operator shall be able to assign on-line, using an interactive
procedure, any BMS input or output point, calculated variable or setpoint
to the historical data trend facility. It shall be possible to have data
collection and storage concurrently, at minimum, for 250,000 variables

and it shall be possible to have data collection for each variable at 2

separate sampling rates.
Each variable shall be sampled at an operator-defined frequency using
an interactive procedure. The sampling frequencies shall be in the
following ranges at minimum:
For BMS monitored points the sample rate shall be
selectable individually for each variable at between once
per day and once per second or once per scan, whichever is
the less frequent.
Setpoints shall be sampled at the same rate as their
associated variable.
For BMS outputs the sample rate shall be selectable
individually for each variable at between once per day and
once per second or once per output change, whichever is
the less frequent.
For calculated points the sample rate shall be selectable
individually for each calculated value at between once per
day and once every calculation.
Storage shall be provided for at least 10,000 pieces of sampled data for
each variable assigned to this feature. Recall of data shall be in either a
tabular form or in a graphical form and shall be displayed on the OIWs
or output on one of the printers as selected by the operator. Whichever
form of output the operator selects it shall be possible to concurrently
output data for a minimum of 3No. Variables. The time period to be
covered by the data output shall be selected by the operator using an
interactive procedure. When the storage capacity for a variable is full,
the newly sampled data shall over-write the data first stored for that
variable. It shall be possible to store data for the same point at different
collection rates. For example, it shall be possible to store 10,000 values
of ambient temperature collected once per hour and it shall be possible
to store 10,000 values of ambient temperature collected every noon and
midnight.
Data output in tabular form shall clearly distinguish between the
variables and shall indicate the time and date at which each piece of data
was sampled.
Data output in graphical form shall meet the same requirements as
detailed above for the real-time plotting of data.
It shall be possible at any time to obtain a listing of which points have
been assigned to this feature and their sampling rates.
It shall be possible to output the historical data in a Microsoft Excel
format in a hardcopy and in an electronic format.
implement all historical data storage as requested by the Employer.
Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the

acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the historical data

trending function. The written request will clearly indicate the
information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to
be provided.
BMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA PRESENTATION SOFTWARE
Data presentation software shall reside at the BMS servers such that all PC on the
BMS Management level Network can present data in the same format. These
features shall comprise the following:
Graphical Display system diagram displays
Graphical System Diagram Displays

Provide a software package to enable the operator to configure, modify
and delete system diagrams similar in scope to those on the control
diagrams that form part of these sub-contract documents. Real-time data
shall be superimposed on the system diagrams and shall be updated at
intervals between 10 and 20 seconds. The data shall be positioned on the
display at points indicative of the instrumentation locations on the
system.
Provide a library of commonly used symbols in accordance with CIBSE
standards including all symbols used in the compilation of the system
diagrams for this project.
Each system diagram shall indicate real-time data including analogue
and digital input and output points, setpoints and calculated values of the
associated system. The BMS Point Schedules and System Diagrams
detailed on the control diagrams shall provide a guideline for the
selection of data to be displayed on a particular system diagram.
Preferably the status of motors, e.g. on, off, failed, etc., shall be indicated
by color changes such as green for on, blue for off and red for failed. The
system diagrams shall also distinguish between outputs in the BMS
manual control mode and in the BMS software control mode. Where
necessary to enhance the understanding of the data displayed use
alphanumeric text. The graphics shall be fully animated such that they
clearly indicate the status of motors.
Provide a hierarchy of display pages that will enable an operator, for
example, to progress from a diagram of the building, to a particular floor
in the building and to a particular zone on the floor. The selection at each
stage shall be by cursor control using a mouse or keyboard arrow buttons.
Provide icons on displays to enable easy access from one display to a
related display. For example, provide a target box on the system diagram
for a group of VAV terminal units that will enable one-step access to the
associated air-handling unit.
A system diagram shall be provided, at minimum, for the following:
Each of the systems detailed in the point definition sections
of these sub-contract documents. This shall include at

minimum each air handling unit and each extract and

supply fan system, each chilled and condenser water
system and each system monitored and controlled via a
third party interface.
Each VAV/FCU terminal unit. This shall show the location
of each VAV and FCU on the floor, the zone temperatures,
the mode of operation, e.g. occupied mode, unoccupied
mode, standby mode, etc. of the terminal units. The zones
covered by each VAV and FCU terminal unit shall be
outlined and zones with temperatures in alarm shall be red.
As for above but for the lighting.
As for above but for the combined lighting and VAV/FCU
terminal units.
As for above but for the FAS.
As for above but for the security devices
Combined security, FAS and lighting on each floor. This
shall show the location of each security and fire alarm
device on the floor, the status of each security and fire
alarm device and the status of each zone of lighting. A
device(s) that has indicated a security or a fire alarm shall
be clearly identified. It shall be possible by clicking on the
appropriate icon on the full floor display for the operator to
zoom in on half of a floor.
All other schematics as detailed throughout these sub-
contract documents.
The BMS Specialist shall submit a complete set of the proposed system
diagrams at the shop drawing stage of the project. The BMS Specialist
shall modify the system diagrams as requested by the Engineer following
shop drawing review at no additional cost to the Employer.
BMS CONTROLLERS: GENERAL
There shall be 3 types of BMS Controllers:

NAC: Network automation Controller, BACnet Building Controller (B-
BC)
DDC: Direct Digital Controller, BACnet Advanced Application
Controller (B-AAC)
ASC: Application Specific Controllers (ASC)
All BACnet controllers shall be based on native BACnet and shall support all
applicable BIBB’s from the data sharing, alarm event, schedule, trend and device
manager groups. Standard BACnet object types supported by the controllers shall
include:
Binary input and output and value

Analogue input, output and value,

Multi-state input and output
Loop, calendar, notification class, command, file, program, schedule,
group, event enrolment and device.
Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically approved
by the Employer.
Following a loss of power the PC, NAC, DDC and ASC shall reboot in an orderly
fashion and attain a normal operating status within 2 minutes of the return of power.
This shall be accomplished without operator intervention.
The BMS can be used for smoke management applications if all the DDC’s are
certified in accordance with UL864 UUKL requirements.
DDC may be used for any equipment monitored and controlled by the BMS. A
dedicated DDC shall be provided at minimum to monitor and control the following:
A single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated DDC).
Other major items of equipment.
BACnet BUILDING CONTROLLER (B-BC)
Furnish and Install BACnet Building Controllers (B-BCs) in the quantities as shown
on the drawings.
Furnish and install a BACnet router (B-RTR) in the quantities as shown on the
drawings plus one additional router for each B-BC shown on the drawings at the
location shown for each B-BC.
General: Building Controllers shall combine both network routing functions and
control functions into a single unit. B-BC's shall route communications between the
BACnet/IP network, the BACnet 8802.3 network, BACnet PTP network and the
BACnet MS/TP network. The BC shall be responsible for monitoring and controlling
directly connected HVAC equipment such as large AHU's, Chillers or Boilers. A
sufficient number of B-BC's shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this
specification and the attached point list. Each B-BC shall be classified as a "native"
BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Building Controller (B) profile. Controllers
that support a lesser profile such as B-AAC are not acceptable. BC's shall be tested
and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Building Controllers (B-
BC).
Hardware Specifications:
Memory: The operating system and the application programs for the B-
BC shall be stored in non-volatile FLASH memory. The B-BC shall
support up to 256 MB Flash memory and up to 512 MB of RAM.
Communication Ports: Each B-BC shall provide communication to both
the Server(s) and the field buses. The B-BC shall have on-board at least
one 10/100bT Ethernet port, an RS-232 Port and at least two RS-485

ports. It shall support communications to a maximum of 32 MS/TP

master devices per port.
Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular I/O field
interface (sensors, actuators, etc.) design to allow easy expansion of the
field interface device Input and Output capacity. It shall be possible to
add I/O modules as desired to meet the I/O requirements for individual
control applications. These modules shall be capable of being installed
up to 100 feet from the B-BC
Inputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal inputs, if required,
with a minimum of 12-bit analog to digital conversion. Each input shall
have over-voltage protection.
Outputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal outputs, if required,
with a 12-bit digital to analog conversion.
Optional output cards for the following outputs:
24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.
N.C. Form A relay output.
N.O. Form A relay output.
4 to 20mA.
0 to 10VDC analog output.
Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum, LED indication of
CPU status, Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status.
Real Time Clock (RTC): Each B-BC shall include a battery or capacitor
backed, real time clock for 72 hours, accurate to 1.5 minutes per month.
The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and
day of week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings
time and leap years.
Power Supply: The power supply for the B-BC's shall be 24 or 220/240
volts AC (-15%, +20%, 25 VA max.) power. Line voltage below the
operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller
shall have over voltage surge protection without additional AC power
signal conditioning.
Automatic Restart after Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after
an outage, the B-BC shall automatically and without human intervention:
update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current
synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies
as required.
Battery Backup: The B-BC shall include an on-board battery to back up
the controller's RAM memory. In the case of a power failure, the B-BC
shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is
corrupted or unusable, then the B-BC shall restart itself from its
application program stored in its FLASH memory.

Software Specifications:
General: The B-BC shall contain FLASH memory to store both the
resident operating system and application programming. Each B-BC
shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs
simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other
program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of
the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted
due to normal user communications including interrogation, program
entry, printout of the program for storage, routing communications, etc.
User Programming Language: The application software shall be user
programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation,
control algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall
be English language-based and programmable by the user.
Control Software:
The B-BC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested
control algorithms:
Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)
Two Position Control.
Digital Filter.
Ratio Calculator.
Equipment Cycling Protection.
Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of performing
basic mathematical functions (+, -, x, /), squares, square roots,
exponential, logarithms, trigonometric functions, Boolean logic
statements or combinations of all. The controllers shall be capable of
performing complex logical statements including operators such as >, <,
=, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These shall be able to be used in the same
equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five
parentheses deep.
Energy Management Applications: B-BC's shall have the ability to
perform any or all of the following energy management routines:
Time of Day Scheduling.
Calendar Based Scheduling.
Holiday Scheduling.
Exception Scheduling.
Temporary Schedule Overrides.
Optimal Start.
Optimal Stop.
Night Setback Control.
Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer).

Peak Demand Limiting.

Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling.
Heating/Cooling Interlock.
Hot/Cold Deck Reset.
Free Cooling.
Hot Water Reset.
Chilled Water Reset.
Condenser Water Reset.
Chiller Sequencing.
History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of locally logging any input,
output, calculated value, etc. over user defined time intervals (1 second minimum
time). Up to 256 values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the
instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall
be downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon
user-defined time intervals, or manual command.
Alarm Management: For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low
limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the BC and
can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports. Up to 8 alarms
can be configured for each point in the controller. Alarms will be generated based
on their priority. A minimum of 255 priority levels shall be provided. If
communication with the Operator Workstation is temporarily interrupted, the alarm
will be time-stamped and buffered in the B-BC. When communications return, the
alarm will be transmitted to the Operator Workstation. Alarms shall be capable of
being routed to any BACnet workstation that conforms to the B-AWS device profile
and uses the BACnet/IP protocol.
Router Function: The B-BC shall be capable of routing traffic between two BACnet
MS/TP ports, one BACnet PTP (Point to Point) port, four (logical) BACnet IP ports
and one (logical) BACnet Ethernet port. The BC shall support BACnet IP Foreign
Device Registration and BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). The B-
BC shall support PTP modem communications and perform IP Packet
Assembling/Disassembling (PAD) Routing for up to four BACnet IP PAD networks.
Each B-BC shall have the following standard features:

Each of the four BACnet IP ports can be configured for BACnet IP,
BBMD, Foreign Device Registration or PAD.
The Firmware shall be upgradeable through the Ethernet connection via
FTP without physical access to the B-BC for easy updates as future
enhancements expand functionality.
Accept up to four expansion I/O cards.
Expansion I/O modules shall be connected with twisted pair wire or
pluggable on the controllers backplane.

Shall dynamically allocate memory resources to provide flexible use of

its memory.
Shall contain up to 32 user defined control programs.
Shall employ at minimum a 32-bit microprocessor.
Shall meet or exceed the specifications in the ANSI/ASHRAE BACnet
Standard 135-2012 for BACnet Building Controllers.
Shall have removable screw terminal blocks that can accommodate wire
sizes 14-22 AWG.
Shall support pulse counting up to 16 Hz with accumulator objects.
Shall support direct connections up to 64 inputs, 32 outputs.
Shall support up to 1000 Analog Value Objects, 1000 Binary Value
Objects and up to 256 Multi-state Value Objects.
Shall support up to 32 Loop Objects.
Shall support up to 32 Program Objects.
Shall support up to 32 Schedule Objects and up to 32 Calendar Objects.
Shall support up to 256 Trend Objects.
Embedded Web Server: Each B-BC shall have an embedded Web Server that
provides the following capabilities as standard features.
Serve and display optional custom graphics and tabular web pages
containing any set of desired I/O values from the entire BMS.
The B-BC shall have capacity for at least 50 unique
graphical web page backgrounds.
Each background may be re-used multiple times with
different sets of similar data such as for a VAV terminal or
FCU to provide many more unique displayed data sets.
Provide a built-in alarm summary that displays selected FMCS system
alarms in a tabular summary page.
Provides a minimum of 3 levels of web browser password protected user
access.
The B-BC shall be capable of being configured over the data network by
using a standard Internet Browser without any additional software.
BACnet ADVANCED APPLICATION CONTROLLER (B-AAC)
Controllers shall be microprocessor based BACnet Advanced Application

Controllers (B-AAC) in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012.
The Native BACnet AAC's shall be provided for Air Handling Units, Heat Recovery
Units, Chilled and Hot Water Control, Pumps and other applications as shown on
the drawings. The application control program shall be resident within the same
enclosure as the input/output circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. The

system supplier shall provide a PICS document showing the installed systems
compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012 or Equivalent BS/EN.
AAC's must be BTL-listed as a B-AAC, shall be fully application programmable and

shall at all times maintain their BACnet compliance. Controllers offering application
selection only (non-programmable) are not acceptable. Control sequences within or
programmed into the BACnet B-AAC's shall be stored in non-volatile memory,
which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained.
Whether stand-alone or networked, the BTL Listed Advanced Application

Controllers (B-AAC) shall be used to provide direct digital control of HVAC
equipment and other connected equipment. In addition to their standalone
capabilities to execute the operating sequences, they shall also be capable to be
networked in a peer-to-peer, BACnet MS/TP field network to other BACnet B-
AAC's, or as part of a complete integrated management system which integrates
multiple field networks. These controllers may be used to optimize the energy
consumption by implementing various Energy Management strategies such as
demand limiting, duty cycling, outside air optimization, temperature setup/setback,
optimum start/stop routines, etc.
Standard features for field devices shall include:

Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities as MS/TP Masters,
slave devices are not acceptable.
BACnet MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to 76.8k
baud.
Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software selectable
as analog or digital with standard and custom ranges. Pulse counting
shall be available for 30% of the inputs up to 16Hz frequency.
All Outputs to be Universal Outputs with 10 bit resolution - software
selectable for analog (0-10V and 4-20mA) or digital with standard and
custom ranges.
40 BV points and 40 AV points minimum.
Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet Loop Objects. Minimum of 1 Loop
Object for each output.
Retains Last To Normal/To off Normal Event for each object.
10 User definable program areas.
8 BACnet Trend Log Objects, minimum sample interval of 1 second.
8 BACnet Schedule Objects.
3 BACnet Calendar Objects.
BACnet Intrinsic Alarm Reporting.
Sensor conversion tables for creating linear curves.
Compatible with "Smart Sensor" specified below.

For BACnet B-AAC's designed to control larger HVAC equipment

including AHUs, Exhaust Fans, Chiller Plants, and Boiler Plants, the
following shall apply in addition to the standard features:
Optional output cards for the following outputs:
24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.
N.C. Form A relay output.
N.O. Form A relay output.
4-20mA.
0-10VDC analog output.
RTD
One B-AAC may only serve a single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a
dedicated controller).
BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC): General
Each ASC controller shall be a dedicated, stand-alone, microprocessor-based,

application-specific unitary controller designed to control the HVAC plant, control
sequences, and point configurations. The ASC shall operate with a high-speed 16-
bit processor. ASC must be BTL-listed as a B-ASC (BACnet-Application Specific
Controller) conforming to ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012.
ASC controller shall utilize user programmable function modules as required to meet
the functional intent of all control sequences on a stand-alone basis.
Universal inputs shall include the following minimum requirements:

Five universal inputs per controller.
Configurable for 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, RTD, or dry contact
type input signals with 12-bit resolution.
Digital outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:

FCU ASC: At least Five (5) relay outputs per controller,
where three of them shall be suitably rated for the FCU fan
Operation.
VAV ASC: At least Two (2) relay outputs per controller
Analog outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:

Three (3) analog outputs per controller configurable for 0-
10VDC or 4-20mA.
Floating analog outputs are not accepted.

Communication Networks:
ASC shall utilize optically isolated, 2-wire twisted shielded
EIA-485 line signaling for portable operator terminal, color
graphic operator station, or NAC and shall utilize the
BACnet MS/TP communications protocol designed to
control the HVAC plant, control sequences, and point
configurations.
ASCs shall communicate at speeds up to and including
76.8k baud and shall utilize a token passing scheme to
accommodate concurrent communication with multiple
network devices.
Failure of one ASC shall not affect the performance of
other ASCs on the network.
Nonvolatile Memory: All ASC's operating parameters, setpoints, and schedules shall
be stored in flash memory or other nonvolatile memory.
ASCs firmware shall be upgradeable through flash memory over MS/TP without
application interruption.
Input Power: Input power requirements for the ASC shall be line voltage or 24VAC,
50/60 Hz, 20 VA maximum. The controller power supply shall be separate from any
other used for motor control contractor coils.
Mounting: ASC shall be readily mounted by using pre-drilled holes or integral

mounting lugs such as DIN rail.
BMS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC): VAV

TERMINAL UNITS
VAV Controller shall be equipped with an integrated proportional (0-
10V or 4-20mA) damper actuator and the damper actuator shall operate
with Motor Management Technology (MMT) for monitoring,
identifying, and correcting motor shorts. VAV controller must be BTL-
listed as B-ASC (BACnet-Application Specific Controller) conforming
to ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012.
Provide differential pressure transducers for the monitoring of the
terminal unit airflow rate. The sensors shall be an integral component of
the ASC. The differential pressure transducer shall meet, at minimum,
the requirements:
Monitor the differential pressures generated by a multi-
point averaging device located in the air duct.
The terminal unit manufacturer as part of the factory
installation shall provide tubing from these sensors to the
multi-point averaging devices.
The differential pressure sensors shall monitor the flow
rates with an accuracy of ± 1 percent over the full scale.

Provide a one-micron filter on the pressure differential

sensor if it monitors a moving air stream.
Each VAV terminal unit shall have an ASC. The number and location
of terminal units and airflow rates shall be as indicated on the Mechanical
Drawings.
The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the following components
for each VAV terminal unit for interface and mounting of the ASC:
Suitable means of mounting the ASC inside or on the
exterior of the VAV terminal unit. The terminal unit
manufacturer shall provide a suitably constructed enclosure
with electrical barriers as required by the applicable codes
and standards.
Multi-point averaging type flow sensor at the air inlet to the
terminal unit and calibration curve (differential pressure
versus flow rate). Calibration curve shall be maintained in
a sturdy plastic pouch that shall be available on the
underside of the terminal unit.
The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each
VAV terminal unit to the VAV terminal unit manufacturer for factory
installation by the VAV terminal unit manufacturer:
Application Specific Controller. (This shall incorporate a
pressure transducer as required to monitor the differential
pressure signal generated by the multi-point averaging type
flow sensor at the inlet to the VAV terminal unit).
24 Vac control transformer.
Any required temperature sensor or control device
Provide the terminal unit manufacturer with the following
documentation to coordinate the mounting of the ASC and related
components:
Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing the
wiring and tubing of the ASC and other control equipment
installed on the terminal devices.
Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient
information to enable the terminal unit manufacturer to
undertake the installation satisfactorily.
The BMS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility
before commencement of fabrication to ensure that the terminal unit
manufacturer's installation procedures are satisfactory. The terminal unit
manufacturer shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the ASC and all
associated instrumentation and final control elements based on the
information provided by the BMS Specialist. The terminal unit
manufacturer and the BMS Specialist shall both certify on the drawing
that the drawing is correct and the drawing shall be submitted as a shop
drawing for review by the Engineer.

ASC for each production run shall be at the terminal unit manufacturer’s
factory at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled shipment dates to the job-
site. Obtain the terminal unit shipping dates from the MEP Specialist.
The BMS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's facility
at the completion of the initial production run, prior to the shipping of
any terminal units to the project site, to inspect the installation of the
ASC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
The BMS Specialist shall enter all data into the ASC and shall test the
ASC at the factory. The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the pressure
sensor and the flow rate reported by the controller at the factory and shall
recheck these values following the installation of the terminal unit in the
ceiling plenum. This shall be done in conjunction with the air-balancing
Specialist and shall be based on the flow sensor calibration curve
(differential pressure versus flow rate) provided by the terminal unit
manufacturer. The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the temperature
sensors.
It shall be the responsibility of the BMS Specialist to verify the following
with the VAV terminal unit manufacturer prior to the tender submittal:
The pressure differential generated by the multi-point
sensors is compatible with the instrumentation to be
provided by the BMS Specialist for the specified accuracy
requirements.
The damper assembly is compatible with the actuator to be
provided by the BMS Specialist.
Provide a wall mounted space smart sensor for the monitoring of the
terminal unit space temperature. The smart sensor shall meet the
following minimum requirements:
RTD sensors.
Temperature reported at the OIW shall have an accuracy of
+ or – 0.5 Deg. C.
Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There
shall be no logos, trademarks or names visible on the
enclosure and there shall be no evidence of their removal.
The Smart Sensor shall have an LCD. Temperature
reported at the LCD shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5
Deg. C. and the difference between the LCD and the OIW
reported temperatures shall not differ by more than 0.2
Deg.C. Cover shall be removable to allow access to the
plug for the POT.
The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall
be space temperature and space temperature set point.
The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval and shall be amended as instructed by the
Engineer at no cost to the Employer.

Smart sensor housings with LCD shall be intelligent and

shall only communicate with their associated ASC via a
digital communications network over screened twisted pair
or equivalent communication cable independent from the
BMS LAN. This communications network may use a
proprietary protocol.
If requested by the engineer the smart sensor enclosure
shall be temporarily mounted alongside the VAV box and
shall be subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out
design. The wall mounted smart sensors shall be located
1500 mm above finished floor level. Coordinate exact
locations with Architectural Plans.
The VAV box ASC shall each have the capability of monitoring and
controlling the following parameters for VAV terminal units:
Space temperature.
Air flow rate.
Damper modulation.
PI or PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within ± 0.5
Deg. C. of the space temperature setpoints.
The operator shall be able to access the ASC by connecting the POT to
the secondary LAN at the space smart sensor enclosure. If there is a wall
mounted smart sensor it shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain
access to the ceiling plenum in order to obtain an operator interface to
the ASC. At minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake the
following functions via the POT when connected to the ASC at the
associated smart sensor enclosure, the DDC and the NAC and via the
OIW:
Change a space temperature set point for a single terminal
unit.
Change a space temperature set point for a group of
terminal units.
Change an alarm limit/value.
Change the operating mode for a single terminal unit.
Change the operating mode for a group of terminal units.
Change the schedules for a single terminal unit.
Change the schedules for a group of terminal units.
Set the air damper on a terminal unit to:
The maximum cooling flow rate set point.
The closed position.
The fully open position.
Minimum cooling flow rate set point.

Turn the fan ON/OFF for a single powered VAV terminal

unit.
Turn the fans ON/OFF for a group of powered VAV
terminal units.
The POT shall be plug connectable at the smart sensor housing.
The BMS Specialist shall install data into the ASC as necessary for the
correct operation of the terminal unit including:
Terminal unit-ASC MS/TP address.
Air damper flow rate set points.
Occupied mode space temperature set points.
Unoccupied mode space temperature set points.
Control constants.
Engineering unit’s conversion factors.
Select the button to be an occupied/unoccupied switch.
Default operating schedules.
Definition of terminal unit type.
Other parameters as necessary to define the operation of the
terminal unit in accordance with these specifications.
Following installation of the terminal unit, the BMS Specialist shall
calibrate on-site the instrumentation associated with the following
monitored parameters:
Space temperature.
Airflow rate sensor.
Following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling space the
BMS Specialist shall undertake the following tasks:
Physically connect the ASC into the BMS LAN.
Enter all parameters as detailed above.
Verify that the ASC modulates the air duct dampers from
fully open to fully closed and vice versa within the
specified time and verify either visually or by feel that the
damper closes fully under ASC control.
Verify that the terminal unit-ASC is satisfactorily
integrated into the BMS LAN.
Verify that the operating sequences are correct and that
there is stable modulation of the air damper.
Assist the Air Balancing and MEP Specialists as required
for the complete commissioning, calibration and
operational verification of the AC and terminal unit
systems.

BMS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC): FAN

COIL UNITS
Each fan coil unit shall have an ASC. The number, type and location of
FCU shall be as indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.
The BMS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each
FCU to the MEP Specialist for installation by the MEP Specialist:
Application Specific Controller.
24 Vac control transformer if required.
Interposing relays for fan speed commands AC-3 rated
according to the FCU fan current requirement.
Temperature sensors for those FCU that have the
temperature sensor located in the recirculation port.
Chilled water valve and actuator. The MEP Specialist shall
install the valve.
Provide a wall mounted smart sensor for the monitoring of the space
temperature and for the user commands associated with the FCU. The
sensor shall meet the following minimum requirements:
RTD sensors.
Temperature reported at the OIW shall have an accuracy of
+ or – 0.5 Deg. C.
Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white. There
shall be no logos, trademarks or names on the enclosure
and there shall be no evidence of their removal.
Sensor shall have an LCD. Temperature reported at the
LCD shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C. and the
difference between the LCD and the OIW reported
temperatures shall not differ by more than 0.2 Deg.C.
Cover shall be removable to allow access to the plug for the
POT.
The functions displayed by LCD via selector button shall
be space temperature, space temperature set point and fan
speed.
The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval and shall be amended as instructed by the
Engineer at no cost to the Employer.
Smart sensor housings with LCD shall be intelligent and
shall only communicate with their associated ASC via a
digital communications network over screened twisted pair
cable or equivalent and shall be independent from BMS
LAN. This communications network may use a proprietary
protocol. Enclosures associated with FCU that have speed
control shall also incorporate speed selection buttons.

If requested by the engineer the smart sensor enclosure

shall be temporarily mounted alongside the FCU and shall
be subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out design.
The wall mounted smart sensors shall be located 1500 mm
above finished floor level. Coordinate exact locations with
Architectural Plans.
Provide the MEP Specialist with the following documentation within 2
weeks of receiving the request from the MEP Specialist:
Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing the
wiring of the FCU controller and other control equipment
installed on the terminal devices.
Written instructions and drawings containing sufficient
information to enable the MEP Specialist to undertake the
installation satisfactorily.
The BMS Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU that shall
have the temperature sensor located in the recirculation
port.
The BMS Specialist shall meet with the MEP Specialist before
commencement of the ASC installation and cabling to ensure that the
proposed installation procedures are satisfactory. The MEP Specialist
shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the ASC and all associated
instrumentation and final control elements based on the information
provided by the BMS Specialist. The MEP Specialist and the BMS
Specialist shall both certify on the drawing that the drawing is correct
and the drawing shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review by the
Engineer.
The BMS Specialist shall periodically meet with the MEP Specialist to
inspect the installation of the ASC and to verify proper operation via a
POT.
The BMS Specialist shall enter all data into the ASC at the site after the
FCU has been installed.
The ASC shall monitor and control the following parameters for FCU:
Space temperature.
Fan ON/OFF and Speed control.
Cooling and Heating coils valve.
Electric reheat coil
Fresh air damper
Set point reset (applicable only to those units with wall
mounted enclosures having a set point reset capability)
Fan speed control selection (applicable only to those units
with wall mounted enclosures having a set point reset
capability)

PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within ± 0.5 Deg. C.
of the space temperature set points.
The operator shall be able to access the ASC by connecting the POT to
the ASC LAN at the smart sensor enclosure. It shall not be necessary for
the operator to obtain access to the ceiling plenum in order to obtain an
operator interface to the ASC. At minimum, the operator shall be able
to undertake the following functions via the POT when communicating
with the BMS Management level Network or when connected at the
smart sensor housing, at the DDC and at the NAC and via any OIW:
Change space temperature set points for a single FCU.
Change an alarm limit/value.
Change the operating mode for a single FCU.
Change the schedules for a single FCU.
Turn the fan ON/OFF for a single FCU.
Override the fan speed.
Set the cooling or heating coil valve to fully open and fully
closed and any intermediate position.
Enable / disable the reheat coil
The BMS Specialist shall install data into the ASC on site as necessary
for the correct operation of the FCU including:
FCU-ASC MS/TP address.
Occupied space temperature set points.
Unoccupied space temperature set points.
Control constants.
Engineering units conversion factors.
Default operating schedules.
Definition of FCU type.
Other parameters as necessary to define the operation of the
FCU in accordance with these specifications.
The BMS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor at the
project site.
Following the installation of the FCU the BMS Specialist shall undertake
the following tasks:
Physically connect the ASC into the BMS LAN.
Enter all parameters that may not have been entered before
shipment of the FCU to the site.
Verify that the ASC modulates the cooling or heating coil
valve from fully open to fully closed and vice versa.

Verify that the FCU-ASC is satisfactorily integrated into

the LAN.
Verify that the operating sequences are correct and that
there is stable modulation of the cooling coil valve and fan
speeds
Calibrate the temperature sensor.
ASC shall have opto-isolation or equivalent protection.
APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER: COMPATIBILITY TESTS FOR

TERMINAL UNITS:
Prior to shipping any VAV/CAV terminal units to site, the BMS

Specialist and the VAV/CAV terminal unit manufacturer shall perform
the tests and inspections detailed herein. A full report must be submitted
to the Engineer for approval before shipping the equipment. The
Engineer may reject any result that is found to contradict the sub-contract
requirements.
Physical Inspection:
Inspect installation of damper actuator on the unit (Verify
rigid installation. Observe full open to full close stroking
of actuator motor without binding.
Inspect installation of cabling and sensor tubing from the
Application Specific Controller (ASC) to end devices.
Inspect mounting of controller on unit. Verify accessibility
for service after installation.
ASC Flow Rate Performance (VAV boxes only):
Verify all ASC software parameters are provided to meet
the specifications.
Verify the ability to provide complete shut off of the air-
cooling damper.
Verify the accuracy of the multipoint flow sensor is within
specification tolerances at various air positions between the
minimum and maximum ranges of the terminal unit. Use
at least six damper positions (lab reading vs. controller
reading vs. damper position). Chart this performance on a
table indicating accuracy deviations and also chart on a
graph (l/s or m³/s vs. % damper position) indicating lab and
controller readings on the same graph.
Move the flexible air duct inlet (simulate a kink in the
flexible ductwork) to verify there is not a requirement for
straight lengths of ductwork to maintain airflow rate sensor
accuracy.

Verify the controller operation is stable at low flow inlet

conditions (less than the multipoint flow sensor rated
accuracy limit). Record minimum inlet velocity at which
accurate sensor accuracy and control was maintained.
If cold air is available in a controlled and conditioned
space, verify that the controller can maintain space
conditions at ± 0.5 Deg. C. around the setpoint (VAV boxes
only).
Set the air damper to maintain a fixed flow rate setpoint.
Vary the inlet static pressure from 25 to 400Pa. in 25 Pa
upward increments. Record the flow rate setpoint, ASC
controller reading of airflow rate, and the laboratory
reading at each setpoint. Vary the inlet static pressure from
400 Pa to 25 Pa in 25 Pa downward increments noting the
same readings. Plot the performance of this test to verify
lack of hysteresis effects. Perform this test at minimum and
maximum air-cooling flow rate setpoints.
ASC Electrical Performance:
Reduce the input voltage on the ASC to below 85% for an
extended period. Note if controller performance is
affected.
Reduce the input voltage on the ASC slowly to witness at
what voltage the ASC will shut down and verify that the
shutdown was orderly.
Increase the input voltage on the ASC slowly to witness at
what voltage the ASC will re-enable itself and verify that
the restart was orderly.
Verify that during the operation of the ASC, electrical noise
is not induced back into the electrical system. This shall
require an oscilloscope.
BACnet ROUTERS
Provide all BACnet routers as necessary to meet the requirements of these

specifications.
BACnet routers shall be native BACnet only. Proprietary and other standard
protocols shall not be provided. Routers shall be provided as necessary to connect
one medium to another, e.g. BACnet ARCnet to BACnet MS/TP, etc.
The BACnet routers shall, at minimum, support BIBB’s for data sharing, alarm and
event management, scheduling, trending and device and network management.

DISTRIBUTED CONTROL PANELS (DCP)
The DCP’s shall be standalone, shall reside on the automation level and shall meet
DCP shall house the DDC’s and shall meet the requirements detailed in
Paragraph titled “Panels and Enclosures” of these specifications. The
DCP shall be placed at the same location as the equipment they control.
The BMS Specialist shall provide a suitably rated enclosure for all
associated BMS components, including the controllers, relays, wiring
guides, terminal strips, etc.
Each DCP shall have its own power supplies that shall be rated such that
they will adequately accommodate all foreseeable uses of the DCP
including DDC controllers and field devices.
Each DCP shall have an AC Mains Socket outlet rated 1000 Watts. If all
the sockets in the DCP’s are connected to the UPS, no more than two
sockets shall be used at the same time therefore a 2kW additional load
shall be considered in the main UPS selection.
All field instrumentation and final control elements cable shall be
terminated at the DCP on terminal strips.
All Power circuits (220/240VAC, 24VAC, 24VDC, 15VDC etc)
supplying any type of equipment or field devices from the DCP, shall be
fused. Outgoing power cables shall be terminated on Fused Terminals
inside the DCP.
Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal
strips. Each termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed
in the shop and record drawings.
Provide and install as-built wiring diagrams to indicate the control points
on all equipment. Also provide laminated point lists in all DCP’s
All the DDC enclosures with reasonable larger size more than 800 mm
Height X 500 mm Width shall be provided with lighting fixtures with
door switches.
An internal white LED strip light, which shall be controlled by a door
mounted micro-switch that energizes the light fitting when the panel door
is opened. The light shall be located where it does not prevent gland plate
removal or interfere with cable entry.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
Outside Air Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
Ventilated white PVC sun screen.
Wall mounted weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.

100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature

coefficient of resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 Deg. C.
(1.0 Deg.F.).
Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet
monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire
configuration
Temperature Range of 0 Deg. C to 50 Deg C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – SINGLE POINT
Provide duct mounted, single point, temperature sensor as follows:

In ducts less than 1 m2 in cross-sectional area.
In ducts greater than 1m2 in cross-sectional area if there is no heating coil
and no cooling coil and no mixing of air flows of different temperatures
upstream.
Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Stainless steel probe of length between one-third and two-thirds of the
duct width.
(1.0 Deg. F.).
configuration.
Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg. F).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – AVERAGING TYPE
Provide duct mounted, averaging, temperature sensor as follows:

In ducts greater than 1 m² in cross-sectional area.
Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Probe length of 3.66m (12 feet) minimum or 3.25m per m2. (One linear
foot per square foot) of duct cross-sectional area, whichever is greater.
Copper sheathed construction.


(1.0 Deg. F.).
configuration.
Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
Suitable supports at all bends and at intermediate points to prevent
movement in the air stream.
Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg.
F.).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR: WALL MOUNTED – PUBLIC SPACES
Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the following:

White protective enclosure. There shall be no manufacturer's logos,
name or thermometer on casing.
Location shall be selected by the Engineer. No sensor shall be mounted
until the Employer gives specific location instructions.
100/1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient
of resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.
Monitored temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 Deg.
C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
configuration
Temperature range of 10 Deg.C. to 60 Deg.C.
Sensor shall have and LCD.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR: THERMOWELL MOUNTED
Thermowell mounted temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
Rigid stainless steel probe of length which is, at minimum, 20% of the
pipe width.
BMS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of ± 0.5
Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.). accuracy.
Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required with a
temperature range that is appropriate for the application.

Range for chilled water between 0 Deg.C. and +70 Deg.C. (+32 Deg.F.
and +160 Deg.F.)
Range for condenser water between 0 Deg.C. and +120 Deg.C. (+32
Deg.F. and +250 Deg.F.)
Range for hot and heating water Between 0 Deg.C. and +120 Deg.C.
(+32 Deg.F. and +250 Deg.F.)
Where necessary to meet monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-
wire or 4-wire configuration.
Moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
Stainless steel thermowell.
Provided with thermal grease to aid temperature sensing.
Sensors required for the determination of temperature differential shall
be matched with a maximum variation over the entire temperature range
of 0.1 Deg. C. (0.2 Deg. F.).
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
Outside air relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
Non-corroding outdoors screen to minimize wind effects and solar
heating.
Wall mounted weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.
Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to relative humidity range of 0%
to 100%.
3% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
Humidity sensor shall be replaceable.
Operating temperature range shall be appropriate for the climate. Sensor
and transmitter shall be rated for operation in ambient temperatures of,
at minimum, 5 Deg.C. (9 Deg.F.) below and above the lowest and highest
recorded temperatures for the location respectively.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
Duct mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
Duct mounted moisture resistant enclosure with conduit fitting.
to 100%.

8 inch probe length.

Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to
122 Deg. F.)
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: INDOOR AIR - WALL MOUNTED
Wall mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
Wall mounted enclosure with white cover. There shall be no
manufacturer's logos, name or thermometer on casing.
to 100%.
Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to
122 Deg. F.).
With LCD.
COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS:

OUTSIDE AIR
Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor for
exterior wall mounting. Web bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
Stainless steel probe with an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior
housing.
Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum wet bulb
temperature range of -7 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (+20 Deg.F. to +120
Deg.F.).
Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum dry bulb
temperature range of -29 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (-20 Deg.F. to +120
Deg.F.).
Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ±
0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
Monitored wet bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ±
3% of reading.
Sensor shall have a solar screen.

COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSOR:

DUCT MOUNTED
duct mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the
Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for
an interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior
housing.
Deg.F.).
Deg.F.).
0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
3% of reading.
Probe shall be a minimum of 200mm.
COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS:

INSIDE AIR
duct mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the
Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing.
Deg.F.).
Deg.F.).
0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
3% of reading.

STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
Duct mounted static pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
Input range shall be appropriate for the application. Select range such
that it covers from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of the
duct up to a static pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of the
maximum static pressure that could be encountered in the duct relative
to the duct exterior. Typically:
For low pressure duct consider using a range of 0 to 500Pa
(0 to 2” wc.)
For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to
6” wc.)
For high-pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500 Pa (0 to 10”
wc.).
4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range
compatible with the BMS.
1% Full scale output accuracy
Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input or 7
kpa (20 psi) whichever is greater.
LCD
STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: SPACE
Space mounted static pressure sensors shall be designed for room pressure
monitoring applications with all electrical and pressure connection on back of unit.
I addition, unit shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Input range of –50 to +50 Pa. (-0.2” to + 0.2” wc.)
4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range
compatible with the BMS.
1% accuracy of range
Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input or 7
kpa (20 psi) whichever is greater.
LCD

STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: WATER
Pressure sensors shall meet the following requirements:

Input range of 0 to 1400 kPa
4-20 mA output proportional to water pressure.
0.5% accuracy of range.
Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 38 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 100 Deg.
F.).
Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.
Over pressure input protection of two times rated input.
An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and
an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
Stainless steel wetted parts.
Burst pressure of 5 times rated input
Long-term stability of .25 percent of full scale.
Construction of pressure transmitter and associated components shall be
rated for at least twice the maximum static pressure.
LCD display
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR – AIR
Differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Output shall be 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc or 0-5Vdc output proportional to
pressure input range compatible with BMS.
Select range as required, taking into consideration pressure drop across
filter or coil. Typically 0 to 500Pa (0-2” wc) range for low-pressure
commercial duct.
Operating temperature range of 0 DEG C to 60 DEG C (32 DEG F to
140 DEG F).
With LCD
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR - WATER
Water differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
Cast aluminum an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior
application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
Output of 4-20 mA proportional to the pressure sensed.
Over pressure protection of five times the rated input.

Operating range shall be suitable for the application. Select range such
that it covers from zero differential pressure up to a differential static
pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static
pressure that could be encountered. Remember that if the sensor is used
for the control of a chilled water bypass and is located across, for
example, a chilled water AHU coil, the pressure drop of both the coil and
the associated valve at full design flow have to be taken into account.
Accuracy of ± 2% of full-scale reading.
Valved tapings shall be installed by the Mechanical contractor. Furnish
the valves to the Mechanical contractor.
MULTIPOINT AVERAGING AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION – DUCTS,

PLENUMS, FAN INLETS.
Multipoint averaging airflow measuring station shall meet, at minimum, the

Sensor and sensor measuring flow range shall be appropriate for the
application.
Multipoint averaging flow sensor complete with sensor, sensor housing
and mounting brackets. Sensor tubing shall be connected or removed
without removing ductwork.
Sensing grid shall be of stainless steel construction.
Internal materials of the transducer shall be suitable for contact with air.
Integral signal integrator to minimize primary signal to noise from the
output signal.
Output signal of 4-20 mA proportional to input pressure, into a 600 OHM
load.
Temperature range of -18 Deg C to 60 Deg C (0 Deg F to 140 Deg F).
5% accuracy of the measured value.
With LCD.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - AIR
Air differential pressure switch shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and
an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
SPDT switch rated for 10 amps minimum at 120 Vac.
Setpoint trip adjustment with scale to indicate setting. Switches used for
filter differential pressures shall also have a display of the monitored
differential pressure.
Dead band adjustment.

Select range such that it covers from zero duct static pressure relative to
the exterior of the duct up to a static pressure of between 20% and 50%
in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be encountered in
the duct relative to the duct exterior. Typically:
For low pressure commercial duct use a range of 0 to 500pa
(0 to 2 inches w.g.)
For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to
6 inches w.g.)
For high pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500Pa (0 to 10
inches w.g.)
Temperature range of -18 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (0 Deg. F. to 160 Deg.
F.).
Manual reset.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - WATER
Water differential pressure switches shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
316 stainless steel body.
Local display gauge.
End to end accuracy not to exceed ± 1.0% over entire range.
Over pressure input protection to a minimum of five (5) times rated input.
The differential pressure transducer shall be rated to withstand the
maximum rated pressure of the system in which it is installed.
Range to be coordinated with the chilling unit manufacturer.
DAMPER END SWITCH
Damper end switch shall meet the following:

Adjustable axle mounted collar for easy setup and adjustment
Electrical enclosure with ½" knockout allowing for easy installation
Dual, opposed switches for fully opened or fully closed position
Switches will have the option to be set as normally closed (NC) or
normally opened (NO) by user.
LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH
Liquid level float switches shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Polypropylene float, PVC cable, hermetically sealed mercury switch.

13 amp running current @ 120 VAC, 11 amp current @ 240 VAC.

SPDT type.
Operating temperature of 0 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F. to 160 Deg.
F.).
Operating pressure of 180 kPa
ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETER
Electromagnetic flow meter shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

No moving parts.
Microprocessor-based.
4-20 mA output.
Full lugged flanged.
Accuracy shall better than 5% of flow rate over a 33:1 turndown at all
flow rates above 1 fps.
The integrally mounted meter housing and flow meter sensor with an
IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an
IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing. The flow sensor coil
housing shall be steel and withstand 3500 kPa external pressure in all
conditions.
Electronics shall be remote mounted within the central plant either wall
or column mounted adjacent to the bypass piping area.
Flow meter transmitter shall be furnished in an IP54 to IEC 60529
transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529
housing for an exterior housing, with a character, 2 line 16 digit backlit
display. The alphanumeric display shall indicate user-defined flow units
and flow rate. All menu advice and commands shall be visible on this
display.
The flow meter shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from -40
Deg F to 200 Deg F and at pressures from full vacuum to 2100 kPa.
The meter shall feature non-volatile sensor memory (EEPROM)) which
shall contain all the characteristics of the sensor (i.e. calibration factors,
coil frequency, gain settings) as well as user defined parameters on site.
This memory shall facilitate automatic transfer of pre-programmed data
to new electronics in the event of a transmitter fault, without requiring
renewed calibration/programming.
The flow meter shall have a switching power supply having an operating
range from 77-265 VAC 50/60 Hz (12-60 VDC). Power consumption
shall not exceed 20 VA.
Carbon steel body.
Flow meter shall distinguish between directions of fluid flow.

Construction of flow-meter and associated components shall be rated for

at least twice the maximum static pressure.
THERMAL ENERGY METER (BTU METER):
The thermal energy meter (also called BTU Meter), in accordance with EN 1434 and
OIML R75, should be designed specifically to capture energy consumption in
heating and cooling applications and integration into Automatic Meter Reading
(AMR)/BMS network and Billing Software. The BTU meter shall be supplied with
two RTDs (Matched Pair) and two stainless steel thermowells.
The thermal energy meter should offer the most advanced BTU measurement by
using state-of-the-art ultrasonic flow measurement technology and thus should not
have moving parts. The body should be made of Bronze for sizes up to DN40 and
Cast Iron for flanged connection Meters sizing from DN50 and above.
The straight through sensor design should lead to zero blockage and minuscule
pressure drops and be ideal for cooling and heating applications even when
measuring the dirtiest liquid.
The meter should provide networking solutions using M-Bus, Modbus, pulse, and
BACnet protocols.
The meter should detect reverse flow.
The calculator should be Clamp On and Wall Mount type. Thermal energy is
calculated according to OIML R75 standard. The lithium battery should be recharged
over the M-Bus network, if M-Bus protocol is used.
For sizes below DN40, the meter should have a straight-through meter containing a
flow guide that extends the sound path, allowing for more precise measurement. This
reflector less design should ensure overall accuracy enhancement.
For large size meters (larger than DN50), the meter should be equipped with
Two/four pairs of ultrasonic transducers mounted on the flow sensor body to
interrogate the flow from two/four different paths or the it should be an
electromagnetic type meter achieving the specified accuracy
The Thermal Energy Meter should respect the following operating condition:
Operating Pressure: 16 bars
Static Current: <10uA
Battery Life: 10 years at tBAT< 30°C
Battery Type: Lithium,3.6V
Network Power Supply: Automatically switch to M-Bus or RS485 Power
if available.
Accuracy Class: Class 2 (OIML R75 Compliant)
Back Flow Detection: yes

Flow Temperature: 0°C to 95°C/130°C

Ambient Class: Class B.
Calculator protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
Flow Sensor Protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
AMR Connectivity: M-Bus, MODBUS, BACnet, Pulse
ULTRASONIC WATER METER:
Provide water meter as indicated in the water riser diagrams and control diagrams.
The water meters shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements.
The water meter should offer the most advanced measurement by using state-of-the-
art ultrasonic flow measurement technology and thus should not have moving parts.
The body should be made of Bronze for sizes up to DN40 and Cast Iron for flanged
connection Meters sizing from DN50 and above.
The sensor should have a non-obstructive sensor design which should lead to zero
blockage and minuscule pressure drops and be ideal for cooling and heating
applications even when measuring the dirtiest liquid.
The sensor should remain proactive and identify leakage in order to capture lost
revenue by detecting leak as low as a few drops per second.
The meter should provide networking solutions using M-Bus, Modbus, pulse, and
BACnet protocols.
The meter should detect reverse flow.
The calculator should be Clamp On and Wall Mount type. The lithium battery should
be recharged over the M-Bus network, if M-Bus protocol is used.
For large size meters (larger than DN50), the meter should be equipped with
Two/four pairs of ultrasonic transducers mounted on the flow sensor body to
interrogate the flow from two/four different paths.
The Meter should respect the following operating condition:

Operating Pressure: 16 bars
Static Current: <10uA
Battery Life: 10 years at tBAT< 30°C
Battery Type: Lithium,3.6V
Network Power Supply: Automatically switch to M-Bus or RS485 Power
if available.
Accuracy Class: Class 2 (OIML R75 Compliant)
Back Flow Detection: yes
Flow Temperature: 5°C to 95°C

Ambient Class: Class B.

Calculator protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
Flow Sensor Protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) Connectivity: M-Bus, Modbus,
BACnet, Pulse
M-BUS CONCENTRATOR:
The concentrators should be used with an Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) system
to facilitate the communication between the data center and the M-Bus utility meters
of the Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) system. The concentrator should support
BTU meters, water meters and electricity energy meters.
The M-bus Concentrator should have BACnet/IP interface to the BMS and M-BUS
and RS-485 ports to connect the M-bus meters to the Automatic Meter Reading
(AMR) meter reading master station.
The Communications parameters can be configured.
The concentrator can connect different quantity meters: 60pcs, 150pcs, 250pcs.The
power supply: 12V or 24V.
The concentrator should follow the international standard M-BUS (Meter-BUS,

EN1434-3). The wire line can be connected random as per topological structure.
The two cores cable connection can finish data communication at the same Time and
the max transmission range can reach 1000m.
The M-Bus concentrator with no memory can be used as a repeater.
The major M-Bus concentrator can be equipped with memory.
As per requirement, the M-Bus concentrator has to be equipped with, M-Bus port or
RS-485 Modbus port or BACnet MS/TP.
CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
Current sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:

Rated and sized for the applicable load.
The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its
complete operating range.
Current relay shall have input and output isolation via current
transformer.
Current relay shall be self-powered with no insertion loss.
Relay shall be housed a dustproof enclosure.

Accuracy to be <2% of full-scale max.

Temperature rating of –15 Deg C to 60 Deg C (5 Deg F to 140 Deg F).
Option: Provide LED indication of relay status.
Whenever the status of a motor cannot be monitored though a differential pressure

switch it shall be done via a current sensing relay. The BMS contractor shall provide
current sensing relays at the MCC starters or at the local starters.
VOLTAGE SENSING RELAY
Voltage sensing relays shall continuously monitor 3-phase power lines for phase
loss, phase reversal and low voltage. Voltage sensing relays shall meet, at minimum,
Dustproof ABS plastic housing.
The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its
complete operating range.
Relay shall have over current and over voltage protection.
Automatic reset with adjustable reset delay.
Adjustable trip delay.
Transient protection - 2500 VRMS for 10 ms.
Accuracy - ± 0.1% of setpoint.
Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20 Deg. F.
to 120 Deg. F.).
Accuracy - ± 0.5% of FS voltage.
Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20 Deg. F.
to 120 Deg. F.).
KW AND KWH TRANSDUCER
Provide kW and kWh transducers as identified in Field termination sheets and/or

control drawings. Transducer shall include, at minimum, the following:
True RMS conversion.
24 Bit DSP signal processor.
On board potential transformers for up to 600 Vac applications.
Configurable via RS-232C on personal computer.
RS-485 data port for communication with BMS.
4-20 mA proportional to KW demand output.
Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc
@150mA for kWH output.

Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc

@150mA for phase loss output.
Accuracy 1% or better of full scale.
Operating temperature of 0ºC to 70ºC (32ºF to 158ºF).
Provide disconnect/shorting bar and Current Transformer compatible
with amperage being sensed.
With LCD.
CONTROL RELAYS – LATCHING
Latching Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Pickup rating, time and hold rating as required for individual
applications.
Rated for a minimum of ten (10) million mechanical operations and a
minimum of 500,000 electrical operations.
Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital
output.
Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
Malfunction of a BMS component shall cause the controlled output to
fail to the positions identified in the failure procedure within the
operating sequences.
10 amp contact rating.
Pin type terminals.
CONTROL RELAYS – MOMENTARY
Momentary Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Coil ratings of 240 VAC, 50 mA or 10-30 VAC/VDC, 40 mA as suitable
for the application.
Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital
output.
Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
10 amp contact rating.
LED status indication.
CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) SENSOR
Provide a space or duct carbon dioxide gas detection sensor as indicated within the
field termination schedules and/or control diagrams. Carbon dioxide detection
sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

A non-dispersive infrared sensor set-up to be fully microprocessor based

via plug and play LCD.
4-20 mA, 0-10 or 0-5 Vdc output compatible with BMS proportional to
0 to 2000 ppm (adjustable to 10,000 ppm in 500 ppm increments) of
carbon dioxide concentration
Power supply to be 20-30Vac/dc @ 80 mA max for 24 Vac and 36 mA
avg @24 Vdc.
No maintenance or period sensor replacement needed. The sensor shall
have a 5-year calibration interval, utilizing the Automatic Calibration
Logic Program (ACLP).
The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop drawing
stage and shall be amended as directed by the Employer and/or Engineer.
Standard accuracy to be 3% of reading or 75 ppm, whichever is greater.
Operating temperature of 0ºC to 50ºC (32ºF to 122ºF).
WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
Provide water leak monitoring as identified within the Field termination schedules
and/or control diagrams. Water leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the
Water leak detection and locating system to give the earliest warning of
a leak from Pipework and Ventilation equipment fitted with drip trays
etc.
The system shall Provide an alarm giving an accurate location of a leak
at a specific zone at high or low level within drip trays etc., (where fitted)
above / below racks, A/C Units, UPS equipment etc.
The system shall comprise a network of sensing devices connected to a
locally mounted control panel. The sensing device shall consist of water
sensing cables, the liquid must touch a sensing device for an alarm to be
activated.
The leak detection system will continuously monitor the network of
sensing devices and give an alarm in the event of detecting a leak or
system/sensing device malfunction, damage or disconnection.
A control panel will be capable of monitoring up to 200% of the required
area and required length of cable sensors.
The length and/or number of sensing cable or devices and their
installation disposition shall be as recommended by the specialist sub-
contractor or supplier in accordance with the general requirement set
down in the schedule and drawings
The system shall be capable of reporting the location of a leak to a
sufficiently accurate position to enable the operator to locate and identify
the activated section of detection cable quickly and accurately

A control panel shall be capable of providing the level of accuracy of

leak detection required. This may be achieved by applying a contiguous
number of separately reporting zones of appropriate length. Wherever
possible the allocation and installation of zones shall be arranged to
coincide with defined areas or “land-marks”, individual rooms, partition
walls or other easily identifiable features. This is to facilitate speedy and
positive leak location.
Leak Detection sensor Cable/Tape

The sensor cable shall be made from Low Smoke and Fume – Zero
Halogen (LSF0H) materials for smoke reduction and low toxicity. The
cable shall be made from durable, non-deteriorating materials and have
no exposed metallic parts. It shall not be adversely affected by the
buildup of dust or other dry dirt/debris.
In the event of damage or irrevocable contamination the affected part of
the cable should be capable of on-site repair. It should not be necessary
to replace the whole length.
Leak detection cable installation

In drip trays suspended above / below Racks A/C Units, AHU’s, water
pipework, UPS equipment etc.
In Conduit at high / low level above Power Supply Boards within each
area.
The cable will be fixed to the tray at approximately 0.5 meter intervals
and at every change in direction. Acceptable fixings will be self-adhesive
clips or cold adhesive or other approved fixing. Adhesive fixings will
only be used where the floor finish is clean, stable and non-dusting.
Identification/warning tags will be attached to the cable every 1 - 2
meters. Tags will state purpose of cable and will show any relevant
information (such as zone number or distance reference) to confirm the
location of that particular part.
Special ‘Plug & Play Auto Zone Changeover Couplers (Type – RJ48)
will be used for zone changes and connection to leader cables. To
confirm location the Zone Couplers will be labeled showing its reference
number and the preceding and following zone numbers.
Appropriate connectors will be used to join separate cable lengths and
leader/ jumper cables. To confirm location the connectors will be labeled
showing any reference number and relevant location information.
The water leak detection system will be applied and mapped in such a way as to
make the part of the sensor network detecting the leak easy to identify and physically
locate. This may be achieved by sub-dividing the sensor network into a series of
separately reporting zones displayed on the control. In any event the zone displayed
by the control panel shall be cross-referenced to a map, chart or diagram which shall
clearly show the routing of the sensor network, its relationship to the building layout
and any fixed zone positions or cumulative distance marks.

The leak detection cable shall be:

Supplied in rolls for cutting and jointing according to site requirements
or
Supplied as pre-connected standard lengths.
Capable of repeated re-use - (wetting then drying).
Robust construction - resistant to moderate physical abuse
Resistant to temperatures up to 100 Deg.C
No exposes metal parts
Not affected by dust and debris
Capable of being attached directly to bare metal surfaces or pipes without
“shorting” or other interference.
Capable of being monitored along its entire length for damage or
disconnection.
Leader cables will be LSF Zero Halogen double insulated, multi-core, 7/0.2 strands
(or solid equivalent) or similar. All leader cables must be monitored along their entire
length for damage or disconnection.
The Control Panel will give a full range of status indicators - mains /battery etc. and
visual and audible alarms:
LEAK – showing affected zone / leak location
SYSTEM FAULT - detection device and/or leader cable damage:
Short circuit or disconnection /break
Open circuit. Both occurrences will show the affected zone
/ fault location
The Control Panel should be able to locate, accept, display and store concurrent
and/or consecutive multiple alarms and show the exact status of all zones at all times
(Leak, System Fault or Quiet).
Outputs and Communication:

Volt free contact changeover relay outputs will be provided for
connection to BMS or other remote alarm or monitoring system. As a
minimum these will include: Common Leak, Common System Fault,
Mains Fail/All Fail, Zone alarms.
The option for individual zone outputs should also be available.
The Control Panel should be mains operated (220/230VAC 50/60Hz) and must
include a trickle charged sealed lead-acid stand-by battery capable of maintaining
the system for 24 hours in quiet monitoring mode.
The sensitivity of the system must be adjustable to suit particular site conditions.

The system must conform to FCC or local EMC regulations, and shall be tested and
marked by and international testing laboratory.
DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
Duct smoke detectors shall be provided at the supply and return ducts of all AHU’s
and at the ducted branches from ceiling voids used as return air plenums to the main
ducted return air system. To initiate closing of dampers and/or shutting off of fans
having the following features:
Photo-electric type for duct mounting
Adjustable sensitivity
Housing of die-cast aluminum for mounting on outside of duct wall with
air sampling tubes extending into air duct, fitted with filters.
Reset switch and indicator lamps for power ON and/or alarm
Integral switching relay (2No SPDT Contacts) for energizing an alarm
panel and for de-energizing air handling devices.
UL Listed.
Alarm response time less than 10 seconds.
Air Velocity range 0.5 to 20 m/s.
Operating temperature 0 to 55 DegC.
Operating humidity 10 to 95% (Non Condensing)
All duct smoke detectors shall be connected to the building’s Fire Alarm System.
Supply duct smoke detector installation should be downstream of fans, filters, coils,
heaters, and humidifiers
Duct smoke detectors in the return air stream should be located at every return air
opening within the smoke compartment, or where the air exits each smoke
compartment or in the duct system before air enters the return air system common to
more than one compartment.
Exception: Additional smoke detectors are not required in ducts where the air duct
system passes through other smoke compartments not served by the duct.
Location of detectors mounted in or on air ducts should be downstream from any

duct openings, deflection plates, sharp bends or branch connections.
Exception: Where it is physically impossible to locate the detector accordingly, the

detector can be positioned where pressure differentials are within those established
by the manufacturer for the proper operation of the detector, usually as far as possible
from the opening, bend or deflection plates.

Detectors should be listed by a third party testing laboratory for the environment
measured in the duct and room at the installation site. Relocate the detector if
measurements fall outside of rated limits.
An access panel or door is incorporated in the duct side walls and is used during
installation and for maintenance and test.
Duct smoke detectors should be located at a minimum of 3 meters downstream from

humidifiers.
Power wiring and fire alarm interfaces to each damper control panel shall be by
electrical and fire alarm contractor respectively. Final connection for fire alarm
interface and power to panel and all wiring from panel to dampers, between panels
and from panels back to Fire Command Centre, shall be by Division 23 BMS sub-
contractor. All wiring to be in fire rated cable and contained in steel conduit. BMS
sub-contractor shall also provide wiring for common fault.
Each smoke control panel (and fireman’s override panel if shown on system
schematics) shall be
Connected back to a single master control panel in the Fire Command Centre or
similar central
location. This panel will allow master override and monitoring of all smoke
dampers in all buildings from the Fire Command Centre and pick up fault status
from the local panels. This panel shall also monitor the position of each
Auto/Hand/Test switch on local damper control panel and each Auto/Hand/Test
switch on any fireman’s override panel. Master control panel and all
interconnecting wiring shall be provided by Division 23 BMS Contractor. All local
smoke damper control panels will be capable of operating independently in the
event of loss of communication with master panel. Provide battery backup to
master panel; 24 hrs quiescent operation followed by 3 hours in alarm / operational
mode.
BMS Interface: Volt free contact indicating common fault from each panel.
CONTROL VALVES GENERAL
Furnish all valves controlled by the BMS as detailed in the mechanical trade
documents and as indicated on the control drawings which form part of these sub-
contract documents. The contractor shall install valves, except those for
instrumentation.
Refer to the Mechanical plans and drawings and to the control drawings which form
part of these sub-contract documents for the design conditions on which to base
sizing and ratings of the valves and their actuators.
The complete valve (body and trim) shall be rated for a pressure that is at least 50%
greater than the maximum pressure to which it will be exposed. Where noted in this
Section, the valve shall be rated for a higher pressure. The complete valve shall be
rated for a temperature that shall be at least 50 deg. C. (90 deg. F.) greater than the
maximum temperature to which it will be exposed. The Manufacturer shall certify

that each complete valve is suitable for and meets all relevant standards for the
application.
All valves shall be rated appropriately for the fluid, temperature and pressure and, at
minimum, shall have a 16 bar rating. Valves shall comply with BS EN 60534.
Valves of similar types shall be by the same manufacturer.
Valves shall have the manufacturer's name and the pressure rating clearly marked on
the outside of the body. Where this is not possible manufacturer's name and valve
pressure rating shall be engraved on a minimum 50mm (2 inch) diameter stainless
steel tag that shall be attached to the valve by a chain in such a manner that it cannot
be unintentionally removed.
Valves 13mm to 50mm (0.5 inch to 2 inches) shall have screwed ends. Screwed
ends shall comply with BS EN 10226 (Specification for pipe threads for tubes and
fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - metric dimensions).
Valves 63mm (2.5 inches) and larger shall have flanged ends. Flanged valves shall
be furnished complete with companion flanges, gaskets and bolting materials.
Flanges, gaskets and bolting materials shall meet the appropriate BS EN
requirements.
Verify and certify that the materials of construction of the pipe, weld, flange, bolts
and valve will not cause any galvanic corrosion.
Valves shall be suitable for continuous throttling.
Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the following
for each valve:
Associated system.
Manufacturer and model number.
Valve size and line size.
Flow rate, flow coefficient (CV) - and pressure drop at design conditions
Valve authority, flow rate and pressure drop across the valve at design
conditions and pressure drop across the associated mechanical
equipment, e.g., coil, heat exchanger, etc., at design conditions.
Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).
Leakage rate.
Maximum pressure shut-off capability.
Actuator manufacturer and model number.
Valve body pressure and temperature rating.
Normally open/closed and failure positions.
Where necessary to achieve the required performance and pressure drop a control
valve may be sized up to two nominal sizes below line size.

Valve bodies shall be cast iron, carbon steel, brass, stainless steel or bronze subject
to requirements for valve body pressure and temperature rating and suitability of
material for application. Valve stem and trim shall be stainless steel.
Valve seats shall be replaceable. Valve seats shall be metal, ceramic filled PTFE or
equivalent and must assure tight seating.
TWO WAY CONTROL VALVES
All 2 way control valves shall be dynamic, modulating, pressure independent control
valves (PICV) and shall be provided by the same manufacturer. PICVs shall be
installed on each cooling (or heating) coil as indicated on the drawings and/or
contract documents. The valve shall be a combination of balancing valve and control
valve and differential pressure control valve and shall be able to control the flow
independent of the system pressure fluctuation.
Balancing valves and associated balancing shall not be used where pressure
independent modulating control valves are installed. The control valve must have
the ability to limit flow to the maximum design flow specific for each coil at all valve
differential pressure ranges of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar) ) or higher as per maximal
system differential pressure
Each control valve shall be individually flow tested and factory verified to deviate
no more than ±5% through the entire operating pressure range of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34
to 4 bar) or higher as per maximal system differential pressure. All valves shall be
tested on a test stand calibrated and verified with traceability to NIST standards. All
testing must be performed at 5 PSI (0° through 90° at 10° increments), 15 and 60
PSI (45° and 90°). Test reports must be provided if requested.
Valve shall require no more than 5 PSI (0.34 bar) to operated pressure independent.
Flow shall not vary more than ±5% through the entire operating pressure range of 5
to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar).
Each control valve shall be factory commissioned. A calibrated performance tag

shall be provided with each valve listing the measured flow rate in 10° rotation
increments.
Control valve range ability shall be a minimum of 100:1 through the operating
pressure range.
Valve bodies 2” [50mm] and smaller shall be brass. Valve bodies 3” [80mm] through
8” [200mm] shall be ductile iron. All internal parts shall be brass, carbon steel,
stainless steel or Teflon®.
All valves shall have at least two (2) factory installed pressure/temperature ports to
allow field verification of flow and pressure independent operation based on Kv-
methodology at every presetting. If the test points are not available or flow
measurement based on Kv-methodology is not possible separate orifice plate shall
be provided and installed in series with each PICV.

Valve flow characteristics may be modified in valves 8” [200mm] and smaller

without removal from the piping system.
Maximum flow settings may be adjusted to different settings within the range of the
valve size.
For stable and accurate modulating control the stroke of the valve shall be ≥ 4mm
for valves DN15-20 and ≥ 6.5mm for valves DN25 and above.
Valve differential pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than the associated
pump’s design head pressure. Valve assembly and actuator torque shall be selected
to close off against this differential pressure.
For large pipe sizes (>DN200), where PICV is not available, 2 nos. of PICVs
installed in parallel shall be provided even if not indicated on the drawings or
separate DPCV (Differential Pressure Control Valve), Orifice plate and 2 Way Globe
Modulating Control Valve to achieve pressure independent controls.
THREE WAY CONTROL VALVES
Provide three-way globe control valves as indicated on the mechanical trade

documents.
Pressure drop shall not exceed 0.35 bar and shall conform to the following
requirements:
Valves shall be selected such that the valve authority (N) shall not be less
than 0.5 for diverting valves and 0.3 for mixing valves as defined by the
relationship: N=P1/(P1+P2) where:
P1= pressure drop across the fully open valve
P2= pressure drop across the remainder of the circuit (e.g.
a coil)
Three way control valves shall be of the mixing or diverting pattern type as indicated
in the mechanical documents. The inner valve shall have a V-port parabolic or linear
plug and stainless steel trim. Valves shall have metal-to-metal stainless steel seats to
assure tight seating.
Mixing valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each inlet port and the outlet
port and diverting valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each outlet port
and the inlet port when operating at system pressure.
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Butterfly valves shall be the full lug type.
The pressure drop across modulating butterfly valves at maximum design flow shall
not exceed 0.2 bar

Disc pins, where required to secure shaft to disc, shall be 316 stainless steel.
The butterfly valve manufacturer shall certify compliance with bubble tight shut-off
requirements at a differential pressure not less than the full rated design working
pressure and temperature specified with the downstream flange removed with flow
in either direction.
Valve manufacturer shall guarantee zero leakage to the shaft.
Where indicated in the Mechanical Trade documents provide linked butterfly valves
that shall comprise two butterfly valves meeting the above requirements mounted on
a flanged cast iron tee with a single actuator which shall modulate one valve open as
it closes the other such that when one is fully open the other is fully closed and vice
versa.
VALVES ACTUATORS - ELECTRIC
The contractor shall provide actuators for valves that are compatible with the BMS
and the selected control valves. All control valve actuators shall be modulating type.
Actuator shall be motor driven type. Valve stem position shall be adjustable in
increments of one (1) percent or less of full stem travel.
Actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train, mechanical travel stops and
two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.
Actuator gear assembly shall be made of hard-anodized aluminum or steel or

material of equivalent durability. No plastic components shall be acceptable for the
gear drive assembly. Disassembly of the gears shall not be required to remove the
motor.
Actuator shall be rated for continuous duty and have an input voltage of 220/240
Vac, 50/60 Hz or 24 V.
Actuator housing shall have a minimum IP 54 to IEC 60529 rating. Actuators on

valves located in mechanical rooms or outdoors shall have covers of aluminum or a
material of equivalent strength and shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of bolts
when removing the cover from the base. Housings for valves located in a plenum
and used for terminal unit or fan coil unit heating/cooling coils, may be constructed
of reinforced plastic. Materials of construction for all actuator components shall be
non-corroding.
Actuator motor shall be fully accessible for ease of maintenance.
Actuator shall be sized to meet the shut-off requirements when operating at the
maximum system differential pressure and with the installed system pump operating
at shut-off head.
Actuator shall control against system maximum working pressures.

Actuator shall fail as indicated on the control drawings that form part of these sub-
contract documents. Provide spring return to de-energized position on loss of power
or loss of control signal if so required by the sequences of operation.
Actuator shall accept control signals compatible with the BMS analogue or digital
output subsystem as appropriate. The valve stem position shall be linearly related to
the control signal.
Actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft and
valve position.
Actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and
vice versa in less than two minutes.
Actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibration without

operations failure. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.
Actuator shall be equipped with an integral position potentiometer to indicate the

stem position of the valve where required by the control sequences. All valve
actuators shall have integral end position switches.
Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed only in the location/orientation
approved by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve
location.
Actuator shall have a manual declutch lever to enable manual operation of the valve.
It shall be possible for an operator to manually modulate valves located in
mechanical rooms in the event of loss of power. The operator shall be able to
manually modulate the valves without having to climb a ladder or other non-
permanent structure. It shall be ensured that the valve installation is such that the
valve cannot declutch under the influence of gravity and/or vibration.
CONTROL VALVES WITH INTEGRAL ENERGY METER & DELTA T

MANAGER
The energy valve is a modulating duty valve which consist of a modulating

motorized control valve, an electronic flow meter and two temperature probes. This
valve shall act as electronic pressure independent balancing & control valve type
governed by a factory controller, either built-in in the valve’s actuator housing or
attached to valve assembly.
The valve shall have EQM characteristic and shall be suitable for modulating control.
Cast construction EN-JL 1040 (GG25) fitted with magnetic induction flow meter
from EN-GJS-500-7U.
Energy Metering: Energy metering shall be accomplished utilizing two temperature

sensors providing feedback of coil inlet and outlet water temperatures, and an
electronic flow meter to provide analogue flow feedback.

Delta T regulation: Software shall control the valve to avoid coil differential
temperature falling below its programmed set point.
Remote Control and Monitoring: Real-time data and configuration of valve

operating parameters shall be available by means of BACnet MS/TP, BACnet/IP or
HTTP. Historical trend data, including energy use shall be stored for up to 14 months
and be retrievable in a standard time stamped format. Valve ball shall be stainless
steel with PTFE seat. Stem seal shall be peroxide EPDM. Valves shall give EQM
characteristic flow control in accordance with VDI/VDE2178.
Actuator shall be supplied fitted from the valve manufacturer with 0-10V control
signal 24VAC rotary action and capable of closing at 690kPa. Shall have manual
override with lockable push button gear disengagement. Actuator shall have
protection class IP54 with EMC CE according to 2004/108/EC. Extra low voltage
protection class IEC/EN 111. Water flow rate may be calibrated off or on site.
Actuator and valve shall be from one manufacturer and maintenance free. Valve and
actuator shall carry a 5 year warranty from the manufacturer.
VALVES FOR INSTRUMENTATION
Instrumentation, such as pressure sensors and flow rate monitors, which is provided
for the monitoring of parameters associated with liquid in pipes or tanks, shall be
removable and replaceable without the requirement to shut down a pump and without
the requirement to drain the pipe or tank and without causing liquid to leak from the
pipe or tank. To facilitate this, the BMS subcontractor shall furnish valves for
installation by the mechanical trade.
Instrumentation that is mounted external to the pipe or tank and which is connected
to the pipe or tank by one or more sampling lines shall have a manual two-way on/off
valve in each sampling line meeting the following requirements:
Ball type valve
Valve body shall be 316 stainless steel
Ball and stem shall be 316 stainless steel
Zero leakage.
Rated for 1050 kPa or for a pressure 50% greater than the system
working pressure, whichever is greater
Rated for a minimum of 50 deg. C (90 deg. F.) greater than the highest
fluid temperature.
Brass or stainless steel trim.
Valve seats shall be metal, reinforced TFE or equivalent and must assure
tight seating.
Valve shall be Whitey 40 Series or 80 Series or approved equal if it meets
the requirements detailed above.

Valves for insertion flow meters shall be full port gate valves sized for the flow meter
in accordance with the flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. If the flow meter
manufacturer offers the valve as an accessory then it shall be purchased by the BMS
subcontractor from the insertion flow meter manufacturer and shall be installed by
the mechanical trade in accordance with the insertion flow meter manufacturer’s
instructions. The valve shall meet the pressure and temperature requirements
detailed for the control valves and shall have zero leakage at the system maximum
pressure.
DAMPERS GENERAL
Provide actuators for all motorized dampers excluding motorized fire and/or smoke
rated dampers. All motorized damper actuators furnished by the BMS Specialist
shall be modulating actuators.
Multiple section two position dampers shall be controlled by one BMS output unless
indicated otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
Multiple section modulating dampers shall be controlled in sequence unless

indicated otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
Actuators shall be mounted to allow complete access for maintenance and removal.
Wherever possible provide damper actuators mounted on the exterior of the
duct/damper section. The installation of actuators within air streams will be
permitted only where damper configurations and site conditions require. Obtain
approval for proposed installations of actuators within ductwork, plenums,
airstreams, etc. Furnish access doors where required to allow access.
Damper actuators shall be configured for normal and failure positions as indicated
in the operating sequences and as indicated on the MEP Specialist Mechanical
Drawings and Specifications. Provide damper end switches on 2-position actuators
and position feedback for modulating damper actuators.
Provide actuators sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and

industry standards for accurate and stable control of airflow in each application.
Provide damper actuator installations to comply with the acoustical requirements for
the project. Noise generated from damper actuators in air streams shall not be
detectable in occupied building spaces.
Damper actuators shall be controlled by the BMS where necessary to meet the
required sequences of operation. If the FAS also controls a damper then the FAS
control shall override the BMS control of the damper.
Dampers shall be provided by the Mechanical Specialist.

DAMPER ACTUATORS
Provide electric damper actuators for all motorized dampers. Electric actuators shall
meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Stroke by the rotating motion of a reversible, overload-protected
synchronous motor. Actuators shall be directly coupled to damper drive
blades with no intermediate linkages or shall be rotary type actuators
directly coupled to the damper drive shaft.
Protected against overload by an integral magnetic clutch or stall
protection by non-overloading impedance protected motor.
240 Vac ± 10%, 50/60 Hz or 24 Vac power supply with 2 limit switches
with electrically isolated contacts
One actuator for each damper section. Provide additional actuators to
ensure sufficient torque to meet the specified close off leakage
requirements. Damper actuators shall not be stacked.
Actuators shall be motorized/driven in both the open and closed
directions. Where required by the sequences of operation, actuators shall
have a spring return to the de-energized position upon loss of power.
Damper normal and failure positions shall be as identified within the
sequences of operation.
BMS controlled actuators for modulating Motorized Dampers shall be
controlled by a 0-10 Vdc, or 4-20mA signal. Provide actuators that are
fully compatible with the BMS analogue output subsystem. BMS
controlled actuators for two position dampers shall be controlled by
24Vac, 24Vdc or single-phase 240 Vac power switched by the BMS.
Complete with mounting brackets suitable for extended shaft mounting
or direct damper drive shaft mounting.
Stroke dampers from fully closed to fully open in accordance with the
following:
Service Timing Requirement
Two position normal service
75 seconds
Modulating normal service
120 seconds
Emergency service (stair pressurization, smoke
containment, etc.) 15 seconds
Actuators for non-fire and/or smoke rated dampers shall be rated for
operation at ambient temperatures of minus 40 Deg.C. to 50 Deg.C. (-40
Deg. F. to 122 Deg. F.).
Complete with damper/actuator stroke position indicator.
Manual drive release mechanism and manual positioning mechanism.

Actuators shall be quiet in operation such that noise from actuator operation is not
detectable in any occupied spaces.
DAMPER ACTUATORS HARDWIRED INTERLOCKS
Provide all required hardwired interlocks between fans and any motor actuated
dampers as identified within these sub-contract documents.
Power for interlocked dampers shall be obtained from the associated air handling fan
motor control circuit. Coordinate actuator power supply wiring and fire alarm
system override control of dampers with MEP Specialist.
Where dampers are specified to be hard wire interlocked with fan motors the BMS
Specialist shall provide the damper position switches. Provide the damper end
switch(s) hard wire interlocked to achieve the operational requirements as specified
in the Point Schedules and the sequences of operation, and as indicated in the MEP
Specialist Drawings and Specifications. Provide damper end switches hard wire
interlocked to prevent fan motor operation in both the hand and auto position of
hand/off/auto motor control circuit. Damper position switches shall be set to indicate
the open position when they are open by more than 80%.
Provide for each damper that is controlled by both the BMS and the FAS, a terminal
strip and associated control relays such as to allow control and monitoring as follows
(as applicable):
BMS two position open-closed control - contact closure of a BMS relay,
thermostat or interlocking device shall control the damper. Contact
opening shall close the damper.
BMS modulating control - modulating signal from the BMS of 0-10 Vdc
or 4-20 mA output to achieve the required sequence.
Damper open/closed status - allows FAS monitoring or interlock of
damper open and damper close status.
Damper open/closed status - allows BMS monitoring or interlock of
damper open and damper close status.
Override open control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or
localized smoke detector shall override any BMS modulating or
open/closed control to open the damper.
Override closed control - contact closure of a FAS command relay or
localized smoke detector shall override any BMS modulating or
open/closed control to close the damper.
Furnish and terminate cabling as follows:
Between all damper actuators and the associated damper
terminal strip.
Between the BMS and the damper terminal strip for any
damper monitored and/or controlled by the BMS.

Between the damper terminal strip and interlocked motors,

thermostats, pressure switches, generators, pumps, etc.
Coordinate exact FAS interface requirements and terminal strip locations with the
MEP Specialist.
THIRD PARTY INTERFACES GENERAL
The NAC, Gateways used for third party systems integration shall be software
programmable gateways that shall provide a native BACnet/IP to third party ELV
building system gateway if the third party ELV building system does not provide
data in a BACnet Object format meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE
standard SSPC 135.
At minimum the third party protocols shall include Modbus, J-Bus, OPC, and
LonWorks.
The third party ELV building system shall have a communications port and shall
exchange information with the Management Level Network in a BACnet/IP format.
The Third Party Supplier scope shall include the following:

Provide third party controller with a communication data port necessary
for the data exchange with the BMS.
Provide the Gateway that shall provide a native BACnet/IP to third party
ELV building system only if the third party ELV building system does
not provide data in a BACnet Object format meeting all of the
requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012.
Connect the Gateway if provided to the Third Party System.
Provide to the BMS supplier the BACnet Objects IDs of all BACnet
Objects that are to be transferred to the BMS, as well as complete
documentation and information required for the mapping.
Map the BACnet Object IDs as received from the BMS supplier to the
third Party Controller.
The BMS Supplier Scope shall include the following:

Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between the
Network Automation Controller (NAC) or the Distributed Control Panel
(DCP) and the Third Party System Gateway or directly to the Third Party
System Data Port if third party ELV building system provides data in a
BACnet Object format meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE
standard SSPC 135.
Map the BACnet Object IDs as received from the Third Party System
Supplier to the BMS
Provide the Third Party System Supplier with the BACnet Objects IDs
of Objects to be transferred to the Third Party System, as well as
complete documentation and information required for the mapping

THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION TESTS

The interface between the BMS and each third party ELV building
system shall be demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the
mechanical contractor who shall liaise with each party concerned. It
shall be conclusively demonstrated that a BMS workstation on the
Management Level Network can communicate with the third party
system and vice versa.
The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and
the third party system shall verify, at minimum, that:
All data communicated from the third party system to the
Management Level Network is in the form of BACnet
Objects that comply completely with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-
2012.
All data points mapped from the Management Level
Network to the third party system are displayed correctly
on the third party system monitor.
All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the
engineering units and significant digits on the third party
system and the BMS workstation.
All points mapped from the third party system to the
Management Level Network meet all of the specifications
detailed in the BMS specifications for points directly
monitored/controlled by the BMS.
Communications speed between the two systems is
satisfactory.
Both systems restart and communications between the two
systems resume following a power failure without operator
intervention.
INTERFACE BETWEEN BMS AND ETS PLC PANEL- CHILLED WATER

SYSTEM.
A. Various chilled water distribution system (Field instruments, MOV’s, Pumps,

packaged systems, etc.) installed in the ETS room shall be monitored and control
by the PLC and BMS system. BMS contractor shall refer ETS drawings, sequence of
operation and Customer Technical Guide –ETS (Saudi Tabreed) for further details in
regard to the interfacing and control of various systems installed in the ETS room.
B. BMS system integrator shall co-ordinate with ETS PLC system integrator (DCP
Contractor) to interface the various chilled water parameters for monitoring in the
BMS panel. BMS contractor shall provide the Modbus-RTU interface for monitoring
the status of Pumps & VFD, VFD parameters, VFD alarms, status of DPS installed
across the strainers of the PHE, index DPT value, etc.
C. The ETS PLC panel shall be supplied by the DCP contractor (Saudi Tabreed). All
the instruments installed on the cold side and the hot side shall be provided by the

BMS contractor and the selection of ETS instruments for the chilled water system
shall be coordinated with the Saudi Tabreed for their acceptance.
D. The ETS PLC panel shall communicate with the BMS DDC panel over Modbus.
E. The ETS PLC shall modulate the Motorized modulating temperature control valve
(MOV-MODTCV installed on the primary / cold side of the PHE.
F. BMS system integrator shall provide the DDC panel and shall be interfaced with the
BMS for the control and monitoring of the pumps, instruments, valves, etc., installed
in the secondary / hot side of the heat exchanger.
G. The DDC panel shall control the speed of the distribution pumps to maintain the set
index DPT value.
H. The motorized by pass control valve installed (customer side) at the end of the chilled
water network shall be controlled and monitored by the DDC- Panel. The valve shall
be opened and closed based on the flowmeter set point.
I. The motorized ON/OFF valve provided on the secondary side shall be provided with
limit switches / volt free contact for the hard wire monitoring of the open and closed
feedback.
J. The pressurization pumps shall be monitored and controlled by the BMS. The BMS
shall start and stop the pressurization pumps based on the chilled water return
pressure to achieve the required suction pressure for the distribution pumps.
K. The side steam filtration pump shall be controlled and monitored by the BMS system.
L. The Control panel (DDC) at the BMS Automation Level interface shall, at minimum,
enable the following data to be transferred from Automation level to the Management
level network:
Chilled Water supply Temperature (monitoring point).
Chilled Water return Temperature (monitoring point).
Pumps status, Valve status,
Alarms, etc.
Any other information available from the control system panel as
selected by the Employer.
INTERFACE BETWEEN BMS AND HOT WATER SYSTEM
A. Various hot water distribution system (Field instruments, MOV’s, Pumps, packaged
systems, etc.) installed in the ETS room shall be monitored and control by the PLC
and BMS system. BMS contractor shall refer ETS drawings and sequence of
operation for further details in regard to the interfacing and control of various systems
installed in the ETS room.

B. BMS system integrator shall co-ordinate with ETS PLC system integrator (Hot water
system infra contractor) to interface the various hot water parameters for monitoring
in the BMS panel. BMS contractor shall provide the Modbus-RTU interface for
monitoring the status of Pumps & VFD, VFD parameters, VFD alarms, status of DPS
installed across the strainers of the PHE, index DPT value, etc.
C. The ETS PLC panel shall be supplied by the infrastructure contractor (Hot water
system contractor). All the instruments installed on the infra side and the customer
side shall be provided by the BMS contractor and the selection of ETS instruments
for the hot water system shall be coordinated with the infrastructure contractor for
their acceptance.
D. The ETS PLC panel shall communicate with the BMS DDC panel over Modbus.
E. The ETS PLC shall modulate the Motorized modulating temperature control valve
(MOV-MOD TCV installed on the primary side of the PHE.
F. BMS system integrator shall provide the DDC panel and shall be interfaced with the
BMS for the control and monitoring of the pumps, instruments, valves, etc., installed
in the secondary side of the heat exchanger.
G. The DDC panel shall control the speed of the distribution pumps to maintain the set
index DPT value.
H. The motorized by pass control valve installed (customer side) at the end of the hot
water network shall be controlled and monitored by the DDC- Panel. The valve shall
be opened and closed based on the flowmeter set point.
I. The motorized ON/OFF valve provided on the secondary side shall be provided with
limit switches / volt free contact for the hard wire monitoring of the open and closed
feedback.
J. The pressurization pumps shall be monitored and controlled by the BMS. The BMS
shall start and stop the pressurization pumps based on the Hot water return pressure
to achieve the required suction pressure for the distribution pumps.
K. The side steam filtration pump shall be controlled and monitored by the BMS system.
L. The Control panel (DDC) at the BMS Automation Level interface shall, at minimum,
enable the following data to be transferred from Automation level to the Management
level network:
Hot Water supply Temperature (monitoring point).
Hot Water return Temperature (monitoring point).
Pumps status, Valve status,
Alarms, etc.
Any other information available from the control system panel as

INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND CLOSED AIR CONDITIONING

UNIT
The CACU controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port that
enables the exchange of data between the CACU controller and the BMS
Automation Level.
The interface between the CACU controller and the Automation level Network shall
be as indicated on the BMS drawings and CACU specification.
INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY

DRIVES (VFD)
The variable frequency drive (VFD) controller shall be microprocessor based and
shall have a data port that enables the exchange of data between the VFD controller
and the BMS Automation Level.
The interface between the variable frequency drive controller and the Automation
level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred
to the BMS Automation Level:
Speed Reference Feedback.
Motor Operating Status.
VFD alarm.
VFD status
Motor power in kW.
Motor kWh.
Motor current.
Motor voltage.
Hours run.
DC link voltage.
Thermal load on motor.
Thermal load on VFD.
Heat sink temperature.
Any other information available from the VFD controller as selected by
the Employer.
The interface between the VFD controller and the Management level Network shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the
Management Level Network to the VFD controller:
Speed Control Signal.
Start/Stop Control Signal.
Speed Feedback

VFD Fault
General Alarm
INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND VRV UNIT
The VRV Unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port
that enables the exchange of data between the VRV unit controller and the BMS
Automation Level.
The interface between the VRV unit controller and the Automation level Network
shall be as indicated on the BMS drawings and VRV unit specification.
INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND PACKAGED A/C UNITS
The Packaged A/C unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a
data port to enable the exchange of data between the BMS Automation Level and
the Packaged A/C unit controller.
The interface between the Packaged A/C unit controller and the BMS Automation
Level shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred between
the Packaged A/C unit controllers and the BMS Automation Level:
Unit Enable/disable Command
Unit Status
Unit Alarm
Fan Status
General Alarm
Unit Supply Air Temperature
Unit Static Pressure Sensor
Refrigerant System Alarm
Compressor Status
Dirty Filter Alarm
Unit Capacity
Reset temperature set point.
Any other information available from the packaged A/C controller as
INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
The Fire Alarm System shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data port to
enable the transfer of information to the Management level Network. The
communication shall be unidirectional from the FAS to the Management Level
Network only. The FAS shall be on its own wide area network.

The start and end of any message shall be uniquely identified and the message shall
indicate the following information at minimum:
Time
Date
Zone of incidence
Indication of whether it is a fire alarm, return to normal or Fire Alarm
System fault.
In the event of a fire the Fire Alarm System shall communicate a list of all equipment
shut down and started by the Fire Alarm System.
There shall be no transfer of data from the Management Level Network to the Fire
Alarm System.
If it is required by the local applicable codes and standards or required by the

Authority having jurisdiction the BMS shall be able to automatically shut down all
terminal units and FCU serving the zone of incidence in the event of a fire alarm and
shall automatically restart equipment following a return to normal message, as
detailed in the Part titled “Equipment Restart Following a Fire Alarm” in this Section
of the documents.
The BMS shall generate an alarm if the status of any equipment differs from that
communicated by the Fire Alarm System to the Management Level Network.
INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND RETAIL WASTE
The grease interceptor shall be odour proof, and include an automatic cleaning cycle
and high pressure pump, disposal pump, water connection, gate inlet/outlet valves,
sight glass and control panel with fault to BMS.
2.104 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND PCA, POP UP PIT & SUMP PUMP
Building Management System (BMS) Interface: The PCA system to be interfaced

with the BMS to provide status information of the system. Interfacing to be
established on a high-level systems hierarchy using TCP/IP interface protocols or
similar. The PCA system to provide but not limited to the following status
information to the BMS:
1. General system status information: System
a) on-line (green indication).
b) System failure/restriction (large red indication, icon representing to be
triple sized).
c) Interface communication failure/restriction (blinking red indication).
2. Signal processor status information PCA units:
a) Signal processor failure (red indication).
3. PCA air handling unit status information:

a) Status: on/off, manual or automatic mode.

b) Aircraft type.
c) Aircraft cabin temperature.
d) Air handling unit discharge temperature and pressure.
e) Air temperature and pressure at aircraft connector.
f) Chilled water temperatures at inlet and outlet.
g) Electrical power consumption.
h) Fan speeds.
i) Faults and maintenance warnings and (pre)alarms.
4. The BMS to be able to control PCA equipment.
a) The PCA Contractor to develop and supply necessary hardware interfaces,
drivers and software protocols for conversion of the monitored information
using either OPC or Modbus protocol in order for the BMS to handle and
process this information.
b. Pop-up pit to provide the following signals and alarms to the BMS:
1. Pit open;
2. Pit fully open and foot lock engaged
3. Pit closed;
4. Power supply failure.
The status of each sump pump to be made available to the BMS. Potential-free
contacts to be provided as follows:
1. Pump trip fault status;
2. “High water level” alarm;
3. Pump run;
4. Manual / auto selector switch.
2.105 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND PACKAGED PUMP SETS.
A. The pumping station shall be fully automatic with the provision for remote enable
/disable and
Monitoring by BMS. The BMS shall contractor shall refer to the BMS drawings for
the IO points.
B. All the pump chambers and valve chambers control panel Hand / off / auto
switches, start /stop button shall be interfaced with BMS. Moreover, 1 set of Volt
free contacts for connection to BMS to monitor power failure, pump failure and
high level shall be provided the respective contractors and shall be interfaced with
BMS.

2.106 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND PBB.
The FCU’s installed in the Passenger pre / fixed boarding bridges shall be monitored and
controlled by the BMS. Moreover the status of the PBB shall be interfaced through
the suitable means of communication for only monitoring the PBB status,
Operational status, Under Maintenance, alarms and subsystems.
2.107 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BMS AND AODB
The BMS shall be interfaced with AODB (Airport Operational Data Base). The MSI
contractor
shall coordinate with the BMS contractor and shall develop the ICD and shall be
submitted for review and approval.
i. This interface shall be initiated by the AODB supplier.
ii. The interface responder shall be the BMS contractor.
iii. The ICD shall define what and how information is passed from the BMS to the
AODB including
a. Utilities Metering information
b. Passenger Boarding Bridge Usage data.
EXECUTION
TRAINING
Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as assigned by the
employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions in at least
one-half day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session and
any prerequisite requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training
outline shall be submitted with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages.
Training shall not commence unless the Engineer has approved a training outline.
Training shall be coordinated with the Employer’s designated training coordinator.
Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on" instruction
and shall be given by the Specialist at the BMS Specialists facilities and on-site as
detailed below. The trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the
manufacturer, shall be experienced with the hardware and software and shall be
experienced trainers. The resumes of the trainers shall be submitted to the Employer
and Engineer for approval. The resumes shall indicate clearly the experience and
expertise of the proposed training staff with regard to both their technical and
training capabilities. The BMS Specialist shall certify the proposed training staff as
specialist trainers. The BMS Specialist shall advise the Employer of the
recommended qualifications for the potential trainees.
Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the BMS Specialist’s facilities.
These training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they shall
be presented in accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the
Employer. Follow up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using
the installed components that shall be given during the period immediately prior to

the acceptance testing. Further follow up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour
sessions on-site during the warranty period. These training sessions during the
warranty period shall be scheduled with the Employer.
Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and any
audiovisual equipment required to execute the training.
Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of the attendees
and prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students. Training
sessions shall be designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the attendees
scheduled to participate and shall differentiate between the requirements of
supervisory, operations and maintenance personnel. The training shall be specific to
this project and shall cover, at minimum, the following:
Data base features.
Operating sequence programming.
Operator interface features.
Graphics set up and modification.
An overview of the BMCS topology.
Information access.
Executing operator commands.
Operator definable values.
Report customization.
Event message generation and modification.
Maintenance and calibration of instrumentation (Maintenance personnel
only)
Use of the Portable Operator Terminals (POT).
Interfaces between the low voltage Building Systems.
Other subjects necessary to ensure that the operators, maintenance and
supervisory staffs will be able to operate the BMS without any on-going
assistance from any outside party.
Provide sufficient training to the Employer’s staff such that they shall be able to map
BACnet object Ids to the BMS servers and shall be able to add points to the data
storage, analysis and retrieval functions.
BORING AND PATCHING
Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install BMS
components shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the BMS Specialist shall
provide boring and patching of work in those instances where the BMS Specialist
has caused damage requiring boring and patching. The BMS Specialist shall provide
boring and patching for all installation work undertaken by the BMS Specialist.
Boring and patching shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

Before boring any structural components, obtain the Engineer's approval.

Make boring with clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be
inconspicuous in covered areas and visually undetectable in areas
normally accessible to the tenants.
Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.
FIRE STOPPING
The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by the MEP
Specialist on behalf of the BMS Specialist but if the BMS Specialist damages fire
stopping installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the BMS Specialist
requires that fire stopping be replaced or added, the BMS Specialist shall seal all
conduit, cable, or cable tray penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop
shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
Comply with all applicable codes, regulations and statutory
requirements.
Approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
Firefighting system or device used shall not derate the ampacity of
electrical cables passing through it.
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment
within which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and
supporting of components with all trades.
Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat and
workmanlike manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
General Requirements:
All components shall be tested by the BMS Specialist to ensure
compliance with the specifications before they leave the BMS
Specialist's premises and shall be tested again on-site by the BMS
Specialist before the commencement of acceptance testing. The BMS
Specialist shall not ship components to the project site until they have
been found to be fully compliant with the specifications and the BMS
Specialist shall not request the commencement of acceptance testing
until such time as the BMS Specialist has made a complete and thorough
checkout of all equipment on site.
Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made
available for inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
Use of any component by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply

acceptance of the system or acceptability of any component. Availability

and demonstration of the systems shall not be withheld and the use of
components shall not imply the start of the Defects Liability Period.
Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be
included in this scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
The BMS Specialist shall make available all equipment, calibrated
instruments and ladders, as necessary to satisfactorily demonstrate the
acceptability of the components and systems. Instrumentation to be used
for the verification of monitored parameters shall be calibrated or
supplied by an approved laboratory or manufacturer. Provide copies of
the calibration data with the component test sheets.
Installation, engineering, software and system personnel shall be
available on-site during the commissioning tests. These personnel shall
be familiar with the installation and shall undertake all tests as requested
by the Engineer in order to verify that the BMS components individually
and in total meet the specifications.
The BMS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be
conducting the commissioning tests on behalf of the BMS Specialist has
been actively involved (on site) throughout the commissioning of the
control system. Software shall be developed, tested and demonstrated
over a time span short enough to guarantee continuity of personnel.
Off-Site Tests/Software Tests:

When the BMS Specialist has written and tested the software and prior
to loading software into controllers on site, the BMS Specialist shall
demonstrate to the Engineer that the software functions in accordance
with the specifications and sequences of operations. This shall be
accomplished by in-house simulation of plant operating conditions using
switches, potentiometers, voltmeters and lamps etc., via the BMS
graphical interface.
The Off-Site tests shall be limited to the plants with typical sequence of
operation such as:
Air Handling Units
Heat Recovery Units
Fan Coil Units
VAV Boxes
Moreover, the contractor shall demonstrate the ability of the interface to
the third party systems
The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations on
a clause-by-clause basis with the specification, with reference to all
applicable correspondence, and with variation orders issued by the
Employer.

Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no

additional cost to the Employer prior to the shipping of the components
to the project site.
The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any
scheduled Off-Site testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time
whether the Engineer shall witness the tests. If the Employer decides
that the tests shall be witnessed the Employer shall select a representative
and the BMS Specialist shall pay the costs of the representative to attend
the tests.
Inspection during Installation:

Prior to commissioning tests, the BMS shall be available for use by the
Employer and Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not
imply acceptance of any component of the BMS or the commencement
of the Defects Liability Period.
Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the
installation period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing
work. The Engineer will generate Field Observation Reports on the
findings of the inspection. The Engineer shall advise the BMS Specialist
during the inspection of any concerns noted with respect to the
installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as soon as possible
after the inspection is completed. The BMS Specialist shall take
corrective action to meet the requirement of the specifications.
Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during
inspections shall not relieve the BMS Specialist of any of the
specification requirements and shall not imply that a deviation from the
specification has been accepted.
Component Testing/Point to Point Testing:

Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the Engineer,
perform a complete and detailed operational check of each BMS
component. Tests shall be documented as detailed below and shall cover
all of the testing requirements detailed in this Section for the
commissioning tests. The Engineer shall undertake such random testing
as the Engineer considers necessary to verify the acceptability of the
components.
All components testing involving the verification of air and water flow
rate monitoring shall be scheduled in conjunction with the air and water-
balancing Specialists. In particular, this shall apply to the verification of
all control and monitoring parameters for terminal units.
Point to point checks shall be proven from the field device/interface
operation to the controller/outstation and from the controller to the
presentation of the point on the graphics. The results from the point-to-
point tests shall be submitted for approval on pre-defined schedules.
Point to point checks shall verify:
Correct location of the field device for the application.

Correct installation of the control device/interface with

reference to the manufacturer’s literature and check that
sufficient access has been provided for maintenance.
That the control device has the correct range for the
application, that the range is correctly entered in the
controller and the display of values is correctly engineered
on the operator's terminal.
Correct operation of the controls device/interface,
including any associated alarm and alarm text.
Correct installation of each valve and damper actuator, and
ensure that each valve and damper actuator is stroked
correctly when checked against the BMS output.
Calibration of the control device.
Labels provided on the control devices and mechanical
equipment are correct.
Systems Testing:
Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has been
successfully undertaken and approved by the Engineer.
System testing shall be undertaken by the BMS Specialist and the BMS
Specialist shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system
performance verification sheets. The completed system performance
verification test sheets shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The BMS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system performance
verification tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests for
the verification by the Engineer shall not be scheduled until the BMS
Specialist has verified that all systems are operating in accordance with
the specifications.
The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the BMS
Specialist and shall be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the
Engineer’s portion of the system performance verification test sheets as
each test is successfully undertaken. The BMS Specialist shall remedy
any deficiencies that are observed during the system performance
verification tests and retesting shall be scheduled at a time suitable to the
Engineer. If there are deficiencies remaining after the follow-up systems
performance verification testing that require further testing by the
Engineer, then the expenses of the Engineer incurred in providing the
additional follow-up tests to verify compliance with the specifications,
including travel, subsistence, accommodation and normal consulting
fees, shall be paid by the BMS Specialist at no additional cost to the
Employer.
The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:
Each and every point on the system including calibration
checks and the stroking of actuators.

All dynamic graphics comply with the mechanical and

control specifications.
All system programs comply with the specification under
the normal modes of operation, emergency power, building
fire detected and fireman's override operating modes.
All system alarms comply with the specification.
System stability.
Dynamic tests to prove control stability and that the
environmental conditions are being maintained.
Test Coordination:
Testing of the BMS during the systems and integrated testing shall be
coordinated with all other trades associated with the system being tested.
The system shall be tested as a complete entity during these tests. The
BMS portion of the systems shall not be tested in isolation.
Testing of Third Party Interfaces:

The BMS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for
the interface between the BMS and equipment furnished by others prior
to the delivery of the associated hardware and software components to
the project site. There shall be no software development on site except
that associated with the entry of database items such as set points, alarm
limits, control constants and schedules.
The third party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer at
the BMS Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any BMS
microprocessor based components at the project site. The demonstration
shall include all hardware and software components associated with the
interfaces.
The third party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the testing
and acceptance by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.
The BMS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects are
provided at the BMS Management level network in accordance with the
requirements of these specifications.
Test Documentation:
Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets shall
be prepared in an appropriate format for the various categories of
component and system to be tested. Component test sheet forms
included within this section indicate a minimum acceptable standard.
The final format of the proposed test forms shall be submitted by the
BMS Specialist for approval at the shop drawing stage. The component
and system performance verification sheets attached to this Section of
the sub-contract Documents are provided to the Specialist for
information and to serve as a guide for the minimum standards required.
These attached examples of component and system test sheets are
generic in nature and may not accurately reflect the actual sequences of

operation that are to be implemented and not all systems and component
types are covered by these example test verification sheets. It is the
responsibility of the BMS Specialist to provide test verification sheets
for each component and system that accurately reflect the sequences of
operation and appropriate data for the components and systems as
furnished under this sub-contract.
Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each
BMS component within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer,
together with a proposed schedule for system commissioning tests, at
least X weeks prior to the proposed system commissioning tests. The
Engineer shall determine on the basis of the BMS Specialist's component
testing, whether or not it is appropriate to commence system-
commissioning tests. It shall be the Engineer’s decision as to whether the
system commissioning tests can proceed as proposed by the BMS
Specialist or whether deficiencies have to be remedied and additional
testing undertaken before the system commissioning tests can proceed.
At minimum, component test sheets will be prepared to cover each of the
following items:
Digital input point
Digital output point
Analogue input point
Analogue output point (one for each type of final control
element, e.g. valve, damper, etc.)
System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum, each
of the systems detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets shall
be based on the sub-contract requirements and not on the system as
installed.
All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and in
hard copy.
ACCEPTANCE AND TURNOVER DOCUMENTS
Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with
requirements of Division 1:
System user manual.
Systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece of
equipment, trouble-shooting charts, and preventive maintenance
instructions, technical data sheet for each instrument referenced for each
application.
As-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings,
equipment wiring and or piping connection drawing.
Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of
system supplied. This to include:

System block diagram (hardware).

Software "functional" flow diagram.
Memory map of all units.
Specific tasks performed by each processor, especially
where a distributed processing architecture is provided.
These are to be clearly indicated in functional form.
Source and object lists of software program.
Tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed
in the systems.
Password at all levels.
Meets ASHRAE SSPC 135 standard.
Interoperability documentation.
System construction inspection procedures.
Points calibration procedures.
Calibration technical procedures.
Plant operational system test procedures.
Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
The BMS sub-contractor shall handover all programs, database, configuration and
network data to the Employer.
All other documentation as detailed in these specifications.
The BMS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods and
techniques required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways,
routers and any other BMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as
well as to export the data in any of the previously mentioned standards to another
system. The system documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the
BMS’s incorporation into another BACnet system in the future.
The BMS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for the

BACnet components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along
with their respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS,
BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and write data via integration of
the components with another system in future.
Provide latest copy of ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012 and ASHRAE 135.1-

2013standards.

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-
water heating, chilled-water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water
for these systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative
1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings.

2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are
made on threads (metric dimensions).
3. BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading.
Technical delivery conditions.
4. BS EN 1044 Filler metals for brazing.
5. BS EN 10253-1 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for
general use and without specific inspection requirements.
6. BS EN 10253-2 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Non alloy and ferritic alloy
steels with specific inspection requirements.
7. BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves,
fittings and accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges.
8. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
9. API American Petroleum Institute.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Manual and Quality plan for Contractor and its related Sub Contractors
including:
1. Inspection Test Plan

.
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113

2. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow
and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting
fittings, calibrated balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of piping Isometric & spools, pipe anchors,
hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and
loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors,
alignment guides, welding map and expansion joints and loops.
C. Proposal Welding Procedure Specification (PWPS).
D. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) supported by Procedure Qualification

Record (PQR).
E. Welder Qualification Certificates.
F. Original Mill Certificates for piping, fitting, filler metal,…etc.
G. Calibration Certificate for Equipment and Gauges.
H. Insulation and Coating procedures
I. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
Include the following:
1. Test procedures used.( NDT Procedures, Hydrostatic& leak test

procedures,…etc)
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
J. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in

K. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality
available at Project site.
A. Surface preparation for all steel pipes: Shot blasting to SA 2.5 and then immediate
application of 150 um polyamide epoxy paint to be confirmed for proper bonding
with pre-insulated pipes manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards as applicable. Welders shall be certified for
the type of pipe material specified, welding process and position of welds required
during fabrication of the piping. Welder’s Qualification Test to be performed on
site and attended by Contractor Welding Inspectors, Third Party and Engineer
prior to commencing piping fabrication.

C. Non destructive examination shall be performed to all pipe welds in accordance to

ASME B31.1 or ASTM B31.9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards as
applicable. A Non destructive test shall perform the tests and submit the related
reports after getting the approval and stamping of third party inspection company,
prior prequalification approval should be obtained from Engineer on NDT &
Third Party Inspection both companies.
D. All welds shall be identified by the welder’s mark and a sequence number. The
Contractor shall employ a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or CSWIP 3.1,
NDT personal certified as Level 2 minimum in the NDE methods utilized
(independent of the contractor fabricating or installing the piping) to visually
examine all welds in accordance with inspection and examination requirements of
ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards as
applicable. Any welds failing the visual or NDE inspection shall be ground out or
cutout. The CWI shall submit a written report signed and stamped from the
approved third party for each weld to the Engineer.
E. Additionally, 5% of all fitting, flange and Butt joint welds shop or field or as per
ASME or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards requirements, minimum of 5% of
Butt Joints welds, randomly selected by the Engineer, shall be radio graphed. The
certified welding inspector shall examine the films and provide a written report to
the Engineer. All welds not meeting the requirements of ASME B31.1 or ASME
B31.9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards latest edition as applicable will be
ground out, re-welded and re-radio graphed. If any 10% of the randomly selected
radio graphed welds fail, all welds in the piping will be radio graphed and
repaired
F. 10 % of Fillet Joints shall be tested by Dye Pentrent Test Or Magnetic Test
G. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards and ASME B31.9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards as
applicable for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure
vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 or Equivalent
H. All pre-insulated piping systems shall be completely sealed and waterproof, and
they shall be capable of allowing sufficient movement for thermal expansion and
contraction. Each assembly shall be factory-designed for the specific service
medium, temperature, and pressure. Expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors,
and guides shall be furnished and installed to provide a trouble-free system and
avoid stress on any equipment.
I. On Site Supervision of Underground Pre-insulated Chilled Water Piping

Installation:
1. The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall have a determined quality

assurance program to ensure compliance with specifications.

2. All inner polyurethane insulation to be visually inspected to ensure absence

of any void prior to the application of jacket.
3. The following tests shall be performed on daily basis to ensure quality of
installation:
a. Density (greater or equal to 60 50Kg/m3)

b. Thermal conductivity (smaller or equal to 0.023 W/m°C)
c. Compressive strength (greater or equal to 300 KPa)
d. Closed cell content (smaller or equal to 88%)
4. Full Time Factory trained field technical assistance & supervision shall be
provided by pre-insulated manufacturer during installation.
5. Representative's daily written reports to the Resident Engineer: Present the
original of each report on the day it is prepared. The report shall be signed
by the manufacturer's representative. The report shall state whether or not
the condition and quality of the materials used and the installation of the
system is in accordance with the plans, specifications, and published
standards of the manufacturer, and is satisfactory in all respects. If anything
connected with the installation is unsatisfactory, the report shall state that
corrective action has been taken or shall contain the manufacturer's
recommendations for corrective action. The report shall cover any condition
that could result in an unsatisfactory installation. The representative shall
take prompt action to return to the factory all damaged and defective
material, and shall order prompt replacement of such material.
6. On completion of the installation, the Contractor will deliver a certificate
from the manufacturer that the installation is in compliance with all
installation recommendations and warranty requirements of the
manufacturer.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system

components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related

Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
base..
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and
floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in
Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING
A. Products shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles

bearing the name of the manufacture.
B. Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an
area that is protected from the elements.
C. End caps weather supplied by the piping manufacturer or fabricated by the

contractor are to be placed at the ends of the piping sections to keep debris and
reptiles from entering inside the pipe while it is placed in storage.
D. Prefabricated sections of the pre-insulated pipe are to be handled per the

manufacturer’s recommendations or instructions.
E. All pre-insulated pipes shall be protected from direct sunlight while transported or
stored.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system

startup and for preventive maintenance.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe

and fitting materials.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING
A. Minimum steel pipe size recommended for hydronic piping is NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
B. Chilled Water (above ground), Heating Water (above ground), Condenser Water
(above ground), and Vent Piping:
1. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, seamless,

Schedule 40 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards with threaded ends.

2. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, ERW,

Schedule 40 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards with threaded ends.
3. Steel pipes DN 65 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or ASTM
A106/A106M Grade B, seamless, Schedule 40 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards with beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for
Coupled Joints.
4. Steel pipes DN 65 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or ASTM
A106/A106M Grade B, ERW, Schedule 40 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards with beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for
Coupled Joints.
5. Steel pipes DN 300 to DN 600: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, or ASTM
A106/A106M Grade B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, Seamless
or ERW, and beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for
Coupled Joints.
6. Pipes above DN 600: API 5L Grade B, SAW at both sides with helical seam
and beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
7. Chilled water and heating water piping underground and in utility tunnels,
pipe basements and crawl spaces: Factory pre-insulated chilled/ heating
water piping supplied in 12 meters lengths with beveled ends.
8. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the calculation based
on ASME B31.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards to verify that wall
thickness is adequate enough as per actual system pressure:
C.
D. Extension of Domestic Water Make-up Piping: [ASTM B88, Type K or L or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, hard drawn copper tubing] [as specified for
Domestic water piping. Refer to section 221116 “Domestic Water Piping”].
E. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping:

1. From air handling units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-welded joints.
2. From fan coil or other terminal units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-
welded joints.
2.3 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION:
A. Insulation for valves, fittings, field casing closures, as required, and other piping
system accessories shall be cellular glass conforming to ASTM C552 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, calcium silicate conforming to ASTM
C533 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards or polyurethane matching the pipe
insulation. Insulation shall be pre-molded, precut or job fabricated to fit and shall
be removable and reusable. Thickness shall match adjacent piping.
B. Metal jackets shall be provided for all pipe insulation in manholes. Insulation
bands shall be 19 mm wide 0.13 mm stainless steel.
C. Buried fittings and accessories shall be factory fabricated and may have field
foamed polyurethane insulation to match adjacent piping and shall be protected

with a covering matching the pipe casing. Shrink sleeves shall be provided over
casing connection joints.
2.4 END SEALS:
A. General: Each pre-insulated section of piping shall have a complete sealing of the
insulation to provide permanent water and vapor seal at each end of the pre-
insulated section of piping. Pre-insulated sections of piping modified in the field
shall be provided with an end seal which is equivalent to the end seals furnished
with the pre-insulated section of piping. Provide complete sealing of the insulation
at each end of each pre-insulated conduit section by one of the following methods:
1. Carrying the outer casing over tapered pipe insulation ends and extending it
to the carrier pipe. Provide sufficient surface bonding area between the
casing and the carrier pipe to ensure a permanent water and vapor resistant
seal.
2. Using specially designed prefabricated caps made of the same material and
not less than the same thickness as the casing. Provide sufficient surface
bonding area between the cap, and both the casing and carrier pipe, to
ensure permanent water and vapor resistant seal.
B. Factory casing and end seal testing and certification:
1. Testing and certification procedures by an independent testing laboratory

shall demonstrate that casings and end seals are capable of resisting
penetration of water into the casing and insulation at 60 kPa of head
pressure, measured above the highest point of the test sample, subjected
over the entire surface of an 2.5 m test sample of prefabricated pipe for not
less than 48 hours. Test shall use 24 degrees C water for chilled water
service, while the sample is either buried or encased in dry bedding sand
with a minimum of 305 mm of sand all around sample. The carrier pipe size
in the test section shall be 75 mm in diameter and shall be restrained during
the test period. The insulation thickness shall not exceed the maximum
thickness provided for the piping in the project.
2.5 JOINTS:
A. Welded joints: Welded joints between sections of pipe and between pipe and
fittings shall be provided where specified or indicated. Branch connections shall
be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings attached to the
main and reinforced against external strains.
B. Flanged joints: Flanged joints shall be provided with gaskets and made perfectly
square and tight. Full-faced gaskets shall be used with cast-iron flanges and all
gaskets shall be as thin as the finish of the flange face permits. Gaskets shall be 5
mm (3/16-inch) thick for 25 through 300 mm (1 through 12 inch) flanges and 6
mm (1/4-inch) thick for flanges 350 mm (14 inches) and larger.

C. Threaded joints: Joints shall be made tight with polytetrafluoroethylene tape

applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the
joint is made up.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, lead-

free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813 or Equivalent
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with
copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Mechanical joints: Sleeve and grooved pipe couplings shall be installed and
protected against corrosion as recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Joints
between nonmetallic and metallic carrier pipe shall be designed and furnished by
the piping system manufacturer. The transition pieces shall be factory fabricated
and shall be designed so that no field chemical welding of the carrier pipe will be
required. Transitional joint connections to manhole steel piping shall be made
inside the manhole except for prefabricated, pre-piped manholes where joints
shall be outside the manhole wall.
G. Insulating joints and dielectric fittings: Shall be installed where shown.
H. Nonmetallic pipe joints: Nonmetallic pipe joints shall be installed in accordance

with the written instructions of the manufacturer.
2.6 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. General
1. The pipes fittings shall be to ASTM A234/A234M WPB, ASTM

A105/A105M or ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, suitable for butt welding, seamless or ERW and thickness as per
matching pipe.
2. All Butt welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, socket welded fittings shall be to
ASME B16.11 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
3. Mechanical coupled joints are allowed as alternative in mechanical rooms
and chiller house but not in pre-insulated pipes running in culverts or
tunnels.
4. Manufacture trade name to be marked on pipes and fitting
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Screwed. Mechanical couplings are optional for water piping
only.
1. Fitting shall have same wall thickness as pipes.

2. Pipes 50 mm and smaller shall have threaded ends.
3. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11 or Equivalent

4. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3 or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards. 125 pound cast iron, ASME B16.4 or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing
reduction of a single pipe size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.
5. Unions: ASME B16.39 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
6. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm garden hose
thread, with hose cap nut.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and fittings

are optional for water piping only.
1. Pipe fitting material shall be to ASTM A 234/A 234M WPB, ASTM

A105/A105M or ASTM A53/A53M Grade B ERW or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards.
2. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards with same wall thickness as connecting piping. Elbows shall be
long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
3. Socket welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11 or
4. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards:
a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch)
thick full face neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220
degrees F).
1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel

flanges, with Teflon gaskets, may be used for water service.
b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM
A307, Grade B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and
threadolets may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than
the main. Forged steel half-couplings, ASME B16.11 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.
E. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: If used and accepted by The Engineer
shall be used with roll grooved pipe, in water service up to 110 degrees C (230
degrees F).
1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards or ductile iron, ASTM A536 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, fabricated in two or more parts,
securely held together by two or more track-head, square, or oval-neck
bolts, ASTM A183 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for
the intended service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards; ductile iron, ASTM A536 or Equivalent BS/EN

or Local Standards; or steel, ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, designed to accept grooved
mechanical couplings. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.
2.7 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING
A. PVC Plastic Pipe fittings socket-type, schedule 40, ASTM D2466 or Equivalent
1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564-04el or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
B. Chemical feed piping for condenser water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl

chloride (CPVC), Schedule 80, ASTM F439 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39 or Equivalent

C. 65 mm and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME
B16.42 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C.
2.9 SCREWED JOINTS
A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the
intended service.
C. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 or Equivalent

BS/EN or Local Standards ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Type F, E, or S, Grade B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards fabricated
steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and

synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts,
bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for welding

materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being
welded.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled;
and design temperatures and pressures.
2.10 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, butterfly valves and motorized valves are specified in
Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.
C. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide
gate and globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full
working pressure.
D. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the
centerline is located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating
platform.
E. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
F. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, used for balancing, shut off and
measuring of pressure drop. Balancing valves shall be provided with two
measuring nipples to have the possibility to measure the differential pressure
(water flow indirectly) through the balancing valve and a tight shut off function
with a hidden memory of the setting. Each valve shall be provided with a label
including at least the valve reference number, valve’s diameter, design flow,
setting after balancing and pressure drop in setting and design position. All valves
shall be supplied with Prefab insulation material sourced from the valve
manufacturer, made of Polyurethane, volume weight 50-60 Kg/cubic m.
G. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: bronze

body, fitted with a red nylon hand-wheel and a protection cap, 1035-kPa (150
psig) working pressure, 107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating temperature,
and having threaded end connections.
H. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Y-

pattern globe valve style, Cast-iron or steel body, fitted with seat seal cone, bonnet
bolts chromed steel and digital hand wheel, 1035-kPa (150 psig) working
pressure, 107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating temperature, and having
flanged or grooved connections.
I. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low

inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and
noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating
pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have
capability for field adjustment.

J. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber,
wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and
shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV:
Heating Boilers, Bear ASME stamp or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
K. Pressure Relief Valve: Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim, with
testing lever. Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8; bear
ASME stamp or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
L. Automatic Dynamic Flow-Control Valves: Gray-iron body, factory set to

maintain constant flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure
fluctuations, and equipped with a readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses,
flow charts, and carrying case. Each valve shall have an identification tag
attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification, valve
number, and flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs:
1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 1206 kPa (175 psig) at 93 deg C (200
deg F) with stainless-steel piston and spring.
2. Brass or ferrous-metal body, designed for 2068 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C
(250 deg F) with corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-
spring assembly easily removable for inspection or replacement.
3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control
valve, with stainless-steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and
temperature test valves, and designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C
(250 deg F).
M. Triple Duty Valve: Contractors option for use at pump discharge in lieu of check
valve and balancing/shut-off valve. Triple duty valve is a non-slam check valve
with spring-loaded weighted disc and a calibrated adjustment feature permitting
regulation of pump discharge flow and shut-off. Valves shall be designed to
permit repacking under full line pressure. Unit shall be installed on discharge side
of pump in a horizontal or vertical position with the stem up. Unit shall be cast
iron body construction suitable for maximum working pressure of 1205 kPa (175
PSI) and maximum operating temperature of 149 C (300 F), bronze disc and
seat, stainless steel stem and spring.
N. Drain Valves: Valves shall be the gate valve types which are in accordance with
MSS SP-80. Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above with a
threaded end connection. Valve shall be provided with a water hose nipple
adapter.
O. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa
(400-psig) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and
vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ANSI/ASME B1.20.7 or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards garden-hose thread and cap.

2.11 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Air Vents
1. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa
(150-psig) working pressure; 107 deg C (225 deg F) operating temperature;
manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with DN 6 (NPS 1/8)
discharge connection and DN 15 (NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
2. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle;
bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa (150-psig) working
pressure; 116 deg C (240 deg F) operating temperature; with DN 8
(NPS 1/4) discharge connection and DN 15 (NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
3. Air vents on water coils shall have not less than 3 mm threaded end
connections.
4. Air vents on water mains shall have not less than 20 mm threaded end
connections.
5. Air vents on all other applications shall have not less than 15 mm threaded
end connections
B. Closed Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 1206-kPa (175-psig)
working pressure and 121 deg C (250 deg F) maximum operating temperature.
Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a
flexible bladder securely sealed into tank. Provide sight glass and include drain
fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks
with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory
fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to
the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels,
Division 1.
C. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and

labeled for 1206-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure and 191 deg C (375
deg F) maximum operating temperature; perforated stainless-steel air collector
tube designed to direct released air into expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet
connections; threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller; flanged
connections for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; threaded blowdown connection.
Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity. Applicable to central plants.
D. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 860-kPa (125-psig) working

pressure; 19-L (5-gal.) capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
E. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent

accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipmentY-Pattern
Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A126-
04, Class B), flanged ends for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger, threaded
connections for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-
steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

F. Basket Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron

body (ASTM A126-04, Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover,
perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
G. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-

reinforcing protective jacket; 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure
and 121 deg C (250 deg F) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall
have flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and
shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch) misalignment.
H. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel

flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating
temperatures up to 121 deg C (250 deg F) and pressures up to 1035 kPa (150
psig).
I. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure,

steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing
ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe
telescoping section.
2.12 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110
percent of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow
rate.
B. Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure
sensing taps upstream and at the throat.
C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with
readout valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each
readout valve shall be fitted with an integral check valve designed to minimize
system fluid loss during the monitoring process.
D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube,

shutoff valves and quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be
rotatable so all sensing ports may be pointed down-stream when unit is not in use.
E. Flow Measurement/Balance Valves: A system comprised of two valves of bronze

and stainless steel metallurgy designed for 1205 kPa pressure at 121 degrees C,
with thermal insulation sleeve.
F. Measurement and shut-off valve: An on/off ball valve with integral high regain
venturi and dual quick connect valves with integral check valves and color coded
safety caps for pressure/temperature readout.
G. A butterfly balancing valve as specified herein, with memory stop and quick
connect valve for pressure/temperature readout.
H. Flow Measuring Device Identification:

1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device.

2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model,
flow rate factor and design flow rate in l/m (gpm).
I. Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick
disconnect connections.
J. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of
capacity curves showing flow rate versus pressure differential.
K. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the
installed flow devices.
L. Permanently Mounted Water Flow Indicating Meters: Minimum 150 mm

diameter, or 450 mm long scale, for 120 percent of design flow rate, direct
reading in lps with three valve manifold and two shut-off valves.
2.13 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Factory built devices, inserted in the pipe lines, designed to absorb axial cyclical
pipe movement which results from thermal expansion and contraction. This
includes factory-built or field-fabricated guides located along the pipe lines to
restrain lateral pipe motion and direct the axial pipe movement into the expansion
joints.
B. Manufacturing Quality Assurance: Conform to Expansion Joints Manufacturers

Association Standards.
C. Bellows - Internally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 or Type A240-321 stainless steel.

2. Internal stainless steel sleeve entire length of bellows.
3. External cast iron equalizing rings for services exceeding 340 kPa (50 psig).
4. Welded ends.
5. Design shall conform to standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1 or
6. External tie rods designed to withstand pressure thrust force upon anchor
failure if one or both anchors for the joint are at change in direction of
pipeline.
7. Integral external cover.
D. Bellows - Externally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Internal and external guide integral with joint.
3. Design for external pressurization of bellows to eliminate squirm.
4. Welded ends.
5. Conform to the standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1 or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards.

6. Threaded connection at bottom, 25 mm (one inch) minimum, for drain or

drip point.
7. Integral external cover and internal sleeve.
E. Expansion Compensators:
1. Corrugated bellows, externally pressurized, stainless steel or bronze.

2. Internal guides and anti-torque devices.
3. Threaded ends.
4. External shroud.
5. Conform to standards of EJMA.
F. Expansion Joint Identification: Provide stamped brass or stainless steel nameplate

on each expansion joint listing the manufacturer, the allowable movement, flow
direction, design pressure and temperature, date of manufacture, and identifying
the expansion joint by the identification number on the contract drawings.
G. Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement
only and to restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to
withstand a minimum of 15 percent of the axial force which will be imposed on
the expansion joints and anchors. Field-built guides may be used if detailed on the
contract drawings.
2.14 GAUGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND
A. ASME B40.100 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, Accuracy Grade 1A,

(pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or water), initial mid-scale accuracy 1
percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115 mm (4-1/2 inches) in
diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with black
graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board
mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate normal working pressure.
B. Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for
gages in water service.
C. Range of Gauges: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating
range.
1. For condenser water suction (compound): Minus 100 kPa (30 inches Hg) to
plus 700 kPa (100 psig).
2.15 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
A. Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap,
with retained safety cap, nordel self-closing valve cores, permanently installed in
piping where shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the
drawings.
B. Provide one each of the following test items to the Resident Engineer:

1. 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure

gage adapter probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
2. 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, , –—
100 kPa (30 inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range.
3. 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one-half degree
accuracy, 25 mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem,
plastic case.
2.16 THERMOMETERS
A. Mercury or organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window,
with 150 mm (6 inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required
for each in reading.
B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish.
C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree
graduations.
D. Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation.
E. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than shown to meet manufacturer's standard.
Required ranges in degrees C (F):
1. Chilled Water 0 to 38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Chilled water/ heating water pipes inside building: Black steel pipes.
B. Condensate drain pipes: PVC pipes.
C. Chilled water/ heating water pipes above ground and exposed to outdoors: Black
steel pipes. Complete with 0.8mm Aluminum jackets and as weather proofing
layer.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following

valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe and ball valves.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply
connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is

connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch
connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and
elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or
cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install silent type check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required
to control flow direction.
E. Install safety valves as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Install safety-valve discharge piping,
without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code
- Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, for installation requirements.
F. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as

required to regulate system pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation
and servicing of valves.
B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short
DN 20 (NPS 3/4) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains
and risers, and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
C. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
D. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings
in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-
feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
F. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve,

solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20
(NPS 3/4) nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers DN 50
(NPS 2) and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers
smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).
G. Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize expansion

or to prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars
with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise
indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in the most effective manner to secure
the desired results using turnbuckles where required. Supports, anchors, or stays
shall not be attached where they will injure the structure or adjacent construction
during installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and
conduit penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be

anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide essentially

zero movement within penetration seal. Detailed drawings of pipe anchors shall
be submitted for approval before installation.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements below
for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6
m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal
piping 6 m or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install rubber pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to
prevent hanger from scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

2. DN 25 (NPS 1): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50 (NPS 2): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 1.5 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.


E. PVC Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's

written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install
hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.
F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints
according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards using lead-free solder alloy complying with
ASTM B 32 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe

and Tube" Chapter or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, using copper-
phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M or Equivalent
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe
ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12 or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, using qualified processes and welding
operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads.
H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for

safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix or

3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and
PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2855 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 or Equivalent
I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's
written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid,
grooved-end-pipe couplings.
J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure.

Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.
K. Mechanical and Heat Fusion Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting

manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at top of risers and high points in piping, at heat-transfer
coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of
system piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air
venting.
C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
D. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and
ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel
control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.

3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of

chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling,
and to sustain the water characteristics appropriate to use.
B. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.
C. Comply with requirements of Section "HVAC Water Treatment."
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.9 or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination

during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain
reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate
expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its
closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to
valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of
overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of

damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and
compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release
trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of
liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that
system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5
times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum
pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under
test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not
exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times
"SE" value in Appendix A of ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by
tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test
until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific

requirements for welding joints in hydronic piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review

and approval by welding engineer.
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on

site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on

site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be

submitted for review and approval and the mechanical test for
electrode material may be required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection

for welding activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system

balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed
and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual
type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling
towers to design requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.11 PAINTING
A. All exposed surfaces of ferrous and non-ferrous piping outdoors or indoors in

equipment rooms and exposed to view in occupied spaces shall be cleaned,
primed and painted.
B. Refer to Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting" for painting

requirement.

3.12 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace
strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before
balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic
systems:
1. Horizontal in-line pumps.

2. End-suction pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pumps shall be designed using hydraulic criteria based upon actual model
developmental test data. Manufacturer shall certify that pumps have been
hydraulically tested at the factory.
B. Head-capacity curves shall slope up to maximum head at shut-off. Curves shall be

relatively flat for closed systems. Select pumps near the midrange of the curve, so
that the design capacity falls to the left of the best efficiency point, to allow a
cushion for the usual drift to the right in operation, without approaching the pump
curve end point and possible cavitation and unstable operation. Select pumps for
open systems so that required net positive suction head (NPSHR) does not exceed
the net positive head available (NPSHA). Deviations within 3 percent of
maximum efficiency are permissible, provided the lesser efficiency is not less
than the scheduled efficiency.
C. The head for pumps submitted for pumping through condensers and through
chilled water coils and evaporators shall be increased, if necessary, to match the
equipment approved for the project.
D. Pump Driver: Furnish with pump. Size to be non-overloading at any point on the
head-capacity curve including one pump operation in a parallel pumping
installation.
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123

E. Pumps having impeller diameters larger than 90 percent of the published

maximum diameter of the casing or less than 15 percent than the published
minimum diameter of the casing will be rejected.
F. Where parallel-pump operation is indicated, pumps selected shall have

characteristics specifically suitable for the service without unstable operation.
G. When net positive suction head (NPSH) calculations are made, inlet-storage head
shall be considered at empty point and the centerline pump location shall include
not less than a 150 mm concrete base.
H. Pumps of the same duty condition, classification, and accessories, or with

specified accessory deviation, shall be identical and the product of one
manufacturing source.
I. Pumps from more than one manufacturing source shall be provided only when a
single manufacturing source is unable to meet all Specification requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings for pumps shall be submitted in accordance

with Part 3, "Execution," of this Section.
B. Product Data: The following shall be submitted for pumps in accordance with
paragraph entitled "General Requirements," of this Section.
1. Equipment and performance data including certified performance pump
curves with 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of motor nominal speed and rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties;
final impeller dimensions; and accessories for each type of product
indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
C. Test Reports: The following tests shall be submitted from the manufacturer prior
to shipping the pump from the factory:
1. Hydraulic Tests.
2. Efficiency Tests.
3. Vibration Tests.
4. Output Efficiency.
5. Surface Hardness Tests.
6. Deflection Tests.
D. Certificates: Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing

conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section.
1. Base-mounted centrifugal pumps.

2. Line-mounted pumps.
3. Accessories.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation

and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Design analysis and calculations shall show NPSH calculations for centrifugal
pumps.
B. Equipment and performance data consisting of pump curves gallons (liters) per
minute versus total head in feet (meters) per rpm shall be provided for each type
of centrifugal pump.
C. Equipment foundation data shall be submitted for centrifugal pumps.

requirements of pumps and are based on the specific types and models selected.
Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

in NFPA 70, Article 100 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a testing
agency acceptable to Engineer.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined

metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing.
Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with
screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign
matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Mechanical Seals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material,
design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall
include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and
of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than
a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be supported
by a service organization. System components shall be environmentally suitable
for the indicated locations.
2.2 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS
A. Certificates for pumps and accessories shall show conformance with the
referenced standards contained in this section. Pumps provided shall conform to
ISO 5199 and ISO 2858 standards for centrifugal pumps and to requirements
specified herein.
B. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.
C. Pump casings shall be bronze-fitted cast iron, seasoned cast iron with a design
working pressure of minimum 1.5 times system’s operating pressure, or the
minimum specified rating whichever is greater. Casings shall be single or double
volute with flanged piping connections conforming to ASME B16.1 or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards, MSS SP-51, MSS SP-86 and ISO 7005-2 Class 125
psi.
D. Motors: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment"

for general requirements for factory-installed motors. Motors shall be NEMA
MG 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, general purpose, continuous duty,
Design B, except Design C where required for high starting torque or equivalent
characteristics in accordance with IEC 60034 parts 1 to 30. Include built-in,
thermal-overload protection, grease-lubricated ball bearings and terminal blocks.
Select each motor to be non-overloading over full range of pump performance
curve.

E. Motors Indicated to be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated

according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency
than "average standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B,
if efficiency is not indicated.
F. Pump impeller assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO

1940-1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
G. Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling.
Flexible member shall be a tire shape in shear, or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk
shape made of chloroprene materials and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible
coupling shall act as a dielectric connector and shall not transmit sound, vibration,
or end thrust.
H. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common steel bedplate, multiribbed for
maximum rigidity, with adequate number of grout holes and grout air vents, and
with drip rim and drain tapping.
A. Mechanical seals shall be balanced or unbalanced, as necessary to conform to

specified service requirements. Mechanical seals shall be constructed in a manner
and of materials particularly suitable for the temperature service range and
chemical analysis of water being pumped. Materials of construction shall include
AISI 300 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards; Material should be Silicone
carbide/Carbon, synthetic resin impregnated for cooling water where the pH is in
excess of 7 or silicone carbide/elastomer/mono chromium nickel steel housing for
water below pH 7 or EPDM.. Seal construction shall not require external source
cooling for pumped-fluid service temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 deg. F).
Seal pressure rating shall be suitable for maximum system hydraulic conditions.
B. Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball or roller type with full provisions for the
mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust loads imposed by any normal service
condition. Bearings shall be manufactured from vacuum-degassed or processed-
alloy steel. Thrust bearings shall be secured to the shaft by threaded collar and
locknut. Double-row ball or roller bearings shall be self-aligning. Bearings shall
have an L-10 rated life of not less than 200,000 hours. Shop Drawings shall bear
manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be grease lubricated and
shall be provided with grease supply and relief fittings located at bottom of
bearings.
C. Factory finish: Manufacturer’s standard paint shall be applied to factory-

assembled and tested units before shipping. Special coating shall be applied for
pumps exposed to outdoor and other corrosive environment.
2.3 HORIZONTAL IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Description: Horizontal, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially

split case design; rated for 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum working pressure subject
to suit system operating pressure, and a continuous water temperature of
107 deg C (225 deg F).

1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections,
and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, cast
bronze, hard iron or cast iron, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
3. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
4. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel
spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type.
6. Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated, sleeve type.
7. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment.
8. Motor: Resiliently mounted to pump casing.
2.4 FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, end-suction, single-

stage, bronze-fitted, back-pull-out, radially split case design; rated for 1200-kPa
(175-psig) minimum working pressure subject to suit system operating pressure,
and a continuous water temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F).
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point
of volute, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections, and
integral feet or other means on volute to support weight of casing and
attached piping. Casing shall allow removal and replacement of impeller
without disconnecting piping.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, cast
bronze, hard iron or cast iron statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve or stainless steel shaft and
sleeve.
5. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration
and shaft misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be
disassembled and removed without removing pump or motor.
7. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.
8. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory
fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing,
coupling guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting holes for field-
installed motors.
9. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

2.5 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 1200-kPa pressure rating, cast-iron or

ductile iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze
or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening
vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field-fabricated support.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with

requirements for installation.
1. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.
2. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps
are to be installed.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with HI

1.4 or HI 2.4.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing

motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves

before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been
completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal

wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of
19 to 38 mm between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level.
Check coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify
that they are level and plumb.
E. For all motors in excess of 20 kg provide lifting eye and lifting beam above the
pump motor complete chain, block and tackle. Provide a flush line to the
mechanical seal of a cyclone type complete with sight indicator.

3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on
foundations, after grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened,
and after piping connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods
specified in HI 1.1-1.2 "Rotodynamic Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature and
Definitions", and HI 1.3 "Rotodynamic Centrifugal Pumps for Design and
Application".
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly.
Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks
and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation
bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping
connected to pumps.
D. Install non-slam check valve and throttling or globe valve on discharge side of
pumps, or install triple-duty valves, contractor’s option, on discharge side of
pumps.
E. Install suction diffuser on suction side of vertical in-line and end-suction pumps
wherever available space doesn’t allow installation of strainers as per
manufacturer recommendations.
F. Install basket type strainer and shut off valve on suction side of base-mounted
pumps.
G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of pumps between pump
casing and valves.
H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure-
gage tappings where provided.
I. Install temperature and pressure-gage connector plugs in suction and discharge

piping around each pump.
J. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

K. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 26
Sections.
L. Ground equipment.

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards and UL 486B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written

instructions and the Contract Documents.
C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before

starting:
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and
clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches
direction marked on pump casing.
4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot
liquids are free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if
they are bound or drag, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into
pumps.
6. Clean strainers.
D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power
is as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare
pumps for operation.
2. Open cooling water-supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings,
where applicable.
3. Open cooling water-supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid-supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not
normally kept at operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead
shutoff.
7. Start motors.


10. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to
prevent overheating.
E. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff
valves open, steps are the same, except open discharge valves before starting
motors.
F. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed
requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to
Division 1.

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications,

including pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and
refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified.
.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings,

including pipe and tube sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations,
slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection
details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout
and installation of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties,
and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with
warranties of connected equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects/engineers and owners, and any other information required by Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators

according to ASME Section IX AMENDED by ASME Section IX Addenda A,
ASME Section IX Addenda B, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
1. ANSI/ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
2. ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration
Systems.” or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
C. UL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Standard: Provide products

complying with UL 207 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, "Refrigerant-
Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, "Electrically Operated Valves."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed
and labeled.
A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits.

2. Refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, drawn temper.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, annealed temper.
D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type A or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, annealed temper.

A. Copper Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: ANSI/AWS A5.8/A5.8M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
2.4 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135

deg C (275 deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or
bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising
stem and handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-end
connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275
deg F) working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps
with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with
solder-end connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating
pressure, 149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with
removable piston, PTFE seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe
design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern, with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating
pressure, 149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with
cast-bronze or forged-brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically
retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall be straight-through or angle pattern, with
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with

copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 760 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature rating, 2760-kPa (400-psig)
working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2-way straight-through
pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1
solenoid enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally
closed holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770 or Equivalent BS/EN

or Local Standards; pilot operated, forged brass or cast bronze with pilot operator,
stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc standard coil, and
wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections.

H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770 or Equivalent BS/EN

or Local Standards; direct acting, brass with pilot operator, stainless-steel
diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat,
factory sealed and ASME labeled or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, for
standard pressure setting.
J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ANSI/ARI 750 or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards; thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size as required and
factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end connections; with sensing bulb,
distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and external equalizer
line.
K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of
compressor unloading; solder-end connections.
2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure;

forged-brass or steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel
screen, and screwed cleanout plug, with solder-end connections.
B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure;

steel shell with stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C

(200 deg F) operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished,
optical viewing window with color-coded moisture indicator, and solder-end
connections.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel

shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and
wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit,
including gaskets, as follows:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel

support, ANSI/AHRI 730 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards rated for
capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated
alumina, ANSI/AHRI 730 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards rated
for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and
desiccant with integral gaskets.
E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure, 107

deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-
copper fittings for solder-end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by
desiccant.

F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg F)
maximum operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end
connections to copper tubing; forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-
inch) nominal copper-tube size and ductile iron for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3-inch)
nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and
fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on flanges and bolts.
G. Flexible Connectors: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; seamless tin-

bronze or stainless-steel core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, solder-end
connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180
mm long.
H. Mufflers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, brazed-steel construction with

fusible plug, sized for refrigeration capacity.
2.6 RECEIVERS
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: AHRI 495 or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760-kPa (400-psig) pressure rating,
with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: AHRI 495 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, welded steel, tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII; 2760 kPa (400 psig) with tappings for liquid
inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.
2.7 REFRIGERANT
A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-

Tetrafluoroethane.
D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed

3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety

Standards for Refrigeration Systems.” or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
B. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints,
elbows, and fittings.
C. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other
equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for
service and inspection.
D. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and
hangers, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors,
walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
E. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all
leaks have been eliminated.
F. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically
and symmetrically.
G. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing
will be exposed to mechanical injury.
H. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4

percent downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent
downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain
oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
I. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs
are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.
K. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
L. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-
inch NPS).

M. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves,

expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
N. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to
axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
O. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
P. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Q. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove
stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant
specialties. Do not apply heat near bulb of expansion valve.
R. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections.

Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
S. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve

outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.
T. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE,

“Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors.
U. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following
ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems”
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards procedures.
A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Provide according to ANSI/ASME
B31.5 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and ANSI/MSS SP-69 or
B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in
length.
C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.
D. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 6 m or longer supported by a trapeze.
E. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in
ASTM B88M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.

8. 79 mm: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
9. 105 mm: Maximum span, 3.6 m; minimum rod size, 12 mm.
G. Support vertical runs at each floor.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter

"Pipe and Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings
with copper pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or
steel.
D. Fill pipe and fittings with nitrogen during brazing to prevent formation of scale.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor
inlet and outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and
on each side of strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on

multiple condenser systems.
D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver

shutoff valve and expansion valve.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines
at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.
Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections.

Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve

outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.
I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34

PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards.
3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving
receiver, and on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including

expansion valves, solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction
valves.
C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral
strainers are used.
D. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and

thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.
F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers

and before each solenoid valve.
G. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using

hermetic compressors, and before each solenoid valve.
H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or
pump-down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator
systems, and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and
refrigerant into suction line when system shuts down.

I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with long
piping runs, sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does

not absorb vibration.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for

electrical connections.
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.5, Chapter VI

or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at
186-kPa (27-psig) vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or
electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.
B. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the
test pressure.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific

requirements for welding joints in refrigerant piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review

and approval by welding engineer.
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on

site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on

site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be

submitted for review and approval and the mechanical test for
electrode material may be required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection

for welding activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning

E. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.

3.10 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and
fittings with trichloroethylene.
3.11 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa).
If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa
(2 psig).
5. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line.
Provide full-operating charge.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat

requirements.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response
to fluctuating suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the

system design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system,

according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other
purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors
and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after
design flow rates and pressures are established.

SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:
1. Heating, hot-water piping (closed-loop system).

2. Chilled-water piping (closed-loop system).
1.3 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Closed-Loop System: One manual bypass feeder and one automatic dosing
system on each system with isolating and drain valves downstream from
circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Introduce chemical treatment manually through bypass feeder when

required or indicated by test and automatically through electronic solid-state
controller and feeding pumps.
2. .
A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and
biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a
hazard to operating personnel or the environment.
B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project B. site,

HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance
characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines
of authorities having jurisdiction
C. Closed hydronic systems : Chilled water:
D. After cleaning the systems treat the closed system to prevent rust, corrosion, scale,
pitting and sludge accumulations. Use a nitrite based combined scale and
corrosion inhibitor containing inhibitors for ferrous, steel, copper and copper
alloys in combination with dispersants. Product to contain a blend of sodium
nitrite, sodium silicate, and sodium hydroxide. Maintain a reserve of 600-800 ppm
nitrite as NO2 and pH of 9.0 – 10.5.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500

E. Treat the system with a broad spectrum biocide to prevent the growth of biofilms
on heat exchange and evaporative surfaces and to control the number of
planktonic bacteria and other micro-organisms. Use a non-foaming agent which is
compatible with non-ionic, cationic and anionic water treatment chemicals. Dose
at regular intervals automatically to give a concentration of 500ml/m3.
F. Closed Hydronic systems: LTHW Heating Water:
G. After cleaning the systems treat the closed system to prevent rust, corrosion, scale,
nitrite, sodium silicate, and sodium hydroxide. Maintain a reserve of 800-1200
ppm nitrite as NO2 and pH of 9.0-10.5.
H. Treat the system with a broad spectrum biocide to prevent the growth of biofilms
at regular intervals automatically to give a concentration of 500ml/m3.
I. Closed Hydronic Systems: Condenser water where cooling towers are of the
closed circuit type
J. After cleaning the systems treat the closed system to prevent rust, corrosion, scale,
nitrite, sodium silicate, and sodium hydroxide. Maintain a reserve of 600-800 ppm
nitrite as
K. Treat the system with a broad spectrum biocide to prevent the growth of biofilms
at regular intervals automatically to give a concentration of 500ml/m3. NO2 and
pH of 9.0 – 10.5.
L. Open Hydronic Systems: Condenser water where cooling towers are of the open
circuit type and recirculation spray water of closed towers.
M. The systems shall be dosed with an alkaline blend of inorganic salts and organic
scale and corrosion inhibitors. Product contains organic phosphonate , organic
heterocyclics 5-10% sodium hydroxide and 2% Triazole and is developed for
open circuit evaporative cooling systems. System to provide scale and corrosion
inhibition. Maintain a reserve of 100 ml/m³ using a water meter controlled dosing
system.

N. Provide biocidal protection to limit biological fouling and the prevention of films
including legionella. Use 2 alternating widespectrum non-oxidising agents
automatically dosing at a metered rate in line with the make-up water quantity to
effectively prevent the growth of algae, fungi, slime or other undesirable forms of
bacteria life
O. Closed hydronic systems including hot-water heating, chilled water, closed circuit
condenser water, shall have the following water qualities
(1) pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.
(2) "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
(3) Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
(4) Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm
(5) Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.
(6) TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.
(7) Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
(8) Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
(9) Microbiological Limits:
(a) Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000

organisms/ml.
(b) Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100

organisms/ml.
(c) Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
(d) Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
(e) Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
P. Open hydronic systems, including condenser, fluid-cooler spray water, shall P.

have the following water qualities:
(1) pH: Maintain a value within 8.0 to 9.1.
(2) "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.
(3) Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.
(4) Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.

(5) TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm
(6) Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
(7) Free "OH" Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 0 ppm
(8) Microbiological Limits:
(a) Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 10,000

organisms/ml.
(b) Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000

organisms/ml.
(c) Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.
(d) Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml
(e) Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.
(9) Polymer Testable: Maintain a minimum value within 10 to 40
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; water-pressure drops; shipping, installed,

and operating weights; and furnished products listed below:
1. Dosing Pots.
2. Water meters.
3. Inhibitor injection timers.
4. pH controllers.
5. TDS controllers.
6. Biocide feeder timers.
7. Chemical solution tanks.
8. Injection pumps.
9. UV-irradiation units.
10. Chemical test equipment.
11. Chemical material safety data sheets.
12. Water softeners.
13. Multimedia filters.
14. Self-cleaning strainers.
15. Bag- or cartridge-type filters.
16. Centrifugal separators.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights,

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate

between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality
available at Project site.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
E. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories
to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized

representative of the chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and
maintenance of chemical treatment equipment required for this Project.

in NFPA 70, Article 100 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a testing
agency acceptable to Engineer.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
.
1. Chemical: Furnish sufficient chemicals based on entire volume of chilled
water system.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining

optimum conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and
organic growths in the cooling, chilled-water piping /heating, hot-water piping
and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year
from date of Substantial Completion, including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and
compliance with government regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with
funnel shutoff valve on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and
recirculating shutoff valves on sides.
1. Capacity: min 19 L (5 gal.) for chilled water system & 7.6 L (2 gallon) for
hot water system.
2. Working Pressure: 1210 kPa (175 psig).
B. Drip Feeders: Plastic reservoir with capillary tubing probe, weight, charging
syringe, and clip.
C. Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for

intended chemical with 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and
temperature.
1. Adjustable flow rate.

2. Thermoplastic construction.
3. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 220-V,60 Hz, single-phase motor.
4. Built-in relief valve.
D. Positive-Displacement Piston Pump: Metal and thermoplastic construction.
1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty,220-V, 60 Hz, single-phase motor.

2. Built-in relief valve.
E. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-

density opaque polyethylene with graduated markings.
1. Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and
liquid-level switch.
2. Capacity: 189 L (50gal).
F. Agitator: Direct drive, 1450 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment.
1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 220-V, 60 Hz, single-phase motor.

2. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and
propeller.
G. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap,

receptacles for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.
H. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy,

linear dial adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-
function light, output to control circuit, and recorder.

I. Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof

magnetic drive; impulse contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact
switch.
J. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid

enclosure with 220-V, continuous-duty coil.
K. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment

over full range, and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status
lights.
L. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or

polypropylene tubing with heat fusion.
M. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and
polytetrafluoroethylene seats and seals.
2.2 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying

case, for testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride,
and total alkalinity and for calcium hardness field tests.
B. Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete

with piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon
downstream from mild steel coupon in the test coupon assembly.
1. Two- station rack for closed-loop systems.

2. Four4-station rack for open condenser water systems.
2.3 CHEMICALS
A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment.
B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and

detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.
C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.
D. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and

adjust pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.

2.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS
A. The water treatment system shall be capable of automatically feeding chemicals

and bleeding the system to prevent corrosion, scale, and biological formations.
Automatic chemical feed systems shall automatically feed chemicals into the
chilled/hot water based on varying system conditions. Chilled/Hot water quality
at selected locations as directed by The Engineer shall be automatically monitored
by the system.
B. Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled materials of construction including

ferrous, and red and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of scale,
corrosion, and fouling. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed
specified mils per year penetration; ferrous, 0.5; copper 0.15 and brass0.2.
Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water
temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 deg. F) and 52 deg. C
(126 deg. F). Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that
allowed by fouling factor 0.0005.
C. Inhibitor: Provide sodium silicate, sodium nitrite/borate, or other approved

proprietary compound suitable for make-up quality and make-up rate and which
will cause or enhance bacteria/corrosion problems or mechanical seal failure due
to excessive total dissolved solids. Shot feed manually. Maintain inhibitor residual
as determined by water treatment laboratory, taking into consideration residual
and temperature effect on pump mechanical seals.
D. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH

range of 8.0 to 10.0.
E. Pot Feeder: Bypass type for chemical treatment schedule 3.5 mm (10 gauge)
heads, 20 mm system connections and large neck opening for chemical addition.
Feeders shall be 7.6 L (2 gallon) minimum size for hot water heating systems and
18.9 L (5 gallon) for chilled water systems.
1. The pot feeder shall be designed & implemented according to ASME code
for pressure vessels with necessary verification certificates & name plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of

chemical treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article.
B. The chilled shall be analyzed a minimum of once a month from the date of
substantial completion until the final handover by the installer water treatment
company.

C. The Contractor is required to employ the services of a Water Treatment Specialist

Contractor to carry out the pipework cleaning and system treatment indicated in
this section. The Water Treatment Specialist Contractor, shall be responsible for
the pipework flushing, chlorination, chemical cleaning and water treatment
additions. All works shall be carried out in accordance with BSRIA application
guide AG 1 /2001.1 and Health and Safety Executive ACOP L8 and the following
specification
D. The Water Treatment Specialist Contractor is responsible for the safe disposal of
all flushing and cleaning water/chemicals. Approval to dispose of any waste shall
be approved by the local municipality. All solutions in excess of 5000 litres shall
be neutralised prior to dispatch.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.
B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all chemicals in manufacturer's sealed shipping

containers. Store in designated space and protect from deleterious exposure and
hazardous spills.
D. Install equipment furnished by the chemical treatment supplier and charge

systems according to the manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the
Engineer.
3.3 PIPEWORK PRE-CLEANING SYSTEMS
A. All systems whether closed or open circuits shall be fully cleaned and flushed A.
out prior to the addition of water treatment.
B. Immediately after hydraulic testing, all water from the systems shall be fully
drained away using pumping facilities where necessary with all drain points and
dead legs open to remove all dross and dirt.
C. The systems shall then be re-filled and flushed out a minimum of 2 times until the
system has been cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. A temporary flushing
pump shall be provided for this work, the second time being filled with a hosed
water supply make up at high level.
D. After flushing and draining all drain pockets, strainers, dead legs, and control
valves shall be checked to ensure that the systems are completely clean and free
from dirt before the systems are put into commission. During flushing processes
all 3 port control valves shall be manually adjusted to provide circulation via all
ports.

E. Should the site water supply be inadequate for the water flow required the
Contractor shall provide a mobile water tank and pump set of sufficient capacity.
To achieve the flushing velocities required.
F. Provide a detailed method statement of the proposed flushing procedures prior to

commencement, to be agreed with the Engineer.
G. Particular emphasis shall be given to proposals for disposal of water G. during this
process. Care shall be taken to ensure that the minimum flushing velocities
indicated in BSRIA Application Guide AG 1/2001.1 "Pre-Commission Cleaning
of Pipework Systems” are achieved for particle sizes up to 5mm diameter.
H. Upon completion of the flushing process all utility systems including drinking,
cold, hot and fire main systems shall be chlorinated as specified in the following
clauses and all closed circuit systems shall be pre-commission chemically cleaned
as specified in the following clauses.
I. Ensure all requirements of COSHH regulations are complied with during the
chemical cleaning and chemical treatment of the system.
J. Where required by local water authority, provide effluent tanks for storage of all
waste products of cleaning and chemical treatment processes. Following local
water authority approval, either neutralize or dispose to drain of all waste
products; or ensure authorized disposal at registered sites.
3.4 CHLORINATION OF WATER SUPPLY MAINS
A. General
(1) Chlorination of water systems (all 'utility' systems including mains,

drinking, cold, hot, irrigation and fire main systems) shall be carried out to
the recommendations of BS EN 806-4. The local water authority shall be
informed prior to carrying out this work and any particular requirements
shall be included. Flushing out of water systems shall be carried out so as
not to cause damage to other services nor to the building fabric.
(2) On completion final flushing samples shall be submitted for bacteria level
tests to an independent laboratory. Certificates shall be submitted to the CA
of chlorination procedures and contact times. All such work shall be carried
out by a Water Treatment Specialist Contractor to the approval of the CA.
B. Disinfection Process
(1) Generally carry out the works in accordance with procedures identified in
Health and Safety Executive publication HSE ACOP L8. Typical
procedures required are as follows:
(2) Tanks shall be blend filled with fresh water and chlorinating chemical to
give a minimum free chlorine concentration of 50 ppm and when full
allowed to stand for one hour.

(3) The solution shall then be distributed throughout the systems until tests
indicate that chlorine is present from every outlet or draw off. After
standing for a further one hour, the chlorine levels shall be tested at the most
remote draw offs. If the chlorine levels are below 30 ppm the above
procedure shall be repeated. The tanks (cisterns) and pipework shall remain
charged with chlorinated water for a minimum of 16 hours. The systems
shall then be drained and thoroughly flushed out with clean mains water
until tests indicate that the free chlorine concentration is no greater than 0.5
ppm or that present in the water supply mains, whichever is the greater.
(4) Disinfection of mains water services shall be carried out in a similar manner
to the above procedure except that initially the chlorinating solution shall be
pre-mixed to a minimum of 50 ppm free chlorine before injection into the
main and associated distribution system.
(5) A completion certificate signed by the CA and the Specialist

Commissioning Contractor is required to confirm that the above procedures
have been complied with.
C. Tests
(1) On completion of final flushing, samples shall be submitted to an

independent laboratory for testing for bacteria levels. Tests shall include
checking for "Legionella" and confirmation will be required that the water
is of potable quality.
D. Disposal: It is the responsibility of the Water Treatment Contractor to safely

dispose of the effluent produced. Chlorinated solutions in excess of 5000 litres
shall be neutralised prior to dispatch.
3.5 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting

electrical equipment.

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A - 486B or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards.

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have
been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before
introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls
during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
B. Test chemical feed piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and
satisfactory test results are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping
tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced
water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has
been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above
materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform

two separate water analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are
maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this
Section. Perform analyses at least 60 days apart. Submit written reports of water
analysis.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment
systems and equipment. Refer to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least eight hours of training.

2. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended
parts inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service.

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular and round, metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to
plus 2490 Pa (minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined

in ASTM C 168 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. In this Section, these
values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the
temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and
-distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by
Engineer. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations
showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without
increasing system total pressure.
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses,

seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall
comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct
Schedule" Article.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of
gravity and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7 or
METAL DUCTS 233113

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and adhesives, sealants and gaskets devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating configuration, liner material, pressure classifications
and sizes on plans.
4. Fittings.
5. Reinforcement and spacing.
6. Seam and joint construction.
7. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
8. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and
access doors and panels.
9. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
10. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration
isolation, and duct attachment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide
access to dampers and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures,
diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special
moldings.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and

personnel comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of

this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details,

reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices.
METAL DUCTS 233113

A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to

perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2/D1.2M,
"Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and
AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems," or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." or
B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and
Insulation." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
C. Sample method: , It should be conducted before installing duct systems for system
pressure classifications higher than 500 Pa (2-inch wg). :
1. .
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers

or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation,
color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's

written recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper
maintained through fabrication and installation.
METAL DUCTS 233113

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275

(G90) for exposed duct and Z180 (G60) for concealed duct or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of
ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed matte
finish.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view; and
Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209) or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with standard, one-side bright
finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for concealed ducts.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed

on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and
stainless-steel ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less;
10-mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. Ductwork is to be constructed to low or medium pressure standards depending

upon the maximum air velocities and static pressures as indicated in the following
table: Refer to design drawings and specification systems description section for
design standards applicable to this project.
(1) Low and Medium Pressure Ductwork Construction
Low pressure (A) Medium pressure (B)
Maximum static pressure +500 Pa +1000 Pa

- positive
Minimum static pressure -500 Pa -750 Pa

- negative
Maximum mean air 10 m/s 20 m/s

velocity
METAL DUCTS 233113

B. Rectangular ductwork and fittings shall be constructed using sheet metal as

specified elsewhere.
C. Stiffening and constructional details shall be provided as indicated on the

following tables,
Construction Low pressure (A) Medium pressure (B)

Longest Metal Site Stiff Stiffening Site Stiffening Stiffening
side of thickness joint ening details joint spacing details
duct spa
cings
Up to 0.8 46m m 300 46mm 3000mm
and mm slip 0m slip
incl. (22g) m
200mm
201mm Standing Standing
400mm Seam seam
incl. with with
401mm 1.0 mm clamp 120 clamps 800mm
800mm (20g) s or 0m or slide
incl. slide m on
801mm on flanges 35mm
1000mm flanges and "slide-
incl. and clamps on"
clamps flange
1001mm 1.2mm Slide- 800 35m ‘Slide- 600mm centre
1250mm (18g) on’ mm ‘slideon’ on’ stiffener
incl. flange Flange flange
1251mm with centre with 40x40x4
1600mm central stiffener central RSA
incl. tie tie bar centre
bar stiffener
1601mm 1.6mm 600 40x40x4 600mm 50x50x5
2000mm (16g) mm RSA RSA
incl. centre centre
stiffener stiffener
2001mm 50x50x5 M10 tie-
2500mm RSA rod
incl. at each
joint
2501mm centre Steel 2 No
3000mm stiffener angle equally
incl. M10tierod flange spread
At each joint 50x50x5
joint RSA
stiffeners
METAL DUCTS 233113

D. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
E. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to

SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
F. "Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction:

Select types and fabricate according to HVAC DW144 or SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
B. Spirally wound and oval circular Ductwork: The following table illustrates the
minimum standard.
Nominal diameter (mm) Sheet thickness (mm) Stiffening or angle flange

sizes (mm)
Up to 200 0.6 25 × 25 × 3
Over 200 and up to 710 0.8 25 × 25 × 3
Over 710 and up to1000 1 30 × 30 × 4 @ 1250mm

centres
40 × 40 × 4 @ 1250
Over 1120 and up to 1.2 centres maximum
1250
50 × 50 × 5 @ 1250
1600 to 2000 1.2 Centres maximum
C. Circular Longitudinal seam (straight seam) ductwork and fittings shall be C.

constructed from sheet steel as specified elsewhere and shall have the following
thicknesses, stiffening requirements and where required flanges of the stated sizes.
METAL DUCTS 233113

Nominal Sheet Stiffening (mm) Stiffening or angle flange

diameter (mm) thickness sizes (mm)
(mm)
Up to 500 .8 swaged ends × 3 25 × 25 × 3
500 to 750 1 swaged ends × 3 25 × 25 × 3

swaged ends × 4
750 to 1000 1.2 but with angle 30 × 30 × 4 @ 1250mm
centres
angle rings 40 × 40 × 4 @ 1250
1120 to 1250 1.2 flanged × 4 centres maximum
angle rings 50 × 50 × 5 @ 1250
1600 to 2000 1.2 flanged × 4 Centres maximum
D. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and
diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor
dimension).
E. Construct ductwork joints and fastenings as indicated below:
Duct diameter (mm) Joint type

Up to 224 40mm socket and spigot
250 to 315 60mm socket and spigot
355 to 1000 75 / 76mm socket and spigot
1120 to 1250 40x40x4mm angle flanged
1600 and over 50x50x5mm angle flanged
F. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to HVAC DW 144 or
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
G. Insert a pressure applied sealant of the non-hard setting mastic type in every joint
prior to assembly except in spiral seams and heat shrink type joints
H. Fastenings to be at 150mm centre and of the mechanically closed rivet type (not
pop rivet or open rivettype) which do not protrude into the air space other than the
rivet head. On all flanges and joints, etc ,mild steel nuts and bolts electro plated,
sheradized or cadmium plated to be used.
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 1524mm in Diameter: Flanged.
I. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
METAL DUCTS 233113

Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to HVAC specification DW 144 or
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
2.4 DUCT LINER (WHERE INDICATED DRAWINGS)
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards and NAIMA AH124 "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." or
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards with coated

surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F)
mean temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and
smoke-developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411 or
4. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner
that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent
and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for
efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
5. Solvent or Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or
NFPA 90B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and with ASTM C 916
a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L

or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
b. ."
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging
liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing
leakage in duct.
a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 23-kg tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and
without projecting more than 3 mm into airstream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-
hazard classification of duct liner system.
METAL DUCTS 233113

2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials
of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave
fabric strips and mastics.
B. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for

sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723;
certified by an NRTL.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.

2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum
mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react
exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal,
(i) Tape Width: 76mm
(ii) Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
(iii)Water resistant.
(iv) Mold and mildew resistant.
(v) Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 2500Pa, positive and negative.
(vi) Service: Indoor and outdoor.
(vii) Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 93 °C.
(viii) Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC
coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.
(ix) For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250
g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: .
(a) Application Method: Brush on.
(b) Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
(c) Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
(d) Water resistant.
(e) Mold and mildew resistant.
(f) VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
(g) Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 2500Pa, positive and negative.
(h) Service: Indoor or outdoor.
(i) Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and
bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
(j) For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
(k) Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 2500Pa, positive or negative.
(l) Service: Indoor or outdoor.
(m) Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and
bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint
sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O
METAL DUCTS 233113

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-

steel fasteners appropriate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 100 mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-
aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, all-threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread

rod.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and
thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates or

steel angles & C channels with coating.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and

other construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements
for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint
types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to

reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, and discolorations.
B. Fabricate grease hood exhaust ducts with not less than 1.52-mm thick, carbon-
steel sheet for concealed ducts and not less than 1.21-mm thick stainless steel for
exposed ducts. Continuous weld seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
C. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts as per

SMACNA’s HVAC duct standard:
METAL DUCTS 233113

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480 mm
and larger and 0.9 mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of unbraced panel
area, unless ducts are lined.
E. Smoke Extract Ducts: shall be constructed of black steel sheet with 2mm
thickness, welded longitudinal joints, flanged sectional joints, reinforced with
girders, and sealed with fire rated sealants.
F. Smoke Extract Ducts and other ducts crossing fire rated walls without fire
dampers shall be fire proofed ducts. Contractor shall submit clear method
statement for the constructing of fire/ smoke rated ducts for approval, such as
applying fire resistant coating similar to products of PROMAT (UK) or approved
equal, which reacts in contact with fire by forming an insulating barrier to
separates two contiguous areas, or by other proven and approved methods. Smoke
extract ducts should be two hours fire rated at 400 deg. C.
2.8 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage
of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve
indicated thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal
joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7
m/s (2500 fpm).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 300 mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse
joints and at intervals not exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
METAL DUCTS 233113

I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness
as specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain
metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 2.4-mm diameter, with an overall open area
of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning
vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or
other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with
bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to
fire-damper sleeve.
2.9 ROUND DUCT FABRICATION
A. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of spiral seam, galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with

spiral seam outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally
insulated ducts are inside dimensions.

mean temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell
dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell
and insulation, and in metal thickness specified for single-wall duct.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise
indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to
single-wall duct or uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and
reduce outer duct diameter to inner liner diameter.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round inner liners with sheet metal having
2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:
a. Ducts 75 to 200 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with standard spiral seam

construction.
b. Ducts 225 to 1070 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with single-rib spiral
seam construction.
c. Ducts 1120 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 0.55 mm with single-rib spiral
seam construction.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2235 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm with standard spiral
seam construction.
6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain

insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
METAL DUCTS 233113

2.10 ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with
metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with

no excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction.

Fabricate bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half
times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate
elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction

complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal
thickness for pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500 Pa (minus 2- to
plus 2-inch wg):
a. Ducts 75 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 685 to 915 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 940 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal

thickness for pressure classes from 500 to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg):

d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.
4. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or
exhaust systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where
space restrictions do not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate
with single-thickness turning vanes.
5. Round Elbows, 200 mm and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45-
and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees
only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard
diameter elbows with gored construction.
6. Round Elbows, 225 through 355 mm: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered
elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard
diameter elbows with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows, Larger Than 355 mm: Fabricate gored elbows, unless space
restrictions require a mitered elbow.
METAL DUCTS 233113

8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200 mm and All Pressures: 1.0 mm
thick with two-piece welded construction.
9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings
specified above.
10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355 mm and Pressures through 2490 Pa
(10-Inch wg): 0.55 mm.
D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with

an outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated
ducts are inside dimensions.

mean temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell
dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell
and insulation. Use the same metal thicknesses for outer duct as for
uninsulated fittings.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise
indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to
single-wall duct or uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and
reduce outer duct diameter to nominal single-wall size.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round liners with solid sheet metal of thickness
listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round inner liners with sheet metal having
2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses:

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain

insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
7. seams spot welded, bonded, and painted with a PVC aerosol spray.
8. Round Elbows 230 to 660 mm in Diameter: Standing seam construction.
9. Round Elbows 710 to 1525 mm in Diameter: Standard gore construction,
riveted and bonded.
10. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints.
11. Couplings: Slip-joint construction with a minimum 50-mm insertion length.
2.11 FIRE STOPPING
A. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in
a through penetration fire stop system for filling openings around duct
penetrations through walls and floors, having fire resistance ratings.
METAL DUCTS 233113

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. All ducts shall be galvanized steel except as follows:
1. Commercial Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts (As applicable as per contactor

scope):
a. Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet, No. 4 finish.

b. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.
c. Welded seams and joints.
2. Service road ventilation system and NOVEC exhaust system ducts: Carbon-
steel sheet.
3. Dishwasher Hood Exhaust Ducts (As applicable as per contactor scope):
a. Type 304, stainless-steel sheet.

b. Exposed to View: No. 4 finish.
c. Concealed: No. 2D finish.
d. Welded seams and flanged joints with watertight EPDM gaskets.
4. Moist Environment Duct Material for shower exhaust: Aluminum.
5. Supply/Return Air Totem: Stainless steel sheet at outer wall (0.6 mm

thickness) and 20 G stainless steel sheet at inner wall layer.
B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
C. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification
indicated.
D. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 3.7 m, unless interrupted by fittings.
E. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
F. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
G. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into
duct.
H. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
I. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural
and permanent enclosure elements of building.
METAL DUCTS 233113

J. Install ducts with a clearance of 25 mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
K. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in
solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.
L. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers,

lighting layouts, and similar finished work.
M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through

transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
N. Where ducts are exposed to view in machine rooms and in spaces without
suspended ceiling, cover with aluminum jacketing to protect against accidental
damage.
O. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior

partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between
construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same
metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 38 mm.
P. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions

and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping
sealant, unless these are fire rated ducts such as for smoke exhaust application.
Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Section "Air Duct Accessories."
Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 GREASE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 1100 deg C
(2000 deg F) temperature range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues, unless traps have
continuous or automatic residue removal.
C. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from grease hood.
D. Install access openings at each change in direction and at 15-m intervals; locate on
sides of duct a minimum of 38 mm from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers
of same material as duct.
E. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies.
F. In accessible shafts and in vertical direction, install access panels at every other
floor and at top of riser.
METAL DUCTS 233113

3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated
and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."
B. Pressure Classification Less Than 500 Pa (2-Inch wg): Transverse joints.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round and rectangularmetal duct with support systems indicated in
B. Support horizontal ducts within 600 mm of each elbow and within 1200 mm of
each branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 5 m and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-
fourth of failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Section "Air Duct

Accessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to

accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test
requirements.
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum

design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are
not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not
pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days'
advance notice for testing.
METAL DUCTS 233113

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to

surface area of test section.
D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage

Classification 3 for round ducts, and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure
classifications from 500 to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg).
E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual."
G. Perform leakage test on supply ducts constructed to pressure higher than 500 Pa
(2-inch wg).
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design

airflow.
B. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed
procedures.
3.8 CLEANING
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.END OF
SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS 233113

SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual-volume dampers.
4. Motorized volume dampers.
5. Fire dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Duct silencers.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
11. Flexible ducts.
13. Duct accessory hardware.
14. Activated carbon panel filters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data For each type of product.
1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data.
Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,

loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location,
and size of each field connection. Detail the following:
1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.

2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted
access doors and panels.
3. Duct security bars.
4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300

C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-
noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss,
dimensions, and weights.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation
and maintenance manuals.
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." or

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
C. Comply with AMCA 500-D "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for

Rating" or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for dampers rating.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fusible Links.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M , Z275

(G90) or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards coating designation; mill-
phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed matte
finish.
C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14 or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, sheet form; with standard, one-side bright
finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063, Temper T6 or

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed

on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and
stainless-steel ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less;
10-mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Description: Gravity balanced, suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.

Dampers shall not produce noise while in operation.
B. Maximum Air Velocity: 10 m/s
C. Maximum System Pressure .5 Pa
D. Maximum pressure drop 30 pa, unless otherwise noted on drawings
E. Frame: 1.3-mm thick, stainless steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Frame: 1.6-mm thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.
G. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 150-mm width,

0.6-mm- thick, rollformed aluminum with sealed edges.
H. Blade Action: Parallel.
I. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.
Blade Axles: Stainless steel or Aluminum..
J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L. Bearings: Synthetic pivot bushings..
M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage (1.0-mm) minimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum.
5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

6. Screen Material: Galvanized steel.

7. Screen Type: Bird.
8. 90-degree stops.
2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
B. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel]], with

welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple, 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.

2. Maximum Width: 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Eccentrically pivoted.
D. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
E. Tie Bars and Brackets:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.

2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
F. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
G. Bearings: Bronze.
H. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
2.4 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen

damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers
in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper
components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 500 Pa (2-Inch wg) or Higher: End bearings or

other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at
both ends of operating shaft.
B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-

blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and
suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of

1.62 mm thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where
indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for
installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Aerofoil type stainless steel 1.62 mm thick..
3. Blade Seals: Neoprene
4. Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Jackshaft: 25-mm diameter, Galvanized-steel piperotating within a pipe-bearing

assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-
damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each

damper of a multiple-damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 32.4-
mm thick zinc-plated steel, and a 19-mm hexagon locking nut. Include center
hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated
duct mounting.
2.5 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Dampers: BS/EN or Local Standards labeled, AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-

blade design; 2.8 -mm minimum, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct
mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 1.6 -mm galvanized steel with
maximum blade width of 200 mm, and with edge seals.
1. Dampers to be dynamic type upstream of VAV boxes and medium pressure

ductworks, and static type downstream of VAV boxes and low pressure
ductwork.
2. Blades shall be secured to 13 -mm diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-
plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-
plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade
bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
3. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 93 deg. C (minus 40
to plus 200 deg F).
4. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
5. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with
inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at
less than 51 L/s per sq. m (10 cfm per sq. ft.) of damper area, at differential
pressure of 995 Pa (4 inches wg) when damper is being held by torque of
5.6 N x m; when tested according to AMCA 500D
6. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside air stream for all ducted fire
dampers.
7. Mounting Sleeves: Factory installed sleeves shall only be allowed. Field
installed sleeves shall not be permitted.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Fire Rating: match the rating of wall or slab in which fire damper is installed..
C. Closing rating in ducts up to 1kPa static pressure class and minimum 20m/s
velocity
D. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-
formed, 1.2-mm thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3 mm or 3.5 mm thick as indicated, and length to

suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct
attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and
thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In

place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized steel
blade connectors.
H. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure

spring.
I. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 72 deg C (162 deg F) rated.
2.7 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS (FSD)
A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Fire Rating: to match the rating of wall or slab in which fire damper is installed.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to 1kPa static pressure class and minimum 20m/s
velocity
D. Frame: Hat-shaped, or 0.05-inck-(1.2 mm) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with

welded corners and mounting flange.
E. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, [165 deg F (74 deg C)] [212 deg F (100
deg C)] rated, fusible links.
F. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking 1.6-mm-thick, galvanized sheet

steel.

H. Leakage: Class I or Class II.
I. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
J. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length

to suit wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.
K. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
L. FSD shall be connected to fire alarm system.
M. Damper Motors: two-position action.
N. Comply with NEMA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards designation,

temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for
motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate
in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and
sealed gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism
where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing
designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150
in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring
gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof.Nonspring-Return Motors:
For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for running torque
rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x
lbf (34 N x m).
5. Electrical Connection: 230 V, single phase,60 Hz.
O. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practicle.
2.8 SMOKE AND SMOKE/FIRE DAMPER CONTROL PANELS
A. Refer to schedule of smoke, smoke/fire dampers for operation requirements.

Provide all control panels as described below.
B. Power wiring and fire alarm interfaces to each damper control panel shall be by
electrical and fire alarm contractor respectively. Final connection for fire alarm
interface and power to panel and all wiring from panel to dampers, between
panels and from panels back to Fire Command Centre, shall be by Division 23
BMS sub-contractor. All wiring to be in fire rated cable and contained in steel
conduit. BMS sub-contractor shall also provide wiring for common fault

C. Local Panels: Wall mounted NEMA 250 Type 1 with door interlocking i C.
solator and MCB protection. Provided with test facility and lamp test switch. An
Auto/Hand/Test selector shall be provided at each panel which shall be padlocked
in the “Auto” position, with status monitored at the Fire Command Centre control
panel.
D. Flexible system architecture to allow for future flexibility. Additional spare ways
to be provided as noted on system schematics.
E. Battery Backup. Provide 24 hrs quiescent operation followed by 3 hours in alarm /

operational mode to each panel on smoke damper system.
F. Status Monitoring: Panel monitors the status of each damper and provides a
graphical indication at panel via a graphical user interface, with labeling of
dampers as Saudi Aramco tag numbers. A laminated system schematic shall be
produced and hung on the adjacent wall providing indication of damper location
and zoning.
G. Where noted as a specific requirement on system schematics, each local panel

shall be overridden when in “Auto” position by the Firefighters Override Panel in
the building. Panel described in Division 23 “Sequence of Operations for HVAC
Controls”. When the local fireman’s switches override automatic control of
smoke fans from this panel, smoke fire dampers shall operate as the fire alarm
cause and effects matrix. The status of all Hand/Auto/Test switches on the
fireman’s override panel shall be monitored at the Fire Command Centre control
panel.
H. Each smoke control panel (and fireman’s override panel if shown on system
schematics) shall be connected back to a single master control panel in the Fire
Command Centre or similar central location. This panel will allow master
override and monitoring of all smoke dampers in all buildings from the Fire
Command Centre and pick up fault status from the local panels. This panel shall
also monitor the position of each Auto/Hand/Test switch on local damper control
panel and each Auto/Hand/Test switch on any fireman’s override panel. Master
control panel and all interconnecting wiring shall be provided by Division 23
BMS Contractor. All local smoke damper control panels will be capable of
operating independently in the event of loss of communication with master panel.
Provide battery backup to master panel; 24 hrs quiescent operation followed by 3
hours in alarm / operational mode.
I. BMS Interface: Volt free contact indicating common fault from each panel.
2.9 SMOKE MOTORIZED DAMPERS (SMD)
A. General: Labeled to BS/EN or Local Standards. Smoke motorized dampers shall

be labeled for one-and-one-halfhour and three hours rating to BS/EN or Local
Standards per design requirements to match the rating of wall or slab in which
damper is installed

B. SMD shall be used in smoke management system as per design requirements and
shall be connected to fire alarm system.
C. Frame and Blades: 1.6-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length

to suit wall or floor application.
E. Damper Motors: Provide for two-position action.

1. Motor Sizes: large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate
in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and
sealed gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism
where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing
designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 17 N x
m and breakaway torque rating of 17 N x m.
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring
gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof.
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 2.3 sq. m, size motor for
running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 34 N x m.
Two-Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
2.10 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with

performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials

shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke
developed when tested according to ASTM E 84 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.85-mm thick, solid

galvanized sheet steel for outer casing and 0.55-mm thick, perforated galvanized
sheet steel for inner casing.
D. Round Units: Casings with galvanized sheet steel thicknesses for diameters listed
below:
1. Up to 600 mm: 0.85 mm.

2. 650 through 1000 mm: 1.0 mm.
3. 1050 through 1300 mm: 1.3 mm.
4. 1350 through 1500 mm: 1.6 mm.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than
that indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm and designed for
minimum aerodynamic losses.
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3-mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.

F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed

under not less than 5 percent compression.
G. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or
otherwise react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to
frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
H. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:
1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477 or Equivalent

BS/EN or Local Standards, with airflow in both directions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise
power levels, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and
reverse flow (air and noise in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least
10-m/s (2000-fpm) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static
pressure or 1500-Pa (6-inch wg) static pressure, whichever is greater.
I. Maximum Pressure Drop (Pa)
20 35
25 35
30 63
35 75
40 and above 100
2.11 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 38-mm wide, curved blades set 19

mm o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 50 mm o.c.; and set into
side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with

perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
D. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.12 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more chrome-
plated enamel painted steel hinges and quick fastening locking devices. Provide
doors as large as practical. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 25-by-
25 mm butt or piano hinge and cam latches. Access doors up to 300 X 300 mm
shall have two cam locks, larger sizes shall have four cam locks.
B. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. As an

alternative, removable access doors may be used.
C. Access doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an
inner and outer door panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door
shall consist of two panels spot-welded together which totally encapsulate
insulation identical to corresponded ductwork insulation. The inner and outer
doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded handles in such a configuration that
the panels can be drawn together to secure the door to the duct in a sandwich
fashion.
D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical
springs shall be used between the door panels to facilitate installation and removal
of the door. Fireproof neoprene gasket shall be used around the outside edge of
the inner or outer panel, but not both, to seal the door.
E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat-oval
ductwork.
F. Insulation: 25-mm thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89

mm wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet
steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
C. Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric

146 mm wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized,
sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected
ducts.
D. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89

mm wide attached to two strips of 111-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet
steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double

coated with polychloroprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 84 N/mm in the warp, and 63 N/mm in the filling.
F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double

coated with a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's
ultraviolet rays and ozone environment.

G. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone

rubber and having a minimum weight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile strength of 50
N/mm in the warp, and 32 N/mm in the filling.
H. High-Corrosive-Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated

with a chemical-resistant coating.

2.14 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with BS/EN or Local Standards or SMACNA’s HVAC

standard.
B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl

sheathing.
1. Pressure Rating: 2500 Pa positive and 250 Pa negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 20m/s.
3. Temperature Range: -40 to +200°C.
C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer

jacket enclosing 38-mm thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner
liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab,
integral fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
4. Pressure Rating: 2500Pa positive and 250Pa negative.
5. Maximum Air Velocity: 20m/s
6. Temperature Range: -30 to + 125 °C.
D. Flexible Duct connectors:
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten

band with a worm-gear action, to suit duct size.
E. Provide flexible ducting for connections between ductwork, terminal units,

diffusers and where indicated on the drawings..

F. Ensure that flexible ductwork does not become kinked or flattened. Changes of
direction shall be of long radius and no kinking or flattening of ducting will be
allowed.
G. Do not exceed 600mm long maximum. Support all ducting adequately supported
to prevent oscillation and noise generation. Steel wire helical reinforcement in
flexible ducts is to be carried over the spigots of grilles and diffusers and
connections to these items are to be painted matt black for the visible depth.
H. Joints to be made by means of hose type metal clamps which tighten around the
circumference of the ducting and be finally sealed with 100mm wide fire resistant
adhesive tape.
I. Use flexible ducting of the insulated type with vapor barrier for all H. supply air
ductwork and uninsulated type for extract air ductwork.
J. The joints of rigid spigots shall be sealed with a brush coat of pipe jointing paste
or mastic compound. The frictional resistance to airflow per unit length of the
flexible duct shall not exceed 50% more than the frictional resistance per unit
length of galvanized steel ducts of equivalent diameter. The radius ratio R/D for
bends shall not be less than 2, where R is the center line radius and D is the
diameter of the flexible duct.
K. Ensure that flexible ductwork does not pass through fire / smoke resistant building
construction nor is it to be used at extract points where deposits of flammable
substances are likely to occur in high fire risk areas.
L. The leakage from any section of flexible duct shall not exceed 1% of the design
airflow rate at the static operating pressure.
2.15 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including
screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing
instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 6-mm, zinc-

plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber
gasket and square-head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to

tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 75 to 450 mm to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and

resistant to gasoline and grease.

2.16 ACTIVATED-CARBON PANEL FILTERS
A. Physical Characteristics
1. Each filter shall consist of 8 pleated media packs assembled into 4 V-banks
within a totally plastic frame. The filters shall be capable of operating at
temperatures up to 130 Degrees F. The filters must either fit without modification
or be adaptable to the existing holding frames.
B. Frame
1. The molded end panels are to be made of high impact polystyrene plastic. The
center support members shall be made of ABS plastic. No metal components are
to be used.
C. Media
1. The media shall be a comprised of carbon particles bonded into a matrix of bi-
component fibers. The bi-component fiber matrix maximizes the exposure of the
sorbent to the gas while securely bonding it within the media. Media weight to be
500 grams / sq. meter. Carbon to have an 85% CTC activity.
D. Media Packs
1. The media shall be pleated into self-supporting pleat packs, without the use of
pleat separators of any type.
E. Media Pack Bond

1. The media packs shall be bonded to the structural support members at all
points of contact, this improves the rigidity as well as eliminates potential
air bypass in the filter.
F. Installation
1. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance.
Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide combination of filter
module sizes to fill existing racks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and
NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories
in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having
duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate
liner with nosing at hat channel.
E. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
H. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's approved written

instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
I. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.
J. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access
panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and
equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning,
inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
3. Install access panels adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers,
to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke
dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall
be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and
inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
K. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
L. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with
maximum 1500-mm (60-inch) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in
place.

O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape.
P. Label access doors according to Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROLS
A. Make additional provisions where control sensors, thermostats, pressure switches,

instruments and the like are installed in sheet metal ductwork.
B. Provisions shall take the form of mounting flanges or plates and additional
stiffening and bracketing shall be provided to ensure that no vibration or strain is
applied to the ductwork or the control instrument etc. and the fixing is a rigid
mounting.
3.3 On insulated ductwork, extend the hole such that it finishes flush with the
insulationCONNECTIONS TO BUILDERS WORK HOLES
A. Where ductwork, fan inlets or outlets connect directly into a builders work duct /
hole or wall, the hole shall have a hardwood timber frame or angle / channel iron
mating frame built in onto which the sheet metal connection shall be made
utilizing an angle iron flange and gasket.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can
be performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full
range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of
operator and damper.

SECTION 233413 - AXIAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Propeller fans.
2. Vaneaxial fans.
3.
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in

equipment schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for
continuous operation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed,
and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated.
2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical
accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,
AXIAL HVAC FANS 233413

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to

scale. Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships
between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"

and "Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test
results for compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.
1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70

or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and that are listed and labeled by UL
where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this

Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100 or
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and

are licensed to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Motors and

electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting
points.

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify

clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish set of belts for belt-driven fan, are packaged with protective covering for
storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PROPELLER FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of

fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with
baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted
to cast-iron hub.
D. Cast-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-

aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Extruded-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades

fastened to cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, statically and

dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum rated
fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment
made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning

ball bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9 , or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, L-10 of 100,000 hours .
4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at

factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at

the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple
belt drives.
7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the
fan cabinet.
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked

blades with nylon
bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards specifications, removable for
maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal

screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100

percent to less than 50 percent.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection

mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum
conduit.

2.2 VANEAXIAL FANS
A. Description: Vaneaxial fans consisting of fan wheel and housing, straightening

vane section, factory-mounted motor, an inlet cone section, and accessories.
Variable features indicated in equipment schedule include belt driven or direct
drive as indicated, and variable or adjustable pitch.
1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted pneumatic actuator, externally

mounted positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator for
variable-volume operation.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel with inlet bell and diffuser sections.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion

flanges; inlet cone shall be welded to the fan raceway.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from the fan wheel
designed to straighten the airflow.
C. Wheels Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with

threaded bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-
aluminum blades; factory mounted and balanced.
D. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no
more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
belt drives.
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan
cabinet.
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, L10 of 100,000 hours.
b. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, L10 of 100,000 hours.
c. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease
fittings.

E. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same
material as housing.
3. Outlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of
same material as housing.
4. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection
to the discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section,
of same material as housing.
5. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall
and signaling control devices.
6. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of
fan to detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems.
7. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from

outside of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support,
and provision for manual or automatic operation, of same material as
housing.
8. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory

wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Extend
lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
F. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized.
a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Common Motors Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for

general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1 , general purpose, continuous duty, Design B

C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located

during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with
the AMCA Seal or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density,
speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified
Aerodynamic Performance Rating." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable for high
temperature application as per design requirements.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of
installation. The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control

devices are specified in Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation springs.
Vibration-control devices are specified in Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections.

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make
final duct connections with flexible connector.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,

including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A - 486B or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including
duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
B. Perform test and inspection. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-

authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Axial HVAC fans and components will be considered defective if unit or

components do not pass test and inspection.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before
startup, and report results in writing Noting that prior to final checks before start-
up; A factory-authorized service representative to be engaged and perform startup
service:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete.
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,
starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction,
and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation.
Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan
wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures
for air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan
units by a factory-authorized service representative. Refer to Division 1.
3.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of Fan units that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty
period.

SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor installations.
B. Kitchen ecology units
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute
(CFM) and design static pressure.
2. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may
allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When
submitted as a deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of
energy conservation.
3. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure
point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static
efficiency.
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge
exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation. Noise level for
all ceiling mounted equipment shall not exceed NC35.
F. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.
G. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416

1.4 SUBMITTALS

indicated.
accessories.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to

scale. Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships
between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.

F. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.

or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and that are listed and labeled by UL or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards where available.



D. NEMA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Motors and

electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location
following manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting
points.

clearances.
specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete" Section.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of ASHRAE 51 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.

3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302.
Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA
99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets
and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are
required, and shall be constructed in accordance with applicable provisions
of ANSI B11.19 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Installation shall
be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and

coated with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers
paint and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735
water fog or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards; ASTM B 117 salt spray;
ASTM D 3359 adhesion or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards; and ASTM G
152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be

provided for the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-
quantity balancing operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the following:
1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed

necessary for proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed
necessary for proper air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan
speed has been determined.
2.2 FAN UNITS
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with
indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,

bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
2.3 HOUSINGS
A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved

scroll housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to
allow access to internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate
fans downstream from humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting

and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.

4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel
cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and
reinforced-steel panels with welded seams and the following:
a. Outlet guide vanes.

b. Motor disconnect switch.
c. Spun inlet cone with flange.
d. Outlet flange.
e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
2.4 WHEELS
A. Backward Inclined: Steel construction with curved inlet flange, back plate,
backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron
or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
B. Forward Curved: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet

flange, back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of
airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; cast-steel hub swaged to
back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
C. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange; heavy back
plate; hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange
and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to
shaft with set screws.
2.5 SHAFTS
A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and
belt adjustment made after installation.
B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective
coating of lubricating oil.
C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top
of the fan's speed range.
2.6 BEARINGS
A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball

bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, L-10 of 120,000 hours.

2.7 BELT DRIVES
A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
B. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch
diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less
than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-
sheave or variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be
fixed-sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than
1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts
shall be aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of
the Engineer.
C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically
balanced at factory.
D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the

middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm

thick, 20-mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or
equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short
circuiting vibration isolation. Include provision for adjustment of belt
tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches

and gaskets.
B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections.
C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.
D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2
permanently lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single
control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently

lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single
control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.
F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2

plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings,
with blades linked out of air stream to single control lever.
1. Configuration: Parallel blade.

2. Configuration: Opposed blade.
G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft
bearings.
H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width
fans.
L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
2.9 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.


during operation.
building occupants.
3. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as
otherwise specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with
fixed-sheave standard belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable,
pivoted motor bases wherever equipment configuration permits proper
installation.
2.10 SMOKE EXHAUST FAN
A. General Description: Belt-driven mixed flow, dual speed, fully weatherproofed

and constructed of corrosion resistant materials. Structural steel support
components to be zinc plated and suitable for smoke exhaust. Fans to be UL or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards listed for smoke removal with operation
temperature of 400C for a minimum of two hours continuous operation.
B. Fan Housing: Heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication, designed to
provide easy access from roof level to all moving parts including motor, without
dismantling unit.
C. Fan wheels: Heavy gauge steel, multi-blade, mixed flow, non-overloading, non-
stall type, fully balanced at factory.
D. Motor: Explosion proof, type Class H insulation, continuously rated, provided

with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings not requiring lubrication for
25000 hours of operation and in-built thermal overload protection.
E. Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels less than 50 db measured on
the A-scale of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
F. Accessories: Fan to be complete with the following: fusible link damper lifter to
provide heat and smoke relief in the event of an electrical power fail are factory
wired safety disconnect switch mounted inside housing, flexible conduit to
receive field wiring, all around expanded aluminum bird and protection screen,
neoprene foam sealing strip for air seal between base and curb and fixings to roof
curb.
G. Fusible Link Lifter: Fusible link damper lifter automatically opens the butterfly
dampers when air temperature below the damper blades exceeds 74 deg. C to
provide smoke and heat relief with no electrical power required.
2.11 KITCHEN FUME ROOF EXTRACT FAN
A. Fan: Dual speed belt-driven motor, Upblast discharge, centrifugal, vertical

discharge, fully weatherproofed, all durable rust-free aluminum construction and

corrosion-resistant protection. Fan shall be spark-resistant. Fans shall be spark

resistant, UL and cUL or Equivalent BS/EN or SBC/Local Standards listed for
grease removal and high static pressures operation and listed for commercial
cocking equipment exhaust applications.
B. Sound Power Level: Select to give sound levels less than 60 dB measured on the
A-scale of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
C. Fan Housing: heavy gauge durable rust-free steel with lock formed seams
permitting no air leakage . Fan housing to be designed for easy access from roof
level to internal parts including motor, V-belt drives and magnetic shutter.
D. Fan Impeller: Steel with backward inclined blades with non-overloading

characteristics, spark proof and non corroding, keyed and locked to drive and
shaft, with the whole rotating element precision balanced at the factory.
E. Shaft to be stainless steel mounted on two heavy duty self-aligning, permanently

lubricated and sealed pillow block ball bearing.
F. Motor: Explosion proof, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated
ball bearings and in-built thermal overload protection. The motor is to be
protected and isolated from the air-stream and to be forced cooled by
uncontaminated air which is drawn into the motor housing through breath tubes.
Motor is to be mounted on vibration dampeners on a slotted base for belt tension
adjustment. Sheave is to be adjustable to allow field changes in fan speed. Motor
is to be class F insulation.
G. Motor to incorporate an under voltage relay complete with timer.
H. Accessories: Fan is to be complete with magnetic shutters, factory wired safety

disconnect switch mounted inside housing, automatic shutters to prevent air
recirculation through stand-by fan, flexible tubing to receive field wiring, hinged
access door, 25 mm drain connection and weatherhood.
I. Automatic Change Over Panel: sheet steel painted grey, houses two contactors,
over load relay, selector switch, two indicator lights and reset buttons.
2.12 KITCHEN HOODS EXHAUST FANS (ECOLOGY UNIT)
A. Fan Unit: A package consisting of a backward inclined exhaust fan with heavy
duty bearings, fan isolators, sound attenuation, two grease sheaves, filter and odor
reducing sections.
B. Ecology unit shall be UL or ETL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards listed

for kitchen grease exhaust and comply with NFPA – 96.
C. Ecology unit shall conform to ANSI/UL STD867 & UL STD 710 or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards where applicable or approved equal.

D. Pre-filter Section: The pre filter section shall include 2 inch deep steel washable
permanent filters according to ASHRAE 52-76 filters or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards. Filter frames shall be constructed of steel.. All filters shall be
removable without the use of tools through side access doors with lift and turn
latches. Filters are to be cleanable with a water hose and soapy water.
E. Second stage filtration: 525 mm bag filter 90% ASHRAE 52-76 filters or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards arranged in a v-bank configuration to
increase filter area and reduce static pressure.
F. Third stage filtration: Absolute HEPA filter 305 mm DOP filter 99.97%
ASHRAE 52-76 filters or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
G. Fan: Single width, single inlet, airfoil centrifugal fan statically and dynamically
balanced.
H. Fan Shaft: The fan shall be mounted on a heavy duty turned ground and polished
steel shaft internally isolated. Pre-lubricated heavy duty bearings.
I. Motor: explosion proof, squirrel cage, induction type with in-built thermal
overload protection. Motor is to be class F insulation for motors outside air stream
and class H insulation for motors inside airstream.
1. Odor Control Module: The section consists of metal cells filled with
activated alumna pellets impregnated with potassium permanganate. The
odor is controlled through a combination of sorption and a chemical
modification of the gaseous contaminates. The odour media is non-toxic and
non-flammable. The pellets are contained in perforated cells located in a
separate odour reduction section normally located between the filter box
and the tan box. All of the exhaust air is drawn over the pellets whenever
the fan is operating. The cells are removed through a side access door on the
odor sectionPellets: The section consists of metal cells filled with activated
alumna pellets impregnated with potassium permanganate. The odor is
controlled through a combination of sorption and a chemical modification
of the gaseous contaminates. The odour media is non-toxic and non-
flammable. The pellets are contained in perforated cells located in a separate
odour reduction section normally located between the filter box and the tan
box. All of the exhaust air is drawn over the pellets whenever the fan is
operating. The cells are removed through a side access door on the odor
section.
2. UV or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards module: Self-cleaning inner
surface. High output lamps designed to run for 13,000 hrs at optimum
capacity. Ozone regulation technology shall control ozone production in
line with cooking activity. Allows increases in air speed without significant
effect on performance.
3. Rigid, bonded, activated carbon panels shall be furnished to remove both
base and acid odor molecules. Carbon mass shall be applied at a minimum
of 100 lbs. per 1,000 cfm (45.2 kg. per 472 l/s) of exhaust air volume.
Panels shall be held in place by gasketed, extruded aluminum tracks
arranged in a v-bank configuration.

J. Fan and Filter box Casing: 16 gauge steel, primed and painted suitably reinforced
to ensure rigidity. An access door is provided to the exhaust fan motor and drive
section. The casing is wrapped with 25mm sound attenuation insulation. The
exhaust fan section shall be internally /externally spring isolated.
K. Control panel in stainless steel comprising on-off, PLC control, system status
display, alarm buzzer, silencing button, control relays, and terminal strip for field
wiring.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat
aluminum parts.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat
before assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not
required.
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans
according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
Aerodynamic Performance Rating ."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Equipment."

1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using

neoprene pads or housed spring isolators as indicated . Secure units to
anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.
C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods,
vibration isolation springs. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section
"Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.

Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall
dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, size and location as indicated.
Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor
slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland
cement conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal
primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS

final duct connections with flexible connectors.

D. Condensate drain from AC units which contains centrifugal fan should be drained
to nearest drain point.


duct and electrical connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor shaft, alignment
of pulleys, belt adjustments, and lubrication, and to report results in writing.
B. Perform test and inspection. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-

3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
abrasions.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
startup, and report results in writing note that prior to final checks before start-up;
A factory-authorized service representative to be engaged and perform startup
service:

and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation.
Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" Section for procedures
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

centrifugal fan units by a factory-authorized service representative. Refer to
Division 1.
3.10 WARRANTY

period.

SECTION 233423 – HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Utility set fans.

2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Axial roof ventilators.
4. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.
5. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
6. In-line ventilators.
7. In-line centrifugal fans.
8. Propeller fans.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for
roof-mounted exhaust fans.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in

equipment schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static
pressure.
2. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may
allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When
submitted as a deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of
energy conservation.
3. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure
point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static
efficiency.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423

E. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge
exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
F. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for
1.4 SUBMITTALS

indicated.
accessories.

C. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling
plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted
above ceiling. Submit with Shop Drawings. Show the following:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

F. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and

maintenance manual specified in Division 1.


and that are listed and labeled by UL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
where available.


D. NEMA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Provide

components required as part of fans that comply with applicable NEMA or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards standards.
E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705 or Equivalent

F. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

clearances.
B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of ASHRAE 51 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302.
Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA
99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets
and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are
required, and shall be constructed in accordance with applicable provisions
of ANSI B11.19 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Installation shall
be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and

coated with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers
paint and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735
water fog or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards; ASTM B 117 salt spray or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards; ASTM D 3359 adhesion or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter or
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified,

with provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be
imposed by the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys
and shall have a certified ABMA 9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours.
Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures
encountered. Housings shall be cast iron unless otherwise specified or
approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface
ball check type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure
relief fittings shall be provided. Bearing and seal construction permitting,
relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite the supply fitting. Relief
fittings shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication
provisions shall include extension tubes where necessary.

4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards corrosion-resistant steel spiral wrapped or split pins, unless
otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified
materials and ABMA 9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, L-10 life
expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by motors with a
power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch
diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less
than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-
sheave or variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be
fixed-sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than
1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts
shall be aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of
the Engineer.
E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with

cross section to suit sheave grooves.
2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the
factory. Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not
acceptable. Each belt set shall be bound with wire and tagged with
equipment identification.
2.2 UTILITY SET FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,

bearings, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or
welded to scroll sheets.
1. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.

C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and
spun-steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel.

2. Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as
scheduled.
3. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball

bearings with AFBMA 9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, L-50 of
200,000 hours.
F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
cabinet.
1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking

aluminum blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with
adjustable linkage.
4. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
5. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
6. Drain Connections: DN20 (3/4-inch) threaded coupling drain connection
installed at lowest point of housing.
7. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting

of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive
assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-
piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge

air upward, with rain and snow drains.

C. Housing: Removable, extruded-aluminum, rectangular top; square, one-piece,

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
D. Housing: Removable, galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece,

hinged, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the

following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel
hub.
ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
G. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in
curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick,
rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer.
Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting

flange.
b. Overall Height: 300 mm.
2.4 AXIAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive axial fans, as indicated, consisting of

housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle;

square, one-piece, hinged, aluminum base.
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and blades.
D. Fan Wheel: Steel hub and blades.

E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the

following features:
hub.
ball bearings.
F. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable, 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.
4. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick,
rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer.
Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting

flange.
b. Overall Height: 300 mm.
c.
2.5 UPBLAST PROPELLER ROOF EXHAUST FANS

housing, wheel, butterfly-type discharge damper, fan shaft, bearings, motor and
disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced galvanized steel,
containing galvanized steel butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive
assembly, and fan wheel.
C. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced aluminum,
containing aluminum butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive
assembly, and fan wheel.
1. Damper Rods: Steel with bronze bearings.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub;

factory set pitch angle.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing; weatherproof

housing of same material as fan housing with the following features:
hub.

2. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type

ball bearings.
4. Motor Mount: On outside of fan cabinet, adjustable base for belt
tensioning.
F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 300 mm.
2.6 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting

of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive
assembly, and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle;

venturi inlet cone.
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the

following features:
hub.
ball bearings.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum
conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting.
wall sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops.

2.7 IN-LINE VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling, wall, duct, or for
concealed in-line applications.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds,
motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and

receptacle for motor plug-in.
E. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent

to less than 50 percent.
F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, or duct collars, and
transition fittings.
2.8 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated,

consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive
assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes;

inlet and outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or
ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to
disconnect located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,

enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings
extended to outside of fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in

fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for
units not connected to ductwork.

2.9 PROPELLER FANS

fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with
baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted
to cast-iron hub.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum

hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch

located on outside of fan housing.
F. Fan Drive:
1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Statically and dynamically balanced.
3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
4. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
5. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
ball bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, L10 of 100,000 hours
7. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory.
8. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <insert
value> hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch
adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
belt drives.
10. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan
cabinet.
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades

with nylon bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards specifications, removable for
maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.

5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.

conduit.
2.10 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for

general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1 , general purpose, continuous duty, Design B


during operation.
building occupants.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans
according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
listed and suitable for high smoke temperature of 260 deg. C (500 deg. F) for a
minimum of four hours continuous operation ..

C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of
installation. The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
D. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen
operation. Fans shall be UL and cUL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
listed for grease removal, tested under high temperature exhaust of 190 deg. C
(375 deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance with relevant NFPA or
Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. Fan coating shall be as directed by the
Engineer. Units shall include the following:
1. Bolted access door.

2. Drain connection.
3. Aluminum grease trap.
4. Weatherhood.
5. Upblast discharge.
6. Windband discharge cap with gravity damper.
7. Outlet guard where fan discharge is accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Equipment."
1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports
using housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
housekeeping base.
2. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.
3. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods,
vibration isolation springs.
4. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded rods or metal
straps, and neoprene washers.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.

Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall
dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, size and location as indicated.
Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor
slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland
cement conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal
primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS

final duct connections with flexible connectors.


duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.

C. Centrifugal HVAC power ventilators and components will be considered

defective if unit or components do not pass test and inspection.

3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
abrasions.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
startup, and report results in writing note that prior to final checks before start-up;
A factory-authorized service representative to be engaged and perform startup
service:

and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect
fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures
E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power

ventilator units by a factory-authorized service representative. Refer to Division 1
Section.
3.10 WARRANTY

components of equipment units that fail in materials or workmanship within
warranty period.

SECTION 233433 - AIR CURTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air curtains with electric heat.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each unit.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed by engineer.

isolators.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations of exterior walls.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects/engineers and owners, and any other information specified or required
by Engineer.
G. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of

requirements.
AIR CURTAINS 233433

H. Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals specified

in Division 1.
I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

of air curtains and are based on the specific product selected. Other
manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer
to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

in NFPA 70, Article 100 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
C. Comply with AMCA 220, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtain Units for
Aerodynamic Performance Rating," for airflow, outlet velocity, and power
consumption.
1. .
D. Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways For Food and Food Service
Establishments." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system

components with other construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-
system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of wall penetrations and louvers. These items are

specified in Division 8, Section "Fixed Louvers" and section "Wall Vents."
C. Air Curtains shall be as selected to match the door opening widths and heights
indicated on the architects Drawings. The units shall be purpose designed to
maintain a virtually constant outflow velocity across the whole width of the
doorway. The schedule indicates the notional sizes which must be verified and
approved by the Architect before manufacture.
1.6 WARRANTY

agreeing to repair or replace components of air curtains that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: one year from date of Substantial Completion for air-curtain
units with heat.
AIR CURTAINS 233433

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish set of filters and fan belts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR AIR CURTAIN UNITS-GENERAL
A. Provide air curtains capable of the capacity indicated on the schedules and
drawings. Air curtains to be suitable for hydronic coil, direct expansion type coil
or ambient operation as indicated on the schedules.
B. Hydronic coil where fitted shall be suitable for an operating pressure of 8 bar and
the outputs selected for the temperature regime indicated on the schedules.
C. Air Curtains shall be as selected to match the door opening widths and heights
indicated on the Architects Drawings. The units shall be purpose designed to
maintain a virtually constant outflow velocity across the whole width of the
doorway. The schedule indicates the notional sizes which must be verified and
approved by the Architect before manufacture.
D. The units shall be of one of the following types:

1. Type DAC1 - Recessed air curtain ( ceiling void mounted)
2. Type DAC2 - Round (cylindrical) type exposed horizontal or vertical.
3. Type DAC3 - Oval Shaped exposed.
E. Ensure that Design background noise levels are not exceeded with the unit
operating at medium speed. Maximum noise level at 3m not to exceed 58dBA
F. Provide for the following remote wired controls:

1. Automatic 3 speed selection.
2. Door contact switch capability.
3. Return air temperature sensor.
4. Provide for remote (BMS) operation (on/off and speed selection) and fault
indication. (fan failure, low temperature, high temperature, filter blocked)
G. Ensure units are installed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
AIR CURTAINS 233433

2.2 RECESSED AIR CURTAIN TYPE
A. Concealed type for installing above a false ceiling and fitted with an inclined coil
with duty as indicated on the schedules.
B. The units shall be purpose designed to maintain a virtually constant outflow

velocity across the whole width of the doorway. The unit shall be manufactured
from zinc plated sheet steel with removable inspection panel on the underside.
C. The return air grilles shall be fitted to the underside of the unit which hinges down
to permit access to the filter and fans. An easy to remove, simple to clean air filter
membrane shall be supplied ready fitted to the return air grille. Provide the units
with long life recyclable filters.
D. The air outlet assembly shall be constructed from sturdy zinc-plated steel; frame
with aluminum louvered fins.
E. Depending upon the unit selected, two or more low noise, double inlet centrifugal
fans shall be provided with a single external rotor motor on ball-bearings. Provide
thermal protection contacts integral to the windings.
F. Interconnecting ductwork shall be flexible ductwork.
2.3 CYLINDRICAL EXPOSED AIR CURTAIN TYPE
A. Cylindrical type air curtains for mounting vertically alongside the opening or
horizontally above the opening as indicated in the schedules of equipment.
B. Unit construction to be self-supporting made of zinc plated steel finished in

epoxy-polyester powder coat or stove enameled finish to color approved by the
Architect. Where indicated on the schedules units are alternatively to be of
stainless steel construction.
C. Air to be supplied via anodized aluminum blow-out vanes, airfoil shaped,

adjustable for 0 to 15° each side.
D. Recirculated air is to be taken in via openings on the top side of horizontal units or
the rear of vertical units.
2.4 OVAL SHAPED EXPOSED AIR CURTAIN TYPE
A. Oval shaped type air curtains for mounting horizontally above the opening as
indicated in the schedules of equipment. Maximum door height is 3.0m
B. Unit construction to be self-supporting made of zinc plated steel finished in

epoxy-polyester powder coat or stove enameled finish to color approved by the
Architect. Where indicated on the schedules units are alternatively to be of
stainless steel construction.
AIR CURTAINS 233433

C. Air to be supplied via a perforated plate diffuser mounted at approximately 45° to

the vertical.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel

finish over powdered mirror.
B. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable with
aluminum removable insect screen. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the
housing, wedge shaped, containing adjustable air-directional vanes with 40-
degreesweep front to back.
2.6 FANS
A. Fans: Galvanized steel, Aluminum, Centrifugal, forward curved, double width,

double inlet; statically and dynamically balanced.
B. Fan Drives: Direct
2.7 MOTORS
A. Motor Type: Multispeed, resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed,

fan cooled, with integral thermal-overload protection.
B. Bearings: Permanently sealed, life-time, prelubricated, ball bearings.
C. Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.
2.8 REMOTE WIRED CONTROLS
A. Automatic 3 speed selection.
B. Door contact switch capability.
C. Provide for remote (BMS) operation (on/off and speed selection) and fault
indication. (fan failure, filter blocked)
2.9 FILTERS
A. Washable Panel Filters: Removable, stainless-steel, baffle-type filters with

spring-loaded fastening; with minimum 2-mm thick, stainless-steel filter frame.
B. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and
suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
AIR CURTAINS 233433

2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Built-in Thermostat: Line voltage, factory installed and wired to the junction box
on air curtain.
B. Automatic Door Switch: Remotely installed in door area to activate air curtain
when door opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
C. Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.
D. Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air curtain to operate
from 1 to 300 seconds after door closes.
E. Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 220-V ac transformer with

primary and secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
F. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.
G. Discharge Extension Neck: For ceiling-recessed installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
B. Ensure that Design background noise levels are not exceeded with the unit
operating at medium speed. Maximum noise level at 3m not to exceed 58dBA
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A - 486B or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards.
AIR CURTAINS 233433

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing, and report results in
writing:
1. After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical

check of individual components.
2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor
rotation and unit operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest units until satisfactory results are
achieved. Operate electric element through each stage and verify proper operation
of electrical connection.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust belt tension.
B. Adjust motor and fan speed to achieve specified airflow.
C. Adjust discharge louver and dampers to regulate airflow.
D. Adjust air-directional vanes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air curtains. Refer to
Division 1.
AIR CURTAINS 233433

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. Refer to section 230529 “Hangers and supports for HVAC”.
C. Refer to section 230553 “Identification for HVAC”
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Single-duct air terminals.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. Include a
schedule showing drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model
number, size, and accessories furnished.

loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
2. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment
and vibration isolation.

air outlets with other items installed in ceilings : involved:
2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,

speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600

D. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of air terminal and troubleshooting
maintenance guide to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
2. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate requirements of air terminals

and are based on specific systems selected. Other manufacturers' systems with
equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated air terminals specified in this
C. NFPA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Install air terminals

according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
D. Comply with listed and labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by
a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
E. The maximum noise level for any ceiling mounted item shall not exceed NC 35.
Units shall meet the airborne and radiated sound-power level (PWL) requirements
scheduled, to attain the specified NC levels. An 18-dB space attenuation shall be
assumed in all octave bands or as recommended by the manufacturer with
consideration given to downstream duct construction and configuration in
determining airborne NC levels. Sound levels shall be tested in accordance with
ANSI/ASA S12.23 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) BOXES & CONSTANT VOLUME –

GENERAL
A. The design, construction, materials and finishes of all units shall be suitable for
the locations, climatic and operating conditions.
B. Provide boxes to meet the performance requirements as indicated in the Schedules

of Equipment.

C. Each VAV unit shall be powered and operated by a 230V, 60 Hz power source
depending upon local power supplies. Constant volume boxes shall be of the
system powered type without an external power supply unless indicated otherwise
in the Equipment Schedules.
D. All diffusers/air terminals connected to the boxes shall be selected to suit the
maximum and minimum flow rates indicated on the schedules.
E. The inlet pressure should not be less than 374 Pa (1-1/2 inches water gage), unless
shown otherwise on drawings. Provide terminal sound attenuators where
necessary to comply with the noise criteria.
2.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) BOXES GENERAL
A. The VAV terminals shall be rigid, double skin construction made of galvanized
sheet steel,
B. mechanically sealed and gasket to form a leak proof construction capable of

handling a maximum static pressure of 1500 Pa. Internal thermal /-acoustic
insulation shall be a minimum of 25mm with a minimum density of 70 kg/m³
treated to prevent erosion for a maximum air velocity of 25m/s.
C. Actuators, reset controllers, circuitry, attenuators and distribution boxes shall be

provided and installed at the factory and must be integrated into the unit casing.
The control equipment must be easily accessible through an access door provided
with quick release frames.
D. The control unit, shall consist of a throttling damper or air valve, electric actuator,
velocity reset controller and flow measuring device. The velocity reset controller
shall control the air flow to within ±5% of the design value, regardless of change
in the static pressure in the duct system. The controller shall reset the airflow as
commanded by the room temperature sensor with the same accuracy.
E. Class II, 24-volt transformer, and disconnect switch.
F. All controls shall be installed in approved NEMA 250, Type 1 or Equivalent

BS/EN or Local Standards enclosure.
G. Multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensor, with a minimum of four measuring

ports. Minimum differential pressure signal of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inch water gage) at
inlet velocity of 2.6 m/s (500 fpm). Control signal accuracy of plus or minus 5
percent with the same inlet size at any inlet condition. Velocity controller shall
have a constant 2 degrees temperature reset span regardless of the minimum and
maximum airflow limit
H. The controller shall be pre-set at the factory for specified maximum and minimum
air flow rates. This facility shall be achieved by electronic pressure independent,
direct drive closed velocity loop type, controls complete with field adjustable
maximum and minimum flow limit set point adjusters. A "Flow Cross" air volume
measuring station shall also be fitted in the inlet duct to facilitate direct reading of

airflow on site. Open loop pressure dependent or mechanical regulators will not
be considered. Units to be delivered to site pre-wired to current IEE regulations.
I. The controllers and factory fitted plenum void return air temperature sensors E.
shall be integrated with the site BMS system. The VAV box manufacturer shall
supply all necessary DDC controllers, temperature sensors, transformers, and
terminal blocks. The units shall require only the connection of a 230V electrical
supply and BMS network to permit them to operate fully. The unit set point shall
be capable of remote reset via an analogue reset signal from the BMS. Ensure that
the VAV boxes are supplied with a controls package of the same manufacture as
the site BMS system.
J. All units shall be factory calibrated to the maximum and minimum airflows
specified in the schedule and the operation and accuracy shall be demonstrated at
the manufacturing plant prior to delivery to site.
K. Units to comprise, circular inlet section regulator, attenuator section and octopus
discharge as indicated on the equipment schedules.
L. Maximum permissible air leakage with the outlet blanked off shall be 1% of
maximum rated airflow against an inlet pressure of 750 Pa.
M. The regulators shall have the specified maximum and minimum volumes, so as to
give constant airflow within a tolerance of ±5% over an inlet pressure range of
100 - 1500 Pa.
N. All components in contact with the air stream shall be made from non-corrodible
materials.
O. K. The units shall be suitable for operating and maintaining the required air
volume flow dependent on the dictates of the control, irrespective of the system
inlet pressure.
P. All units shall be designed and selected so as not to exceed the noise rating
indicated in the schedules when installed in the areas served and allowing for the
cumulative effect of all units operating together.
Q. Units shall be of the type which have reducing sound power levels for "induct"
and radiated noise as the unit closes down to its minimum air volume rating.
R. There shall be access panels on each unit for inspection of all moving parts.
S. The unit shall allow for adjustment to airflow limits on site for future change.
Provision shall be made for calibration and resetting on site by External gauge
tappings
T. Each unit shall be supplied complete with a fully site resettable controls
calibration chart for setting of airflow on site. This shall be attached to the unit.
U. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based

thermostat. Control devices shall have the following features:

1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, powered open.

2. Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with the following features:
a. Temperature set-point display in Celsius.
b. Auxiliary switch to energize heating control circuit if indicated.
V. Sound attenuator (Silencer): Provide sound attenuators to meet the acoustic

requirements of the project and as scheduled.
2.3 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) BOXES GENERAL
A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control

components inside a protective metal shroud.
B. Casing: 0.85-mm galvanized steel double wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 25mm thick, polyurethane foam
insulation complying with UL 181 erosion requirements, and having a
maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed
index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to
ASTM E 84. and Class O as tested by BS 476-7
2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection.
3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections
4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment,
or maintenance; with airtight gasket.
5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply
with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
C. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with flow-sensing ring and peripheral gasket
and self-lubricating bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: to DW 144 class A./ ARI 880 rated, 0.5%
percent of nominal airflow at 500Pa inlet static pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.
D. Velocity Sensors: Pressure differential multipoint flow grid.
E. Attenuator Section: 0.85mm sheet.

1. Lining: Adhesive attached, 50-mm thick, coated, mineral fibre liner
complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and
adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a. Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal.
with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
F. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based G.

thermostat with integral airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall
have the following features:
1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed,
2. Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum and
maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by

thermostat within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-
pressure variations up to 1000Pa; and shall have a multipoint velocity
sensor at air inlet.
3. Thermostat: Wall-mounted electronic type with temperature set-point
display in °C
2.4 CIRCULAR MECHANICAL SYSTEM POWERED CONSTANT VOLUME

CONTROLLERS
A. The controller operates without an external power supply. The control damper
blade is adjusted by the aerodynamic forces such that the preset flow rate is held
constant over the entire pressure differential range.
B. The control volume is set by using the pointer against an externally mounted
scale. The controller shall react immediately to variations in the upstream duct
pressure to maintain a constant air volume flow rate.
C. The aerodynamic forces create a closing force on the damper blade and a self-
inflating bellows amplifies this force acting simultaneously as an oscillating
damper. The closing force is counter acted by a leaf spring that unrolls over a cam
plate. The damper plate is designed such that as the pressure differential changes,
the damper blade adjusts to keep a constant flow rate.
D. Box characteristics:
1. Straight duct required before controller: 1.5 x Diameter.
2. 2. Flow rate setting ± 4%
3. Flow rate range 4:1
4. Damper blade supported in bearings
5. Differential pressure range 50-1000Pa
6. Damper blade mechanism maintenance free
7. Operating temperatures 10-50°C
8. Min volume : 11 l/s
9. Max Volume: 1400 l/s
10. Sizes: 80 to 400mm Ø
E. Construction:
1. Circular spigot connections on both ends
2. Casing – galvanized sheet steel
3. Damper blade – galvanized sheet steel
4. Plain bearings with PTFE coating
5. Polyurethane bellows
6. Optional electric actuator if indicated on the equipment schedules.
F. Provide additional acoustic cladding if required to reduce casing radiated noise to

comply with the project maximum noise levels as indicated in systems description
section of this specification.

G. Provide additional circular silencers if required to meet the project maximum

noise levels as indicated in systems description section of this specification.
H. The volume control dial shall be calibrated to identify air volume in increments of
l/s of airflow. Airflow rate and pressure loss shall visibly displayed outside the
damper.
I. The unit shall allow for adjustment to airflow limits on site for future change.
J. Each unit shall be supplied with a complete set of calibration charts for setting of
airflow on site. This shall be attached to the unit.
K. The room noise criteria are as specified. To take account of other noise sources
within the building, the regulators (complete with attenuator sections) shall be
selected to ensure that the maximum noise within the space resulting from the
regulators (break out or duct borne) shall be 5 dB below specified levels. These
room noise levels shall be met at all possible combinations of flow rate and
pressure drop stated in the schedules.
L. All air terminal units shall be constructed in accordance with the best current
practice and free from sharp edges.
M. Units shall have pressure independent control.
2.5 RECTANGULAR MECHANICAL SYSTEM POWERED CONSTANT

VOLUME CONTROLLERS
A. The controller operates without an external power supply. The control damper
blade is adjusted by the aerodynamic forces such that the preset flow rate is held
constant over the entire pressure differential range.
B. The control volume is set by using the pointer against an externally mounted
scale. The controller shall react immediately to variations in the upstream duct
pressure to maintain a constant air volume flow rate.
C. The aerodynamic forces create a closing force on the damper blade and a self-
inflating bellows amplifies this force acting simultaneously as an oscillating
damper. The closing force is counter acted by a leaf spring that unrolls over a cam
plate. The damper plate is designed such that as the pressure differential changes,
the damper blade adjusts to keep a constant flow rate.
D. Box characteristics:
1. Straight duct required before controller : 1.5 x Breadth
2. Flow rate setting ± 4%
3. Flow rate range 4:1
4. Damper blade supported in bearings
5. Differential pressure range 50-1000Pa
6. Damper blade mechanism maintenance free
7. Operating temperatures 10-50°C
8. Min volume : 40 l/s

9. Max Volume: 3360 l/s

10. Sizes: 200x100 to 600x 600mm
E. Construction:
1. Circular spigot connections on both ends
2. Casing – galvanized sheet steel
3. Damper blade – galvanized sheet steel
4. Plain bearings with PTFE coating
5. Polyurethane bellows
6. Optional electric actuator if indicated on the equipment schedules.
F. Provide additional acoustic cladding if required to reduce casing radiated noise to

comply with the project maximum noise levels as indicated in systems description
section of this specification.
G. Provide additional rectangular silencers if required to meet the project maximum

noise levels as indicated in systems description section of this specification.
H. The volume control dial shall be calibrated to identify air volume in increments of
l/s of airflow. Airflow rate and pressure loss shall visibly displayed outside the
damper.
I. The unit shall allow for adjustment to airflow limits on site for future change.
J. Each unit shall be supplied with a complete set of calibration charts for setting of
airflow on site. This shall be attached to the unit.
K. The room noise criteria are as specified. To take account of other noise sources
within the building, the regulators (complete with attenuator sections) shall be
selected to ensure that the maximum noise within the space resulting from the
regulators (break out or duct borne) shall be 5 dB below specified levels. These
room noise levels shall be met at all possible combinations of flow rate and
pressure drop.
L. All air terminal units shall be constructed in accordance with the best current
practice and free from sharp edges.
M. Units shall have pressure independent control.
A. Testing Requirements: Test and rate air terminals according to AHRI 880 I-P or
AHRI 881 SI, "Performance Rating of Air Terminals." or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards
B. Identification: Label each air terminal with plan number, nominal airflow,
maximum and minimum factory-set airflows and AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminals level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, rough-in drawings, original design, and referenced standards; and
maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.
B. All connections should be properly executed and consider operational testing to

confirm motor and unit operations prior to adjusting of control and safeties.
C. Connect ductwork to air terminals according to ductwork Sections.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
B. Ground equipment.

published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A - 486B or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards.


1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.

3.4 Prepare test and inspection reports. CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged
finishes.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract

Documents.
B. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal

manufacturer to achieve proper performance.
C. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
D. Verify that control connections are complete.
E. Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
F. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
D. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test & adjust any

field assembled components and equipment installations, and to train Employer's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminals. Refer to
Division 1 Section.

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling-, floor- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and
grilles as applicable to design requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located

in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in
various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with
secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which

can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished;
indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation,
room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials
and methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to

scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with
other items installed in ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color
finishes.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713

D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's

standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same
material to be used for the Work.
E. Source quality-control reports.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of

diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the
systems selected. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. NFPA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Install diffusers,

registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of
Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
A. Air-diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or

vibration. Devices shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for
mounting in indicated surface construction.
B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.
C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid.
Dampers shall be extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal
velocity is not to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer velocities
through diffuser are not to exceed 3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be able to
deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below room temperature without causing
objectionable conditions.
E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the face
of the device. Volume adjustments shall be made by removable key].
F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished

surfaces.
G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.
H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage),

provide sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.

I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air
quantity, as measured on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless
specified otherwise.
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing the

Performance of Air Outlets and Air Inlets." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to

manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and
referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of

ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated
to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern,
throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as
practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center
of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation,
notify Engineer for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to
allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or
as directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean
exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers,
and grilles that have damaged finishes.
3.5 CEILING DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE
A. Round Ceiling Diffuser
1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer
4. Face Style: Four, Three orTwo cone.
5. Mounting: Duct connection.
6. Pattern: Fully adjustable.
7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade.
8. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
B. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers <:

3. Finish Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
4. Face Size: To suit acoustic tile size and to the approval of Engineer. Face
Style: Three cone, Four cone or Plaque as shown in the drawings
5. Mounting: Surface mount.
6. Pattern: Adjustable.
7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade.
8. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
C. Perforated Diffuser:

2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with aluminum face or steel
perforated sheet with the powder coated finish.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
4. Face Size: per design requirement or shown on drawings. Duct Inlet:
Round..
5. Face Style: Face shall have a smooth finish under any light conditions; the
curvature shall works with the formed edges of the face panel to deliver a
uniform 360o horizontal air pattern, without excessive noise or pressure
drop. Mounting: Surface mount..
6. Pattern Controller: Adjustable with louvered pattern modules at inlet.

7. Dampers: Opposed blade. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
3.6 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS SCHEDULE
A. Flow Bar Diffuser:

2. Material: Aluminum
4. Mounting: Flush or Flanged.
5. Face Style: Single-slot type, continuous length units furnished with factory
assembles corner modules and alignment pins.
6. Pattern: Adjustable, sliding (high throw) or vane (jet throw) type controller
for directing the airflow as required.
7. Accessories: Include the following:
a. Opposed blade damper adjustable from diffuser face
b. Mitered corners.
c. Insulated plenum for supply and return diffuser of dimensions as
shown on drawings.
d. Black finish blank-offs on dummy diffusers.
e. Plaster / ceiling frame, as required/ appropriate.
B. Linear Slot Diffuser

2. Material - Shell: Aluminum
3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.
5. Accessories:
a. Insulated plenum on supply and return diffusers of dimensions as

shown on drawings.
b. Equalizing grid.
c. Operating keys.
d. Black finish blank-offs on dummy diffusers.
e. Alignment pins and end caps.
f. Mitered corners.
6.

3.7 UNDERFLOOR AIR DISTRIBUTION DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE
A. Linear Floor Diffuser Plenums:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: [as selected by Engineer.
3. Deflection: Zero] degrees.
4. Components:
a. Aluminum diffuser core.

b. Diffuser frame.
c. Plenum, 0.034-inch (0.85-mm) steel.
3.8 JET NOZZLES SCHEDULE
A. Jet Nozzle:
1. Airflow Principle: Extended distance for high airflow rates.

2. Material: Aluminum] .
3. Finish: Powder coated, colour to be selected and approved by the Engineer.
4. Duct Connection: Round.
5. Duct Connection Size: As shown on drawings.
6. Face Size: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
7. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC35.
8. Face Style: Round.
9. Air pattern: Adjustable, swivel deflection within +/- 30 degrees.
10. Mounting: Front mounting flange.
11. Accessories: Insulated supply air plenums.
3.9 REGISTERS AND GRILLES SCHEDULE
A. Supply/return and exhaust register:
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal for return and exhaust registers.
4. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical for supply registers.
5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
6. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
8. Accessories: Include plaster frame.

B. Supply and return grille.
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal.
4. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical.
5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
6. Mounting: Countersunk screw.

SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes shell-and-tube heat exchangers and plate heat exchangers
for HVAC applications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing bases.

2. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for heat exchangers.
A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of
the items involved:
1. Maintenance space.
2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger.

Documentation that shell-and-tube heat exchangers comply with "TEMA
Standards."
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700

C. Source quality-control reports as per Quality Assurance clause requirements.
D. Commissioning Report: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this

Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in operation and
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional

requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment selected.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards - Thermal performance

certification: The plate heat exchangers shall be performance certified in
accordance with the AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Liquid to
Liquid Heat Exchangers Certification Program and applies to all plate heat
exchangers within the scope of the certification program and data sheets as per the
certification shall be provided with the submittals for verification. The Approval
for plate heat exchangers shall be provided only after verifying the data sheet with
AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. It should be verified the technical
details of the supplied plate heat exchanger with mentioned parameters in the
AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards data sheet. The Heat Exchangers
shall bear the AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards name plate.
C. Perform at least one performance test in a 3rd party laboratory to verify that the
quoted duties have been achieved.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance:

Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
F. ASME Compliance: Fabricate, test and label heat exchangers to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"
Division 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards. The Heat Exchanger shall
bear ASME U stamp name plate.
G. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times

pressure rating before shipment.

H. HVAC-water heat exchangers and its accessories will be considered defective if

they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section
014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and re-inspecting requirements and
Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.
I. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.
A. All components of PHE including frame support, fixed and movable end plates,
tie rods & gaskets shall be manufactured in the country of origin , boxed up &
shipped as a one piece ready for hook up
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and

supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Periods: As per manufacturer standard warranty from date of

Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," .
1. .
2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. The vendor shall provide the following information and details:

1. Effective heat transfer area.
2. Total number of plates.
3. Heat transfer area per plate.
4. Technical calculations for overall heat transfer coefficient.

B. Thermal performance: manufacturer shall provide written confirmation that the

plate heat exchangers comply with AHRI 400-2001 “Liquid to Liquid Heat
Exchangers” standard or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and subsequent
addendums. Data sheets according to AHRI 400 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards shall be included in the submittals for verification.
C. Engage a well-recognized third party listed and licensed testing agency to attest
thermal performance of plate heat exchanger. Third party testing is not required
when AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards product certification is
provided.
D. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and

bottom carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods,
individually removable plates, and one-piece gaskets.
E. Frame:
1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates.

2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.
F. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Painted carbon steel, aluminum, or
stainless steel.
1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars with

reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement when heat-
exchanger carrying and guide bars are anchored to building structure.
G. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel with stainless steel tie-rods and nuts.
H. Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless-steel shell, 0.6mm minimum
thickness or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
I. Gasket Material: EPDM.
J. Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-

exchanger shell. Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling.
1. DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for
steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper
and copper-alloy flanges.
K. Protective Shroud: Steel, covering channel plates.
L. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local

Standards, unless otherwise indicated, and suitable for operating temperature.
Surround entire heat exchanger except connections.
M. All components of PHE (frame support, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods &
gaskets) are manufacture in the country of origin, boxed up & shipped as a one
piece ready for hook up.

N. Provide insulated galvanized, drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat
exchanger.
O. Provide factory fabricated removable and reusable insulation cover for each heat
exchanger. The insulation cover shall be designed for easy removal and
replacement to facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting
performance of heat exchangers.
B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of

piping connections before equipment installation.
3.2 HEAT EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Heat exchangers shall be insulated. Comply with requirements of section 230716

“HVAC Equipment Insulation”. Coordinate with manufacturer’s
recommendations as necessary.
C. Provide factory fabricated aluminum removable and reusable insulation shroud

for each heat exchanger. The insulation shroud shall be designed for easy removal
and replacement to facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.
D. Provide insulated galvanized, drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat
exchanger. The drip tray consists of 0.75 mm hot galvanized steel plates, 50 mm
polyurethane foam, supports, and a draining valve.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

Install piping connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.
C. Install piping with threaded or flanged connections at heat exchangers.
D. Install shutoff valves at heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections.

E. Install relief valves on heat exchanger heated-fluid connection.
F. Install vacuum breaker at heat exchanger steam inlet connection.
G. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping, and install

thermometer on heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements
for thermometers specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC
Piping."
H. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with

requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages
for HVAC Piping."
I. Follow heat exchanger hook-up detail.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged
finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING

B. Verify that heat exchangers are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
D. Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.
E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.

SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Air-cooled condensing units.
A. Seismic Performance: Compressor and condenser units shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
dimensions; required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished
specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions for each model
indicated.

B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units

comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation indicating that compressor
and condenser units and refrigerants comply.
C. Shop Drawings: For compressor and condenser units. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
E. Seismic Qualification Certification: For compressor and condenser units,

accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 236200

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
F. Source Quality Control Reports: as specified in clause "Source Quality Control".
G. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the
operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory;
troubleshooting maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive
maintenance procedures and schedule.
I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this

Section that is listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15 AND 34

PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D. Fabricate and label water-cooled condensers according to ASME Boiler &

Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels Division 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical power and control wiring.
F. Comply with UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt

inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

Roof specialties are specified in Section "Roof Accessories."

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer and

countersigned by Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials
and workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's
written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been
followed.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FOR AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
A. Air-cooled condenser shall be a packaged, self-contained assembly that includes

fans, motors, drives, refrigerant condensing coils, controls, inter-component
piping and wiring, totally enclosed weatherproof casing, and frame mounting; the
unit shall be ready for terminal field connections with fully automatic operation.
B. Condensing coils shall be designed and sized specifically for air-cooled condenser
service. Coil frame shall be not less than 12-gage (2.8 millimeter) galvanized
steel. Coils shall be factory tested pneumatically under water at not less than 400
pounds per square inch (2758 kilopascal). A purging vent shall be provided at
the highest point of the entering refrigerant header of each coil circuit.
Condenser coil and receiver shall have an excess capacity of not less than 20
percent for storage of pumped-down refrigerant. Condensing coil and remainder
of refrigerant circuit shall be cleaned and factory charged with dry nitrogen or
refrigerant.
C. Drive shall be weather-protected. Drive and fan discharge and inlet shall be
guarded. Fan guards shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and shall be
suitable for salt-air atmosphere; electrogalvanizing is not acceptable.
D. Condensing pressure control shall be accomplished by combination of fan cycling

and modulation of dampers located in the discharge airstream.
E. Condenser-mounted control panel and inter-component piping and wiring shall be

provided. Control panels exposed to the weather shall have NEMA 250, Type 3
enclosures and NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures if protected by casing. Electrical
work shall conform to NFPA 70 requirements.
2.2 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 3.5 TO 17.6 kW (1 TO 5 TONS)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of compressors,

condenser coils, fans, motors, refrigerant reservoirs, and operating controls.
B. Compressor: Scroll, Hermetically sealed and isolated for vibration.

1. Motor: Include thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start

capacitor, relay, and contactor.
2. Two-Speed Compressor: Include manual reset, high-pressure switch and
automatic reset, and low-pressure switch.
C. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
D. Condenser: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, circuited for integral liquid

subcooler, with removable drain pan and brass service valves with service ports.
E. Condenser Fan: Direct-drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently

lubricated, totally enclosed fan motor with thermal-overload protection.
F. Accessories include the following:
1. Low-voltage thermostat and subbase to control condensing unit and

evaporator fan.
2. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing.
3. Low ambient kit to permit operation down to 7 deg C (45 deg F).
4. Crankcase heater.
5. Automatic reset timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle.
6. Filter-dryer.
7. High-Pressure Switch: Automatic-reset switch cycles compressor off on
high refrigerant pressure.
8. Polyethylene mounting base to provide a permanent foundation.
G. Casing: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components
and controls. Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes
in base. Mount service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2.3 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 21 TO 422 kW (6 TO 120 TONS)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing,

compressors, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetic or semihermetic compressor designed for service with

crankcase sight glass, crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on
suction and discharge ports.
1. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass and cylinder unloading.
C. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410Aor R-134a.
D. Condenser: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, with separate and

independent refrigeration circuit for each compressor. Include liquid accumulator
and subcooling circuit and backseating liquid-line service access valve. Factory
test coils at 3105 kPa (450 psig), then dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill
with a holding charge of nitrogen.

E. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven.

Include the following:
1. Permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors.

2. Separate motor for each fan.
3. Motors with thermal-overload cutouts.
4. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies.
5. Low Ambient Control: Factory-installed damper assembly, fan-speed
control, or fan-cycling control.
F. Operating and safety controls include the following:
1. Manual reset, high-pressure cutout switches.

2. Automatic reset, low-pressure cutout switches.
3. Low oil pressure cutout switch.
4. Compressor-winding thermostat cutout switch.
5. 3-leg, compressor-overload protection.
6. Control transformer.
7. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
8. Automatic, nonrecycling pump down and a timing device to prevent
excessive compressor cycling.
G. Accessories:
1. Low-voltage thermostat and subbase to control compressor and condenser

unit and evaporator fan.
2. Gage Panel: Package with refrigerant circuit suction and discharge gages.
3. Hot-gas bypass kit.
4. Part-winding-start timing relay, circuit breakers, and contactors.
H. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for
components and controls and with removable panels for required access to
compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features
include the following:
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and
finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating.
2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units.
3. Gasketed control panel door.
4. Unfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external
electrical power connection.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment"

for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to AHRI 210/240.
B. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ANSI/AHRI

340/360-.
A. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings," Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
B. Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler & Pressure
Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels Division 1.
C. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI

270.
D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI

370.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of compressor and condenser units.
B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of

piping connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where compressor and
condenser units will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install condensing units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Install ground-mounted units on minimum 100-mm thick, reinforced concrete

base, 100 mm larger than condensing unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of
anchoring devices.

D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor

unit to supports with removable fasteners.
E. Install units on seismically restrained spring isolators with a minimum deflection

of 25-mm.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing so it does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.
B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required

access to unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
C. Connect refrigerant and condenser water piping to water-cooled condensing units.

Maintain clear tube removal space.

not indicated, use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for
leaks. Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
D. Report test results in writing.
3.5 CLEANING
exposed finish. Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair
damaged finishes.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions and do the following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
D. Lubricate bearings on fans.
E. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or
binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
H. Measure and record airflow over coils.
I. Check operation of condenser capacity control device.
J. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
K. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units. Retain
or revise number of hours to suit Project.

SECTION 237200 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Heat wheels.
Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation details, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by an engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, operating

characteristics, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties,
accessories, and installation and startup instructions.

C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment indicated

to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of air-to-air energy recovery equipment.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages
and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable
motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200

S17058-0100D-FD--SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV B Page 1 of 7
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input
from Installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Mechanical and Electrical equipment within the Mechanical room.

3. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be
attached.
F. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3

of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
G. Operation and Maintenance data for each energy recovery unit, control, and
accessory to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements

of air-to-air energy recovery units and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements".
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by architect,

except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
C. ARI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance:
1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy
Recovery Ventilation Equipment." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-
Circulation Air- Cooling and Air-Heating Coils." or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards
D. ASHRAE or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance:
1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards
2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers." or

E. NRCA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Provide roof curbs

for roof-mounted equipment constructed according to recommendations of NRCA
F. UL Compliance:
1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in

UL 1812, "Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted
Heat Recovery Ventilators." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and
Cooling Equipment."
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.

inserts into base. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Sections.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters.
2. Fan Belts.
3. Wheel Belts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAT WHEELS
A. Casing: Either galvanized or stainless sheet steel.. Include the following:
1. Integral purge section.

2. Casing seals on periphery of rotor, on duct divider, and on purge section.
3. Support rotor on grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease
fittings. Mount horizontal wheels on tapered roller bearing.

B. Rotor: Corrugated aluminum strengthened with radial spokes, with nontoxic,

noncorrosive silica-gel desiccant coating. Construct media for passing maximum
800 micron solids and maximum 0.04 percent cross contamination by volume of
exhaust air. Drive rotor with belt around outside of rotor.
C. Drive: Motor drive unit to be of the variable speed type inverter driven suitable
for 0-10 V dc input. This shall enable the rotor speed to be varied between 0 and
15 revolutions per minute. The motor shall be mounted on anti-vibration
mountings
D. Controls: Panel, factory mounted and wired to motor with airstream thermostat
and manual motor starter for field wiring; with pilot-light indication of rotor
rotation and provisions for setting maximum and minimum speed.
E. Changeover Control: Electronic automatic summer changeover system for field

mounting of room and outdoor air temperature sensors, to provide maximum rotor
speed when room air temperature is less than outdoor air temperature.
F. Rotation Detection: Electronic control module, electromagnetic sensor, and iron

shuttle factory wired and mounted, with alarm bell for field wiring and mounting,
and remote alarm capability. Provide a means of remotely checking that the wheel
is rotating and provide an alarm to the BMS system should the wheel stop (when
it should be rotating). The rotating wheel shall be driven.
G. Type TW2 thermal wheels shall be of the hygroscopic type in which latent energy
(moisture) is transferred via a desiccant coating which has a strong affinity for
water vapor. During the cooling season when the latent load can be greater than
the sensible load, the outdoor air will be dehumidified. During the heating season,
the humidification load is reduced through moisture recovery.
H. Air pressure drop across the wheel should not exceed 200Pa.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive energy recovery units for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of energy
recovery units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install energy recovery units as indicated, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust flow in opposite directions and rotation
is from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.
1. Provide access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
2. Provide removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts
on building side for bypass during startup.
C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing,

adjusting, and balancing.
D. Install wind restraints according to manufacturers' written instructions. Wind

restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails are specified in Section 230548
"Vibration c Controls for HVAC."
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing,

adjusting, and balancing.
G. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards drawn-temper
copper water tubing with soldered joints, same size as condensate drain
connection.
H. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM D 1785,
Schedule 40 PVC pipe or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and solvent-
welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.
1. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:
a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ducts and fan installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings
B. Ground equipment.


not indicated, use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B or Equivalent
3.4 CLEANING
and clean exposed finishes. Remove dirt and construction debris and repair
damaged finishes.
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL :

including accessories.

C. Test and Inspections:

1. Operational Test - After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
2. Adjust seals and purge.
control and equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
D. Air to air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not
pass test and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

commission units as specified below, and report results in writing.
1. Energize and verify correct rotation of heat wheels and fans.

2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

B. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not

pass tests and inspections.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air recovery units.
Refer to Division 1.
3.8 WARRANTY

period.

SECTION 237313 - MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes constant or variable -volume, central-station air-handling

units with coils for indoor or outdoor installations as applicable.
B. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at
design cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as
stated above.
C. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation, a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
Such a deviation shall not qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or
reward.
D. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near
the peak of static efficiency.
E. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation details, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of

withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints
exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within
completed casings.
MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each central-station air-handling unit specified, including the
following:
1. Submittals for AHUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, electrical steam
humidifiers, sound attenuators, mixing box with outside/return air dampers,
filter housings, and all other related accessories.
2. The Contractor will provide custom drawings showing total air-handling unit
assembly including dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates, flexible
connections, door swings, control penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights,
duplex outlets, switches, wiring, utility connection points, unit support
system, vibration isolators, drain pan, and rigging points. The Contractor will
also submit performance data including performance test results, charts,
curves or certified computer selection data; data sheets; fabrication and
insulation details; and the number of pieces that each unit will have to be
broken into to meet shipping and job site rigging requirements.
3. Submit certified fan-sound power ratings showing sound power levels in each
octave band for fan and at entrance and discharge of AHUs at both present
and future scheduled conditions. Include sound attenuator capacities and
itemized internal component attenuation. Internal lining of supply air
ductwork with sound absorbing material is not permitted.
4. Provide certified fan curves showing cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per
minute), static pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for both present and
future design point of operation and at maximum of present and future design
cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent of design
static pressure.
5. Submit total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for AHU including
total, inlet and discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal losses and
unspecified internal losses. Refer to air-handling unit schedule on drawings.
6. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions
indicated.
7. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
8. Material gages and finishes.
9. Filters with performance characteristics.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable
motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.
C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating


D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
E. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Submit
with Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between
components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support
locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field
measurements.
F. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3

of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
G. Operation and Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units to include in

the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
H. Source quality control reports.
I. Field quality control reports.
A. NFPA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Central-station air-

handling units and components shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in
compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems." or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards or comply with Eurovent
standard 1886.
B. UL/ETL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Electric coils,

along with complete central-station air-handling unit, shall be listed and labeled by
ETL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards in compliance with UL requirements
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards or comply with Eurovent standard 1886..
C. AHRI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Certification: Central-station air-

handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to the
applicable portions of ANSI/AHRI 430, "Performance Rating of Central-Station
Air-Handling Units," or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and shall be listed
and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute
(AHRI) or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labeled by
UL or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and comply with applicable NEMA
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards or equivalent characteristics in accordance
with applicable parts of IEC 60034 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

latest and relevant IEC standard or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, by a

testing agency acceptable to the Engineer. And comply with NFPA 70 - National
Electrical Code.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this

G. Compliance with ASHRAE 90.1 Section 6 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-

Conditioning.
1.6 COORDINATION

inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of central-station air-handling

units with piping and ductwork and with other installations.
A. Deliver air-handling unit as a factory-assembled module with protective crating and

covering.
B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

inserts into base.
B. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing
contents.
B. Filters: 2 filters, one filter to be installed immediately prior to practical completion

when the building is physically clean and the other to be retained as a spare set.
C. Fan Belts.
D. Gaskets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. AHUs shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction. Galvanizing

shall be hot dipped conforming to A653/A653M and shall provide a minimum of
0.275 kg of zinc per square meter (0.90 oz. of zinc per square foot) (G90).
Aluminum constructed units may be provided subject to the Engineer’s approval
and documentation that structural rigidity is equal or greater than the galvanized
steel SASO specified.
B. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive

assembly, coils, damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, mixing dampers, and discharge
collars with flexible duct connectors.
C. Allocated space shown on the drawings should be considered with AHU

manufacturer insuring that the unit will not exceed this allocated space , including
required clearances for service and future overhaul or removal of unit components..
D. AHUs shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance

with the arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be assembled into the
largest sections possible subject to shipping and rigging restrictions. The correct fit
of all components and casing sections shall be verified in the factory for all units
prior to shipment. Factory tested units shall be fully assembled, tested and then split
to accommodate shipment and job site rigging. On units not shipped fully
assembled, the manufacturer shall tag each section and include airflow direction to
facilitate assembly at the job site. Lifting lugs or shipping skids shall be provided
for each section to allow for field rigging and final placement of unit.
E. The AHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing, caulking, and all
screws, nuts, and bolts required for assembly.
F. The manufacturer shall provide a local representative at the job site to supervise the
assembly and to assure the units are assembled to meet manufacturer's
recommendations and requirements noted on the drawings. Provide documentation
that this representative has provided this service on similar jobs to the Engineer. If
a local representative cannot be provided, the manufacturer shall provide a factory
representative.
G. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal airtight and
retain their structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and
disassembly of bolted panels and opening and closing of hinged components.
Bolted sections may use a more permanent gasketing method provided they are not
disassembled.
H. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Section "Common Motor

Requirements For HVAC Equipment."
I. Air-handling units intended for outdoor installation shall be of the weather proof
type. They shall have protective pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish.

J. Air handling units with DX coils shall be completed with condensing units.
2.2 BASE
A. Provide a heavy-duty steel base for supporting all AHU major components. Bases
shall be constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams, channels, or minimum 152 mm
(6 inch) high 3.5 mm (10 gauge) steel base rails. Welded or bolted cross members
shall be provided as required for lateral stability. The supplemental steel supports
should be provided as required to obtain proper operation heights for cooling coil
condense drain trap as shown on drawings.
B. AHUs shall be completely self-supporting for installation on concrete house-

keeping pad, steel support pedestals, or suspended as shown on drawings.
C. The AHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be cleaned, primed
with a rust inhibiting primer, and finished with a rust inhibiting exterior enamel.
2.3 CABINET
A. General: AHU shall be designed and constructed such that removal of any panel
shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Plug panels may be used to
enhance structural stability provided access space is not reduced.
B. Materials: Formed and reinforced, double wall construction, galvanized steel

panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components,
with joints between sections sealed. The outer walls of the double skin panel shall
be precoated with oven backed polyester paint finish. Units for outdoor installation
shall have protective pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish. Units with
100% outdoor air shall have internal sides protected with corrosion resistant paint
finish.
1. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1.2 mm-1.5mm.
2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1 mm.
3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, 3.0 mm or 1.5 mm injected polyurethane

insulation.
C. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing panels

shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet. degree F)).
D. Condensation Requirements: AHUs shall be designed to ensure that there is no

condensation on the exterior of the unit based on outside design conditions.
Through metal connections between inner and outer panels shall be kept to an
absolute minimum. If tubular structural members are used inside of tube shall be
insulated equal to casing.
E. Unit sections shall be tightly joined in the field through the use of all-thread rod or
casing brackets and shall be gasketed to make airtight.

F. Exterior and interior panels shall be secured to the support channels with stainless
steel screws and gaskets installed around the panel perimeter. Screw spacing shall
not be greater than 229 mm (nine inches). Panels shall be completely removable to
allow removal of fan, coils, and other internal components for future maintenance,
repair, or modifications. Welded exterior panels are not acceptable.
G. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for penetrations

through casing for power and temperature control wiring and pneumatic tubing.
Coordinate number and location with electrical and temperature control
subcontractors. Coordinate lights, switches, and duplex outlets and disconnect
switch location and mounting. All penetrations and equipment mounting shall be
provided in the factory. All field penetrations shall be performed neatly by drilling
or saw cutting. No cutting by torches will be allowed. Neatly seal all openings
airtight.
H. Insulation: CFC free polyurethane insulation, complying with NFPA 90A flame
spread and smoke generation requirements, "Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems," or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards for insulation.
1. The walls, roof and floor of the AHU shall be insulated. Insulation shall be
held securely in position between the inner and outer skin of casing.
3. Insulation shall have 44 kg/cubic meter minimum density rigid glass fiber.
Insulation shall meet ASTM C1071 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards
requirements.
4. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical
fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from and
including the cooling coil section.
I. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete
with hinges, latches, handles, and gaskets. Provide in each access section. Doors
shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) wide and shall be the full casing height
up to a maximum of 1850 mm (6 feet). Doors shall be gasketed, hinged, and latched
to provide an airtight seal. Each door shall include a minimum 150 mm x 150 mm
(6 inch x 6 inch) double thickness reinforced glass or Plexiglas window in a
gasketed frame.
1. Hinges: Manufacturers standard, designed for door size, weight and pressure
classifications. Hinges shall hold door completely rigid with minimum 45 kg
(100 pound) weight hung on latch side of door.
2. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for positive
cam action, operable from either inside or outside. Doors that do not open
against unit operating pressure shall be provided with safety "Vent lock"-
style latches which allow the door to open approximately 75 mm (3 inches)
and then require approximately 0.785 radian (45 degrees) further movement
of the handle for complete opening. Latch shall be capable of restraining
explosive opening of door with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12
inches water) of differential static pressure or 1-1/2 times operating
differential pressure whichever is greater.

3. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct

compression with no sliding action between the door and gasket. Secure with
high quality mastic to eliminate possibility of gasket slipping or coming
loose.
4. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and
located to allow periodic maintenance and inspections.
J. Floor:
1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support
a minimum of 488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed
load without permanent deformation or crushing of internal insulation.
2. Provide adequate structural base members beneath floor in service access
sections to support typical service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit
floor or internal insulation.
3. Unit floors in casing sections, which may contain water or condensate, shall
be watertight with drain pan.
4. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing
floors shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet.
degree F)).
K. Drain Pans: Formed sections of insulated stainless steel (316) or (304), sheet based.
Fabricate pans in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils
(including coil piping connections and return bends) when units are operating at
maximum cataloged face velocity across cooling coil. Depth of drain pan shall be
at least 43 mm (1.7 inches) and shall handle all condensate without overflowing.
Drain pan shall be sloped to drain. Drain pan shall be continuous metal or welded
watertight. No mastic sealing of joints exposed to water will be permitted. Drain
pan shall be placed on top of casing floor or integrated into casing floor assembly.
Maximum overall thermal conductance of floor/drain pan assembly shall not
exceed 0.68 W/square meter K (0.12 Btu/ (h. sq. ft. degree F)).
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation

and seal moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough
to collect condensate from top coil.
5. Cooling coil ends shall be enclosed by cabinet and shall be factory insulated
against sweating or shall drain to a drain pan.
6. All pans shall have a double slope to the drain point.
L. Electrical and Lighting: Wiring and equipment specifications shall conform to

1. Provide factory installed vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style
with glass globe and cast aluminum guard shall be installed in each access
section, fan, coil, filter and mixing box sections.
2. A switch shall control the lights in each compartment with pilot light mounted
outside the respective compartment access door. Wiring between switches

and lights shall be factory installed. All wiring shall run in neatly installed
electrical conduits and terminate in a junction box for field connection to the
building system. Provide single point 230 volt - one phase connection at
junction box.
3. Install compatible 100 watt bulb in each light fixture.
4. Provide a convenience duplex outlet next to the light switch.
5. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted
disconnect switch. Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.
M. Inspection Windows: Provide factory installed 200mm glass or plastic inspection

windows on fan and filter plenum section access panels of air-handling units.
2.4 FAN SECTION
A. Fan-Section Construction (supply and return fans sections as applicable): Belt-

driven centrifugal fans, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and
disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure, equipped with formed-
steel channel base for integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Mount
fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, and motor on structural-steel frame, with frame
mounted on base with vibration isolation.
B. Housings: Fabricate from formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to
allow entry to internal parts and components.
C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor power. Fan wheel shall be
double-width, double-inlet type with backward-curved or airfoil blades.
1. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel
cabinet.
2. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange,
back plate, backward-curved blades, and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
3. Airfoil Wheel: Steel; with smooth, curved inlet flange; back plate; die-
formed, hollow, airfoil blades; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
4. Shafts: Hot-rolled steel; turned, ground, and polished, and having keyway to
secure to fan wheel hub.
5. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type
ball or roller bearings with the following:
a. Rated Bearing Life: ANSI/ABMA STD 9 or ABMA STD 11 or

Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, L-50 of 200,000 hours.
6. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
a. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.
7. Pulleys: Cast iron or steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced
at factory.

8. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch, selected so pitch adjustment is at middle of

adjustment range at fan design conditions.
9. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt
drives.
10. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards requirements, 2.7 mm thick, 20-mm diamond-mesh wire screen
welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
11. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
12. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators, PVC

coated, minimum 25 mm static deflection, with side snubbers. Allowable
vibration tolerances for fan shall not exceed a self-excited vibration
maximum velocity of 0.005 m/s (0.20 inch per second) RMS when measured
with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and
axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are
concealed.
D. Fan-Section Source Quality Control: The following factory tests are required.
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards Test fans according to ANSI/AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings
seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, temperature,
rotation speed, and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic
Performance Rating."
2.5 MOTORS
A. General: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment"

for general requirements.
B. Provide internally vibration isolated fan, motor and drive, mounted on a common
integral bolted or welded structural steel base with adjustable motor slide rail with
locking device. Provide vibration isolators and flexible duct connections at fan
discharge to completely isolate fan assembly. Fan drive and belts shall be factory
mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment to be made by the Contractor
after installation.
C. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.
D. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range.
E. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for

continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).

F. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
G. Motor Construction: ANSI/NEMA MG 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards,

general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
H. Bearings: The following features are required:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.

2. Grease lubricated.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce
lateral or axial thrust in motor.
I. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
1. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
J. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
K. Noise Rating: Quiet.
L. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled

according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall
have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" according to IEEE
112, Test Method B.
M. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,

construction, and special features.
N. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 26 Sections.
2.6 COILS
A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized steel casings for

heating and cooling coils. Design and construct to facilitate removal and
replacement of coil for maintenance and to assure full airflow through coils.
1. Multizone Units: Provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow
across coils.
B. Coil Construction: Rigidly supported across full face, pitched to allow drainage.
1. Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes.
2. Tubes: Seamless copper, minimum thickness: 0.035 inches.
3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel.
4. Headers for Steam & Water Coils: Steel, cast iron, or copper with
connections for drain valve and air vent, and threaded piping connections.

C. Water Coils: Drainable with threaded plugs, serpentine with return bends in smaller
sizes and with return headers in larger sizes.
D. Coil face area velocity is not to exceed 2.5 meters per second at specified air
quantity. Coil to have number of rows and fins per cm to satisfy required capacity
at specified condition, with not more than 5 fins per cm.
E. Electric steam humidifier Coil: Steam-distributing type with concentrically

supported distributing tube.
F. Number of circuits to be such that water velocity satisfies specified conditions

without exceeding specified maximum water pressure drop through coil. Water
velocity through tubes is not to exceed 1.8 meters per second and not less than 0.76
meters per second.
G. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils: ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety

Standard for Refrigeration Systems” or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, with
the following features:
1. Suction Headers and Distributor Tubes: Seamless copper.

2. Refrigerant Distributor: Design for low pressure drop, for down feed with
solder connections, and with maximum of 12 circuits for each distributor.
H. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed

surface coils for rating according to ANSI/AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-
Cooling and Air-Heating Coils." Or Eurovent standards.
2.7 DAMPERS
A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500-D, "Laboratory Methods of

Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 10-m/s
(2000-fpm) face velocity through damper and 1000-Pa (4-inch wg) pressure
differential.
1. Damper operators shall be electrically operated.
B. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade galvanized steel or aluminum damper blades

mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet.
Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers
operate simultaneously.
C. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Parallel-blade galvanized steel or aluminum

damper blades mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced,
galvanized steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and
interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. Cabinet support
members shall hold 50-mm thick, pleated, flat permanent or throwaway filters.
Provide hinged access panels or doors to allow removal of filters from both sides
of unit.

D. Inlet Damper Section

1. A. These shall be fitted on the inlet to all air handling units. The damper
blades shall be made from aluminium extrusion blades with rubber seal
gaskets on sealing edges.
1.6mm thick galvanized steel and have cadmium plated shaft, nylon bearings
and direct linkage fitted to the blade end shafts. Dampers shall be arranged to
give tight shut off when the fan is not operational.
2. The damper section shall be provided with a duct connection flange.
3. The blade bearings shall be glass fiber reinforced nylon. The dampers shall
be individually motorized.
4. Dampers shall be complete with all necessary linkages on the outside of the
casing for motorized operation, or the actuators shall be internally mounted
to extend life and minimize air leakage. All dampers shall have an “open-
closed” indication sign.
2.8 FILTER SECTION
A. Air Filters: Refer to Section "Particulate Air Filters."
B. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
C. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or

Local Standards, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to
ASHRAE 52.2 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Filter Housing: Provide filter media holding frames arranged for flat, angular
orientation, or bag filters, minimum thickness, 14 gage galvanized steel with baked
finish inside and out. Joints shall be continuously welded. Flange shall have a
fixed air-sealing gasket with hollow cross section, closed cell rubber or resilient
neoprene, suitable for repetitive reuse. Cabinets shall have flanged ends for
connection to adjacent ducts. Hinged access doors on both cabinet sides. Provide
access doors with fixed air sealing gaskets to be airtight at the static pressure
expected in service. Weld test ports into each filter cabinet or plenum. Test port
shall not penetrate to filter frame or media.
E. Pre-filters: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers flat panel with cardboard frame and
perforated metal retainer, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch wg) at face
velocity of 2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.
F. Permanent Filters: Washable, cleanable, 50 mm thick, with aluminum- or stainless-

steel media and stainless-steel frames, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch
wg) at face velocity of 2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.
G. Permanent Filters: Bag type, viscous coated fiber, 450mm long with holding
stainless steel frames and fasteners, and ASHRAE filter-arrestance efficiency of 60
to 80 percent.

H. Construction Filters for pre-commissioning: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers

encased in fiberboard cell with perforated-metal media support, clean airflow
resistance of 37 Pa at face velocity of 1.52 m/s and ASHRAE 52.1 or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards filter-arrestance efficiency of 70 to 82 percent.
I. Filter condition: Differential Pressure sensor will be used.
2.9 ENERGY RECOVERY SECTION
A. Heat Recovery Wheels, or Heat Pipes shall be factory installed within Air Handling
Units, as per design requirements where needed.
B. Refer to Section “Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment”
2.10 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. Variable air volume Air Handling units shall be provided with Variable Speed
Drives, as specified in Division 26, Section 262419 “Motor-Control Centers”.
B. A. Each variable volume fan array drive shall be complete with an infinitely
variable speed drive which shall operate from a frequency converter. The frequency
converter shall consist of a rectifier, intermediate circuit (or DC link), inverter and
controller. The complete frequency inverter shall be housed all within a purpose
made enclosure which shall be assembled and tested at works prior to dispatch.
Enclosure shall be IP54 rated if internal or IP65 complete with frost protection
within cabinet if external.
C. The frequency converter shall have pre-programmed application macros. The

control panel shall consist of a two line alphanumeric display with 20 characters
per line.
D. The frequency converter shall have two analogue and six digital inputs as well as
two analogue and three relay outputs. The built in PI process controller shall be
suitable for configuring with pressure control via a 0-10V signal (0.20 mA).
E. The frequency converter shall also have the facility to individually adjust
acceleration and deceleration ramps.
F. All adjustments shall be made on the digital control panel keypad. The output
frequency of the controller shall be suitable for setting at 0.01 Hz steps.
G. The unit shall be capable of a motor starting torque of 180% of the rated motor
torque.
H. The frequency converter shall be suitable for connecting to a spinning motor.
I. The frequency converter manufacturer shall be responsible for co-ordination and

selection of a unit to suit the selected fan and motor.

2.11 ADIABATIC COOLER
A. System shall have having Control Cabinet and Pumps which will pump the water
at high pressure and it will reach matrix of Nozzles inside the AHU; these Nozzles
will spray water as atomize with very small and fine droplets @ 30 Micron that
evaporate spontaneously, Which results in cooling the air with very large very large
surface droplets area and maximum efficiency (Minimum 95%)
B. Following components shall be provided:

1. Pumping unit that delivers pressurized water to the distribution system as
recommended by supplier which should be suitable for system operation,
ON/OFF flow-rate control, drain solenoid valve for unit shut down.
2. Modular stainless steel manifolds.
3. Spray atomization nozzles.
4. Drain solenoid valves on the distribution system.
5. Metal connection hoses and fittings.
C. Droplet separator.
The droplet separator has the purpose of trapping the droplets of water that are not
completely evaporated, to prevent them entering fan section.
2.12 TESTING
A. General:
1. ARI or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards certified AHUs: AHUs

selected by the Engineer for testing shall be factory assembled and tested
prior to shipment and shall be shipped prior to any untested units.
2. Non-ARI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in
accordance with specified Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with
required unit capacities, ensure correct fit of all components and minimize
field assembly labor.
B. Factory Test:
1. The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those methods
specified in Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing”; however test
methods including instruments used must be submitted and approved by the
Engineer prior to initiating testing. The AHUs shall be tested for air volume,
static pressure for AHU and each component, fan RPM and power
consumption for the maximum of present or future design conditions. Submit
fan curves showing test results.
C. Approval:
1. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of
deficiency and re-testing of unit.
2. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for compliance with

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of central-station
air-handling units.
B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, condensate drainage piping, and electrical

to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
D. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit
installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture
damaged or mold damaged.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb, according to

1. Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete housekeeping bases using

neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete
housekeeping base.
2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using
threaded steel rods and vibration isolation.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for
A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.
B. Form concrete bases with steel channels conforming to ASTM A36/A36M, size
and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor
or key to floor slab.
C. Form concrete bases with framing lumber with form-release compounds. Chamfer
top edge and corners of base.
D. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.

E. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C150/C150M or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, 27-
MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
F. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3 and apply 2 coats
of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. The Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following
are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connection piping to suspended air-handling units with flexible connectors.
3. Connect condensate drain pans. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.
Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes
in direction.
4. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of
Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with
shutoff or balancing valve and union or flange at each connection.
5. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section
"Refrigerant Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff
valve and union or flange at each connection.
B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. The
final duct connections with factory-provided duct collars and flexible connections.
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections.
1. Connect fan motors to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical

connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Section
"Building Management System."
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING
abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.
Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
3.7 QUALITY CONTROL:

to supervise field assembly of components and installation of air-handling units
B. Perform test and inspection.

C. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components

do not pass test and inspection.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to perform start-up or commissioning services.
B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following before startup:

connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify that
proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and
disconnects.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan
drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to fully open position for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
8. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
11. Verify that manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

C. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units include the following:
wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm.
a. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design

conditions. Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record
fan performance.
D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling
system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain central-station air-handling units. Refer
to Division 1.
3.10 WARRANTY

components of Air Handling units that fail in materials or workmanship within
warranty period.

SECTION 237320 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING

UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. Associated spcesification :Sec-230517 sleeves and sleeve seals for hvac piping;
Sec-230529 hangers and supports for hvac; Sec-230548 vibration controls for
hvac; Sec-230553 identification for hvac; Sec-230593 testing, adjusting, and
balancing & Sec-232300 refrigerant piping.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required
for complete installation of the multi-split system inverter driven air conditioners
with multi indoor units and related work as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.
B. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Extent of Air-conditioning units work required by this section is indicated

on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. Types of
air-conditioning units specified in this section include the following:
a. Indoor Units
b. Outdoor units
c. Refrigerant Piping
2. Provide factory-mounted and wired controls and electrical devices as

specified in this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include
performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound
power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 237320

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of

sections of units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-
applied color finishes.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply

wiring to units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock
and control wiring required for final installation of units and controls. Clearly
differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to
be field-installed.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each packaged unit,
control and accessory, including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include
this data and product data in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle air-conditioning units and components carefully to

prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged air-
conditioning units or components; replace with new.
B. Store air-conditioning units and components in clean dry place. Protect from
weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air-
conditioning units, and moving units to final locations for installation.

of units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers'
systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70 , Article 100 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with

ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE , “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 -

"Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "

Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." or Equivalent

BS/EN or Local Standards
E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
F. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and
suitable of working at outdoor ambient temperature of 46.1 deg. C.
G. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan

operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not
exceed 40dBa at low speed and 48dBa at high speed.
H. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance

with the test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards. Sound-power values apply to units provided with factory-
fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the
standard cabinet models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate
tests provided there is no variation between models as to the coil configuration,
blowers, motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be
fastened securely to the building structure.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment
supports, and roof penetrations specified in Section "Roof Accessories."
1.7 WARRANTY

agreeing to repair or replace components of air-conditioning units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Filters.
2. Fan Belts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install multi split system inverter driven air conditioner for
application with R-410A or R-407C refrigerants and consisting of outdoor unit
and matching multi indoor evaporator blowers. Each unit shall provide the total
cooling capacity shown on the drawings. Indoor units shall be of the type shown
on drawings.
B. Units to be certified for capacity rating by an approved international institute.
C. Multi splits system shall be suitable for the existing static height between the
condensing units located on roof and the indoor units located in attic of each
apartment.
D. The split system shall be complete with a distribution refrigeration cycle, electrical
controls, wiring and enclosing cabinets.
2.2 OUTDOOR UNIT
A. Cabinet
1. The cabinet shall be constructed of weatherproof casing constructed from

rust-proof galvanized steel sheet, baked with synthetic resin or baked
enamel finish paint.
2. Outdoor units material shall be selected with heavy anti-corrosion
specifications designed specifically for use in areas which are subject to salt
damage.
3. The service panel shall be easily removable for service access to the
electrical components and the compressor section.
B. Refrigeration Cycle
1. Each refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with minimum of 2 scroll

compressors, solenoid valves, shut-off valves, heat exchangers,
accumulators, 4-way valves. All compressors shall be inverter driven.
Allowable pipe length shall exceed 150m. COP of system in cooling mode
shall exceed 3.60.
C. Compressor Protection
1. The compressor shall be protected against breakdown by a quick response

over current relay, a high pressure switch, a wrap-around type oil heater and
a discharge gas thermistor. Compressors shall be installed on vibration
isolators to be isolated from the cabinet floor.

D. Outdoor Fan and Fan Motor
1. The outdoor fan shall be the plastic propeller type, dynamically balanced,
and the fan shall be directly driven by a suitable motor for vertical-flow air
discharge. The fan motor shall be permanently lubricated and be protected
from ingress of water. The fan motor shall be of DC inverter type.
E. Outdoor Heat Exchanger
1. The heat exchanger shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type, equipped
with highly-efficient aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to oxygen-free
copper tubes. Aluminum fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film.
The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.
The heat exchanger space shall be separated from compressors space to have
accurate diagnostics readings when needed.
2. Outdoor units installation should allow for side by side installation.
2.3 INDOOR UNIT
A. Cabinet
1. The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet or finished steel

sheet, baked with synthetic resin-paint, with panel assembly constructed of
galvanized steel sheet for the ceiling duct type unit.
2. Type of cabinet shall be as indicated on drawings.
3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
B. Refrigeration Cycle
1. The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with a heat exchanger, an

electronic expansion valve, solenoid valves and flare connections.
C. Indoor Fan and Fan Motor
1. The indoor fan shall be the multi-blade centrifugal type, statically and
dynamically balanced, and directly driven by suitable motor. The fan motor
bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Three operating positions High,
Medium and low can be selected according to the required conditions. Fan
capacity and motor ratings shall be as indicated on drawings and
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Unit selection shall be based on medium speed fan capacity.
D. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan

operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed the
following values at the midfrequency of each octave band:
OCTAVE BANDS

Frequency
(hertz) 4,000
250 500 1,000 2,000
Power 60 55 53 50 48
Level
E. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance

with the test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values
apply to units provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard
grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models will be acceptable for
concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation between
models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative
arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building
structure.
F. Indoor Heat Exchanger
1. The heat exchanger shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type, equipped
with highly efficient aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to seamless,
oxygen-free copper tubes. The fins shall be spaced at no more than 12 fins
per 25.4 mm. The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at
the factory.
G. Air Filters
1. Air filters shall be nylon fiber or cellular plastic material and shall have a
minimum efficiency of 60%.
2.4 CONTROL
A. All electrical control devices shall be enclosed in the indoor and outdoor units.
B. Controls and Thermostats shall be manufactured by the same selected VRV

Manufacturer.
C. In addition to the compressor protection devices, the indoor fan motor shall be
equipped with an internal thermostat. The outdoor fan motor shall be protected by
an internal thermostat. The indoor fan motor shall be directly supplied with the
power source from the control circuit. The functions of these control devices shall
compose an electrical sequence of manual starting and stopping, automatic
continuous operation whenever the room thermostat requires, and the protection
devices allow the operation.
D. The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet.
E. Various operation data for the last 30 minutes shall be kept inside the control PCB
of outdoor unit.

F. Test run mode to check and prevent installation errors.
G. Automatic back up operation shall be available; even if one compressor fails

another compressor will back up and automatically keep the system in operation
without interruption.
H. Connectivity to central controllers shall be available with no need to interface

devices.
I. Availability of interface units for communication with standard BMS systems.

Comply with requirements of section 230900.
2.5 REMOTE CONTROLLER.
A. Provide remote controller with each indoor unit.
B. The remote controller shall be able to set temperature, mode of operation, fan
speed. Also remote controller shall read room temperature. Filter sign must be
included to indicate when the filter shall be cleaned. The remote controller shall
provide as standard feature a weekly timer witch allows one week operation
schedule to be registered.
C. Controller must store operation data for cumulative hours of operation.
2.6 REFRIGERATION CYCLE
A. The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with multi kit on all pipes branching as
recommended by air-conditioning unit’s manufacturer.
B. Circuits shall include but not limited to liquid and gas shut off valves and solenoid
valves.
C. All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safety operation of the
system. The following shall be part of the outdoor unit:
1. High Pressure Switch
2. Low Pressure Switch

3. Overload Relay
4. Inverter Overload Protector
5. Fusible Plugs
6. Control Circuit Fuses
7. Overcurrent Protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timer.
D. Outdoor unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery systm to ensure stable
operation with long refrigerant piping.

2.7 REFRIGERANT PIPES
A. Refrigerant pipes shall be of seamless copper tube type "L", coated with PVC
tape, jointed by silver brazing, using 45% silver brazing alloy. All copper pipes
shall be marked with manufacturer name or trademark.
B. Pipe carrying cold refrigerant gas (RS & RL) shall be insulated as recommended
by air-conditioning unit’s manufacturer.
C. Size of refrigerant lines between condensing unit and evaporator blowers shall be
as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be submitted to the engineer for
approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting

devices securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on minimum 100 mm

thick, reinforced concrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D. Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports

specified in Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with
removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Section "Vibration Controls for
HVAC Pipes and Equipment."
F. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings.

Install tubing to allow access to unit.
G. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances
3.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to
allow units to be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system
Sections for specific valve and specialty arrangements.

indicated, use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards.
E. Electrical Wiring
1. Obtain from manufacturer all required devices not specified to be factory-

mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram.
2. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not
proceed with equipment startup until wiring installation is acceptable to
equipment manufacturer.
F. Ductwork
1. Refer to Sections "Metal Ducts" and "Air Duct Accessories". Connect

supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide
transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size.
2. Connect condenser supply and exhaust ducts to unit with flexible
connections.
G. Drain Piping: Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. Provide
trap at drain pan, construct at least 25mm (1 inch) deeper than fan pressure in
inches of water.
A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping
and electrical connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

A. Referigerant piping and sleeve Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate actual

effects and to set quality standards for execution.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. . Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test & adjust any

field assembled components and equipment installations, and to train Employer's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain variable refrigerant
volume air conditioning units. Refer to Division 1 Section.
B.

SECTION 238123 - COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air-conditioning units and their accessories intended

specifically for computer-room applications, in the following arrangements:
1. Floor-mounted computer-room air conditioners.

2. Ceiling-mounted computer-room air conditioners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities operating characteristics, electrical

characteristics; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties;
and accessories for each model indicated.


loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location

C. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of

this Section. Indicate and interpret results of startup and commissioning
requirements. Submit copies of checklists.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and
E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238123

A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34

PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.” or Equivalent BS/EN
or Local Standards
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 -

"Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 -
"Ventilation Rate Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." or
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this

E. ASME or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards Compliance: Fabricate and label

water-cooled condenser shells to comply with 2010 ASME Boiler & Pressure
Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and suspension components with other
assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations

with roof construction.
C. Coordinate installation of computer-room air-conditioning units with computer-

room raised floor installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer

and countersigned by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in
materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided
manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance
have been followed.
1. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial

Completion.

2. Warranty Period, Humidifiers: 3 years after date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period, Control Boards: 3 years after date of Substantial

Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below ,are packaged with protective covering
for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan Belts.
PART 2 - Filters: 2 filters, one filter to be installed immediately prior to practical

completion when the building is physically clean and the other to be retained as a spare set.
PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish a computer room process cooling self-contained units complete, including

all temperature controls, filters, fans and other system components as specified, all
assembled and tested at the factory prior to shipment in accordance with
ANSI/ASHRAE 51 or AMCA 210 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
Ratings shall comply with AHRI 430 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
Total static pressure and coil face area classification shall conform to AMCA 99.
B. The system shall include an automatic temperature control panel and electric
panel with main disconnect operable from the exterior of the room unit. Cooling
capacity of unit shall meet the sensible heat requirements and total heat
requirements shown. In selecting unit size, make true allowance for "sensible to
total heat ratio" to satisfy required sensible cooling capacity.
C. Design the separate assemblies to be used together and base ratings on the use of
the matched assemblies:
1. Self-contained direct expansion cooling units.

2. Water Cooling Coil.
3. Humidifier.
4. Electric reheat coil.
5. Factory fabricated floor stand.
6. All units shall have automatic controls and shall be a complete factory
assembled, piped and wired package.
D. Corrosion Prevention: All equipment fabricated from ferrous metals shall be

coated with epoxy finish or a zinc coating or a duplex coating of zinc and paint. If
accepted by the Engineer, equipment fabricated from ferrous metals that do not
have a zinc coating or a duplex coating of zinc and paint shall be treated for
prevention of rust with a factory coating or paint system that will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall be

tested for 500 hours. The salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM
B117 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards using a 20 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the coating shall show no signs
of blistering, wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, and the specimen shall
show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm (1/8-inch) on either side of the
scratch mark.
E. Unit Cabinet:
1. Unit frame shall be minimum 14 gage (2.0 millimeter) welded steel tubes or
steel angles and shall be mill-galvanized or coated with an epoxy finish, or
as specified above.
2. Exterior panels shall be furniture grade steel sheet, minimum of 20 gage
(1.0 mm), mill-galvanized or coated with a corrosion-inhibiting epoxy
finish, or an approved equivalent finish. Mill galvanized sheet metal shall
be coated with not less than 1.25 ounces of zinc per square foot (380 gram
of zinc per square meter) of two-sided surface. Mill rolled structural steel
shall be hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted. Cut edges, burns and
scratches in hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with galvanizing
repair coating.
3. Provide removable panel for access to controls without interrupting airflow.
Panels shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage under system operating
pressure and shall be removable for service access without the use of special
tools. Condensate pans shall be minimum 22 gage (1.0 millimeter) Type
316 stainless steel and shall be piped to drain.
4. Exterior surfaces of cabinets constructed of mill-galvanized steel shall be
finished by the manufacturer's standard enamel finish in the required color
as directed by the Engineer.
5. Unit manufacturer's standard cabinet materials and finishes will be
acceptable if considered equivalent to the above requirements by the
Engineer.
F. Cabinet Interiors Sound Attenuation:
1. Provide a factory-installed sound attenuation system in the interior of the

unit cabinet.
2. Unit cabinet panels interior shall be provided with 25 millimeters of 24
kilogram per cubic meter (one inch of 1 1/2 pound per cubic foot) neoprene-
coated fiberglass insulation on interior of cabinet panels. Insulation shall be
applied to the cabinet panels with 100 percent adhesive coverage and both
the insulation and the adhesive shall conform to NFPA 90A or Equivalent
3. Finish of Interior Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall
comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
4. Fans and compressors located in the unit interior cabinet shall be provided
with vibration isolators between their respective support frames and the
cabinet framing.
G. Each unit shall be provided complete with the following:

1. Air Sensor: Air sensing devices shall be installed to indicate clogged filters
and loss of airflow.
2. Water Sensor: A water sensor shall be mounted on the main floor directly
below the unit and shall activate the alarm system if it detects the presence
of moisture.
3. Smoke Detector: Smoke detector shall be located in the return air stream
and shall shut down the air-handling unit and activate the alarm when
smoke is detected. Alarm shall be connected to building alarm system.
4. Thermostat: Thermostat shall be an electronic solid state device with its
element located in the filtered return air stream. Thermostat shall have a
minimum range of 16 to 27 deg. C (60 to 80 deg. F) and shall be accurate
to within 0.5 degrees at the set point.
5. Humidistat: Humidistat shall be an electronic solid state device with its
element located in the filtered return air stream entering the unit's coils.
Humidistat shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent in reading
relative humidity and shall have a minimum adjustable dead band of plus or
minus 5 percent. Humidistat shall have a minimum operating range of 35 to
65 percent relative humidity and shall be adjustable over the full range.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY TEST PLANS
A. For each unit, submit a factory test plan which when followed during factory
testing shall verify that the performance scheduled on the drawings is met by the
produced unit models.
B. The manufacturer shall perform factory tests on the actual units produced for this
project. The test reports shall document the performance tests conducted on the
factory assembled computer-room air-conditioning units. Performance testing on
the individual computer-room air-conditioning unit components, not factory
assembled, is not acceptable.
C. Submit the required test plans for review and approval to the Engineer at least 30
calendar days before scheduled factory test date.
D. Test Procedure: Indicate in each test plan the factory acceptance test procedures.
Procedures shall be structured to test all modes of operation to confirm that the
controls through all modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing
in accordance with the intended sequence of control. Controllers shall be verified
to be properly calibrated and have the proper set point to provide stable control of
their respective equipment. Include in each test plan a detailed step-by-step
procedure for testing automatic controls provided by the manufacturer.

2.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description and Assembly: Packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped;

consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, humidifier, and controls.
1. Assembly: Downflow air delivery, in draw-through configuration.
B. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel suitably braced for rigidity, supporting
compressors and other mechanical equipment and fittings with floor stand with
adjustable legs and vibration isolation pads.
1. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets,

hinges, and concealed fastening devices.
2. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior with 25-mm
thick duct liner.
Standards.
4. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on, textured vinyl enamel.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Evaporator Fans: Double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal, statically and

dynamically balanced.
1. Drive: Steel shaft with self-aligning ball bearings; and V-belt drive with
cast-iron or steel sheaves, variable- and adjustable-pitch motor sheave,
minimum of 2 matched belts, with drive rated at a minimum of 2.0 times the
nameplate rating of motor.
2. Motor: Dripproof, permanently lubricated ball-bearing motor with built-in
current and overload protection.
D. Compressors: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, oil sight
glass, internal motor protection, low-pressure switch, and manual-reset high-
pressure switch.
1. Refrigeration Circuits: 2, each with hot-gas mufflers, thermal-expansion

valve with external equalizer, liquid-line solenoid valve, liquid-line filter-
dryer, refrigerant sight glass with moisture indicator, service shutoff valves,
charging valves, and accumulator sized for liquid seal under light load.
2. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
E. Evaporator Coil: Alternate-row or split-face circuits, direct-expansion cooling

coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins, mounted over
stainless-steel drain pan complying with ASHRAE 62.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards and having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch,
pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.

F. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-

tube aluminum-fin coils arranged for 2 circuits, multiple direct-drive propeller
fans with permanently lubricated ball bearings, and single-phase motors with
internal overload protection. Provide capacity control by cycling fans.
G. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with
modulating control valve.
1. .
H. Extended-Surface, Disposable, Panel Filters: Pleated, lofted, nonwoven,

reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded-wire grid; enclosed in
cardboard frame.
1. Nominal Thickness: 100 mm.

2. Dust-Spot Efficiency: 25 to 30 percent.
3. Weight Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards): 90 to 92 percent.
4. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards): 7.
5. Initial Resistance at 2.54 m/s (500-FPM) Face Velocity: 75 Pa (0.30-inch
wg).
6. Recommended Final Resistance: 250 Pa (1-inch wg).
I. .
J. Infrared Humidifier: High-intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless-steel

evaporator pan, serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical
connections; prepiped and using condensate water from cooling coils with
stainless-steel or brass float-valve mechanism; located in bypass airstream; with
flush-cycle timer and solenoid drain valve.
K. Plumbing Components and Valve Bodies: Plastic, linked by flexible rubber

hosing, with water fill with air gap and solenoid valve incorporating built-in
strainer, pressure-reducing and flow-regulating orifice, and drain with integral air
gap on drain.
L. Control: Fully modulating to provide gradual 0 to 100 percent capacity with

field-adjustable maximum capacity; high-water probe.
M. Drain Cycle: Field-adjustable drain duration and drain interval.
N. Integral Electrical Panel: Unit mounted NEMA 250 , Type 2 enclosure, with
piano-hinged door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload
relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control-circuit transformer
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonautomatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle

accessible with panel closed and capable of preventing access until switched
to off position.

O. Microprocessor-Control System: Continuously monitors operation of process

cooling system; continuously displays room temperature and room relative
humidity; sounds alarm on system malfunction and simultaneously displays
problem. If more than one malfunction occurs, system displays fault in sequence
with room temperature and continues to display fault when malfunction is cleared
until system is reset.
1. Malfunctions: Power Loss, Loss of Airflow, Clogged Air Filter, High

Room Temperature, Low Room Temperature, High Humidity, Low
Humidity, Smoke/Fire, Water-under-Floor, Supply Fan Overload,
Compressor No. 1--Overload, Compressor No. 1--Low Pressure,
Compressor No. 1--High Pressure, Compressor No. 2--Overload,
Compressor No. 2--Low Pressure, and Compressor No. 2--High Pressure.
2. LED Display: Control Power On, System On, Humidification,
Dehumidification Taking Place, Compressor No. 1 Operating, Compressor
No. 2 Operating, Heat or Reheat Operating, Economy Cooling.
3. Push Buttons: Provide to stop process cooling system, start process cooling
system, silence audible alarm, push-to-test LED indicators, and display
room relative humidity.
4. Remote Signaling: Provide termination for remote signaling of system
status and alarms. Comply with requirements of Building Management
System (BMS) specifications section.
2.4 CLOSE CONTROL (COMPUTER ROOM TYPE) AIR CONDITIONERS
A. The units shall consist of 2 independent cooling circuits with one of the following
configurations:
1. chilled water circuit with a redundant DX circuit with matched air-cooled

condenser
2. chilled water circuit with a redundant DX circuit with matched air-cooled
condensing unit
B. Primary cooling is normally achieved by the chilled-water coil, fed from the
building chilled water circuit. In case of failure, malfunction, or service of the
primary source, operation is automatically switched over to the direct-expansion
circuit.
C. The units shall be suitable for DX or chilled water as indicated on the schedules.
Where heating is indicated it shall be of the electrical or LTHW water type as
indicated on the schedules.
D. In the units the air is filtered, cooled or heated and humidified as required to
maintain the room conditions. The units shall be pre-wired and pre-plumbed to
incorporate all necessary controls and monitoring features described in this
section.
E. All units to be commissioned by the manufacturer to the standards indicated in

this section.

F. The unit control panel is to contain the fan motor contactors and overloads,
compressor starter (DX units) contactors, transformer, sub-circuit protection, volt
free contacts, mains and interconnecting terminals. The wiring shall conform to
the latest British Standards and codes of practice. Provide door interlocked
isolator for complete isolation of the unit.
G. Each unit to have factory fitted drain cocks and air vents. Condensate from F. drip
tray and humidifier to discharge into a factory fitted tundish with connection for
local drain. Where the local drain is not available provide an integral condensate
pump to lift the condensate to a high level drain.
H. Units to be fitted with a microprocessor controller which provides analogue and

digital control of return air temperature and humidity and interface with BMS
system. The microprocessor shall control the cooling, heating, humidification and
dehumidification devices as necessary to maintain the set point conditions in the
space with an accuracy of ± 0.25°C and ±3% RH. For local monitoring provide a
ax20 character backlit LCD door mounted display keypad assembly to view the
unit status and allow operator adjustment.
I. Each controller shall have the following display messages and allow remote
monitoring by BMS.
1. Return air temperature

2. Return air humidity
3. Cooling Status
4. Heating Status
5. Cooling trip
6. Air flow fail
7. Overheat cut-out
8. Flood
9. Power Fail
10. Manual Off
11. Temperature out of Units
12. Humidity out of Units
13. Manual On
14. Filter Change
15. Supply air temperature
16. Condensing Pressure (DX units only)
17. Glycol Temperature (Glycol free cooling units only)
18. Chilled water flow temperature (chilled water units only)
19. Chilled water return temperature (chilled water units only)
20. Items 5 to 8 shall also sound an integral alarm.
J. In addition to the display items described, the microprocessor shall allow the
review of the following without the ability to change any setting.
1. Temperature set point
2. Temperature/humidity high limit
3. Temperature/humidity low limit
4. Fan running hours
5. Running hours for each compressor

6. Alarm occurrence
7. Free cooling glycol temperature
8. Glycol valve position
K. The microprocessor shall have two levels of security each protected by a pass
code. In the first level the following set points shall be adjusted;
1. Temperature
2. Temperature high limit
3. Temperature low limit
4. Humidity high limit
5. Humidity low limit
L. In the second level of security accessed by a separate pass code, the following
control variables shall be programmable.
1. Proportion band
2. Integral action time
3. Dead band
4. Delay on start
5. Compressor starts per hour
6. Reset of fan running hours
7. Reset of compressor running hours
M. Air filtration shall be accomplished using disposable 50 mm thick fibre-L. glass

filters or disposable pleated filter in a cardboard retaining frame. The filters shall
be easily replaced and conforming to G3 as BS EN 779. A factory preset
diaphragm type low pressure switch shall provide dirty filter indication. The
switch shall sample pressure differences across the filter bank and operate an
audible and visual alarm when activated.
N. Each unit shall be provided with a double inlet backward curved, direct drive
centrifugal fan, statically and dynamically balanced for quiet operation and
mounted on anti-vibration mounts. Fan motors to be of the EC (electronically
commutated) DC voltage type. Fans to be suitable for the external pressures
indicated on the schedules. Fan impellers and casings shall be galvanised or
painted for protection against corrosion. Fan speed, airflow and external pressure
shall be controlled by a voltage controller via the microprocessor display keypad
which shall maintain optimum performance.
O. In Direct Expansion (DX type) units with the compressor in the unit, the
compressor shall be suitable for use with R407c refrigerant unless indicated
otherwise on the schedules and shall be mounted on anti- vibration mountings.
The compressor shall be of the hermetic scroll type and shall be complete with the
following:
1. Internal thermal motor protection
2. Sight glass
3. High discharge gas thermostat
4. Oil sump heaters, to guard against refrigerant migration and to eliminate oil
forming on start up.
5. Electronic expansion valves to improve system EER up to 30%

6. Liquid line ball valve

7. Suction line ball valve
8. Low pressure cut-out with manual reset via microprocessor controller
9. High pressure switch with manual reset
10. Pressure relief valve with integral rupture disc and indicator gauge
11. Refrigerant Leak detection system
P. Provide an airflow switch to activate an audible and visual alarm at the unit in the
event of fan or motor failure.
Q. For units with hydronic coil, provide a water leak detection of one of the
following types:
1. Solid state probe sensor supplied loose for mounting on site
2. Water detection tape (10m long) for sensing water droplets for remote
mounting on site
R. Provide the units with the following features:

1. Smoke detector – activates alarm on sensing smoke
2. Interface with fire alarm system
3. Interface with Fireman’s panel (remote shut down)
2.5 CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped;

consisting of cabinet, fan, filters, controls; for horizontal ceiling mounting to fit
600-by-1200-mm T-bar ceiling opening.
B. Cabinet: Welded steel with baked-enamel finish and insulated with 15-mm thick,
acoustic duct liner.
1. Integral factory-supplied supply and return grille to fit ceiling grid kit of
600 by 1200 mm, with filter.
Standards.
C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven by 2-speed motor.
D. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, and internal
motor overload protection.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure

switch, thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, sight glass with
moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of
refrigerant.
E. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes

expanded into aluminum fins, with thermal-expansion valve with external
equalizer, liquid-line filter-dryer, service shutoff valves, and charging valves.

Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan complying with ASHRAE
62.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and having a condensate pump unit
with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
F. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin

coil with fan driven by double-shafted evaporator fan motor.
1. Split System: Provide suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and

refrigerant piping for field interconnection.
G. Filter: 25-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber media.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor,

dehumidification relay, and high-temperature-limit switch.
I. Atomizing Humidifier: Centrifugal atomizer with stainless-steel pan, demister

pad, and solenoid valve.
J. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with
K. .
1. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan complying with
ASHRAE 62.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and having a
condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and
condensate reservoir.
L. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor

contactor, compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker,
solid-state temperature- and humidity-control modules, humidity contactor, time-
delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-temperature thermostat. Provide solid-
state, wall-mounted control panel with start-stop switch, adjustable humidity set
point, and adjustable temperature set point.
2.6 SMALL-CAPACITY UPRIGHT UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped;

consisting of cabinet, fan, filters, controls; for vertical floor mounting in upflow or
downflow configuration.
B. Cabinet: Welded tubular-steel frame with removable steel panels with baked-
enamel finish and insulated with 25-mm thick, acoustic duct liner.
1. Floor Stand: Welded tubular steel, with adjustable legs and vibration
isolation pads.
Standards.

C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, with adjustable V-belt drive, 1400-
rpm motor.
D. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, with internal
motor overload protection.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure

switch, thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, sight glass with
moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of
refrigerant.
E. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes

expanded into aluminum fins, with thermal-expansion valve with external
equalizer, liquid-line filter-dryer, service shutoff valves, and charging valves.
Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan complying with ASHRAE 62.1
or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and having a condensate pump unit with
integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
F. Remote, Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin

coil with fan driven by double-shafted evaporator fan motor.
1. Split System: Provide suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and

refrigerant piping for field interconnection.
G. Filter: 100-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber media with minimum 20 percent

dust-spot efficiency.
1. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards):

minimum 90 percent.
2. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards): 6 or
higher.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor

and temperature-limit switches.
I. Infrared Humidifier: High-intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless-steel

evaporator pan, serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical
connections; prepiped and located in bypass airstream; with flush-cycle timer and
solenoid drain valve.
1. .
J. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with
K. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor

contactor, compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker,
solid-state temperature- and humidity-control modules, humidity contactor, time-
delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-temperature thermostat. Provide solid-
state, wall-mounted control panel with start-stop switch, adjustable humidity set
point, and adjustable temperature set point.

2.7 FLOOR STANDS
A. For computer-room raised access flooring applications, provide floor mounted

computer-room air-conditioning units with factory matched floor stands.
Coordinate size and height of floor stands with computer-room raised access
flooring installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that flooring system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are
as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Verify that ceiling system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
D. Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb.
C. Install air-cooled condenser on vibration isolation.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.

2. Water and Drainage Connections: Conform to applicable requirements of
Sections "Domestic Water Piping & Sanitary Drain Piping." . Provide
adequate connections for water-cooled units, condensate, and humidifier
flushing system.
3. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section

"Refrigerant Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.
4. Hydronic Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of
Section "Hydronic Piping." Provide shutoff valves in inlet and outlet piping
to reheat coils.

C. Ground equipment.

not indicated, use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B or Equivalent
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal
occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.5 CLEANING
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged
finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL:

B. Perform test and inspection.

C. Test and Inspections:

1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks and tie-down straps.
2. After installing computer-room air conditioners and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
3. Operational Test - After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
4. Test and adjust control safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
control and equipment.
D. Computer room air conditioners will be considered defective if it does not pass
test and inspections.

E. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier.
3.7 COMMISSIONING

report results in writing:
B. After installation, check the following:
1. Components are not damaged.

2. Unit is level.
3. Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
4. Vibration isolation and flexible connections are installed correctly.
5. Makeup water is connected.
6. Humidifier water piping is connected.
7. Ductwork is connected.
8. Bearings are lubricated.
9. Filters are installed and clean.
C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's startup checks.
D. After starting and performance test, replace filters with new, clean filters and flush
humidifier.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer-room air-
conditioning units. Refer to Division 1 Section

SECTION 238219 - FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and
configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to
concealed units.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of fan-coil unit indicated.
FAN-COIL UNITS 238219

S17058-0100D-DD-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV B Page 1 of 12
F. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of

requirements.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral
controls, and filters.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the
Engineer.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." or
C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." or Equivalent BS/EN or
Local Standards
D. Compliance for NFPA 70 and NFPA 90.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters.

2. Fan Belts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material,
design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall
include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and
of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a
5 year field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by
a service organization. System components shall be environmentally suitable for
the indicated locations.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33,
and UL 1995.
B. Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed
models.
C. Units shall have three speeds switch unless specified and shall be selected at
medium speed.
D. Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with
auxiliary water coil, valve and piping package, drain pans, air filter, fan motor,
and motor control.
E. All thermal and acoustical insulation shall be sealed with a coating that is
impervious to moisture.
F. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan

operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed the
following values at the midfrequency of each octave band:
OCTAVE BANDS
Frequency
(hertz) 4,000
250 500 1,000 2,000
Power 60 55 53 50 48
Level

G. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance

with the test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values
apply to units provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard
grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models will be acceptable for
concealed models without separate tests provided there is no variation between
models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative
arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building
structure.
H. Capacity of he units shall be as indicated. Room fan-coil units shall be certified as

complying with AHRI 440 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards and shall
meet the requirements of UL 1995 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
2.3 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis, coil, drain pan,
fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronicor direct-expansion
cooling coil as shown on equipment schedule.
B. Concealed Units: An enclosed, horizontal type assembly including cabinet, filter,

chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with
hydronic or direct-expansion cooling coil with inlet and outlet duct collars.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.
B. Coil Section Insulation: minimum 13-mm (1/2-inch) duct liner (coated glass fiber
or foil-covered, closed-cell foam) complying with ASTM C 1071 or Equivalent
BS/EN or Local Standards and attached with adhesive complying with
ASTM C 916 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a combined

maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when
tested according to ASTM E 84 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards by
a qualified testing agency.
with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be
insulated with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall extend to
underside of valves, strainers and accessories, and be formed to slope from all
directions to drain connection.
D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.

1. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and
hinge and attached with safety chain; with cast-aluminum discharge grilles.

E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Engineer, applied to factory-
assembled and -tested fan-coil unit before shipping.
F. Enclosure shall be constructed of not lighter than 18-gage, 1.3 millimeter,

galvanized steel, properly reinforced and braced. Front panel of enclosure shall
be removable and provided with 1/2-inch (13 millimeter) thick insulation
conforming to NFPA 90A or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards, to prevent
condensation. Discharge louvers shall be four-way adjustable and shall be
designed to properly distribute air throughout the conditioned space. All ferrous-
metal surfaces shall be galvanized. All exposed-to-view enclosure corners and
edges shall be rounded. Discharge louvers shall be mounted in a top panel that is
removable for coil cleaning. Access doors shall be hinged and shall be provided
for all piping and control compartments. Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer's
standard in color selected by the Engineer.
2.5 WATER COILS
A. Cooling Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no
closer than 2.5 mm and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum
working pressure of 1378 kPa (200 psig) and a maximum entering water
temperature of 104 deg C (220 deg F).
B. Many additional features, which vary with each manufacturer, are available for
this product. Include all features for fan-coil units that are required for Project,
and identify additional features for specific unit in the Fan-Coil-Unit Schedule on
Drawings.
C. Comply with the performance details indicated on the equipment schedules.

Performance includes air flow rates, heating and cooling duties, external
resistance and noise levels.
D. Ensure that coils are suitable for the working pressures in the systems and for test
pressures 1.5 times the working pressures.
E. Provide fan coil units of one of the following types as indicated section 2.6
F. Valve controlled 2 port
G. Valve controlled 3 port
H. Valve controlled 4 port.
I. Damper controlled
J. Fan coils shall have a minimum of 3 speeds (low, medium and high) and all units
shall be selected on medium speed. Fans shall be capable of a minimum of 50Pa
external resistance unless indicated otherwise on the equipment performance
schedules.

K. Motors shall be of the AC or DC type as indicated on the schedules but all units
shall be suitable for a 230 V, 50Hz power source. This shall energise and operate
each fan coil unit motor, and controls. One switch shall provide total electrical
isolation of the fan coil unit.
L. Select coils to have the approximate temperature differences indicated between

the flow and return temperatures ensuring that the maximum water velocity of
1.5m/s is not exceeded. Coil pressure drop not to exceed 30kPa.
M. Units shall be supplied suitable for one of the following methods of mounting as
indicated on the section 2.6.
N. Provide a flushing by pass on each fan coil unit to enable the chilled water and
heating water systems to be thoroughly flushed clean without passing dirty water
through the coils.
O. Ensure that due allowance is made for the accumulative effect of a number of fan
coils operating in the same room and select the units to comply with the specified
room noise criteria when all units are operational.
P. Support the fan coils by mild steel supports with suitable anti vibration mounts to
prevent at least 95% of vibration transmission to the structure. Install in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to give a neat appearance, with
supports out of view. Ensure equipment is firmly fixed and level.
2.6 METHOD OF MOUNTED
A. FAN COIL UNITS TYPE 1 – ABOVE CEILING DUCTED

1. Where fan coils are concealed within ceiling voids they shall be of A. the
chassis type, fully packaged (pre-wired and pre-plumbed) with return air
filter and discharge air plenum.
2. Provide bottom or side withdrawal return air filter within frame to G3 as BS
EN 779 synthetic washable media pad supported by aluminum mesh.
3. Provide an extended insulated drain pan (extended to encompass the
commissioning and control valves fittings and connections). Pan to be
fabricated from non-corrosive material or to be protected against corrosion.
Provide a 20mm screwed plug connection to permit the installation of a
drain line. Provide a trap on drain prior to discharge.
4. Provide a purpose made air discharge Plenum Box acoustically lined with
250 or 200mm spigots as scheduled. Acoustic lining to be fibre free and
non-shedding.
5. Provide a 100 or 200mm diameter spigot for fresh air connection where
indicated on the schedules.
B. FAN COIL UNITS TYPE 2 – BELOW FLOOR DUCTED

1. Where fan coils are concealed in a floor void they shall be of the chassis
type, fully packaged (prewired and pre-plumbed) with return air filter and
air discharge plenum. Unit dimensions shall be modular to suit the floor
support arrangements.

2. Provide side or top withdrawal return air filter within frame to G3 as BS EN

779 synthetic washable media pad supported by aluminum mesh.
3. Ensure that access is provided within the floor to all moving parts, motors,
coils and valves.
4. Provide an extended insulated drain pan (extended to encompass the
commissioning and control valves fittings and connections). Pan to be
fabricated from non-corrosive material or to be protected against corrosion.
Provide a 20mm screwed plug connection to permit the installation of a
drain line. Provide a trap on drain prior to discharge.
5. If condensate drain cannot go by gravity to discharge provide unit with a
condensate pump to enable condensate to be pumped to a higher level.
6. Provide a leak detection system to alert BMS if there is any leakage of
water detected.
7. Ensure floor void plenum is dust free and air tight.
C. FAN COIL UNITS TYPE 3 - EXPOSED TO VIEW WALL MOUNTED (HIGH

LEVEL)
1. Where fan coils are exposed to view they shall be contained within a
manufacturer’s standard sheet steel enclosures to form a rigid cabinet that
will not flex or vibrate during operation.
2. Treat panel with corrosion resistant baked on primer and stove enameled or
equal finish. RAL colour to be manufacturer’s standard.
3. Provide access in exposed unit cabinets to fans, coils, filters and electrical
components. Access to control switches and coil connections shall be
through hinged flaps. Front panels shall be secured with positive locking
tamper proof fasteners.
4. On floor mounted units the air shall be returned via low level air grilles and
discharged vertically via linear grilles in steel or aluminum, powder coated
to RAL colour.
5. On wall mounted units the air shall be returned via low level air grilles E.
and discharged horizontally through adjustable blade linear grille at high
level.
6. Air shall be returned to the unit through grilles mounted in the front face of
the unit. The return air will be filtered by synthetic fibre washable filters
mounted behind the return air grilles. Filters to be supported by aluminum
mesh and within a frame to G3 as BS EN 779 standard.
7. Each unit shall have a 3 speed control selector switch located behind a
hinged access panel.
D. FAN COIL UNITS TYPE 4 – FLOOR MOUNTED WITHIN CABINET

1. Where fan coils are exposed to view they shall be contained within a
manufacturer’s standard sheet steel enclosures to form a rigid cabinet that
will not flex or vibrate during operation.
2. Treat panel with corrosion resistant baked on primer and stove enameled or
equal finish. RAL colour to be manufacturer’s standard.
3. Provide access in exposed unit cabinets to fans, coils, filters and electrical
components. Access to control switches and coil connections shall be

through hinged flaps. Front panels shall be secured with positive locking
tamper proof fasteners.
4. On floor mounted units the air shall be returned via low level air grilles and
discharged vertically via linear grilles in steel or aluminum, powder coated
to RAL colour.
5. On wall mounted units the air shall be returned via low level air grilles and
discharged horizontally through adjustable blade linear grille at high level.
6. Air shall be returned to the unit through grilles mounted in the front face of
the unit. The return air will be filtered by synthetic fibre washable filters
mounted behind the return air grilles. Filters to be supported by aluminum
mesh and within a frame to G3 as BS EN 779 standard.
7. Each unit shall have a 3 speed control selector switch located behind a
hinged access panel.
E. FAN COIL UNITS TYPE 5 - CASSETTE TYPE MOUNTING

1. Where indicated on the equipment schedules provide fan coils of the
cassette type complete with integral horizontal return air grille and 4 way
supply air slots (louvers).
2. The units shall be of modular construction, 600 x 600 or 800x800 as
indicated on the schedules. The basic unit shall be of galvanized steel
construction with internal thermal insulation and outside anti condensate
lining
3. Filter to be accessible through a hinged return air grille. Grille to be of ABS
construction with colour to suit architects requirements. Filter to be
synthetic washable type G3 as BS EN 779 standard and easily removable.
4. Integral drip tray and condensate pump to be provided for collection of
condensate which shall be pumped to higher level gravity drain. The drip
tray shall be manufactured from ABS polystyrene foam fire retardant rating
B2 to DIN 4102. Condensate pump shall be wired to the integral control
panel and
the control shall be by integral float switch. The pump shall be suitable for a
maximum head of 650mm.
5. Front panels shall be secured with positive locking tamper proof fasteners.
2.7 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of

galvanized steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven
from motor. Fan shall be suitable for these speed operation. Fan-coil capacity
shall be based on medium speed. The noise level shall not exceed NC30 unless
otherwise specified.

2.8 FAN MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."
B. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor

except for units serving Toilets, Garbage room & Smoking Rooms with integral
thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts. For units serving Toilets,
Smoking Rooms and Garbage room, single speed motor to be used.
C. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled, with hinged mount,
adjustable motor pulley and permanently lubricated bearings.
D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power

circuit. Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Outdoor-air aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen, for
fan-coil units with outdoor-air intake.
B. Steel subbase, height as indicated.
C. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.
D. Filters: 20 mm or 25-mm thick, washable type, aluminum filters and frames.
E. Dampers: Steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade length
and having factory-mounted electric operators for 25 percent open cycle.
2.10 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Two-Pipe, Fan Cycle: Unit/Wall-mounted thermostat cycles fan from manually

set speed to off. Thermostat mounted on supply pipe /Manual switch mounted
adjacent to thermostat changes control from heating to cooling; suitable for a
230V, 60Hz.
B. Two-Pipe, Valve Cycle: Unit/Wall-mounted thermostat, with manual fan-speed

switch, cycles normally closed electric valve. Manual switch mounted adjacent to
thermostat changes control from heating to cooling.
A. Test and rate units according to AHRI 440 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards

and AHRI 410 or Equivalent BS/EN or Local Standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual

locations before fan-coil unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A or Equivalent BS/EN or Local
Standards.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators

(rubber hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Section "Vibration Controls
for HVAC Piping and Instruments."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls at heights to match lighting

controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each
connection.
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
F. Connect piping to fan-coil unit factory hydronic package. Install piping package if
shipped loose.
G. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. Install condensate trap of adequate

depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at change of
direction.

H. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors
specified in "Air Duct Accessories." Section; Comply with safety requirement in
UL 1995 for duct connections.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in
writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper
operation and electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service - Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment
installation, including connections and to assist in field testing.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's

C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial
Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to
Division 1 Section.
3.7 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturer's standard warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of fan coil units that fail in materials workmanship within
specified warranty period. Failures include but are not limited to fan failure and
cooling coil leaks.

3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments.
B. Adjust motor and fan speed to achieve specified airflow. Except for units serving
Toilets, garbage room & Smoking Rooms whose fan speed will remain
unchanged.
C. Adjust discharge connected air terminals and dampers to regulate airflow.
D. Adjust air-directional vanes.


King Khaled International Airport Development and Expansion: Specifications Part 2 OF 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

King Khaled International Airport Development and Expansion: Specifications Part 2 OF 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Draft Final Design Documents

King Khaled International Airport

S17058-0100D – March 2019 1440 ‫رجب‬

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

034910 DECORATIVE GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE

042000 UNIT MASONRY

050513 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METALS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

101423 PANEL SIGNAGE

110100 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

221123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

275116 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL (SACS)

311000 SITE CLEARING

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321723 ROAD PAVEMENT MARKINGS

334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B,

C. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness;

D. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

B. Install pipe at the center of sleeve and not to be supported by sleeve..

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical

E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING 210517

F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,